132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Volume 2

ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY OF CYPRUS

132 kV Outdoor Gas Insulated Substations &

Ancillary Equipment

SECTION 5

CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS

132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Contract Requirements.doc of 11

Table of Contents 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT.....................................................................................................................3 1.2 EXTENT OF CONTRACT ....................................................................................................................................3 1.3 CONTRACT TERMINAL POINTS........................................................................................................................7 1.4 PLANT ERECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING.....................................................................................9 1.5 BUILDINGS..........................................................................................................................................................9 1.6 TOOLS AND APPLIANCES ..............................................................................................................................10 1.7 SPARES.............................................................................................................................................................11


1.1 DESCRIPTION OF THE PROJECT

The Project works are to be carried out at the International Airport and Pyla substations. Both substations are situated in the southeast coast of Cyprus near the town of Larnaka.

The Project includes the refurbishment of both substations with the installation of new outdoor 132kV GIS switchgear, 40MVA 132/22-11kV power transformers, earthing transformers, power cable termination work and refurbishment of the protection and control system. It also includes the supply of one 22kV Medium Voltage switchboard for Protaras substation, one 22kV Medium Voltage switchboard for Limassol Marina Primary Substation and one 40MVA 132/22-11kV power transformer for Larnaka Commercial Substation. Finally it includes the installation of protection panels at Dhekelia, Larnaka Commercial Centre, Free Industrial Zone Substations and other ancillary equipment.

1.2 EXTENT OF CONTRACT

The Contract is on a turnkey basis and provides for all parts of the work, excluding civil works, to be completed in every respect for commercial operation to the requirements of the Engineer.

1.2.1 Work Description

The Contract covers the design, manufacture, inspection and testing at the maker's works and at site, packing for export shipment, insurance, transport and delivery to site or store, unloading, customs clearance, complete erection, testing and setting to work and maintenance for a period of twelve (12) months of the works described below and detailed in the Schedules at the fixed scheduled prices:

1.2.1.1 Pyla Substation

The contract includes the following:

• Supply and installation of a double busbar 9 bay Outdoor 132kV Gas Insulated Switchboard:

o 2 Transformer Bays

o 4 Line Bays

o 2 Bus Section Bays

o 1 Bus Coupler Bay

• Supply and installation of 2 x 40MVA 132/22-11kV Power Transformers and 2 x Earthing Transformers

• Cut, divert and terminate 2 x 800mm2 to new GIS

• Lay and terminate 1 x 300mm2 132kV cables between power transformer and GIS (2 Transformers)

• Lay and terminate 3 x 630mm2 medium voltage cables between power transformer and existing 11kV switchgear and 1 x 300mm2 medium voltage cable between power transformer and earthing transformer (2 Transformers)

• Protection and Control:


o 1 Automated System (IEC 61850)

Signals of existing substation to be transferred to new system from existing ABB RTU200 / COM 500 with IEC 61850-5-104. These signals shall be provided by EAC. It is the contractors’ responsibility to program the new automation system to accept these signals and also include a mimic diagram of the M.V. switchboard on the HMI.

o 2 Transformer Protection & Control Panels..

o 4 Line Protection & Control Panels

o 1 Bus Coupler & Bus Section Protection & Control Panel.

o Busbar Protection.

o 1 Transformer Voltage Regulation Panel to include 3 AVR relays of the latest technology equipped with all the necessary modules to allow the automatic voltage control of power transformers using the minimum circulating current principle, manual step up and step down operation of tap changer, indications, communication facilities for remote and supervisory control

o Engineering, Wiring, Testing and Commissioning of the complete system, i.e. new equipment, interconnections with existing, to deliver a complete system.

• 300Ahr DC Battery System.

For Transmission System operational reasons, the installation of the substation equipment shall be carried out in two consequent phases, as per the Tender Drawings, without a time delay in between.

The Contract provides for all parts of the work to be completed in every respect for commercial operation to the requirements of the Engineer not withstanding that any details, accessories, etc. required for the complete installation and satisfactory operation of the Plant are not specifically mentioned in the Specification, such details are to be considered as included in the Contract Price.

1.2.1.2 International Airport Substation


• Supply and installation of a 7 bay outdoor 132kV Gas Insulated Switchboard

o 3 Transformer Bays

o 3 Line Bays

o 1 Bus Section Bay

• Supply and Installation of 3 x 40MVA 132/22-11kV Power Transformers and 3 x Earthing Transformers

• Cut, divert and terminate 2 x 800mm2 to new GIS

• Lay and Terminate 1 x 300mm2 132kV cables between power transformer and GIS (3 Transformers)


• Lay and Terminate 3 x 630mm2 medium voltage cables between power transformer and existing 11kV switchgear and 1 x 300mm2 medium voltage cable between power transformer and earthing transformer (3 Transformers)

• Protection and Control

o 1 Automated System (IEC 61850)

Signals of existing substation to be transferred to new system from existing ABB RTU200 / COM 500 with IEC 61850-5-104. These signals shall be provided by EAC. It is the contractors’ responsibility to program the new automation system to accept these signals and also include a mimic diagram of the M.V. switchboard on the HMI.

o 3 Transformer Protection & Control Panels.

o 3 Line Protection & Control Panels.

o 1 Transformer Voltage Regulation Panel to include 3 AVR relays of the latest technology equipped with all the necessary modules to allow the automatic voltage control of power transformers using the minimum circulating current principle, manual step up and step down operation of tap changer, indications, communication facilities for remote and supervisory control

o Engineering, Wiring, Testing and Commissioning of the complete system, i.e. new equipment, interconnections with existing, to deliver a complete system.

For Transmission System operational reasons, the installation of the substation equipment shall be carried out in three consequent phases, as per the Tender Drawings, without a time delay in between.


1.2.1.3 Larnaka Commercial Substation


• Supply of one 40MVA 132/22-11kV Power Transformer and one Earthing Transformer. The power and earthing transformer shall be delivered to Larnaka Commercial Centre substation, where they shall be placed on their respective basis inside the transformer cells.

• Installation of three Protection Panels. SCADA signals to be connected to existing system with IEC61850 protocol.



1.2.1.4 Dhekelia GIS Substation


• Supply and Installation of two Protection Panels. SCADA signals to be connected to existing system with IEC61850 protocol.


1.2.1.5 Free Industrial Zone Substation


• Supply and Installation of two Protection Panels. SCADA signals to be connected to existing system with conventional copper wires.


1.2.1.6 Protaras Substation


• Supply of a 21-panel medium voltage switchboard to be delivered to EAC Larnaka Stores. This switchboard shall be installed by EAC personnel and as a result the contract includes for the training of EAC personnel so as to be certified for the installation of the switchboard. An IEC 61850 system as per drawing TK42/304 that will be able to handle all the SCADA signals as detailed in Chapter “Items of Equipment”, shall be provided. This shall manage the data exchange between the switchboard and the Control Centre. This communication shall be based on protocol IEC 60870-5-101.


1.2.1.7 Limassol Marina Primary Substation


• Supply of a 17-panel medium voltage switchboard to be delivered to EAC Larnaka Stores. This switchboard shall be installed by EAC personnel and as a result the contract includes for the training of EAC personnel so as to be certified for the installation of the switchboard. An IEC 61850 system as per drawing TM/LIM96 that will be able to handle all the SCADA signals as detailed in Chapter “Items of Equipment”, shall be provided. This shall manage the data exchange between the switchboard and the Control Centre. This communication shall be based on protocol IEC 60870-5-101.



1.2.1.8 Miscellaneous


• Training Course for two people (One Engineer and one Technician) that will enable them to be qualified for the erection and commissioning of the medium voltage switchboards

• Secondary Injection Test Set Type Omicron CMC353 with the Software Options VE002904 Advanced Protection

• Omicron Switch Box CP SB1

• Micafluid AG Vacuum Pump System, Type Micafluid VPU900


1.3 CONTRACT TERMINAL POINTS

The following shall be the Contract Terminal Points:

1.3.1 Pyla Substation

1.3.1.1 132 kV GIS Switchgear - Outgoing Cable Feeders

Termination work of two “Dhekelia” outgoing circuits and two “Power Transformer” circuits is included in this contract. Termination work of all other circuits is not included.

1.3.1.2 22 kV Switchboard

The termination of two incoming 11kV feeders (Transformer Feeders) to the 11kV switchboard is included in this Contract. Control & Protection cabling required to complete the circuits is included in the contract.

1.3.1.3 Communication Panel

In the case of current differential protection relays through fibre optic media, the Contractor shall be responsible for connecting and terminating up to the multiplexer communication panel, which shall be provided by others, or the main fibre optic termination box as specified elsewhere in this Contract.

1.3.1.4 Fire Alarm and Fire Fighting Control Panels

The control cables required for the connection of the fire alarm and fire fighting control panels, which shall be provided by others, to the substation control centre for remote indication, are included in this contract.


1.3.1.5 132 kV and 22 kV Power Cables

All 132 kV and the 22 kV power cables required for the completion of works at the substation shall be provided by the Purchaser. All accessories and works required for connecting these power cables will be the responsibility of the Supplier/Contractor. The Supplier/Contractor will not be responsible for the guarantee of the power cables but will be responsible for the guarantee of all connections.

1.3.2 International Airport Substation

1.3.2.1 132 kV GIS Switchgear - Outgoing Cable Feeders

Termination work of two “Free Industrial Zone” outgoing circuits and three “Power Transformer” circuits is included in this contract. Termination work of all other circuits is not included.

1.3.2.2 22 kV Switchboard

The termination of two incoming 11kV feeders (Transformer Feeders) to the 11kV switchboard is included in this Contract. Control & Protection cabling required to complete the circuits is included in the contract.



1.3.2.4 Fire Alarm and Fire Fighting Control Panels

The control cables required for the connection of the fire alarm and fire fighting control panels, which shall be provided by others, to the substation control centre for remote indication, are included in this contract.

1.3.2.5 132 kV and 22 kV Power Cables

All 132 kV and the 22 kV power cables required for the completion of works at the substation shall be provided by the Purchaser. All accessories and works required for connecting these power cables will be the responsibility of the Supplier/Contractor. The Supplier/Contractor will not be responsible for the guarantee of the power cables but will be responsible for the guarantee of all connections.

1.3.3 Larnaka Commercial Substation

1.3.3.1 Protection Panels

All cables necessary for the correct operation of the protection panels shall be installed by the contractor.




1.3.4 Dhekelia GIS Substation





1.3.5 Free Industrial Zone Substation





1.4 PLANT ERECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

The Tenderer shall include the provision of all labour, technicians; testing and supervisory engineers to install test and commission the plant supplied under the Contract to the agreed program and shall include all costs associated with the activity including the cost of providing all necessary test equipment.

The Tenderer shall fully consider the Regulations regarding the use of local labour for site works and clarify in his offer where expatriate staff will be used on site activities.

Directions and instructions given by the Engineer's Representative or the Purchaser to the supervisors shall be interpreted as having been given to the Contractor.

The supervisors shall be well qualified by long training and experience in the installation and operation of equipment of the type covered by the Specification. They shall liaise with the Engineer and the Purchaser's staff in respect of the installation, testing and placing into operational service of the substation equipment supplied under other contracts leading to commissioning of the complete substation or extension and for this purpose the English language shall be used.

1.5 BUILDINGS

Unless otherwise specified all substation buildings, foundations, walls, roof coverings, concrete floor fittings, ducts and pipework embedded in the foundations, trenches with floor plates for cables, etc., will be provided under other contracts. Tenderers should take into consideration the following:

• dimensions specified as per drawings.


• applied maximum load (including impulse load) on the floor of the GIS switchgear room should not exceed 20 kN/m2.

• the available crane in the GIS room can carry a maximum load of 5.000 kg.

The magnitude of the loadings from plant or equipment onto foundations must be stated by the Tenderer. The loadings shall be confirmed by the dates given in the appropriate schedule.

The Tender Drawings show the preferred layouts of all plant, equipment and buildings. Dimensions in these Drawings have been based on typical sizes of plant and equipment. In any case the width of Line, Cable and Transformer bays should no exit 1000mm for switchboards with 31,5kA rated short circuit withstand current and 1200mm for switchboards with 40kA rated short circuit withstand current.

The Contractor should ascertain for himself during the tender stage that the plant he proposes to supply will be suitable for the arrangements shown on Tender Drawings, and the Contract Price is deemed to include the cost of any modified layout to meet the Employer's design principles. Failure of the Engineer or Employer to comment on drawings submitted by the contractor during the tender stage which show modified arrangements not complying with Tender Drawings and Design Principles shall not be accepted as approving such arrangements; any modifications proposed should be clearly stated in the Schedule of Departures.

1.6 TOOLS AND APPLIANCES

The following tools and appliances may be purchased under this Contract. The Tenderer's full list with itemized prices and details is to be given in the Schedule of Special Tools and Equipment of this Specification.

(a) One set of any special tools or gauges required for the normal maintenance of the Plant and equipment covered by the Contract.

(b) One set of any special lifting and handling appliances required for the normal maintenance of the Plant and equipment covered by the Contract.

(c) One set of any special tools, gauges or other test equipment required for the dismantling, re-assembly, checking or adjustment (but not normal maintenance) of the whole of the Plant and equipment covered by the Contract.

Each tool or appliance is to be clearly marked with its size and/or purpose.

Each set of tools and appliances under category (a) above, together with the smaller items under (b) & (c) above, are to be suitably arranged in fitted boxes of mild steel construction, the number of boxes being determined in relation to the layout of the Plant and equipment in question. If the weight of any box and its content should be such that it cannot conveniently be carried it is to be supported on steerable rubber-tyred wheels.

Each box is to be fitted with a lock and is to be painted black and clearly marked in white letters with the name of the Plant or equipment for which the tools and appliances therein are intended.

The tools and appliances with the appropriate boxes are to be delivered to the Purchaser together with the switchgear.



The price of such equipment as detailed in the Schedules shall remain fixed for the duration of the Contract.

1.7 SPARES

1.7.1 General

The Tenderer shall complete the appropriate Schedules with a list of spares in addition to any specifically stated and provide unit prices for the spares which he recommends should be held in stock for the maintenance of the plant for at least 5 years of normal operation.

1.7.1.1 Programmed Maintenance Spares

Items for which the Contractor anticipates that demands will arise in the normal operation of the plant. The Contractor shall quote estimates of annual consumption of each item over each of the first five years.

1.7.1.2 Strategic/Breakdown Spares

Items for which the Contractor anticipates that demands may arise through breakdown which could jeopardize the availability or safety of the plant. The Contractor shall state his recommended stock holding for such items.

The spares prices shall remain valid for at least twelve months after placing the contract provided also that a reasonable time will be provided after the contractor makes all necessary information available to enable determining the spares requirement.

The Contractor shall indicate the items which he recommends should be manufactured at the same time as the main plant. For each of these items he must inform the Engineer the latest date by which orders are to be placed for concurrent manufacture.

The Purchaser may order all or any of the spares so recommended at his discretion. The Tenderer shall state in the Schedule of Deliveries the minimum period required by him for the delivery of the spares from the date of the receipt by him of the Purchaser's order.

The spares will be charged against the Provisional Sum included in the Schedule of Prices and are to be supplied at the prices listed in the Schedule of Spares subject to the qualification that, if any spares should be ordered after the dates referred to in this clause the price may be subject to adjustment.

All spares supplied are to be strictly interchangeable with the parts for which they are intended to be replacements and are to be treated and packed for long storage under the climatic conditions prevailing at the Site and labeled for easy identification. Packing shall be on individual items or sets basis where appropriate.

Labeling shall be such that spares can be correctly identified from reference quoted in the operation and maintenance manuals provided. All labeling shall be legible without unpacking the items.

1.7.2 Commissioning Spares

The Tenderer shall make his own provision for spares required during erection and commissioning without resorting to the use of the spares ordered and supplied under the contract.


132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment

SECTION 6

EAC SPECIFICATION 14-019

Transmission Substation Equipment

EAC SPEC 14-019, Issue 9 Dated 03-05-2010

132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Specification.doc Page 2 of 365

Table of Contents

SCO

R ......................... 8 ......................... 8

......................... 8

............................8

G ......................... 6 ..........................16 .......................... 2 ......................... 6 ..........................26 ..........................29

6 ......................... 0 7 ......................... 5 8 ......................... 7 9 ......................... 0 10 ..........................40 11 ..........................40 12 ..........................41 13 ......................... 1 14 ......................... 2 15 ......................... 3 16 ..........................43 17 ......................... 4 18 ......................... 4 19 ..........................45 20 ..........................45 21 ......................... 5 22 ..........................45 23 ......................... 6 24 ......................... 8 25 ..........................48 26 ......................... 8 27 ..........................49 28 ..........................49 29 ..........................49 30 ..........................51 31 2

3.32 EARTHING CONNECTIONS .............................................................................................................................53 ..........................53

3.34 INDICATING LAMPS AND FITTING .................................................................................................................55

AUXILIARY SWITCHES ....................................................................................................................................55 3.37 ENCLOSURES OF APPARATUS, HEATERS, AND VENTILATORS..............................................................55 3.38 INSULATING OIL, COMPOUND AND GAS......................................................................................................56 3.39 CABLE BOXES AND CABLE BOX ACCESSORIES .......................................................................................56

4. INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES ........................................................................................................................................58 4.1 UNLOADING AND STORAGE AT SITE............................................................................................................58

1. PE ............................................................................................................................................................................71.1 GENERAL............................................................................................................................................................7

2. EFERENCES ............................................................................................................................... .......

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...3. ELECTRICAL INSULATION..............................................................................................................................5

...

3.353.36

...

3.2 COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATION ............................................................................ ...

2.1 NORMATIVE REFERENCES ............................................................................................. ... ...

UNITS OF MEASUREMENT..............................................................................................

2.2 INFORMATIVE REFERENCES ......................................................................................... ...

...

3.3 ...DRAWINGS........................................................................................................................

2.3 LIST OF REFERENCES .................................................................................................... ...

3. ENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS.................................................................................. ... .1

3. PROGRESS REPORTS AND MEETINGS ........................................................................ ...

3.1 DESIGN CRITERIA............................................................................................................ ...2

3. INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS......................... ...

.2

3. PACKING OR PREPARATION OF MATERIAL FOR DISPATCH.................................... ...

3.4 ...3.5 PROGRAM OF WORK ...................................................................................................... ...

.3

3. ...

.3

3. TRANSPORT TO SITE ...................................................................................................... ...

.3

3. ERECTION......................................................................................................................... ...

3. ... ERECTION MARKS...........................................................................................................

CABLE DRUMS AND CABLE SEALING.......................................................................... .4

3. CLEANING AND PAINTING.............................................................................................. ... .4

3. ... NUTS, BOLTS, STUDS, AND WASHERS ........................................................................

3. LABELS, NUMBER PLATES, AND PHASE IDENTIFICATION DISCS ........................... ... .4

3. ...

3. LOCKS............................................................................................................................... ... .4

3. RIVETS............................................................................................................................... ...

TROPICALIZATION............................................................................................................4

3. CASTINGS......................................................................................................................... ...

.4

3. WELDING.................................................................................................................................

3. FORGINGS ........................................................................................................................ ...

.4

3. ...

3. ... PIPE WORK AND VALVES............................................................................................... GALVANIZED WORK........................................................................................................

.4

3. OIL LEVEL INDICATORS.................................................................................................. ...3. OIL OR COMPOUND FILLED CHAMBERS...................................................................... ... .4

3. THERMOMETER POCKETS ............................................................................................. ... .4

PRESSURE GAUGES .......................................................................................................3. CHROMIUM PLATING....................................................................................................... ...3. ...

SMALL WIRING.................................................................................................................3. ... 3. TERMINAL BOARDS ........................................................................................................ ...

3.33 ELECTRIC MOTORS......................................................................................................... ... CONTROL SWITCHES AND PUSHBUTTONS.................................................................................................54


4.3 ...ABNORMAL WORKING TIME ..........................................................................................


......................... 8 ..........................58 ......................... 8 ......................... 9 ......................... 0 ......................... 1

8 ......................... 1 9 ..........................61 10 ..........................62 11 ......................... 2 12 ..........................62

4.13 TRAINING OF THE PURCHASER'S PERSONNEL..........................................................................................65 .......................... 5 .......................... 5

132kV SF ......................... 7 ..........................68 ......................... 8 ......................... 8

5 ..........................74 6 ......................... 6 7 ..........................77 8 ......................... 1 9 ..........................81 10 ......................... 1 11 ..........................83 12 ......................... 4

......................... 6

......................... 8

..........................89

..........................89 5.17

O ......................... 2 ..........................92

6.3 RADIO INTERFERENCE ...................................................................................................................................92 ..........................92

......................... 8 ........................102 ........................1 3 ........................108 ........................113

S ........................1 0 7.1 SCOPE.............................................................................................................................................................120

DEFINITIONS...................................................................................................................................................120 7.3 ABBREVIATIONS............................................................................................................................................123 7.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ..........................................................................................................................124 7.5 SYSTEM STRUCTURE....................................................................................................................................127 7.6 NETWORK CONTROL CENTRE COMMUNICATION ....................................................................................129 7.7 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS.............................................................................................................................130 7.8 LOGICAL NODES............................................................................................................................................131

4.2 ERECTION AND CHECKING AT SITE ............................................................................. ....................................

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

...

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

7.2

.5

4.6 SAFETY FOR WORKMEN AND PUBLIC ......................................................................... ...

CLEANING OF SITE..........................................................................................................4.4 ... .5

4. TAKING OVER CERTIFICATES ....................................................................................... ...

4.5 CONTRACTOR'S AND SUB-CONTRACTOR'S STAFF................................................... ... .5

ACCESS TO SITE..............................................................................................................

.6

4. ... DAY WORK........................................................................................................................

4.7 SAFETY RULES, CLEARANCE CERTIFICATES, AND PERMITS TO WORK ............... ... .6

4. ...

.6

4. SITE REGISTER OF LIFTING TACKLE............................................................................ ... .6

...

4. SITE SERVICES ................................................................................................................ ...

4.14 EXAMINATION OF WORK BEFORE COVERING UP...................................................... 6

5. 6 GAS INSULATED SWITCHGEAR ..............................................................................................................67

4.15 SYSTEM OF WORKS AND COOPERATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS AT SITE ... 6

5.1 TYPE OF SWITCHGEAR AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ......................................... ... .6

5.3 CONNECTIONS TO OUTGOING CIRCUITS..................................................................... ...5.2 CURRENT RATINGS......................................................................................................... ...

.6

SEALING ENDS.................................................................................................................5.4 DESIGN PRINCIPLES – 132 kV GIS SWITCHGEAR ....................................................... ... .65. ...

LOCAL, REMOTE, AND SUPERVISORY CONTROL ......................................................5. ... .75. CIRCUIT BREAKERS........................................................................................................ ...5. LOCAL CONTROL CUBICLES ......................................................................................... ... .85. LOCKING FACILITIES ...................................................................................................... ...5. ISOLATING AND EARTHING SWITCHES ....................................................................... ... .8

INTERLOCKING ................................................................................................................5. ...5. AUXILIARY SWITCHES AND CONTACTORS ................................................................. ... .85.13 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS........................................................................................... ... .85.14 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS........................................................................................... ... .85.15 EARTHING SYSTEM......................................................................................................... ...5.16 SURGE ARRESTERS........................................................................................................ ...

GAS HANDLING EQUIPMENT .........................................................................................................................90

6. UTDOOR SWITCHGEAR & EQUIPMENT .................................................................................................................92.96.1 SWITCHGEAR - DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE .......................................................... ...

6.2 CLEARANCES................................................................................................................. ...

6.4 CIRCUIT-BREAKERS...................................................................................................... ....96.5 CURRENT AND VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS.............................................................. ...

6.6 SURGE ARRESTERS...................................................................................................... ...06.7 ISOLATORS AND EARTH SWITCHES .......................................................................... ...

6.8 OUTDOOR BUSBARS .................................................................................................... ...6.9 ...

2

STEEL STRUCTURES ....................................................................................................

7. UBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM..................................................................................... ...


7. ... BAY UNITS ......................................................................................................................


9 ........................1 1 10 ........................143 11 ........................147

........................1 2

C ........................1 3 ........................1 3 ........................1 3 ......................155 ........................157 ........................157 ........................1 8

7 ........................159 8 ........................160 9 ...........161 10 ........................1 2 11 ........................163 12 ........................164 13 ........................164

........................164

........................1 5

........................1 6

........................166

P ........................169 ........................1 9 ........................169

4 ........................175 5 ........................180 6 ........................1 3 7 ........................184

9 ........................1 5 9 ........................1 6 10 ........................186 11 ........................1 7 12 ........................187 13 ........................1 7

........................1 0 .1 ........................190 .2 ........................190 .3 ........................1 0 .4 ........................1 1 .5 ........................1 1

10.6 CIRCUIT BREAKER COMPARTMENT...........................................................................................................191 OPERATING MECHANISM .............................................................................................................................192

10.8 ISOLATING FACILITIES .................................................................................................................................193 10.9 EARTHING FACILITIES ..................................................................................................................................193 10.10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FAULT-MAKING EARTHING SWITCHES .............................................193 10.11 EARTHING OF METAL PARTS ......................................................................................................................194 10.12 CABLE CONNECTION ....................................................................................................................................194 10.13 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS.........................................................................................................................194

7. STATION CONTROL UNIT.............................................................................................. ..................

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

10.7

4 OPERATOR CONSOLE ..................................................................................................

7. ...7.12 SWITCHGEAR INTERLOCKING SYSTEM.....................................................................................................1517.13 ENGINEERING PC AND SOFTWARE ............................................................................ ... 5

8.2 ...

8. ONTROL AND RELAY PANELS FOR NON-AUTOMATED SUBSTATIONS.......................... ... 5

8.4 INDICATIONS .................................................................................................................. ...

8.1 ARRANGEMENT OF FACILITIES................................................................................... ... 55

8.5 SUPERVISION RELAYS ................................................................................................. ...

CONSTRUCTION OF CUBICLES ...................................................................................8.3 CONTROLS ...............................................................................................................................

8.6 BUSBAR VOLTAGE SELECTION .................................................................................. ... 5

8. ...8. SYNCHRONISING ........................................................................................................... ...

INDICATING LAMPS .......................................................................................................8. ALARM SCHEMES...............................................................................................................................8. RELAYS, MINIATURE CIRCUIT-BREAKERS AND FUSES .......................................... ... 6

8. CABLE TERMINATIONS................................................................................................. ...8. INSTRUMENTS................................................................................................................ ...

8. TESTING FACILITIES ..................................................................................................... ...8.14 EARTHING....................................................................................................................... ...8.15 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND TELEMETERING CABINETS.................................... ... 6

8.17 TRANSDUCERS .............................................................................................................. ...8.16 MULTICORE CABLES AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS................................................. ... 6

9. ROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT........................................................................................................ ...9.1 General ............................................................................................................................ ... 69.2 ...Protective IEDs ...............................................................................................................9.3 Test and Earthing Facilities...........................................................................................................................1749. 132 kV Feeder Protection............................................................................................... ...9. Transformer Protection.................................................................................................. ...9. 132 kV Busbar and Circuit Breaker Fail Protection..................................................... ... 89. Auto-Reclosing Function............................................................................................... ....8 Synchronizing Check Function..................................................................................... ... 8

9. Intertrip Send/Receive Teleprotection Equipment ...................................................... ... 89. Tripping Relays............................................................................................................... ...9. Trip Circuit Supervision Schemes ................................................................................ ... 89. ...

22-11 kV Feeder Protection ........................................................................................... 8 Segregation.....................................................................................................................

9. ...

10. MEDIUM VOLTAGE GAS INSULATED SWITCHGEAR DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE... 9 ... 10 SWITCHGEAR TYPE....................................................................................................... ...

10 CURRENT RATINGS....................................................................................................... ...910 DESIGN AND CONTRUCTION ....................................................................................... ...910 COMPARTMENTS CONTAINING SF6 ............................................................................ ...910 COMPARTMENT COUPLINGS....................................................................................... ...


...10.16 SWITCHGEAR ENCLOSURE .........................................................................................


........................1 5

........................1 6

........................1 6

........................1 7

........................197

........................1 7 10.20

........................198

.1 .2 ........................2 4

1.3 ........................2 6 .4 ........................210 .5 ........................212 .6 ....215 .7 ........................2 7

11.8 TEMPERATURE AND ALARM DEVICES AND MARSHALLING CUBICLES...............................................217 ........................220

.1 ........................2 1 ........................2 2

.....225 1 ........................225

.2 ........................2 7

.3 ........................2 8

.4

........................2 8 .1 .2 ........................2 3 .3 ........................2 8 .4 ........................2 8 .5 ........................250 .6 G.....................251

1 BSTATIONS..253 .8 ........................2 1 .9 ........................2 1 .1 ........................2 1

........................2 1

........................263

........................265 .1 ........................2 5 .2 ........................2 5 .3 ........................266

14.4 TEMPERATURE RISE.....................................................................................................................................266 CONSTRUCTION OF ENCLOSURE ...............................................................................................................266

14.6 LV CIRCUIT BREAKERS ................................................................................................................................267 14.7 INSTRUMENTS................................................................................................................................................269 14.8 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS.........................................................................................................................269 14.9 TERMINATION CABLES.................................................................................................................................270 14.10 EARTHING.......................................................................................................................................................270 14.11 INCOMING SUPPLY CIRCUIT BREAKERS CONTROL AND INTERLOCK SCHEME .................................270

10.14 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS......................................................................................... .................................

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....LDIN S.........................

.....

.....

.....

14.5

9

10.18 LOCKING FACILITIES .................................................................................................... ...

10.15 CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE DETECTION SYSTEM............................................................ 9

10.19 AUXILIARY SWITCHES AND CONTACTORS ............................................................... ...

...

9

BUSBARS AND CONNECTIONS ...................................................................................................................198

10.17 INTERLOCKS AND CONTROLS .................................................................................... ... 9

10.21 CIRCUIT LABELS............................................................................................................ ...

9

11. POWER AND EARTHING TRANSFORMERS.......................................................................................................19911 GENERAL........................................................................................................................................................19911 MAGNETIC CIRCUIT AND WINDINGS........................................................................... ... 0

VOLTAGE CONTROL .....................................................................................................

1 TANKS ............................................................................................................................. ... 0

11 ...1

11 COOLING PLANT............................................................................................................ ...

1 TERMINAL BUSHINGS ...............................................................................................................................11 CABLES AND TERMINATIONS...................................................................................... ... 1

11 ...0 OIL....................................................................................................................................

.9 DRYING OUT ...................................................................................................................11 ...

2

12. STATION DC EQUIPMENT...............................................................................................................................

11.11 EARTHING AND AUXILIARY TRANSFORMERS .......................................................... ... 2

2.1 BATTERY CELLS............................................................................................................ ...12 BATTERY MOUNTING, CONNECTIONS, AND ACCESSORIES................................... ... 2

12 DC DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS ...........................................................................................................23512 ...

DC CONTROL & CHARGING EQUIPMENT ................................................................... 2

13. POWER AND MULTICORE/MULTIPAIR CABLES UP TO 132kV........................................ ...

313 GENERAL........................................................................................................................................................23813 132/66kV XLPE INSULATED POWER CABLES............................................................ ... 413 22 kV XLPE INSULATED POWER CABLES.................................................................. ... 413 AUXILIARY POWER AND MULTICORE CABLES UPTO 1.000 V ................................ ... 41 MULTIPAIR CABLES ......................................................................................................3 ...13 INSTALLATION OF CABLES AND ACCESSORIES WITHIN THE SUBSTATION BUI N

3.7 EXCAVATION OF TRENCHES AND ANCILLARY EARTHWORKS IN TRANSMISSIO U13 TERMINATION OF AUXILIARY CABLES AND IDENTIFICATION OF CORES ............ ... 6

TERMINATION OF CONTROL CABLE SCREENS ........................................................13 ... 60 TERMINAL COLOURING AND LABELLING..................................................................13 ... 6 13.11 TERMINAL BOXES AND CABLE MARSHALLING KIOSKS......................................... ... 6

13.12 DRAWINGS...................................................................................................................... ...

14. LV AC SWITCHBOARD......................................................................................................... ...614 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION .......................................................................................... ...614 RATINGS .................................................................................................................................

14 MAIN BUS-BARS ............................................................................................................ ...


15. SUBSTATION EARTHING..................................................................................................... .......................

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

.....

........................272 .1 .2 ........................272 .3 ........................2 2

15.4 JOINTS AND BRANCHES ..............................................................................................................................2 2 ........................2 3

........................274 .1 .2 .............274

FIBER JOINTS.................................................................................................................................................276 ........................276

.5 ........................2 7

........................278 .1 ........................2 8 .2 ........................278 .3 ........................279 .4 ........................2 9 .5 ........................2 0

1 ........................281 .7 ........................282 .8 ........................282 .9 ........................3 3

........................305 .1 ........................3 5 .2 ........................3 0 .3 ........................3 4 .4 ........................3 7 .5 ........................321 .6 ........................3 0 .7 ........................3 5 .8 ........................3 6

1 ........................3 5 18.10 MAIN AND AUXILIARY POWER AND MULTICORE CABLES......................................................................358 18.11 LV AC DISTRIBUTION BOARD ......................................................................................................................360 18.12 SUBSTATION DC EQUIPMENT......................................................................................................................360 18.13 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS...................................................................................................................................362 18.14 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSORS ..........................................................................................................363

19. SPECIFICATION DRAWING LIST.........................................................................................................................364

15 ...........................272 BASIS OF DESIGN.......................................................................................................... GENERAL........................................................................................................................

15 ... 715 EARTHING OF EQUIPMENT .......................................................................................... ...

715 ....5 GUARDS.......................................................................................................................... 7

16. FIBER OPTIC SYSTEMS....................................................................................................... ...16 ...........................274

GENERAL........................................................................................................................

16 OPTICAL FIBERS...............................................................................................................................16.31

TESTING..........................................................................................................................6.4 TERMINATION CABLES................................................................................................. ...

716 ...

17. INSPECTION AND TESTING.................................................................................................7

... GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ..........................................................................................17 ... 17 SUB-CONTRACTORS..................................................................................................... ...

717 MATERIAL TESTS .......................................................................................................... ...

817 WORKS TESTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................ ...17 SITE TESTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .................................................................. ...7.6 TEST CERTIFICATES ..................................................................................................... ...

0

17 REJECTION OF PLANT .................................................................................................. ...17 LIST OF TESTS ............................................................................................................... ...17 INSPECTION PLAN AND PROCEDURES...................................................................... ...

018. ITEMS OF EQUIPMENT......................................................................................................... ...

1

18 132 and 66kV OUTDOOR TYPE SWITCHGEAR ........................................................... ...

1

18 ... Current and Voltage Transformers ...............................................................................

3

METAL ENCLOSED GIS SWITCHGEAR ....................................................................... 118 ...

3

18 POWER AND EARTHING TRANSFORMERS ................................................................ ...

3

18 22 kV SWITCHGEAR....................................................................................................... ...

4

18 PROTECTION AND CONTROL CUBICLES ................................................................... ...18 SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM ......................................................................... ...18 REMOTE CONTROL CUBICLES AND PANELS............................................................ ...8.9 SUPERVISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA) SIGNALS ............... ...



1. SCOPE

g at maker's witchgear and

guarantee period.

pect for ents of the Engineer not withstanding that any

details, accessories, etc. required for the complete installation and satisfactory operation are to be

Test requirements and test methods are included which are intended to demonstrate the capability of the offered equipment and their compliance to the declared values in the Schedules of Particulars that are attached to this document.

1.1 GENERAL

This specification includes the design, manufacture, inspection and testinworks, packing for export shipment and delivery of 132kV, 66kV and 22kV sancillary equipment. When specified it also includes erection and commissioning. The Contractor is responsible for making good defective material within the The Contract provides for all parts of the work to be completed in every rescommercial operation to the requirem

of the Plant are not specifically mentioned in the Specification, such detailsconsidered as included in the Contract Price.



2. REFERENCES

from other in the text e, only the lication apply

specification only when incorporated in the reference by amendment or revision. ents to, or the latest edition of, the cited publication

This specification refers to other publications that provide information or guidance. s current at the time of issue of the standard are listed in the

ut reference should be made to the latest editions.

2.3 LIST OF REFERENCES

Normative refe

97-1 eria for

2.1 NORMATIVE REFERENCES

This specification incorporates by dated or undated reference, provisionspublications. These normative references are cited at the appropriate placeand the publications are listed in paragraph 2.3 below. For a dated referenccited edition applies: any subsequent amendments to or revisions of the pubto thisFor undated references, any amendmapplies.

2.2 INFORMATIVE REFERENCES

Editions of these publicationparagraph below, b

rences

EN 1 Cement. Composition, specifications and conformity critcommon cements

EN 729 lding. Fusion welding of metallic Quality requirements for wematerials

EN 755 um and aluminium alloys. Extruded rod/bar, tube and profiles. Alumini

EN 837 Pressure gauges. Bourdon tube pressure gauges. Dimensions, metrology, requirements and testing

EN 1435 aphic examination of Non-destructive examination of welds. Radiogrwelded joints

EN 1559 ding. Technical conditions of delivery Foun

EN 1780 ium alloys. Designation of unalloyed and nd castings

Aluminium and aluminalloyed aluminium ingots for remelting, master alloys a

EN 1977 Copper and copper alloys. Copper drawing stock (wire rod)

EN 10025 Hot rolled products of non-alloy structural steels. Technical delivery conditions

EN 10027 Designation systems for steels

EN 10029 Specification for tolerances on dimensions, shape and mass for hot rolled steel plates 3 mm thick or above

EN 10113 Hot-rolled products in weldable fine grain structural steels



EN 10137 uctural steels in conditions

Plates and wide flats made of high yield strength strthe quenched and tempered or precipitation hardened

EN 10143 ip metal coated steel sheet and strip. Tolerances Continuously hot-don dimensions and shape

EN 10147 Continuously hot-dip zinc coated structural steel sheet and strip. Technical delivery conditions.

EN 10155 on resistance. Structural steels with improved atmospheric corrosiTechnical delivery conditions

EN 10210 fine grain tructural steels. Technical delivery requirements

Hot finished structural hollow sections of non-alloy ands

EN 10220 Seamless and welded steel tubes. Dimensions and masses per unit length

EN 10244 ings on steel . Zinc or zinc alloy coatings

Steel wire and wire products. Non-ferrous metallic coatwire

EN 12540 tings of nickel, r plus nickel plus

chromium

Corrosion protection of metals. Electrodeposited coanickel plus chromium, copper plus nickel and coppe

EN 50052 nd controlgear for s filled high-

Specification for high-voltage switchgear aindustrial use. Cast aluminium alloy enclosures for gavoltage switchgear and control gear

EN 50064 loy enclosures rol gear

Specification for wrought aluminium and aluminium alfor gas-filled high-voltage switchgear and cont

EN 50068 ght steel enclosures for gas filled high voltage Specification for wrouswitchgear and controlgear

EN 50069 site enclosures of cast and wrought Specification for welded compoaluminium alloys for gas filled high voltage switchgear and controlgear

EN 50081 Electromagnetic compatibility

EN 50089 closed gas filled switchgear and controlgear

Specification for cast resin partitions for metal-enhigh-voltage

EN 50178 llations Electronic equipment for use in power insta

EN 50262 Metric cable glands for electrical installations

EN 50265 Common test methods for cables under fire conditions. Test for resistance to vertical flame propagation for a single insulated conductor or cable

EN 50266 Common test methods for cables under fire conditions



EN 50299 formers and actors having highest voltage for equipment Um from 72,5kV to

Oil-immersed cable connection assemblies for transre550kV

EN 60034 Rotating electrical machines

EN 60044 – 1 rs Instrument transformers. Current transforme

EN 60044 – 2 tage transformers Instrument transformers. Inductive vol

EN 60044 – 3 formers. Combined transformers Instrument trans

EN 60044 – 4 ing partial discharges in Instrument transformers. Method for measurinstrument transformers

EN 60044 – 5 acitor voltage transformers Instrument transformers. Cap

EN 60044 – 6 Instrument transformers. Requirements for protective current transformers for transient performance

EN 60044 – 7 ers Instrument transformers. Electronic voltage transform

EN 60044 – 8 sformers. Electronic current transformers Instrument tran

EN 60051 instruments Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuringand their accessories

EN 60068 Environmental testing

EN 60073 nd safety principles of man-machine interface, marking and Basic aidentification. Coding principles for indicators and actuators

EN 60076 er transformers Pow

EN 60099 – 1 surge arresters for Surge arresters. Non-linear resistor type gappeda.c. systems

EN 60099 – 4 etal-oxide surge arresters without gaps for a.c. Surge arresters. Msystems

EN 60099 – 5 Surge arresters. Selection and application recommendations

EN 60137 Insulated bushings for alternating voltages above 1kV

EN 60146 ctor convertors Semicondu

EN 60168 ts on indoor and outdoor post insulators of ceramic material or Tesglass for systems with nominal voltages greater than 1000V

EN 60214 On-load tap-changers

EN 60255 Electrical Protection relays

EN 60269 Low-voltage fuses

EN 60289 Reactors

EN 60296 Fluids for electrotechnical applications – Unused mineral insulating



oils for transformers and switchgear

EN 60372 all and socket couplings of string insulator Locking devices for bunits. Dimensions and tests.

EN 60383 – 1 nes with a nominal voltage above 1000 V. Insulators for overhead liCeramic or glass insulator units for a.c. systems. Definitions, test methods and acceptance criteria.

EN 60383 – 2 ines with a nominal voltage above 1000 V. finitions, test

Insulators for overhead lInsulator strings and insulator sets for a.c. systems. Demethods and acceptance criteria

EN 60439 cification for low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies Spe

EN 60529 Specification for degrees of protection provided by enc(IP code)

losures

EN 60599 Mineral oil-impregnated electrical equipment in service. Guide to the interpretation of dissolved and free gases analysis

EN 60617 Graphical symbols for diagrams

EN 60618 Inductive voltage dividers

EN 60623 Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or other non-acid electrolytes. Vented nickel-cadmium prismatic recells

chargeable single

EN 60672 Ceramic and glass insulating materials

EN 60688 ctrical measuring transducers for converting a.c. electrical Elequantities to analogue or digital signals

EN 60793 Optical fibres. Measurement methods and test procedures

EN 60811 Insulating and sheathing materials of electric cables. Common test methods

EN 60898 ation for circuit-breakers for overcurrent protection for Specifichousehold and similar installations

EN 60947 w-voltage switchgear and controlgear Specification for lo

EN 61000-4-3 surement c field

immunity test

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Testing and meatechniques. Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagneti

EN 61082 Preparation of documents used in electrotechnology

EN 61131 Programmable controllers

EN 62155 Hollow pressurised and unpressurised ceramic and glass insulators for use in electrical equipment with rated voltages greater than 1000 V

EN 62271 - 1 Common specifications for high voltage switchgear and controlgear



standards

EN 62271 - 10 itchgear and controlgear. High-voltage alternating-0 High-voltage swcurrent circuit-breakers

EN 62271 - 102 High voltage switchgear and controlgear. High-voltage alternating current disconnectors and earthing switches

EN 62271 - 10 rated voltages 3 Specification for high-voltage switches. Switches forabove 1 kV and less than 52 kV

EN 62271 - 10 e switches for ltage of 52 kV and above

4 Specification for high-voltage switches. High-voltagrated vo

EN 62271 - 10 actor-based 6 High-voltage alternating current contactors and contmotor starters

EN 62271 - 20 tal-enclosed switchgear an controlgear for rated voltages 0 A.C. meabove 1 kV and less than 52 kV

EN 62271 - 20 voltages of 72.5 3 Gas-insulated metal-enclosed switchgear for ratedkV and above

EN 62271 - 20 switchgear for ded insulation

9 Cable connections for gas-insulated metal-enclosed rated voltages above 52 kV. Fluid-filled and extrucables. Fluid-filled and dry-type cable-terminations

EN 62271 - 30 osed switchgear for extruded

n cables – Fluid-filed and dry type cable-terminations

5 Cable connections for gas-insulated metal-enclrated voltages of 72,5kV and above – Fluid-filled and insulatio

EN 81346 industrial rinciples and reference designations

Industrial systems, installations and equipment andproducts - Structuring p

EN ISO 216 Writing paper and certain classes of printed matter. Trimmed sizes. A and B series

EN ISO 1461 teel articles. d test methods

Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and sSpecifications an

EN ISO 4589 of burning behaviour by oxygen index Plastics. Determination

EN ISO 5455 Technical drawings. Scales

EN ISO 12944 structures by s

Paints and varnishes. Corrosion protection of steel protective paint system

EN ISO 14713 tructures. Zinc and aluminium coatings. Guidelines

Protection against corrosion of iron and steel in s

IEC 60085 Thermal evaluation and classification of electrical insulation

IEC 60120 Dimensions of ball and socket couplings of string insulator units.

IEC 60228 Conductors of insulated cables

IEC 60229 Electric cables - Tests on extruded oversheaths with a special



protective function

IEC 60273 outdoor insulators for systems with V

Characteristic of indoor andnominal voltage greater than 1000

IEC 60332 ns Tests on electric cables under fire conditio

IEC 60354 ormers Guide to loading of oil-immersed power transf

IEC 60376 Specification and acceptance of new sulphur hexafluoride

IEC 60376A Section thirteen Mineral Oil Content First supplement:

IEC 60376B acceptance of exafluoride

Second supplement - Clause 26 Specification andnew sulphur h

IEC 60480 Guide to the checking of sulphur hexafluoride (SF ) taken from 6electrical equipment

IEC 60502 Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated voltages from 1 kV (Um = 1,2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV)

IEC 60815 tion of insulators in respect of polluted conditions. Guide for the selec

IEC 60840 cessories for rated ltages above 30kV (Um = 36kV) up to 150kV (Um = 170kV) – Test

Power cables with extruded insulation and their acvomethods and requirements

IEC 61109 minal voltage initions, test methods and acceptance

Composite insulators for a.c. overhead lines with a nogreater than 1000 V - Defcriteria

IEC 61850 s Communication networks and systems in substation

ISO 1000 r the use of their Specification for SI units and recommendations fomultiples and of certain other units

BS B 24 s alloy rods and sections Specification for copper-tin-phosphorou

BS 61 Specification for threads for light gauge copper tubes and fittings

BS 159 ion for high-voltage busbars and busbar connections Specificat

BS 215 nductors and aluminium conductors,

Specification for aluminium costeel reinforced for overhead power transmission.

BS 381C and special Specification for colours for identification, codingpurposes

BS 1133 Packaging Code

BS 1376 Specification for colours of light signals

BS 1858 Electric cables. Accessories. Bitumen-based filling compounds

BS 2484 Specification for straight concrete and clayware cable covers

BS 2562 Specification for cable boxes for transformers and reactors



BS 2569 tection of iron and steel res

Specification for sprayed metal coatings. Proagainst corrosion and oxidation at elevated temperatu

BS 2765 r dimensions of temperature detecting elements and Specification focorresponding pockets

BS 2950 Specification. Cartridge fuse-links for telecommunication and light electrical apparatus

BS 3288 Insulator and conductor fittings for overhead power lines

BS 3643 ISO metric screw threads

BS 3692 ts. Specification ISO metric precision hexagon bolts, screws and nu

BS 3941 Specification for voltage transformers

BS 4190 ification ISO metric black hexagon bolts, screws and nuts. Spec

BS 4504 nated) Circular flanges for pipes, valves and fittings (PN desig

BS 4872 r approval testing of welders when welding procedure Specification foapproval is not required

BS 5000 r rotating electrical machines of particular types or for Specification foparticular applications

BS 5207 Specification for sulphur hexafluoride for electrical equipment

BS 5308 Instrumentation cables

BS 5467 n for 600/1000 V and 1900/3300 V armoured electric Specificatiocables having thermosetting insulation

BS 6121 nds. Mechanical cable gla

BS 6231 Specification for PVC-insulated cables for switchgear and iring controlgear w

BS 6346 ed electric Specification for 600/1000 V and 1900/3300 V armourcables having PVC insulation

BS 6360 cords Specification for conductors in insulated cables and

BS 6399 Loading for buildings

BS 6622 extruded cross-linked polyethylene or es from 3.8/6.6

kV up to 19/33 kV

Specification for cables withethylene propylene rubber insulation for rated voltag

BS 6724 Specification for 600/1000 V and 1900/3300 V armoured electric cables having thermosetting insulation and low emission of smoke and corrosive gases when affected by fire

BS 7207 Specification for crude vegetable fats

BS 7354 Code of practice for design of high-voltage open terminal stations



BS 7430 Code of practice for earthing

BS 7655 or cables Specification for insulating and sheathing materials f

BS 7668 Specification for weldable structural steels. Hot finished structural hollow sections in weather resistant steels

BS 7884 Specification for copper and copper-cadmium stranded conductors for overhead electric traction and power transmission systems



3. GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

et out for r any claims based on th will be accepted.

1 es above sea level: Below 1000m

3.1 DESIGN CRITERIA

3.1.1 Site Operating Conditions

The climate is sub-tropical and the following meteorological information is sguidNevertheless, the values given below shall be taken into account in designing the works.

ance only. No responsibility o is information

Altitude of sit

2 Maximum outdoor ambient shade or indoor tempera or ses:

50 oC ture fdesign purpo

3 Minimum temperature: -5 oC

4 Relative humidity: 100 %

5 Thunderstorms per year: 30

6 Number of strokes to earth per km2 per year: 4

7 Earthquake loading for design purposes: Refer to Clause 3.1.9

8 Wind Speed/pressure for design purposes 40 m/s at 10m / 575 N/m²

9 Condition of atmosphere sionally dust d salt laden

Occaan

For current rating calculations of busbar usbar ections th llowing assumptions shall be made:

Copper Aluminium

s and b conn e fo

1 Maximum operating temperatu Refer to Clause 6.8.1 res

2 Wind speed m/sec 0,6 0,6

3 Emissivity factor 0.5 0,6

4 Absorption factor 0,5 0,6

5 Solar radiation W/m2 1050 1050

3.1.2 General Design Information

Rotation and Colour-Phases shall be distinguished as Brown (L1), Black (L2), and Grey (L3) with phases reaching their maximum values in that order in an anti-clockwise rotation.

Phase



1 system voltage betw 220 132 66 22/11 0,400 Nominal eenphases (kV)

2 Rated voltage (kV) 245 145 72,5 24/12

3 (%) Nominal system voltage variation +/-10 +/-6 - +10/-6

4 System nominal Frequency (Hz) 50

5 System nominal Frequencrange(Hz)

y 49,5-50,5

6 System Frequency rangedisturbances(Hz)

du 52ring 47,0- ,0

7 Rated short-circuit and thfault capability, Vassilikos,

rou

kAs

kA r 3 s

50 kA for 1s

gh-

Dhekelia and Moni S/S

40kA for 1s

40kAfor 1s

25 for 1

20fo

8 and through-stations

31,5kA for 1s

31,5kA for 1s

25 kA for 1s

20kA for 3 s

50 kA for 1s

Rated short-circuitfault capability, other Sub

9 rated short-circuit breaking current 45ms 45ms 45ms 45ms 45ms DC time constant at

10 DC time constant at rated short-circuit breaking current -

uit breakers ms

generator circ318

11 Earthing of System Solid Earthing

Solid Earthing of the 22/11kV neutral or of zig-zag earthing transformer

12 AC supply voltage for auxiliary 0/230 Vac ±10% equipment 40

13 e for auxiliary 110 V 2-wire DC supply voltagequipment dc

14 Closing 110 V dc

15 Tripping 110 Vdc

Initiating power supply for indications and alarms 110 Vdc 16

DC voltages stated are nominal battery voltages and due allowance shall be made for all connected equipment to operate safely when batteries are under normal float charge or boost charge conditions.



The equipment provided under this Contract is to be capable of operating reliably within ltage ranges:

inal voltage up to 110% nominal voltage (125 V for 110 V DC supply).

voltage.

3.1.3 Co-ordination of Substation Insulation

) 2 66 22 11

the following vo

(a) DC Equipment:

From 80% nom

(b) AC Equipment:

From 80% nominal voltage up to 110% nominal

1 Nominal system voltage (kV 20 132

2 Rated system voltage (kV) 245 145 72 24 12

3 Assumed highest switching surge Not greater than 3:1

4 ltage (1,2 950 650 325 125 75 Impulse withstand vo /50 μsec) (kV)

5 withstand voltage (1,2/50 750 550 325 125 95 Impulse

μsec) for transformers (kV)

6 Power frequency withstand voltage 50 28 (1 min) (kV) 395 275 140

7 Impulse withstand level of isolator 115% of rated insulation level gap

8 Minimum external creepage 770 385 distance (mm) 7700 4620 2310

9 Minimum substation cleara(Outdoor Equipment):

nce s

• Phase to earth (mm) 0 5 200 2100 127 68 279

• Phase to phase (mm) 3 6 250 2400 147 78 330

• Between terminal ophase (mm)

f same 330 250 1783 1473 786

• 2440 2440 Finished concrete level to base of post insulator (mm) 2440 2440 2440

• Section (mm) 4250 3500 3050 2590 2590

• Height from ground to the nearest unscreened live conductor in air (mm)

3530 3530 3530 3530 3530

Note 1: The above clearances are applicable only to equipment not subject to impulse voltage tests. They apply for conditions of maximum swing and sag.

Note 2: The minimum creepage distance measured from the metal cap to the base over the surface of the insulator shed (expressed in millimetres per unit of nominal voltage



between phases) shall not be less than 35mm per kV (nominal voltage) for outdoor

per cent of the rt of the

bushing. If the nti-fog" or "Anti-pollution" type or other insulators with deep sheds or skirts is

tion and fully dimensioned drawing of the

asic R uirements

10kA crest

insulators.

The minimum protected creepage distance shall not be less than thirty fivetotal creepage distance. The protected creepage distance refers to that painsulator, which is protected against rain at right angles to the axis of the use of "Aintended the Tenderer shall include a descripinsulators..

3.1.4 Surge Arrester B eq

1 Nominal discharge current 2 Line discharge class

0as per EN 3

6 099-4 3 Discharge Current Withstands • High Current 4/10 μs 100kA crest • Low Current 2000 μs (minimum) 700A crest

4 Housing Polymeric

3.1.5 Minimum Factors of Safety for Outdoor Switchgear and Equipment

of stress: 2,5 1 Busbar or other connections based on elastic limit or 0.1% pro

2 ased on mechanical test: 2,5 Complete insulator units b

3 Insulator metal fittings based on elastic limit: 2,5

4 Steel structures based on elastic limit of tension members and on crippling 2,5 loads of compression members:

5 ns for structures against overturning or up-rooting under king loading: 2,5 Foundatio

maximum simultaneous wor

3. aracteristics of Associated Transmission Lines

1 ormal transmission voltage betwephases (kV) 220 132

1.6 Ch

N en

2 Wet power frequency withstand 395 275 voltage (kV)

3 nd vol(kV) 950 650 Dry lightning impulse withsta tage

Phase

conductorPhase

conductor Earthwire

4 conductor on the substation landing gantry (kN)

40 kN 13,5 kN 9 kN Maximum tension in each line

5 220 kV feeders Rubus OPGW



6 220 kV feeders but operated 132 kV R OPGW ubus

7 132 kV feeders UPAS or P

Willow or OPGW arakeet

8 132 kV feeders but operated 66 kV UPAS or Parakeet

Willow or OPGW

9 Number of circuits per tower 2 2

10 Number of phase conductors per 2 1 circuit

11 Number of earthwires 1 1

12 Typical impedance values:

• Positive sequence (Z1) 0,42 <74N.A. 0

Ohms / km

• Zero sequence (Z0) N.A. 1,21 <730 / km Ohms

3.1.7 Power Quality

The system nominal values and range of variation under normal conditions and during system disturbances are included in the table of clause 3.1.2 above. In addition the

oltage must not exceed the value of 5%

sec

ency of 0,5 Hz/sec.

tibility

y

above listed phenomena.

Susceptibility to Radiated Electromagnetic Energy

The Works shall be immune from the effects of:

(a) 5W hand held VHF transceivers when operated in the same rooms as the RTU equipment (0.25m from any point of the Works with all equipment doors closed and covers in place).

negative sequence component of the phase vunder normal operating conditions. The frequency variations must be limited to the values below:

Minimum temporary frequency of 47 Hz for 5

Maximum temporary frequency of 52 Hz for 3600 sec.

Maximum rate of change of frequ

3.1.8 Electromagnetic Compa

The electromagnetic environment comprises:

(a) conducted emissions and susceptibility

(b) radiated emissions and susceptibilit

(c) conditions leading to electrostatic discharge

The Works shall conform to the requirements in the following Clauses with respect to the

3.1.8.1



(b) Cell phones when operated in the 900MHz frequency band within the sathe eq

me rooms as uipment (0.25m from any part of the Works with all equipment doors and covers

o interference to the operation oms.

llowing types

2 for ference Class

lectrical Interference Class of the equipment.

0 Hz.

l be better than 40 dB at 50 Hz.

cted Electromagnetic Interference

wn internal uses mal-

ischarge

n, the Works shall be immune from any levels and types of environment. The

al precautions to under maintenance.

equipment complies and whether type test certification demonstrating compliance with tandards exists.

Degree of compliance with the requirements of the EC 1992 directive on EMC.

3.1.9 Earthquake Withstand

The sites are subject to seismic activity and disturbances with a modified Mercalli intensity of 8,0, which should be taken into account in the plant design. For the purpose of design

in place).

(c) Typical levels of broadcast radio and television signals.

(d) An electromagnetic field, with field strength of 10V/m, measured by the method specified in EN 61000-4-3.

3.1.8.2 Production of Radiated Electromagnetic Energy

Emissions from equipment supplied under the Contract shall be limited to ensure that there are no unwanted internal effects on the Works and nof similar equipment (supplied by others) located in the same or adjacent ro

3.1.8.3 Susceptibility to Conducted Electromagnetic Energy

The Contractor shall ensure the Works are immune from the effects of the foand levels of conducted electromagnetic interference.

(a) Impulse Voltage Withstand as defined and recommended in EN 60255-2equipment required to operate in environments subject to Electrical InterII.

(b) High Frequency Disturbance as defined and recommended in EN 60255-22 for equipment required to operate in environments subject to EII and shall be applied to the AC power supply terminals

(c) Signal lines Common Mode Rejection shall be better than 50 dB at 5

(d) Signal lines Series Mode Rejection shal

3.1.8.4 Production of Condu

The Works shall not introduce conducted interference, which disturbs its ooperation or generates interference on the incoming power supply, which caoperation of sensitive equipment supplied by others.

3.1.8.5 Electrostatic D

During normal operatioelectrostatic discharge (ESD), which can be found in a typical office Contractor shall describe in the relevant maintenance manuals any specibe taken to guard against the effects of ESD when the Works are

3.1.8.6 EMC Standards

The Tenderer shall indicate:

With which, if any, standards relating to electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) the

such s



calculations, the earthquake stresses may be determined based on maximum horizontal

brittle

tion equipment shall be based on a recognized design rs shall state

ipment similar to ll be stated.

e spectra, tted by the

and location of the centres of gravity of the ipment, reports of tests and studies conducted

factors and natural periods of vibration should be submitted.

or illustrations which may be submitted with strictly in accordance with the Specification

arture is listed pted at the date

's Responsibilities

planations, with the fety in

operation, freedom from undue stresses and satisfactory performance in all other

r implied by the h may be

the Contract Price.

the drawings and not mentioned or described in the Specification and vertheless be

by the Contract Price in the same manner as if they have been expressly shown upon the drawings and

bed in the Specification.

3.2.3 Design and Construction

3.2.3.1 General

In complying with the requirements of the Specification, both with respect to arrangement and detail, design is to conform to the best current engineering practice. Each of the

and vertical ground accelerations (seismic coefficient) of 0,15g.

For equipment contained in the circuit breaker, which will fail by fracture of acomponent the adopted design stress using the modified seismic coefficient shall provide for a factor of safety of not less than 2.

The seismic design of the substacode, as far as such codes are applicable to the plant in question. Tenderewhich design code they propose to use.

Tenderers shall include evidence of tests or studies conducted or still to be conducted to prove the earthquake resistance of the equipment offered. Details of equthat offered and which has been subject to any serious earthquakes sha

Calculations to show design factors used, design stresses, seismic responsfactors of safety, inherent damping, mode of failure etc shall be submiContractor. Drawings showing the weight principal components of each piece of equto determine damping

3.2 COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATION

3.2.1 General

Notwithstanding any descriptions, drawingsthe Tender, all details will be deemed to beand the standard specifications and codes referred to therein unless a depin the Schedule of Departures and the departure has been formally acceof Contract award.

3.2.2 Contractor

Unless stated specifically to the contrary in the Tender with full supporting exthe Contractor will be deemed to have concurred as a practical manufacturerdesign and layout of the Works as being sufficient to ensure reliability and sa

essentials as a working plant.

The Contractor is to include the whole of the Works that are described in oContract Document. All matters omitted from the Contract Document, whicinferred to be obviously necessary for the efficiency, stability and completion of the Works, shall be deemed to be included in

Works shown upon Works described in the Specification and not shown on the drawings will neheld to be included in this Contract and their execution is to be covered

descri



several parts of the Plant is to be of the maker's standard design provided this in general accordance with the Specification. All systems and equihave prov

at this design pment supplied shall

ed satisfactory on other installations when operated similarly in a similar

ign, colour and e same room

xisting caling similar

tions of equipment

and can operate satisfactorily in conjunction with the existing equipment. The l of the

nd repairs and for apparatus shall be

designed to ensure satisfactory operation under the atmospheric conditions prevailing at met under

e to faulty ratus.

r the safety of s and of

ng continuous ition designs

al access in order to enance.

y will not suffer itions.

e to be submitted

st quality and

hroughout the Contract plant shall be interchangeable and all spare equired by the

All equipment is to operate without undue vibration and with the least possible amount of and is not to cause a nuisance.

All equipment is to be designed to minimize the risk of fire and any damage, which may be caused in the event of fire.

All apparatus shall be designed to obviate the risk of accidental short-circuit due to animals, birds and vermin. Openings in ventilated enclosures shall be so constructed to

environment.

Panels provided for installation in the same room shall be of same desappearance. In addition, panels provided as extensions or for erection in thas existing boards shall be of similar design, colour and appearance to the eboards. Equipment mounted on such panels shall likewise be of style and sto the existing equipment. Characteristics of relays, etc., and all connecto be associated with existing equipment shall be such that they are fully compatible with

characteristics and appearance of all such equipment shall be to the approvaEngineer.

The Contract Works shall be designed to facilitate inspection, cleaning aoperation in which continuity of service is the first consideration. All

the sites and under such sudden variations of load and voltage as may be working conditions on the system and short circuits, including those dusynchronizing, within the rating of the appa

The design shall incorporate every reasonable precaution and provision foall those concerned in the operation and maintenance of the Contract Workassociated works supplied under other Contracts.

The essence of design should be simplicity and reliability in order to give loservice with high economy and low operation and maintenance cost. I addshould be such us to avoid long supply interruptions, in case of maintenance and repairs after faults. Particular attention should be paid to internal and externfacilitate inspection, cleaning and maint

The design, dimensions and materials of all parts are to be such that thedamage as a result of stresses under the most severe service cond

Fully detailed specifications of the several parts of the Plant ardescribing particularly the materials to be used.

The materials used in the construction of the Plant are to be of the higheselected particularly to meet the duties required of them. Mechanisms are to be constructed to avoid sticking due to rust or corrosion.

Workmanship and general finish are to be of the highest class throughout.

Corresponding parts tparts must fit in place accurately without additional machining. When rEngineer, the Contractor shall demonstrate this quality.

noise



prevent the entry of vermin and insects. The use of materials, which may be liable to ts, is to be avoided.

). The tions or other

maloperation of relays or other he size of the

ated with only

dance with this

front panel or the equipment-mounting panel is

ovided and

adlocking. dlocks shall not be more than 1,5 meters above floor level. Top and

e sealing.

sing device (e.g.,

an interior lamp itch, shall be

op of each section. Anti-condensation heaters shall also be fitted in each h vermin proof

d shall provide hardwood

chieving this, exceed the

width. The width between apparatus mounted on the cubicle side shall not be less than s mounted on oards shall be

The floor plates of cubicles shall not be used as gland plates for control cable terminations parate removable gland plates shall be provided within the cubicles, so located as

to provide adequate working clearance for terminating the cables.

Where relay movements and other sensitive equipment are mounted on hinged front panels, these shall be designed to minimize shock and wiring shall be so arranged as to impose no strain on terminations. No equipment whatsoever shall be mounted on rear access doors.

attack by termites or other insec

3.2.3.2 Construction of Cubicles

Cubicles are to be sheet metal having a minimum thickness of 2mm (14SWGconstruction shall employ folding techniques with use of standard rolled secreinforcement where necessary to prevent distortion or the apparatus by impact, having regard to the number and size of cut-outs and tpanel. The front of the panel is to have a smooth well-finished surface.

Each cubicle shall form a complete enclosure and is preferably to be associone circuit of main equipment. The enclosures shall afford IP31 degree of protection for indoor and IP54 for outdoor cubicles, as categorized by EN 60529 in accorSpecification.

Cubicles shall be so constructed that theremovable without disturbing the remainder of the cubicle structure.

Close fitting, lockable and lift-off rear access cubicle steel doors shall be prhinged to lie back flat to avoid restricting access.

Doors shall be secured by integral handles and provision shall be made for pHandles and pabottom doors shall not be interlocked and cross stiffeners shall not impede access to the cubicle. Moulded gaskets of non-aging material shall be used to provide clos

All cubicle doors shall be closed by handle that operates on a 3-point cloEspagnolette type).

The interior of each cubicle shall be finished with a Matt white surface and suitable for the local LV AC supply and controlled by a door operating swfitted at the tsection and each cubicle shall be well-ventilated top and bottom througlouvers fitted with brass gauze screens.

Unless otherwise approved, panels shall be suitable for floor mounting anfor bottom entry of power and multicore cables via vermin proof plates andsealing bushes.

Equipment and terminals shall be readily accessible and shall require a minimum of disturbance of associated and adjacent equipment for access. To assist in acubicle widths shall not be less than 600 mm wide and the depth shall not

that which will permit full and easy access to all terminals and for apparatuthe panels. The arrangement of panel wiring and multicore cable terminal bin accordance with the relevant Clause of this Specification.

but se



All sections of a composite cubicle shall be suitably labelled in accordance wSpecification and each section or pan

ith the el shall also be readily identified by labels at the rear

colour of all cubicles shall be to the approval of the Engineer.

st be provided for each primary circuit. It is e a section of the individual bay panel. However in certain

ng on concrete

icles shall be provided with the necessary terminal blocks, cable gland plates etc., for

imate conditions

icles shall comply with enclosure category IP54 but shall also be well ventilated d to the

to assist air

3.2.4 Relays, Miniature Circuit Breakers, Fuses, and Ancillary Apparatus

hall be mounted in sup-positions that no part requiring inspection or adjustment acticable the an 30 mm and in

te phase ition to the shall be

pt to a minimum and where approved these shall be of a type having a low burden, to prevent drain on the battery.

Isolating links and fuses of approved type shall be provided on each panel to facilitate the n of all sources of electrical potential to permit testing or other work on the panel

without danger to personnel or interference with similar circuits on other panels. Carriers and bases shall be of moulded plastic material coloured white for links and black for fuses. Fuse carriers shall be clearly marked with the correct fuse rating. As an alternative to fuses and links, miniature circuit breakers will be accepted.

with the access doors either open or closed.

The arrangement and mounting of all devices shall be to the approval of the Engineer. The exterior finish and

3.2.3.2.1 Bay Cubicles

Bay control and protection cubicles mupreferable that the cubicle bcases it can be separate self-standing panels.

3.2.3.2.2 Outdoor Cubicles

They shall be complete with any supporting steelwork necessary for mountifoundations, steelwork or plant as appropriate.

Cubtermination of multicore cables.

Door shall be fitted with weatherproof sealing material suitable for the clat site.

The cubthrough louvers having a brass gauge screen attached to a frame and secureinside of the cubicle.

Any divisions between compartments within the cubicles shall be perforatedcirculation.

All relays sis less than 450 mm or more than 2 meters above floor level. Where prclearances between relay stems or connecting studs shall not be less thno case less than 25 mm.

Unless otherwise stated all relays for front of panel mounting shall be flush pattern and withdrawable.

Relays associated with the three phases shall be marked with the appropriaidentification and the fuses and links shall also be suitably labelled. In addlabelling to identify relays on the front of panels, all relays and components identified from the rear of the panels.

The use of permanently energized relays shall be ke

isolatio



Where miniature air circuit breakers are used on control, protection and alarm supplies,

e accepted. Fuse

ng of fuses and ting panels, MCB´s fuses and links associated with

ottom of the

and spaced tion in order to facilitate identification.

vided and vered to the Purchaser.

6 hexagon or stainless

ing circuits in which the voltage equals or exceeds 125 volts shall be fed through inal, which

be shrouded ntact with live metal cannot be made when the moving portion is

withdrawn.

ith stud terminals. Set ed.

sions and a degree of

duced specifically for this Contract and plant manuals shall be in SI

Operating Maintenance Instructions.

3.4 DRAWINGS

3.4.1 General

Drawings shall be prepared in accordance with EN 61082, 61355, 60617 and 81346. All drawings shall be on EN ISO 216 using the preferred "A" series size sheets with multiple

tripping shall cause an alarm to be displayed.

Fuses shall be of the HRC cartridge type; re-wirable type fuses will not bholders shall be designed to lock the cartridges firmly into position without the use of screw clamping devices.

Except on panels forming extensions to existing boards where the mountilinks shall conform with the existripping circuits and protective gear test circuits shall be positioned at the bfront face of relay and control boards.

Other links, fuses and MCB's shall be accommodated within the cubicle or at the rear of the cubicle above the cubicle doors. Fuses and links shall be grouped according to their func

Spare fuses and MCB´s of at least 50% of each type and size shall be prodeli

Links in current transformer circuits shall be of the bolted type having size Mnuts. M5 size may be used provided the material used is phosphor bronze steel.

All incominsulated fuses and/or links, the supplies being connected to the bottom termshall be shrouded. The contacts of the fixed portion of the fuse or link shall so that accidental co

Resistance boxes shall be so mounted inside the cubicle that their adjustment screws are on a vertical and accessible face. Resistances shall be provided wscrews shall not be us

3.3 UNITS OF MEASUREMENT

The Contractor shall design in "The International System of Units" (SI Units) in accordance with ISO 1000

Where plant and equipment designs already exist in Imperial units, dimentolerances of layouts and terminal points shall be presented in SI Units toaccuracy of conversion from the original unit, which permits precise matching with mating components.

Contract drawings proUnits.

SI Units shall be used in all correspondence, technical schedules and in the



sheets of the same drawing all the same size. The maximum dimensions ishall not exceed 420mm and the minimum drawing size shall not be less297mm. Drawings shall be spe

n one direction than 210mm x

cifically prepared for this Contract unless the Engineer

ngs and performance curves referred to in ry to describe the plant offered.

gister of all , which he shall maintain and issue at regular

t each issue. register

layout shall be to the approval of the Engineer.

wing all details of approval.

r approval otection

hemes. ns between

tic diagrams shall bbreviations used.

ailable ross references.

or not.

. Where wiring

lied in order to pplied under

tor is unable to provide any of the above,

ment date and deemed

mpletion of the ngs submitted are to be modified as necessary if requested by

the Engineer and re-submitted for final approval.

ase shall the Contractor proceed with manufacture before the manufacturing specification, drawings and design data are approved. Comments or approval shall be given by the Engineer within thirty days from receipt by the Engineer. Any manufacturing work carried out prior to such approval will be at the Contractor's own risk and expense. The Contractor's program shall allow for the time required for the necessary comment and/or approval by the Engineer.

approves existing standard drawings.

3.4.2 Drawings Submitted with the Tender

The Tender shall be accompanied by the drawithe Schedules and any other drawings necessa

3.4.3 Manufacturing and Erection Drawings

At the commencement of the Contract, the Contractor shall prepare a redrawings, which he proposes to produceintervals. The register shall record dates of issue and approval status againsDrawings shall be subdivided into groups of drawings in subject matter. The

Before the work is put in hand, dimensioned drawings and diagrams shothe Plant and materials to be used are to be submitted to the Engineer for

No wiring or connection diagrams shall be submitted for approval unless priohas been obtained for schematic diagrams, which is to include control and prschematics, showing the facilities being provided and the working of the scElectrical schematic diagrams shall show, in a simple manner, the connectioall apparatus included in the Contract and also those connections to associated equipment which may be supplied under a separate contract. All schemainclude a schedule of apparatus, which shall explain any symbols or aThe schematic drawings of the devices and equipment shall show all avconnections and terminations (including unused ones) and shall include c

All wiring diagrams shall show clearly the details of multicore cables terminated in the equipment, whether such multicore cables are supplied under the Contract

Wiring diagrams shall be drawn as viewed from the back of the panelsdiagrams take the form of schedules, each schedule shall include a view of the back of the panel with the position of all terminals identified.

Electronic circuit diagrams and component layout drawings are to be suppenable full repair and testing by the Purchaser of all electronic equipment suthe Contract. In cases where the Contracrequired information, it should be stated at the time of Tendering.

The drawings are to be submitted as soon as possible after the commencein any case in sufficient time to permit modifications to be made if such arenecessary by the Engineer without delaying the initial deliveries or the coContract Works. The drawi

In no c



If the Contractor requires urgent approval of any drawing in order todelivery of the Contract Works, he is to advise the Engineer to such efsubmitting the drawing. The Engineer will not be held responsible ifapprove

avoid delay in the fect when

he is unable to or comment on the submitted drawing within the time requested by the

e Contractor writing, the program.

approval of the Engineer, by airmail if from another country. The same copy of documents shall be sent to

nic form by e-mail. Within thirty days after receipt, the Engineer will of the following ways:

no approval required" - Category IV.

Contractor to the agreed

d" by the ctly to the oted" the e noted

ward within 14 days one copy, suitably amended as above.

by the Engineer of proposals, drawings or documents val expressed

solve the of the provisions of

ish, including the site and description of the drawing cale, an

eference.

ite, Contract No. and drawing number. A blank area of 100 mm x 70 mm shall be left on all drawings above the title block for the Engineer's acceptance stamp.

ed or redrawn drawings shall have the revision letter inserted in each drawing in a table which shall also include a brief description of the revision, date and authorization signature.

The drawing title block shall be subject to the Engineer's approval.

Contractor.

If the Engineer fails to approve or comment on the drawings submitted by thwithin the specified period the Contractor may, after advising the Engineer inproceed with manufacturing at the manufacturer's works in accordance with

One full size copy of each drawing, diagram or report shall be furnished for

the Engineer in electroadvise the Contractor by e-mail in one

(a) "Approved” - Category I

(b) "Approved Except as Noted" - Category II

(c) "Modification required" - Category III

(d) "For information only,

The notation "Approved" and "Approved Except as Noted" authorize the proceed with fabrication of the plant covered by the drawings subject toamendments, if any, indicated.

When the Contractor receives the advice that a plant drawing is "ApproveEngineer, he must then forward within 14 days one copy of this drawing direEngineer. When the Contractor receives the advice "Approved Except As NContractor may either re-submit a modified drawing for approval or accept thmodification and for

No examination or consideration submitted by the Contractor for the approval of the Engineer, nor the approby him with regard thereto, either with or without modifications, shall abContractor from any responsibility or liability imposed upon him by any the Contract documents.

3.4.4 Numbering of Drawings

All drawings shall bear a title in Englsubject and the serial number of the Main Contract, the revision letter, the sindication of the method of drawing, together with an approved Contract R

The title block shall include a space in a prominent location of the Purchaser's name ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY OF CYPRUS, substation s

Amend



3.4.5 Contract Drawings

After all items of Plant have been manufactured, one complete set of each fully revised and previously approved, is to be provided in electronic printouproduced by the vector form CAD software such as Eplan, Elcad, and /ordepending on the application. Electronic copies of a workable set shall be finincluded in the set of Operation and Maintenance Manuals described in thechapter of this specifications in the original vector form of the available CADin dwg /dxf form as applica

drawing being t (pdf format)

dwg / dxf form, alized and

relevant software and

ble. The Tenderer should ascertain for himself during the tender stage that this requirement is to be fulfilled otherwise a statement shall be included in the

s.

commissioning l. Copies of the ontractor.

ontract from the submission of

testing and

nt parties

f civil works

aser at least

program shall submitted

tail separately the ation required to finalize civil works designs will be available.

Contract it is found necessary to modify the dified chart for

med to be consent to any amendment to the date of

3.5.2 Project Schedule/Program

The Contractor shall submit within one month of Contract award a master program sub-divided in such a way as to give full information on the following:

• Design/Document submissions • Placing of orders for manufacture • Periods of manufacture

relevant schedule of Departure

3.5 PROGRAM OF WORK

3.5.1 Manufacturing Progress Information

Within one month of acceptance of the Tender, the Contractor is to forward to the Engineer a chart detailing the plant manufacture, delivery, installation andprogram etc. for the complete contract work for his comment or approvaapproved chart, as required by the Engineer, are to be provided by the C

The chart is to indicate the various phases of work for all items of the Ccommencement of the Contract to its final completion, e.g., design, drawings, ordering of materials, manufacture delivery, installation, cabling commissioning.

The works program shall take into consideration work carried out by differeinvolved (e.g., civil contractor etc.) and shall define the time at which the various operations controlling the site progress will take place such as submission olayout drawings, supply of anchor bolts for structures etc.

All instructions for work on existing plant shall be requested from the Purchone month in advance.

The dates by which access to sites or buildings are required to achieve thebe stated. The program shall indicate the dates by which drawings will beindicating separately dates for arrangement and layout, schematics, wiring diagrams and cable schedules. The arrangement drawing submission dates shall dedate by which all inform

If at any time during the execution of theapproved chart, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer and submit a moapproval.

Such approval is not to be deetract. completion of the Con



• Work tests • Factory Inspections • Transportation and Shipment

• Delivery of Spares and Tools

d to clearly show

he guaranteed dates of delivery of ed in the act, from the

n.

ogram shall be on a per-site basis and in the same number of copies as the

trate the relevant

The approval program shall be marked up by the Contractor to record the actual and to the

f any unscheduled delays occurring, the ise the policy or methods to be implemented

approval by the Engineer and once approved shall not be

n duplicate by rall project progress report for

nimum the following items:

:

ress in design, specification, sub-ordering, manufacture, erection and commissioning of a specified and agreed list of key items of plant.

(c) An assessment of the effect of such delays on the attainment of specified key dates in the Contract (not necessarily Contractual key dates).

(d) A statement of the measures, if any, being taken or proposed to be taken to minimize the effect of the delay.

• Plant Erection • Plant Commissioning

• Training of purchaser’s Staff

The erection and commissioning section shall be particularly detailerequired power system shutdown and durations.

The master program must be consistent with tinformation, drawings and equipment as required by the contract, and includOrder Letter and is to cover all phases of the works for all items of the Contrcommencement of the Contract to its final completio

Sub-programs based on and containing similar information to the master prprovided by the Contractor master program at the discretion and request of the Engineer.

Both the master and sub programs shall be of clear presentation to illuscalendar dates/activity durations.

forecast progress for the purpose of Contract control and shall be submittedEngineer at monthly intervals. In the event oContractor shall inform the Engineer and advto eliminate or minimize such delays.

All programs shall be subject toamended unless specifically agreed by the Engineer.

3.6 PROGRESS REPORTS AND MEETINGS

3.6.1 Progress Reports

For the duration of the Contract the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer ithe fifth (5th) day of each calendar month, an approved ovethe previous month. The project report shall include as a mi

3.6.1.1 Summary

The Contractor shall submit in writing, brief but concise progress reports indicating

(a) The state of prog

(b) A statement of any delays and the reasons why they have occurred.



(e) An estimation of the completion date of the project, based upon the programs outlined .

d in Clause 3.5 of these Conditions shall also be included.

shall be included:

al approval status

t to the approval of the Engineer and the ntified as one of the following categories:

(SA) ) )

R) (NA)

A) )

e shall also be shown. The equipment identified shall be

hlighted by particular item. ed.

3.6.1.4 Health and Safety Plan

garding the o the Tenderer that in accordance

with regulation ΚΔΠ 172/2002, the Tenderer is obliged to submit with his Tender proposal for the appointment of a qualified Safety Coordinator and a health and safety plan (referred to in

ecification as the "plan") at the stage of design. Likewise, a qualified Safety coordinator shall be appointed for the construction works before the commencement of such works.

As guidance, to the Tenderer, the following basic requirements for the plan are specified here below. The Tenderer is obliged to read all the requirements of the above regulation and any other law or regulation associated with, before preparing this plan.

in Clause 3.5 of these Conditions

3.6.1.2 Project Schedule/Program

Copies of the programs outline

3.6.1.3 Updated Schedules

The following updated schedules

• Equipment/Materi• Drawing Schedule • Equipment Schedule

The drawing schedule shall detail the current status of the individual drawings.

The equipment schedule shall be subjecindividual equipment/materials, ide

• Submitted for Approval • Approved (AP• Approved Except as Noted (AE• Modification Required (M• No Approval Required • % Manufactured (M• Works Tested (WT• Factory Inspected (FI) • Under Transportation/Shipment (TR) • Site Inspected (SI) • % Erected (ER) • % Commissioned (CO)

Key dates relating to the abovsub-divided only up to main component parts.

Any changes within the equipment schedule since the last issue shall be higincluding the revision number of the latest issue of the schedule next to the Any equipment removed shall still be detailed but shall be indicated as delet

All project works shall comply with all relevant Cyprus laws and regulations rehealth and safety at work. Particular attention is drawn t

this sp



A copy of the plan shall be always maintained on site in the health and saas the "file"). Upon completion of the works, the

fety file (referred to plan shall be updated and amended, if

s involved in the works and to determine how these risks can be avoided or how can the works be protected

wing:

er, Safety anager, contractors, sub-contractors, etc).

arcation,

uctures, other installations, traffic, ground characteristics, any constraint or requirement implied by the Purchaser or other

s.

ith the orks and proposed working procedures and codes of practice that might be

er this contract.

e design and any other m and is relevant to health

ls or use of materials.

.

ion of the plan in accordance with any possible y design revisions and

tractors involved.

plan at the construction work on the line throughout its life,

such as maintenance, dismantling etc.

ements, necessary to be provided by the

g:

ork.

• Health and safety policy and formulation of targets.

• Constraints affecting the execution of the works.

• Organization structure of the project team and the assignment of roles and responsibilities for each individual member.

• Description of the management system on health and safety issues.

required, and the file shall be submitted to the Engineer.

The prerequisite for the preparation of the plan is to define and assess all risk

from them.

At the design stage the plan shall include among other things the follo

• A schedule of all stakeholders being known at the design stage (ownCoordinator, designers, project m

• A project definition, including work description, topographical maps, demschedule of works at milestone level, etc.

• Site information such as neighbouring buildings, str

Authority, etc.

• Flow of traffic and access paths to public or private building

• Design principles including preventive measures against risks associated wconstruction wimplemented in connection with the works covered und

• Construction drawings and other documents associated with thspecific information that might be useful to the construction teaand safety issues.

• Definition of risks associated with the materia

• Site organization, including site office, stores, and health facilities locations

• Procedures relevant to the revisamendments during the construction works, the management of anthe cooperation between the subcon

• Any information or requirement relevant to the preparation of the stage and necessary for the file in connection with

Supporting information for the above requirPurchaser is available in the tender documents.

At the construction stage, the plan shall include among other things the followin

• Description of all tasks associated with the construction w



• Communication procedures and coordination of the works of subcont

• Detailed mapping show

ractors

ing all site facilities and installations, including flow of traffic,

• Information on all standards and legislation relevant to health and safety and

cure

tors in respect to safety at work and no health risks.

arding the safe

pment and adequately and sufficiently

The sufficient training of all machinery operators.

ight be affected

ordination of all subcontractors involved including meetings to secure that the works will be running in

nstruction works, design works should be

health risks. The

f work including where necessary peration and

such as lifting devices, s adjacent to electrical

• Maps, diagrams and procedures to secure the flow or diversion of traffic in a safe nd or buildings and safety measures.

.

• Procedures for the notification of accidents and dangerous events such as falling of scaffoldings, excavations, etc and procedures for researching such events, including the

intaining of statistics.

• Facilities for the personal hygiene of personnel.

• Procedures for the information and training of all personnel in relation to the organization of site and program of works, the risks and the required safety measures, the part of the

storage, waste disposal, etc.

environmental issues that must be implemented.

• Criteria for the appointment of subcontractors and suppliers in order to se

• The competency of subcontrac

• The provision of all necessary information from the suppliers regtransportation and use of all materials.

• The use of suitable machinery and equimaintaining it throughout the whole period of construction works.

•

• Procedures for providing sufficient information to all stakeholders who mfrom the works.

• Procedures for the establishment of the necessary cooperation and co

safety with no risk on health.

• Procedures in cases that, during the corequired, including procedure for design work approval.

• Effective management of all tasks and activities involving safety andmanagement of these tasks shall include among others the following:

• Identification and written assessment of risks.

• Determination of safe procedures and methods odesign and calculations, temporary supports, assembly manuals, omaintenance manuals of all mechanical and other equipmentscaffoldings etc., permit to work certificates in confined areaconductors etc, and details of safety measures for risks which are impossible to avoid.

• Such activities are indicatively shown in the relevant regulation.

manner, access to private or public la

• Procedures in anticipation of emergencies, such as escape or action plans

ma



plan which must be familiar with their commitments and obligations as implied by the

nd involvement in issues related with the health

•

r the collection and entry of all data to the file relating to any alteration to the e work as this has

at work is being running in accordance with the provisions of

plus in the Contract.

e form of a matrix and shall include a total comprising gainst an agreed item of equipment/work/specification requirement.

ent status of the cification requirement.

by these Conditions in

ncluding arrival and departure date of supervisory staff).

issioning progress made during the month.

o plant and machinery.

ahead including

and actual).

3.6.2 Notification of Delay

In every case of delay or anticipated delay, from whatever cause, in fulfilment of the Contract by the Contractor, which is likely to postpone delivery or completion dates

ed in the Contract, the Contractor will notify the Purchaser in writing within seven days after Contractor becomes aware of the cause of the delay and the changed date of delivery. Such notification does not relieve the Contractor from his responsibilities and obligations.

legislation and any other relevant useful information.

• Procedures for employee consultations aand safety, such as organizing safety committees.

The establishment of rules governing the operation of the site addressed tocontractors/subcontractors/employees/visitors, suppliers.

• Procedures foplanned work, so that the file includes the right information describing thbeen constructed.

• Procedure for auditing thlegislation, the rules of the site and the plan.

3.6.1.5 Financial Report

A financial report comprising a summary sheet of invoicing/payments to datepayment status against a payment schedule of individual items as agreedThe payment schedule shall take thof specific sub-totals aThe payment schedule shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and once agreed shall be modified only in accordance with the current completion/paymequipment/work/spe

3.6.1.6 Site Report

A site report containing a summary of those details required addition to the following:

(a) Site Manpower forecasts and returns (i

(b) Plant and Machinery returns (including arrival and departure dates).

(c) Site Erection and Comm

(d) An accident report related to personnel injuries.

(e) A damage report related t

(f) A fully detailed schedule of works proposed for the following montherection, commissioning, etc.

(g) A schedule of equipment shipment and site arrival dates (anticipated

provid



3.6.3 Meetings

If during the execution of the Contract the Engineer considers the progress psection of the work to be unsatisfactory, he will be at liberty

osition of any to call such meetings, either at

Access to the Contractor’s and Sub-Contractor’s works is to be granted to the Engineer at

UCTIONS

rmation necessary to allow the purchaser:

quipment,

satisfactory conditions,

necessary in

t. It will not be sufficient to incorporate manufacturer's standard upplied and

, drawings and

into which items

(b) Drawings sufficient for the understanding of descriptions.

w sheets or single line and block diagrams, which explain the functioning and logic of the system. Where related systems are shown on composite diagrams, individual systems shall be identified by colour, or coding as agreed.

(d) Schedules which provide assembled references to items of a like kind, e.g. Valve Schedules, Piping Schedules, Operational Limit Schedule, etc.

his office, or at the Contractor’s works, as he deems to be necessary.

If required by the Engineer, a responsible representative from the Contractor’s works is to attend such meetings.

all reasonable times for the purpose of ascertaining progress.

3.7 INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE INSTR

3.7.1 Purpose

The purpose of the manual is to collect all info

• to understand the operation of the e

• to operate it under normal and accident conditions,

• to maintain it under

• to carry out all operations which may be necessary for the maintenance case of incident or accident.

3.7.2 Contents

The details are to cover the main plant and all associated ancillary equipment as supplied under the Contracbrochures as part of the text unless they refer particularly to the equipment sare free of extraneous matter.

The instruction manuals shall conform to the following format:

3.7.2.1 Index

The index system shall provide rapid and easy access to particular subjectsillustrations. It should include a master index and a sub-index to each main section of the manual.

3.7.2.2 Description

This section shall include basic data on the Plant:

(a) Descriptions of the Plant both for individual items and for the systemare assembled.

(c) Flo



(e) Data sheets, which assemble in a concise format relevant technicalitem or system. The purpose of a data sheet is to provide quick referencessential facts omittin

details of a plant e to the

g all reference to general descriptions operating or maintenance uctions.

tion drawings and systematic procedures for installation.

items and to systems under all patterns of normal and abnormal ration limits.

Maintenance

shall comprise the maintenance procedures for the items of the Plant and

disassembly ons.

e made, including the limits of fits and other tolerances.

e, where appropriate in particular where it concerns electronic

ient to illustrate the maintenance procedures, spares and special tools te exploded views and isometrics to give maximum

pment supplied should be provided in order to enable

ent size and ompletely

ary. Throw-clear levant sub-sections, and their locations

noted in the Section drawing index. Detailed engineering drawings necessary for

INCLUDED' being entered against them. Drawings are to be identified at the bottom right corner by title and number.

The name of the main Contractor, but not that of any Sub-Contractor, may also be inscribed upon the cover after the description of the Plant.

principles and instr

3.7.2.3 Installation

It shall include installa

3.7.2.4 Operation

This section shall include basic systematic instructions on how to operate the Plant both with regard to individual conditions. The instructions shall include reference to the applicable ope

3.7.2.5

This section shall include:

(a) The step-by-step procedures for maintenance including assembly andinstructi

(b) The checks to b

(c) A fault diagnosis guidequipment.

(d) The spares required.

(e) The special tools required.

(f) Drawings sufficincluding where appropriainstructional content. The necessary electronic circuit diagrams and component layout drawings for all electronic equifull testing and repair of such equipment.

(g) Lubricant schedule.

(h) Ball and roller bearing schedule.

3.7.3 Manual Presentation

Drawings and diagrams shall wherever practicable be reduced to a convenibound into the manual. The reduced size drawings and diagrams shall be clegible and suitable for reproduction. Drawings, which are referred to several times in the text, shall be either of the "throw clear" type or be repeated as necessdrawings are to be included at the back of the re

maintenance and mentioned in the text but not included in the manual because of size reduction difficulties, should nevertheless be listed in the drawing index, the words 'NOT



The name of the Purchaser and substation or other identification followed classification of the plant (e.g., 132 kV CIRCUIT BREAKER) is to be inscribspine of the cover and, if the instructio

by a ed upon the

ns are contained in several books, these are to be lume number.

g all plant o months before e Specification.

of transformer

uired by the o that the final

st three ts required by

one substation is tion, each set

bstation. If the complete text of ulti-volume form.

aintenance odification etc. of the works during the

quired. satisfaction

ontractor’s

quipment are r books of approximately A4 size and bound into durable

e title page to this document except that the references to Specification, Conditions of Contract,

tructions”.

r than six months before the

in chapter 3.4.

CKING OR PREPARATION OF MATERIAL FOR DISPATCH

The recommendations of BS 1133 Packaging Code are to be observed.

g shall be such that it affords adequate protection to the enclosed materials against mechanical damage during transport to its final destination, including any transition during shipment. All plant shall be packed suitable for open storage for up to three months following arrival in Cyprus, if required, taking into consideration high humidity and salty atmosphere.

marked with the appropriate vo

3.7.4 Manual Delivery Time

Copies of the draft composite maintenance and operating manuals coverinsupplied under the contract shall be submitted to the Engineer at least twthe earliest delivery of plant, in accordance with the general clauses of thWhere appropriate these shall be subdivided to cover each substation site. In case of power transformers, separate manuals shall be prepared for each sizeincluded in the Contract.

In the event that amendments or alterations to the draft manual are reqEngineer, the Contractor shall submit revisions for approval without delay sdocument can be supplied within the date specified.

Not later than the time of delivery of the Plant covered by the Contract at leacopies of the approved version of the instructions incorporating amendmenthe Engineer shall be delivered to the Purchaser. Where more than covered by the Contract, at least three sets shall be supplied for each substacovering all transformer types and sizes supplied for the suthe manual is too bulky then it should be sub-divided and produced in m

Should any changes/modifications be required to the operation and minstructions arising from operation, failure, repair, mMaintenance Guarantee period, the Contractor shall incorporate such changes/modifications into the operation and maintenance instructions as reIncorporation of such changes/modifications by the Contractor shall be to theand approval of the Engineer and is to be effected not later than the Capplication date for issue of the Final Taking Over Certificate.

A further three sets of manuals for each substation site and for each spare eto be reproduced as a book ocovers inscribed in permanent form upon the front generally in the form of th

Drawings, etc. will be replaced by “Operating and Maintenance Ins

The finished books are to be handed to the Engineer not latecompletion of the guarantee period.

The same manuals shall also be provided in electronic format as described

3.8 PA

Packin



A maximum amount of shop assembly consistent with export shipping requirements is

equirements stated below for non-

f type (i.e. metal sides and roof) ase the type of

n-container shipments packing shall be stout close-boarded wooden cases of ater-resistant

ate protection of overs not less

r bolted provided ends are adequately protected and the enclosing bands or wires are robust.

ing on the obtain

ipment within ent pallet type

ed to assist in loading and unloading.

s, must be elopes should

ture content plus

ms shall be so secured that they are not free

event relative ach bag contents.

additional ygroscopic.

s, adapted to king shall be ces, the

application of a protective coat; enclosure of the items in a hermetically sealed container, e inhibitor

ged by moisture, mould, insects or rodents. Items that include materials liable to be damaged by moisture

e packed in hermetically sealed containers in which some approved, non-harmful or toxic dehydrant, has been inserted.

Cases shall be marked both with large lettering to show which side up the case is to be, and, if the contents are fragile, marked "FRAGILE" in large letters and the international wineglass symbol. In the case of container shipments individual crates or equipment on pallets shall also indicate any special handling or movement requirements or weight

required in order to reduce field erection work.

Where shipment by container is intended the packing rcontainerised shipments shall apply for any part container loads.

Containers shall be of the fully enclosed weatherproounless the size of plant to be shipped necessitates otherwise in which ccontainer and method of shipping shall be subject to approval.

For noadequate thickness, suitably braced and banded and lined internally with wmaterial.

Certain types of outdoor equipment may be crated, provided that adequvulnerable parts is assured. All pipe flanges shall be fitted with wooden cthan 40mm larger in diameter than the flange. These shall be wired othat the

For full container shipments a degree of crating may still be required dependtype of equipment involved and the Contractor shall state his intentions and approval.

Adequate battens and braces shall be provided to prevent movement of equthe container. Where appropriate due to the weight or nature of the equipmbases shall be provid

Indoors electrical equipment, whether shipped in containers or packing caseenclosed in welded polythene envelopes inside the packing cases. The envbe sealed and have sufficient desiccant inside to absorb the initial moisan allowance for leakage.

When in cases or crates or containers, all iteto move and cannot work loose in transport. If rotating parts are shipped within their bearings or mountings they must be adequately braced and restrained to prmovement. Bags of loose items shall be placed in a supplementary case, ehaving stitched on to it a metal label indicating the number and nature of itsWhere a filler material is used in a case to restrict movement or provide protection it must be inorganic and non-h

All surfaces liable to corrosion shall be thoroughly cleaned and special stepthe nature of the materials and the time interval between packing and unpactaken to prevent corrosion. These steps may constitute the greasing of surfa

consisting of paper, cellophane, plastic or zinc; the addition of vapour phaspaper to the package; or other approved means.

Steps shall be taken to ensure that insulated materials cannot be dama

shall b



limitations. Packages shall be marked with their place of destination in surough handling or the effect of weather cannot remove or obliterate the maseparate package shall be marked with the gross weight and for all lifts ovemarks on the case

ch a way that rking. Each r two tons

s or equipment shall show where the weight is bearing and the correct

aced any side ndle the case

ave to be slung in nveniently be annot be e crated

apable of being attached direct to

ring transport. torn off or

handed in ging, and the

d that they are not rendered ineffective by shrinkage of the wood.

markings to nguish the

d list shall be prepared of the contents of each packing case

or container ings showing

inside the case or

riptive metal tabs , shall be applied in two

to any erection of

ries or materials not included in the main shipment as a result of an gence of the Contractor, shall, unless otherwise agreed by the

shipped by air mail or air freight on the Contractor's expense.

hanical shock indicators shall be fitted on each of the following cate how the specific equipment was handled during transit and to

determine if detailed inspection is required at site:

• GIS Panels

Breakers

• Surge Arresters

• Outdoor Current and Voltage Transformers

• 22 kV Switchgear Panels

positions for the slings.

The cases shall, whenever possible, be so packed that they can safely be pluppermost and no reliance shall be placed on the ability of those who will hato read written instructions or to understand pictorial ones. Cases that ha certain way shall, as far as possible, be so constructed that they cannot coslung in any other way and packages shall preferably be so large that they ceasily rolled over or thrown about; thus when practicable small cases shall btogether to form one larger unit. Crates shall be sufficiently strong to be cslung from the outside even when provision is also made for slings to bea major article inside. Special steps shall be taken to guard against theft du No small items, such as padlocks, nameplates and so forth, which could be unscrewed, shall be accessible. Cases, crates, barrels and drums shall besuch a manner as to obstruct the theft of any of the timber used for packabands shall be so secure

The materials for each substation should be packed separately and suitable the approval of the Engineer shall be made on all cases, crating etc. to distimaterials for each substation.

A descriptive and fully itemizeor container. A copy of this list shall be placed in a waterproof envelope under a metal or other suitable plate securely fastened to the outside of one end of the caseand its position adequately indicated by stencilling. Where appropriate drawthe erection marking instructions of the items concerned shall be placed with the equipment in the container.

All stencilled markings on cases and crates, or other markings on descfixed to cable drums, bundles of structural steelwork and so forthplaces with a material which cannot wash off and shall be additional other marks or impressions which may be specified elsewhere.

Components accessooversight or the negliPurchaser, be

During transit mecequipment to indi

• Power Transformers

• Circuit



3.9 CABLE DRUMS AND CABLE SEALING

Cable shall be supplied on strong non-returnable drums arranged to take aof a section adequate to support the loaded cable drum during installation aThe drum shall be lagged with strong closely fitting battens, which shall be to prevent damage to the cable. Wooden drums shall be constructed of seato prevent shrinkage of drums during shipment and subsequent storage on drum shall be clearly marked in a manner which cannot be obliterated wit

round spindle nd handling.

securely fixed soned timber

Site. Each h the particulars

of protective ction for rolling.

he Contractor responsible to transfer to the Purchaser’s Stores, as will be advised by the

other drums or tor at his own

sheathed cables shall be suitably sealed to prevent the ingress e cable left projecting from the drum shall at all times be

bers and/or roved drawings and material lists or shipping

documents. All erection marks shall be legible and clearly visible, where relevant erection ore galvanizing.

approved code is to be employed to identify members of similar

nder his own responsibility and supervision

tion and n about

prevailing ridges. The

related therewith.

The Contractor shall use every reasonable means and care to prevent any of the highways or bridges on the route to Site from being damaged or injured by any traffic of

ntractor or any of his Sub-Contractors and in particular select, choose and use vehicles and restrict and distribute loads so that any such extraordinary traffic that will inevitably arise from moving of Contractor’s equipment and material from and to the Site shall be limited as far as reasonably possible and so that no damage or injury may be occasioned to such highway and bridges.

of the cable including voltage, length, conductor size, number of cores, type covering, section number, gross and net weights, together with the dire

Empty drums shall remain the property of the Purchaser if he so chooses. Tshall bePurchaser, of all empty drums that the Purchaser will decide to retain. Anyother leftover packing materials will be removed from the site by the Contracexpenses.

The ends of lead sheathed cables shall be sealed by plumbing a cap or disc on the lead sheath. The ends of PVC of moisture. The end of thsecurely protected against damage.

3.10 ERECTION MARKS

All plant requiring erection at site shall be marked with distinguishing numletters corresponding to those on the app

Marks shall be stamped bef

Colour banding to anshape or type but of differing strengths of grades.

3.11 TRANSPORT TO SITE

3.11.1 General

The Contractor shall arrange and carry out uthe local transport from the port of destination to the Site.

The Contractor shall, at his own convenience, gather all necessary informaarrange for all necessary provisions in order to obtain accurate informatiounloading at the port of destination and inland transport facilities as well asconditions, particularly the safe load bearing capacity of highways and bContractor shall bear all expenses

the Co



If during the carrying out of the work or at any time thereafter the Contclaim arising out of the execution of the Works in respect of damage or injurhighways or bridges, he shall immediately report the same to the Engineer ahe shall make the settlement of any payment of all sums due in respect of suin respect of all claims, demands, proceedings, damages, costs, charges and expenses in

ractor receives any y to the nd thereafter ch claim and

ntractor, who for these ll necessary equipment.

er each individual at job site shall

e Contractor mediately submit a damage report, countersigned by the Engineer to the

ed in Marine tered/appointed

iately notify the relevant manufacturer(s). He shall also immediately notify the Engineer of the actions he will be

rtaking in order to repair or replace the damaged part(s) and of the . Any repairs .

ecautionary measures, which

issioned.

injure galvanized or other specially treated surfaces during erection and also to prevent or remove any rust streaks or foreign matter deposited

orage or transport or after erection.

e with the EAC result in

personnel being dismissed from the site.

dance with EN t least 10 years

The Tenderer is to submit with his offer details of painting and finishing covering the

Before painting or filling with oil, gas, or compound, all non galvanized parts including tanks and accessories, shall be thoroughly cleaned free from rust, scale, burrs, sharp corners, grease and moisture by shot blasting, pickling and rinsing or other approved process. Any protective coatings are to be applied after tests have been carried out.

relation thereto without any obligation to the Purchaser.

The unloading and storage at Site shall be carried out by the Copurposes shall make all necessary provisions and arrange for a

3.11.2 Receiving of Equipment & Issuing of Damage Reports

The Contractor shall submit receiving reports to the Engineer to covshipment received and checked at the jot site. Each shipment on arrival be unloaded, opened and carefully checked for any damage in transit and thshall imInsurance Company with copy to the Engineer, where damage has occurrTransportation. A copy of the damage report shall also be sent to the regissurveyor.

In all cases of irreparable damages, the Contractor shall immed

initiating and undeconsequences this damage will have on the completion date of the Worksproposed by the Contractor will be subject to the approval of the Engineer

3.12 ERECTION

The Maintenance Instructions shall include any special prmust be taken during erection or subsequent maintenance. These special precautions must be strictly observed when the equipment is installed, tested and comm

Special care shall be taken not to

on galvanized surfaces during st

In operational substations all work shall be carried out strictly in accordancPermit to Work system. Failure of personnel to adhere to this system may

3.13 CLEANING AND PAINTING

All iron and steel structures shall be protected against corrosion in accorISO 12944 and EN ISO 14713 and shall withstand the environment for awithout maintenance.

extent of surface treatment required on items in works and prior to dispatch.



Pickling shall be preceded by suitable solvent or alkaline cleaning for remoof oil, grease etc., where necessary. The finishe

val of deposits d surface shall be in a suitable condition

lic test and readily accessible for drying out are on completion of tests at the manufacturer's

shing coats on

e the same

rotective during shipment to Site. After erection these parts

.

r making good minor

The colour and shade of all painted external surfaces shall be to BS 381C colour, 631 hite.

tly finished

y Contractor

DISCS

us position, a late of material that cannot be corroded upon which is to be engraved any

diagram be required by the Engineer. Where labels are provided for making clear

grammatic nt labels shall be fitted in appropriate

ess otherwise

Equipment rating plates and serial numbers shall be located in a conspicuous and easily readable position.

All switchgear shall be clearly and permanently identified with circuit designation, front and rear, number plates, and phase discs of appropriate colours.

Labels, number plates and their fixing screws for outdoor use shall be of stainless steel or other corrosion resistant material. Where the use of vitreous enamelled labels is

to provide good adhesion properties to the primary coat.

Pipes, valves and other similar parts of the Plant which are subject to hydrauare notworks to be drained out by washing with an approved de-watering oil prior to protection for shipment.

All surfaces shall be prepared for coating in accordance with BS 2569.

All paint is to have appropriate standard finish, requiring at least two finiprepared surfaces properly filled in to provide a smooth finish. The insides of control cubicles, cabinets etc., where condensation is liable to occur are to receivnumber of coats.

All bright metal parts are to be covered before shipment with an approved pcompound and protected adequately are to be cleaned with correct solvent and polished bright where required

The Contractor shall provide an adequate supply of touch-up paint fodamages, which may occur during transport.

Light Grey or similar. All internal surfaces, which require painting, shall be w

Instrument, relay and ancillary panel mounted equipment shall be consistenand details submitted for approval by the Engineer.

The SF6 pipes shall be painted yellow but all pipes associated with one gas zone shall be separately identified with an individual colour band every 300 mm.

Colours of equipment other than above and all shades are to be proposed band agreed with the Engineer.

3.14 LABELS, NUMBER PLATES, AND PHASE IDENTIFICATION

Each main and auxiliary item of plant is to have attached to it in a conspicuorating pidentifying name, type or serial number, together with details of loading conditions under which the item of Plant in question has been designed to operate, and suchplates as maythe method of operation of apparatus they shall be concise and preferably diain form. Danger labels and fire protection equipmeplaces. All labels shall be submitted for approval and shall be in English unlspecified.



approved, the whole surface including the back and edges shall be properly covered and

be pictorial if and number plates shall have black lettering

on a white background.

el Size (mm Lettering (mm)

protective washers shall be provided front and back on the fixing screws.

Danger notices shall have red lettering on a white background or they mayapproved by the Engineer. All other labels

Equipment Lab )

Main labels on panels, cubicles, kiosks, similar

t

125X50 20X1,5 junction and control boxes and equipmen

Control and changeover switches and 70X30 12X1,5 similar items

Fuses and links 35X15 5X1

Relays and contactors 60X20 5X1

3.15 LOCKS

switches, screened enclosures, and other equipment shall be supplied under this

voltag ontrol and

ey removable al position only)

Padlocks or other approved locking devices for circuit breakers, isolating devices, control

Contract.

On electrical plant at allprotection panels shall be locked as follows:

e levels switches on the local and remote c

• Control Switches: Cylinder or fixed interference lock (kin neutr

• Discrepancy Switch: Fixed interference lock (key removablposition only)

e in neutral

• Control Selector Switch: Cylinder or fixed interference lock (key removable in each position)

Where locks are called for under this Specification, these shall be of anlatch type or padlocks as appropriate. Three keys

approved dead shall be supplied for each lock and all

group master key shall be supplied in addition.

Keys and locks shall be impressed with the manufacturer's serial number.

dlocks and keys shall be engraved with an agreed identifying code or inscription.

3.16 TROPICALIZATION

In choosing materials and their finishes, due regard is to be given to the humid conditions under which equipment is to work. Some relaxation of the following provisions may be

locks and keys shall be non-interchangeable.

Where a set of locks is provided under any particular section of the Plant, a

All locks and padlocks shall be of brass and where they are fitted to switchboards or similar cubicles shall have the visible parts chromium plated.

The pa



permitted where equipment is hermetically sealed but it is preferred that tropical grade used wherever possible.

. Indoor parts may otective finish.

l) of all instruments and electrical nets and the metal parts of relays and mechanisms

lays wherever n plating is not

le owing to tolerance limitations, are to be of corrosion-resisting steel. Instrument forming part of a magnetic circuit) are to be of brass or bronze.

3.16.3 Rubbers

to ISO Metric ermitted for

nance. Where the Contract

uts and bolts.

holes they occupy, are to have the ing and are to be

ngs and

to be included under this Contract, including locking devices and Engineer.

the surface of the nuts.

RIVETS

Rivets are to conform to the appropriate British Standard and for general use pan heads are preferred. Rivets on bearing surfaces are to be flat counter-sunk, driven flush. Whenever practicable, riveting is to be done by hydraulic tools and rivets must completely fill the holes when closed. If loose, or if the heads are badly formed, cracked or eccentric

materials should be

3.16.1 Metals

Iron and steel are generally to be painted or galvanized as appropriatealternatively have chromium or copper-nickel plating or other approved prSmall iron and steel parts (other than rustless steeequipment, the cores of electromagare to be treated in an approved manner to prevent rusting.

3.16.2 Screws, Nuts, Springs, etc

The use of iron and steel is to be avoided in instruments and electrical repossible. Steel screws are to be zinc, cadmium or chromium plated, or whepossibscrews (except thoseSprings are to be of non-rusting material, e.g., phosphor bronze or nickel silver, as far as possible.

Neoprene and similar synthetic compounds, not subject to deterioration due to the climatic conditions, are to be used for gaskets, sealing rings, diaphragms, etc.

3.17 NUTS, BOLTS, STUDS, AND WASHERS

Nuts and bolts for incorporation in the plant are preferably to conformCoarse to BS 3643, BS 3692 and BS 4190. Other sizes or threads are pthreaded parts not to be disturbed in normal use or mainteincludes nuts and bolts of different standards, then the tools to be provided in accordance with this Specification are to include spanners, taps and dies for these n

Fitted bolts are to be a driving fit in the reamedscrewed portion of a diameter such that it will not be damaged in drivmarked in a conspicuous position to ensure correct assembly at Site.

On outdoor equipment all bolts, nuts and washers shall be of non-corroding materials where they are in contact with non-ferrous parts in conductor clamps and fittielsewhere where specifically required by the Engineer.

All washers areanti-vibration arrangements, which are to be subject to the approval of the Taper washers are to be fitted where necessary.

Where there is risk of corrosion, bolts and studs are to be finished flush with

3.18



to the shank or do not bear truly on the plate or bar, such rivets are to be cut out and replaced. All surfaces to be riveted must be in close contact throughout.

the maker's works by the Engineer and by a representative of the Contractor during forging and heat treatment and are to be

atest methods for the detection of defects.

tion of the

ant for those

n or which is subject to impact stresses. This clause is not intended to f suitable grades of cast-iron for parts where service experience has

3.21 WELDING

elding operators ith the requirements of the appropriate section of BS

able time h the progress

t in accordance with the relevant International or other ngineer, non-destructive examination of the

then the he resulting

the Engineer.

ified and all punching, cutting, drilling, screw tapping and the removal of burns is to be completed

98% of

alternative process is to be used without the approval of the Engineer. Bolts are to be etely galvanized including the threads, but the threads are to be left uncoated in the

case of nuts.

The zinc coating is to be uniform, clean, smooth and as free from spangle as possible.

Unless otherwise specified the average thickness of zinc coating for iron and steel articles shall be in accordance with EN 729 and that for steel wires to EN 10244. The Engineer

3.19 FORGINGS

All important forgings are to be jointly examined at

examined by the l

3.20 CASTINGS

All castings are to be as free from blowholes, flaws and cracks as is practicable. No welding, filling or plugging of defective parts is to be done without the sancEngineer and then only with his approval in writing.

All cast-iron is to be of close-grained quality and is to be corrosion-resistparts in contact with seawater. Cast-iron is not to be used for any part of the equipment which is in tensioprohibit the use oshown it to be satisfactory.

Where fabrication welds are liable to be highly stressed, the welders or wshall be qualified in accordance w4872 Part 1, or other relevant International Standard Specification.

The Engineer reserves the right to visit the Contractor's Works at any reasonduring the fabrication of the items of Plant and to familiarize himself witmade and the quality of the work to date.

All tests are to be carried ouapproved Standards. Where required by the Efinished weld is to be made. If the examinations be by radiograph means,recommendations of EN 1435 where applicable are to be followed and tnegatives are to be made available to

3.22 GALVANIZED WORK

All materials to be galvanized are to be of the full dimensions shown or spec

before the galvanizing process commences.

All galvanizing is to be done by the hot dip process with spelter, not less thanwhich must be pure zinc and in accordance with EN 729 or EN 10244 as applicable. No

compl



may select for test as many components to be weighed after pickling and before and after

from injury to the zinc coating due to abrasion e and erection.

ES

nternal surface of all pipelines is mmission.

umulations of ite welding before erection.

of all pipe work after erection by blowing through to atmosphere to ctor is to provide all

cylindrical al, shall be

stresses and strain involved in the

he pipes in an approved manner - alternatively cast steel s bends or

the same as that of the of attachment of

l be provided r will be

s in the direction of the flow

drainage on all pipe work. Isolating valves, complete with padlocks and hose connections, shall be provided at the take off points of all such drains.

l care shall be taken to ensure that no permanent stresses are set up in any pipeline or items of connected plant when closing lengths are jointed.

Except where otherwise specified all piping shall have full penetration butt welded connections with a minimum number of flanged joints necessary for maintenance.

galvanizing as he may think fit.

All galvanized parts are to be protectedduring periods of transit, storag

3.23 PIPE WORK AND VALV

3.23.1 Internal Cleaning of Pipes

The Contractor is to be responsible for ensuring that the ithoroughly clean both during erection and before the pipeline is placed in co

The procedure adopted by the Contractor is to include the following:

(a) Thorough cleaning of all internal surfaces prior to erection to remove accdirt, rust, scale, etc., and welding slag due to s

(b) Thorough cleaningensure that no extraneous matter is left in the system. The Contranecessary facilities for carrying out these requirements.

3.23.2 Pipe Work

All pipe work shall be designed for the appropriate conditions and shall comply with requirements of the latest Standard. All pipes, bends, and tees shall be trulyand uniform in section. The pipes shall be of appropriate approved materiseamless and shall be suitable to withstand theoperation of the Plant.

Branches shall be welded onto ttees may be provided subject to the approval of the Engineer. Cast steel teefittings shall be of similar analysis to the adjoining pipes.

Care shall be taken that the internal diameter of all castings ispipes to which they are joined. Castings without ample fillets at the pointsflanges and branches will be rejected.

All pipes shall be adequately anchored and expansion loops and bends shalwhere required and shall preferably be arranged horizontally. The Contractoresponsible for the design and positioning of all provisions for expansion.

All piping systems shall be arranged to allow adequate fallexcept where otherwise approved by the Engineer.

Adequate provision shall be made for air release, pressure relief, and

Specia



All terminal points and at points where castings adjoin and where, in the oEngineer, it is

pinion of the undesirable to use a butt-welded joint, a flanged joint of approved design

n adequate t maintenance.

ed directly on the pipes but shall be secured to a wall or

re to be supported ructural steelwork,

out any .

pported from another pipe.

d by a support is

f a similar changeable with one another. Valves shall have

when in full he gate. The

at the ends adjacent to the pipe work shall be similar to the

he screwed all not pass through or into the stuffing box. Where valves are

s, which shall

e clearly marked he direction of

ore shall have indicators to show readily whether the valves are open or shut. In the case of valves with extended spindles, indicators shall be fitted to

e valve spindle and the operating pedestal.

Each valve handwheel shall have fitted firmly in position on top of the handwheel, a permanent stainless steel nameplate with inscribed lettering to indicate the system with which the valve is associated and an identification number corresponding to the number allocated to the valve on the system flow diagram. The identification system shall be to the approval of the Engineer.

shall be provided.

Pipes and attachments shall be properly aligned and jigged prior to welding. If tack welds are used the tacks shall be fused into the first runs of weld deposited.

All flanged joints and bolting materials shall be liberally smeared with agraphite solution during erection and/or assembly to assist subsequen

Gauges shall not be mountstructure which is free from vibration.

3.23.3 Pipe Supports

The whole of the pipe work and accessories included in this Contract aand mounted in an approved manner. All necessary slings, saddles, stfoundation bolts, fixing bolts and all other attachments are to be supplied.

Supports shall be arranged so that any valve or fitting can be withdrawn withadditional support being required and without disturbing the rest of the plant

No pipe shall be su

The number and positions of all supports and the maximum weight carrieto be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

3.23.4 Valves

All valves shall be of approved design and manufacture. Where valves are omake, size and type they shall be interbolted connections. Light pattern valves are not acceptable for any service.

All valves shall be of the full way gate type unless otherwise specified andopen position, the bore of the valve shall not be obstructed by any part of tinternal diameter of all valvesinternal diameter of the connecting pipe work.

All valves over 50 mm nominal bore shall have outside screwed spindles, tthread on the spindle shexposed to the weather, protective covers shall be provided for the spindlebe to the approval of the Engineer.

All valves shall be closed by rotating the handwheel in a clockwise direction when looking at the face of the handwheel. The face of each valve handwheel shall bwith the words "OPEN" and "SHUT" and with arrows adjacent to indicate trotation to which each refers.

All valves over 50 mm b

both th



Valves shall be installed with their spindles above or at the horizontal positshall be e

ion, no valves rected in the inverted position. Hand operated valves shall be easily operable

osition hand

d loss through le access

with an arrow to indicate the correct flow

Valves which it will be necessary to lock in the open or closed position are to be provided ment by locking pins which shall be of an anti-rattle

design so as not to add to noise emission. Such locking pins shall incorporate 8mm holes

MPOUND FILLED CHAMBERS

hich have to be ers are oil-tight.

Defective welded joints are not to be caulked but may be re-welded subject to the written

ll oil or e trapping of

air or gases during the filling process.

rature of any chamber, which is to be compound filled, to be

ing insulation

S

he indicators re to be

els and are to be easily dismantled for cleaning. In addition, the normal filling level of all removable

ners is to be marked on the inside.

3.26 THERMOMETER POCKETS

Thermometer pockets and instrument connections of an approved pattern are to be fitted in such positions as may be determined to suit the operation and testing of the plant to the approval of the Engineer. A thermometer pocket is to be fitted adjacent to each point of

by one man.

Adequate means of easy lubrication shall be provided for all valves and operating extension components.

Cast iron shall not be used in the manufacture of any valves. Plastic or compwheels will not be accepted.

All non-return valves shall be of an approved type and manufacture and heathe valves shall be to approval. The bodies shall be provided with removabcovers to enable the internal parts to be examined or renewed without removing the valve from the pipeline. The bodies shall be stampeddirection.

Non-return valves shall not be fitted in vertical pipe runs.

with a non-detachable locking arrange

for padlocks.

Filter valves shall be fitted with locking plates.

3.24 OIL OR CO

All joints of fabricated oil or compound filled chambers, other than those, wbroken, are to be welded and care is to be taken to ensure that the chamb

approval of the Engineer.

Suitable provision is to be made for the expansion of the filling medium in acompound filled chambers and the chambers are to be designed to avoid th

Design shall permit the temperaised such that the compound does not solidify during the filling process.

All wiring in the vicinity of oil-filled chambers is to be insulated with oil-resistof approved quality.

3.25 OIL LEVEL INDICATOR

Oil level indicators of approved design are to be fitted to all oil containers. Tare to show the level at all temperatures likely to be experienced in service, amarked with the normal level at 20oC clearly visible from normal access lev

contai



connection for distant remote temperature indication unless specifically statecontrary. Wh

d to the ere necessary, the pocket is to be of approved alloy material suitable for the

to comply with the requirements of BS 2765.

The chromium plating of those components of the Plant where specified and where o comply with the requirements of EN 12540.

mediately adjacent to each gauge ch point of

panels, the

tween the situation of the gauge and the point at e in the dial

g and the dial must be marked with the amount of compensation applied. Where

e to be clearly identified by means of labels of approved type and

.

at forms or run in er of wires in any

eed 20 and the duct-filling ratio shall not exceed 75%. The not um number in

all be of the strapping shall be used for bunched wires. Wiring

bicles and the wires for each circuit shall be separately grouped. Back of panel wiring shall be so

ed that access to the connecting stems of relays and other apparatus and to contacts of control and other switches is not impeded. Where provision is made for addition of equipment not required initially, means shall be adopted for supporting and termination wiring during the interim period.

Except where terminals are approved by the Engineer for use with bare conductors, crimped plated connectors of approved type are to be used to terminate all small wiring.

required service.

All thermometer pockets are

3.27 CHROMIUM PLATING

offered by the Contractor is t

3.28 PRESSURE GAUGES

Pressure gauges are to comply with the requirements of EN 837.

All pressure gauges are to be fitted with stopcocks imand all pressure gauge piping is to be fitted with an isolating valve at eaconnection to the main system. Where pressure gauges are mounted onstopcocks are to be suitable for the connection of a test gauge.

Where a difference in level exists bewhich pressure is to be measured, appropriate compensation is to be madreadinthe compensation would amount to two percent or less of the total movement indicated under normal conditions, it may be ignored.

All pressure gauges arlettering.

All pressure gauge piping is to be of corrosion resistant steel or copper tube

3.29 SMALL WIRING

3.29.1 General

All wiring shall be neatly run and securely fixed in cleats, bunched in neapproved wiring troughs or tubes not susceptible to corrosion. The numbone bunch or tube shall not excpractice of doubling back wires on themselves in a trough to absorb slack isacceptable. Where bunched or handled wires are run in troughs the maximeach bunch or bundle shall be retained at 20.

Cleats shall be of moulded or metal-reinforced insulating material and shlimited compression type. Insulatedtroughs shall be of insulating material.

Wherever practicable, wiring shall be accommodated on the sides of the cu

arrang



All wiring shall have insulation incapable of supporting combustion. Cores shall be multi-

selected with due regard to thermal requirements,

t purposes.

, as nt to

2)

maintenance. Flexible conductors of smaller sizes shall only be employed with written approval.

For new switchboards the coloured wiring shall comply with the following code:

olour of Wire s

stranded.

The size of wiring cores shall bevoltage drop and mechanical strength.

Particular attention is to be paid to fatigue failure of cores due to flexing or vibration including damage at terminations, which require disconnection for tes

All panel wiring is to comply with the requirements of BS 6231, Type A or Bappropriate. Conductors are to be copper and have a cross section equivale30/0,25mm (1,5mm2), 50/0,25mm (2,5mm2), 7/0,67mm (2,5mm2) or 1/1,78mm (2,5mmbut single stranded conductors should only be employed for rigid connections which are not subject to movement or vibration during shipment, operation or

C Circuit Particular

• Brown (L1) / Black (L2)Grey (L3)

, when directly connected to the primary ary circuits of

/ First, second and third phase connections, respectivelycircuit or connected to the secondcurrent and voltage transformers.

• Green or Green/Yellow Connections to earth

• Blue connected to the secondary circuit ofvoltage transformers. AC connections

AC neutral connections, earthed or unearthed, current and

other than those above and connections in AC/DC circuits.

• Brown (L+) / Grey (L-) Connections in DC circuits.

Alternatively, where equipment is wired in accordance with a manufacturer'swiring ma

standard, y be carried out in a single colour except that all connections to earth shall be

iring, the existing

tails.

system for approval by the

ire shall have a letter to denote its function, e.g. control of circuit breaker, current transformer for primary protection, voltage for instruments, metering and protection. A number identifying the individual wire shall follow the function letter. Every branch of any connection shall bear the same identification mark. At points of interconnection where a change of numbering cannot be avoided double ferrules are to be provided. Where it is necessary to identify branches, which are commoned (e.g., current transformer leads), different identification marks for the branches may be employed only if they are

green or green/yellow.

If extensions are involved to existing plant which has already coloured wwire colouring scheme shall be retained.

Wiring diagrams must indicate wire colours and are to be drawn as viewed from the back of the panel.

Numbered ferrules shall be fitted to internal wiring and to all multi-core cable

Ferrule numbering shall be in accordance with the established numbering existing substations. For new substations the Contractor shall submit for Engineer of a standard system of numbering for small wiring.

Each w



commoned through links, or are connected to separate terminals which are then

Unused cores in multicore cables shall be ferruled U1, U2, etc. at both ends and

l be of white insulating material with glossy finish to minimize adhesion of rmanently

cable or be

ing switches, r and marked

shall be taken to terminal boards and wires shall not be teed or jointed between

or water cannot hem.

e able to resist tic due to

ustion area when the flame is

be connected by st earth bar.

f transformers, for example, between Buchholz relay, thermal point terminal boxes and the marshalling box, shall be

ation at temperatures up to and including 105 oC. Heat

iosk through the

Screw type terminals shall utilize a pressure plate arrangement; single point screw terminations will not be accepted. The size of screws for screw clamps is not restricted

ed that the screws are captive; otherwise they shall comply with the requirements for bolt and stud terminals. Not more than two wires shall be connected to any one terminal. Insulating barriers shall be provided between adjacent pairs of terminals. The height of the barriers and the spacing of the terminals shall be such as to give adequate protection while allowing easy access to terminals.

commoned by removable connections.

Numbering shall read from the terminals outwards on all wires.

connected to individual spare terminals.

Ferrules shaldirt. They shall not be affected by damp or oil and shall be clearly and pemarked in black.

The ferrules shall be of sleeve type so fitted that they cannot slip along the removed from the cable without re-terminating.

The ferrules on all wiring directly connected to circuit breaker trip coils, trippetc., are to be of a colour, preferably red, different from that of the remainde"Trip" or "T" in white.

All wiringterminal points.

Electrical wiring and instruments are to be so located that leakage of oil affect t

Where plastic material is used for ducting etc. it shall be tough and shall bshock tests for reinforced enclosure equipment. Inflammation of the plasexposure to flame shall not propagate beyond the combremoved.

All metallic cases of instruments, control switches, relays, etc., are to means of copper conductors of not less than 2,5 mm2 section to the neareThese conductors may be bare or have insulation coloured green.

3.29.2 External Wiring

Control and indication cables erected on the surface o

suitable for continuous operresisting grade PVC is approved for this purpose but the use of mineral insulated cables is not permitted. The wiring shall enter the bottom compartment of the kgland plate in such a manner that the rear is kept clear for access.

External wiring shall have a minimum cross section of 2,5 mm2.

3.30 TERMINAL BOARDS

provid



Terminations shall be grouped according to function and labels shall be provided to show

ections to terminals shall be made using pre insulated reinforced crimped-end

former Tripping circuits shall be of the slide-type terminal to

conductors with

nclosed access to pacing of

ards is to be not less than 100 mm and the bottom of each board is to ove the incoming cable gland plate. Separate terminations

and outgoing cables

nt ashers.

n type SAK6 or the Phoenix type UK10 or ermination is rminal entries

. Tapped holes are el, stainless

4.

nting collectively d number of

catalogues are to be supplied with the offer. If requested by the Purchaser samples of

For voltages in excess of 125 V, circuit terminals are to be segregated from other non-flammable plastic covers to prevent contact with

d thereon in

metal is to

3.31 ELECTRICAL INSULATION

ulating materials are to be suitably finished so as to prevent deterioration of their qualities under the specified working conditions.

Plastics, elastomers, resin-bonded laminates and inorganic materials are to be of suitable quality selected from the grades or types in the appropriate British Standard.

the group function.

Connpieces.

Terminals of Voltage and Current Transtest/disconnect type and shall have facility for inserting banana type testingboth the incoming and to the outgoing terminal.

Connections to relays shall be made using screwed lugs clamped to thean insulating sleeve.

All terminal boards are to be mounted in accessible positions and, when in ecubicles, are preferably to be inclined towards the rear doors to give easyterminations and to enable ferrule numbers to be read without difficulty. Sadjacent terminal bobe not less than 200 mm abare to be provided on each terminal strip for the cores of incomingincluding all spare cores.

Acceptable types of terminals are:

(a) Screw or stud type used with crimped ring type termination for high curreconnections. All studs are to be provided with nuts, washers and lock w

(b) Insertion clamp type such as the Klipposimilar equivalent to the approval of the Engineer, whereby the crimped tclamped between plates by a screw having a suitable locking device. Teare to be shrouded such that no current carrying metal is exposedto have not less than three full threads. Screws are to be of plated stesteel or phosphor bronze and size M3 and M

Terminal assemblies are preferably to be of the unit form suitable for mouon a standard assembly rail, secured from the front and giving the requireways plus at least ten percent extra terminals as spares. Relevant manufacturer's

terminals are to be provided for inspection and approval.

terminals and are to be fitted with any live parts. They are to have warning labels, with red lettering, mounteconspicuous position.

All connections are to be made at the front of the terminal boards and no livebe exposed at the back.

All ins



3.32 EARTHING CONNECTIONS

All necessary studs, connectors and earth bars are to be provided to permconnection of each switchboard, motor or other electrical equipment suppliContract to the substation general earthing system. The provisions for ea

it the ed under the

rthing are to be such that no reliance is to be placed on the conductivity of metal-to-metal joints without

ss than 85 t the bars of

ints shall be tinned.

to the main of not less than 85 mm2.

connected to

Current transformer and voltage transformer secondary circuits shall be complete in them point only, through links situated in an accessible position. e earthed through a separate link, suitably labelled. The links

g test leads.

3.33 ELECTRIC MOTORS

nless e specified shall have cooling type ICO1 suitable for continuous operation and

at site. Main with Class B of

quency ithout injurious

ency without nstrate that

A miniature circuit breaker or fuses with thermal overcurrent protection shall protect each

ad current.

lls or rollers is not

Vertical shaft motors are to have approved thrust bearings.

ds of motor windings are to be brought out to terminal boxes and the arrangement is to be such as to permit easy changing over of any two-phase leads.

All terminals are to be of the stud type of adequate size for the particular duty, marked in accordance with EN 60034 and to be enclosed in a weatherproof box, which is to be securely fixed to the motor frame.

the use of special connectors.

All control or relay panels shall be provided with a copper earth bar of not lemm2 cross-section run along the bottom of the panels and arranged so thaadjacent panels can be joined together to form a common bus. All jo

The common earthing busbar of control and relay panels shall be connectedstation earthing system via a copper earthing connection

Metal cases of instruments and metal bases of relays on the panels shall bethis bar by conductors of a sectional area of not less than 2,5 mm2.

and shall be earthed at oneEach separate circuit shall bshall be of the bolted type; having M6 nuts and provision for attachin

All motors are to be in accordance with BS 5000, Part II or EN 60034 and, uotherwisdirect on-line starting.

They are to be suitable in all respects for service under the conditions conductor and slot insulation is to be non-hygroscopic and in accordanceIEC 60085.

Motors are to be capable of operating continuously at rated output at any frebetween 48 and 51 cycles per second and at 85% of the nominal voltage woverheating. Motors are to be designed to operate for a period of not less than five minutes at a voltage of 25% below the nominal value and at normal frequinjurious overheating. If required by the Engineer, the Contractor is to demothe motors comply with this requirement.

motor.

The starting current at full voltage is not to exceed six times the rated full lo

Motor bearings are to be of the rolling type and the cage locating the bato be in contact with the races. All bearings are to be fitted with oil or grease lubricators.

The en



All terminal boxes are to be fitted with an approved sealing chamber, conadapto

duit entry or r plate, as required, together with the necessary fittings to suit the type of cable

The material hall have a flat surface for an area of 30 mm diameter. For motors

ection shal

• Motors up to 1 kW: fuses, thermal or magnetic overload

supplied.

Motors shall be provided with a 9 mm diameter earthing stud and lock nuts. surrounding the stud sbelow 1 kW a 6 mm diameter earthing stud may be fitted. Holding down bolts shall not be used for earthing purposes.

The following prot l be provided:

• Motors more than 1 kW: fuses, thermal overload, single-phasing protection

3.34 CONTROL SWITCHES AND PUSHBUTTONS

eakers are to be of pistol grip or, where wise when closing

e designed to proved,

ppropriate

d by independent ct springs alone for restoring not being acceptable.

materials,

buttons are to be strong and to have a positive

rements of this dition to clear indication as to the direction of each operation, for

", etc.

cally controlled from a number of different control points as

3.34.2.1 Local Control

operation.

3.34.2.2 Remote Control

Located at a substation control room where specified items of Plant are monitored and controlled by direct cable connection.

Control switches and pushbuttons shall comply with EN 60947.

3.34.1 General

Control switches for electrically operated circuit-brspecified, of approved discrepancy type and arranged to operate clockthe circuit-breakers and anti-clockwise when opening them. They are to bprevent accidental operation. When switches of the discrepancy type are apoperation is to be effected by two independent movements.

Where necessary, control switches are to be capable of being locked in apositions but control switches for circuit breakers are to be of the non-locking type with spring-return to the "neutral" position. Such switches are to be controllesprings, the use of conta

All pushbuttons are to be of the non-retaining type made of non-hygroscopicnon-swelling and fitted to avoid any possibility of sticking.

The contacts of all switches and pushwiping action when operated.

All control switches are to be provided with labels complying with the requiSpecification in adexample, "open", "close

3.34.2 Electrical Control Locations

Equipment may be electrispecified in the appropriate sections of this Specification. The control positions shall be designated as follows:

Located adjacent to the item of plant to facilitate maintenance, inspection and emergency



3.34.2.3 Supervisory Control

Located at a System Control Centre where principal items of plant at a number of substations are remotely controlled via a telecontrol system.

s or panels are to

el by manual

be of an to permit

er. The rated ge, whether AC table.

nd are to be in standard colours, red, green, blue, white and amber. The colour is to be in the glass and not an

nt coloured glasses are not to be interchangeable. such materials

tes.

ssary auxiliary g, control, be wired up to a

fixed portion of the plant, whether they are in use or not in the first

ssible ar of the operating mechanisms and are to be protected in an approved

manner. The contacts of all auxiliary switches are to be strong and to have a positive

rranged to facilitate quired. Also, all auxiliary switches are to be replaced when damaged or

f adjacent

ATERS, AND VENTILATORS

ures for electrical apparatus are to afford the following degrees of protection classified in EN 60529

(a) Metal housing of switchboard - IP54 - also provision of a thermostatically controlled 230 Vac anti-condensation heater and screened drainage holes.

(b) Auxiliary switches and associated terminals - IP54 - as (a) but with heater control switch common to other apparatus on the same circuit.

3.35 INDICATING LAMPS AND FITTING

Indicating lamps fitted into the fascias of switch and instrument cubiclebe adequately ventilated.

Lamps are to be easily removed and replaced from the front of the panmeans preferably not requiring the use of extractors.

The bezel of metal or other approved material holding the lamp glass is toapproved finish and to be easily removable from the body of the fitting so asaccess to the lamp and lamp glass.

The lamps are to be clear and are to fit into a standard form of lamp holdlamp voltage should be ten percent in excess of the auxiliary supply voltaor DC. Alternatively, low voltage lamps with series resistors will be accep

The lamp glasses shall comply with BS 1376 and EN 60073 a

applied coating and the differeTransparent synthetic materials may be used instead of glass, providedhave fast colours and are completely suitable for use in tropical clima

3.36 AUXILIARY SWITCHES

Where appropriate, each item of Plant is to be equipped with all neceswitches, contactors and mechanisms for indication, protection, meterininterlocking, supervisory and other services. All auxiliary switches are toterminal board on the instance.

All auxiliary switches and mechanisms are to be mounted in approved accepositions cle

wiping action when closing.

Banks of auxiliary switches and associated terminal boards are to be aextension when remaintained, without having to dismantle the entire bank or take the wires oswitches away.

3.37 ENCLOSURES OF APPARATUS, HE

Enclos



(c) Junction boxes - IP54

ts - IP65

ng part of . All

corrosion. Anti-cubicle or where

so as not to anged to

exceeds 30-35 C. Means shall be provided at each unit for isolating the supply. A common switch with a neon gas

e mounted at a convenient point such that it

filling of all oil, compound and gas required for the ordance with EN 60296 uninhibited, non-

6 76).

These shall be delivered in strong hermetically sealed drums or suitable containers.

ers and other

zontal position.

All oil or oil-derived compounds shall be PCB free. A certificate shall be provided at the ffered utilizes PCB's and each

ompanied by a certificate confirming that all equipment in the CB's. Furthermore, all shipments shall be accompanied by a

eristics and

SSORIES

or the number, les specified in the Schedule of Requirements. Air clearances to earth

and between phases shall not be less than the figures stated in Table 3 of BS7354.

ion shall be made for earthing the body of each cable box.

Boxes shall be arranged for cables entering vertically from below.

To provide full accessibility and to enable the cables to be prepared in their final position in the cable box, the gland plate and the front cover down to the gland plate shall be separate and removable.

(d) Instrumen

(e) Motors - IP54

Operating boxes, kiosks, cubicles and similar enclosed compartments formiauxiliary equipment shall be adequately ventilated to minimize condensationcontactor or relay coils and other parts shall be suitably protected against condensation heaters of an approved type shall be provided inside each necessary each cubicle compartment. They shall be shrouded and locatedcause injury to personnel or damage to equipment. A thermostat shall be arrswitch off the heater supply when the ambient temperature o

type lamp labelled "Cubicle heaters on" shall bwill not require movement in the event of extension units being added.

3.38 INSULATING OIL, COMPOUND AND GAS

The Contractor shall supply the firstoperation of the plant. The oil shall be in acclabelled, Class I and on testing at works shall comply with these Standards.

The compound shall comply with BS 1858.

The SF gas shall comply with BS 52O7 (EN 603

Where other types of filling media are used in current transformer chambparts of the equipment they shall be of an approved type.

Where drums are stored on Site in the open, they shall be kept in a hori

tender stage guaranteeing that none of the equipment oshipment shall be accshipment is free from PMaterial Safety Data Sheet, which shall give the composition, the charactinstructions for the correct and safe use and disposal.

3.39 CABLE BOXES AND CABLE BOX ACCE

3.39.1 Cable Boxes

Cable boxes shall be unfilled and shall be suitable for dry terminations ftype and size of cab

Provis



The cable boxes shall be supplied complete with the required connecting bars including,

ating sockets

1 and they

all be dry and suitable for the above bushings and comply with

62 shall be

tors for

capable of withstanding a dry high voltage test of 2kVrms AC for one minute.

Where XLPE cables are to be used compression type cable glands to EN 50262 shall be provided under the Contract.

any supporting insulators, on which the cable connectors will be attached.

Where cable boxes are provided for three-core or four-core cables, the sweon the outer phases shall be inclined towards the centre to minimize bending of the cable cores.

3.39.2 Cable Terminations

The bushing contacts for the 22 kV XLPE cables shall comply with EN 5018shall be of the bolted type.

The cable sealing ends shthe requirements of HD 629.1.S1.

3.39.3 Cable Glands

Where lead sheath cables are to be used wiping cable glands to BS 25provided under the Contract.

Glands for single core cables are to be insulated from the box. The insulation is to include a metallic "island" layer for testing purposes. In addition, removable connecbonding across the gland insulation are to be provided. The gland insulation is to be



4. INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES

ontractor's store able unloading

. Items of ed by the ype. Storage

awing from stores. All equipment and material the Engineer.

and performance rsonnel or by

ersonnel.

ness of the plied under the Contract before

ment and tc., as well as

the execution and completion of the Works.

carried out in such a manner as not to obstruct the operations aser's existing

actors and

onably clean,

ite is mandatory for the collection of all waist ctor fails to remove rubbish within 48 hours of the

back-charged to the and tidy to the

ge done to buildings, structures, plant or property s.

the Contractor intends to work outside normal working hours he shall give adequate advance notice to the Engineer so that the Engineer or the Engineer's representative can be present during the work.

It shall be understood that all prices quoted involving work within operational substations are based on work being carried out during normal EAC working hours. Where for reasons of system operation requirements it is necessary to carry out work in operational

4.1 UNLOADING AND STORAGE AT SITE

The Contractor shall unload all imported equipment and material at the Cor at the Site or at the Purchaser's store, as the case may be, using suitequipment from trucks and trailers and delivery vehicles as the case may bepermanent installation shall be properly and neatly stored in areas designatEngineer and shall be protected to prevent damage or deterioration of any tmethods shall be such as to cause minimum inconvenience to others and shall be arranged to facilitate inspection and withdrstorage shall be subject to the approval of

4.2 ERECTION AND CHECKING AT SITE

The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the execution of the Works of erection work carried out by his own personnel, by his Sub-Contractor's pelocally engaged skilled or unskilled p

The Contractor shall be responsible for satisfying himself as to the correctelectrical and mechanical connections to all equipment supsuch equipment is brought into commission.

The Contractor shall supply and provide all erection and construction equipmaterial, both for temporary and permanent work, tools, tackles, stores, econsumables required for

All works at the site shall be of other Contractors on the site or interfere with the operation of the Purchinstallations on the Site, and the Contractor shall co-operate with other contrthe Engineer to attain this end.

4.3 CLEANING OF SITE

The Contractor shall keep the site on which he erects or stores plant, reasremoving all waste material resulting from the Works as it accumulates and as reasonably directed. The use of a waist skip on smaterial on a daily basis. If the Contradetermined date, the rubbish will be removed by others and the cost Contractor. On completion of the Works the Site shall be left clean satisfaction of the Engineer. Any damabelonging to the Purchaser shall be made good at the Contractor's expense

4.4 ABNORMAL WORKING TIME

Where



substations outside normal working hours and this is requested by the Purchaser/Engineer, the Contractor will be entitled to premium time pcalculated from the differen

ayment which will be ce in the rates entered in the appropriate Schedule for

l substations l hours and such work requires the attendance of the Purchaser's

personnel, then the Contractor shall be responsible for payment of the extra cost incurred

ties and assistance

with the execution and

ive fields to give ed to supervise.

ineers as are skilled and experienced in their respective fields

proper and

ractor to n of the work

aser/Engineer is insufficiently qualified

the employed on y person so

r from among his senior staff, ect on behalf of the

orks and for

ent at Site during presentative

e deemed to have been given to the Contractor.

nderer in his Tender shall nominate persons for each of the job allocations associated with the execution of the Contract. The Tenderer shall include full curriculum vitae of the nominated persons at the time of the Tender to establish that the personnel comply with the minimum qualifications required as indicated in the following clause. The Tenderer shall also indicate the period for which these persons are expected to be available in their respective posts. The posts shall not be for less than the period up to the completion of the Works.

installation and supervisory staff.

Where the Contractor requires work to be carried out within EAC operationaoutside norma

by the Purchaser.

4.5 CONTRACTOR'S AND SUB-CONTRACTOR'S STAFF

The carrying out of all the work included in the Contract shall be supervised by a sufficient number of qualified representatives of the Contractor and full facilishall be afforded for the Engineer to check the Works.

The Contractor shall provide and employ in connectionmaintenance of the work:

• Only such engineers as are qualified and experienced in their respectproper supervision to the work they are requir

• Only such assistant engand such sub-agents, foremen and leading hands as are competent to give proper supervision to the Work they are required to supervise.

• Only such skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled labour as necessary for the timely execution of the Works.

The Purchaser/Engineer shall be at liberty to object and to require the Contremove forthwith any person employed by the Contractor for the executiounder this Contract, who in the opinion of the Purchfor his intended duty, misconduct’s himself, or is incompetent, or negligent in the proper performance of his duties, or whose employment is otherwise considered by Purchaser/ Engineer to be undesirable, and such person shall not be againthis Contract without the written permission of the Purchaser/Engineer. Anremoved shall be replaced without delay by a competent substitute, subject to the provisions of further stipulations in the following sub-clauses.

The Tenderer shall nominate in his Tender a Project Managewho will be empowered with the authority to undertake the entire projContractor. The Project Manager shall be in charge of coordination of the wliaison with the Purchaser and the Engineer.

The Tenderer shall also nominate the Site Manager who shall be presworking hours and any orders or instructions, which the Engineer or his remay give to him, shall b

The Te



The Contractor shall submit a chart showing the proposed manpower strength for each month of the whole of the construction period.

res, rules and hich he shall be

complied with ub-Contractors shall

lations and urchaser.

erly maintain red by the

During erection and commissioning the Contractor shall provide all temporary scaffolding, s of workmen

, and afford igher level on the personnel below.

a reasonable y affect the normal

engaged on

ea.

om his staff, whom will g the "Permits to

under this ice the Contractor

ich the the Engineer and the Purchaser's

se involving the by the

ermit to Work" signed

es at Site with haser, the Engineer and the Government.

The Contractor shall make full arrangements and be responsible for the diversion of traffic, including arranging permission from road authorities, fixing and maintenance of

caution boards and provision of night signals and temporary traffic lights.

All this work shall be undertaken by the Contractor to the satisfaction and approval of the Engineer. All costs associated with this work shall be deemed to be included in the agreed Contract Price.

4.6 SAFETY FOR WORKMEN AND PUBLIC

The Tenderer shall submit with his offer a manual detailing the proceduregulations pertaining to "Safety and Engineering Practices" according to wproposes to undertake the Works. Following Award of Contract this manualsubject to the approval of the Engineer and once approved shall be strictlyby the Contractor and his Sub-Contractors. The Contractor and his Salso comply with all applicable Governmental safety and sanitary laws, reguordinances, as well as the established safety rules and practices of the P

The Contractor shall provide means for the protection of personnel and propwarning signs and lights, barricades, railings and other safeguards as requiconditions and the progress of the Work.

ladders, platforms with toe boards and hand-rails essential for proper accesand inspectors, cover or rail-off dangerous openings or holes in floorsadequate protection against material falling from a h

The Contractor must take particular precaution to warn the Engineer withintime in advance of forthcoming activities in the works, which maoperation of the existing plant, or the personnel engaged in it.

The maximum personal safety must be afforded to personnel either directlythis Contract or who in the normal course of their occupations find it necessary to utilize temporary works erected by the Contractor or to frequent the working ar

In this respect the Contractor shall nominate a person or persons fridentify themselves by their passport, as competent persons for receivinWork".

In each and every case involving a connection between the Plant supplied Contract and any other existing plant which may or may not be in servmust make suitable arrangements as regards the time and manner in whconnection is made subject only to the approval ofRepresentative who is in charge of the existing plant. Where cases arioperation of the plant, or work on plant in operation, or whenever requiredPurchaser's representative, the Contractor must obtain a written "Pby a person duly authorized by the Purchaser and countersigned by the Engineer.

All accidents shall be promptly reported to the Engineer's representativcopies to the Purc

signs,



4.7 SAFETY RULES, CLEARANCE CERTIFICATES, AND PERMITS TO

e of the pproved by the

Engineer and to comply with such safety regulations and safety procedures as may be alf.

ceed, efore work ntative of the

sible person.

etails of all work modifications to existing panel wiring

itted showing the the Permit may

as made the es, or circuit cessary warning

shall also be ted on the

of the areas covered by the

rmit has been e considered

s. Access to

s been installed and prior to energizing or alternatively when the equipment is to be installed in an area where its proximity to

a hazard, a "Clearance Certificate" shall be issued by the Engineer's Representative and signed by the Contractor. This Certificate shall inform

er's id Permit to

R CERTIFICATES

assed the Tests ive a proposed

the Engineer by the issue of a Taking Over Certificate to the Contractor.

ACCESS TO SITE

Arrangement for access to EAC Operational substations shall be made in the first case through the Engineer's Representative. All Contractors’ personnel entering operational substations will require official passes and arrangement for the issue of these should be made with the Electricity Authority of Cyprus.

WORK

For the installation, testing, taking over, commissioning and final acceptancWorks, the Contractor is required to adopt a safe and orderly procedure a

issued from time to time by the Purchaser or by the Engineer on his beh

Where a shut down of the existing system is required to enable work to proreasonable notice shall be given to the Engineer and a program agreed. Bcommences a Permit to Work shall be issued by the Employer to a represeContractor, such person to be agreed with the Engineer as being a respon

Before a Permit to Work will be issued, the Contractor shall submit full dto be carried out with points of isolation and whereare involved. Marked up copies highlighting the changes are to be submextent to which modifications on a specific circuit being the subject of affect schemes common to the substation and switchboard.

The recipient of a Permit to Work shall satisfy himself that the Employer hequipment to be worked on dead, locked off any disconnectors, switchbreakers from which such equipment may be energized, posted any nenotices and earthed the equipment in an approved manner. The Contractor responsible for staff under his control observing the limitations of access staPermit and shall ensure that such staff is fully informed Permit. He shall also be responsible for informing all staff (including Employer's and Engineer's staff) employed on work covered by a Permit, when the Pecancelled. Any equipment or section of line not included in the Permit shall bto be live and be roped off and Danger Notices posted in prominent positionthe work zone shall be along and only along an agreed safe path.

When each item or section of Plant ha

existing "live" equipment constitutes

the Contractor that the equipment shall henceforth be subject to the Purchasregulations and that no more work thereon shall be undertaken unless a valWork card has been issued by the Employer.

4.8 TAKING OVE

When the Works, or any Section of the Works, has been completed and pon Completion, the Contractor shall agree with the Engineer's Representatdate for taking over as referred to in the Contract Conditions. This will be confirmed by

4.9



The Contractor will be responsible for security of the new substation Site until it comes

rational substations and where necessary ks, prior arrangements shall be made.

aterial basis sentative and

r's Representative

to the at which the

ployed and their respective time periods and rates. The Contractor shall submit Time and Material

end of each working week while the Work is in itted in duplicate to the Engineer at monthly

During Plant erection the Government Inspector or other authorized person may wish to ntaining the test certificates of all lifting tackle used in the course

r shall prepare the register at the start of erection and ite.

on

ractor's expatriate uch

be allowed on the

The Contractor is to provide such temporary buildings as may be necessary for office ts for his site staff during the erection of the

Price.

of the Engineer and the Public Health Authorities. The sanitary accommodation shall be ed on completion of the Work and all trenches shall be chemically treated and

completely back filled to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

4.12.3 Storage and Workshop Facilities

The Contractor should make his own arrangements for unloading and storing of materials and equipment and for providing workshop facilities and the cost of these will be deemed

under EAC control period to commissioning.

Vehicles will not normally be permitted into opeto perform the wor

4.10 DAY WORK

Work on Site authorized by the Engineer to be carried out on a time and mshall be the subject of a Site Instruction (SI) issued by the Engineer's Represuitably endorsed to that effect. The Purchaser will not be bound to pay for any work at time and material rates carried out unless an SI signed by the Engineehas been issued.

Time and Material Sheets shall be submitted in duplicate at weekly intervalsEngineer and shall show the number of the SI authorizing the work, the Sitework is carried out, the date of the work, all men and material and plant em

Sheets to the Engineer for signature at the progress. Day work invoices shall be submintervals for certification, supported by Suppliers' invoices for all materials.

4.11 SITE REGISTER OF LIFTING TACKLE

examine the register coof the Work, such as cranes, hoists, shackles, eye-bolts, trunnions, slings and any special handling equipment. The Contractoafter commissioning shall hand it over to the Engineer's Representative on S

4.12 SITE SERVICES

4.12.1 Living Accommodati

The Purchaser will not provide any housing accommodation for the Contor locally recruited staff and the Contract Price is to include the cost of saccommodation as may be necessary. No living accommodation willSite.

4.12.2 Office Accommodation

accommodation and sanitary arrangemenWorks and the cost of these shall be deemed to be included in the Contract

The sanitary accommodation shall be kept in a clean and orderly condition to the approval

remov



to be included in the Contract price. At the absolute discretion of the PurchaContractor may be permitted to use the substation sites for temporary storaor equipment if this will not interfere with the freedom of access to the siteworks being or planned to be carried

ser the ge of materials

s or with other out at these sites or with the safe operation of the

he personnel.

y at 400 volts, 3-imum power: 50 kVA).

ion Board (either

f the

ide for his own use all

cation, utilization and maintenance of the installation must receive the the rous. All local

Electricity Regulations and Ordinances shall be strictly observed in the distribution and

ll be free of charge for construction purposes provided that the ically.

not be held nience caused directly or indirectly by a total or

ply.

rrangements for provision of any water supply otable or non-potable.

rrangements for a supply of compressed air

facilities.

12.8 Contractor’s Employees

The Contractor is to fulfil all his obligations in respect of accommodation, feeding and al facilities for all personnel in his employ, as necessary to ensure satisfactory

execution of the Contract. He is also to comply with the requirements of all relevant local Statutory Employment Regulations.

The Contractor is to be responsible for the behaviour on site of all personnel employed by him.

substations and the safety of t

4.12.4 Electricity Supply

The Purchaser will make available to the Site a supply of electrical energphase, 4-wire, 50 Hz for power and lighting (max

The supply will be made available at the substation's LVAC Distributexisting or to be provided and installed by the Contractor).

The Contractor will be responsible for providing and maintaining the whole oinstallation beyond the panel, as required for his operations on the site.

All portable lights must be low voltage and the Contractor is to provnecessary transformers, with centre points earthed.

The design, loapproval of the Engineer or his authorized representative, who may requiredisconnection or alteration of any parts, which in his opinion may be dange

use of the supply.

The supply of electricity wiContractor uses it econom

The supply of electricity will be available at all hours, but the Purchaser will responsible for any loss, damage, inconvepartial interruption of the sup

4.12.5 Water Supply

The Contractor will have to make his own arequired at the sites, either p

4.12.6 Compressed Air

The Contractor is to make his own anecessary for the construction of the Plant.

4.12.7 Lifting Facilities

Lifting facilities are not available on site. The contractor is in charge of these

4.

medic



4.12.9 First Aid Facilities

The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate first aid facilities on thapproval of the Engineer and the Public Health Authorities. At lea

e Site to the st one of his staff shall

ministration of first aid at each site.

is own cost all d where necessary or requested by the

y constituted authority for the protection of the Work or

rovide and maintain to the approval of the Engineer and the local

ate(s).

tained the Purchaser's/ Engineer's approval, erect signboards of minimum size 2x1m, one lettered in

t, the date of

e number and

d progress learly demonstrate the Work performed

he Work th, and

ts having ork to be performed

an the 5th day

Manager shall immediately inform the Engineer's representative

odical meetings will be held between the Engineer's Representative and the g to actual

4 Site Records

The Contractor shall maintain a field copy at Site wherein all records of tests and plans shall be entered. Also sketches and records of the field works shall be shown in this field copybook.

The Contractor shall maintain a continuous record of all field deviations from the approved drawings if any and as approved by the Engineer.

be fully qualified in the knowledge and ad

4.12.10 Watching, Lighting, and Fencing

The Contractor shall in connection with the Work provide and maintain at hlights, guards, fencing and watching when anPurchaser/Engineer or by any dulfor the safety and convenience of the public or others.

4.12.11 Fire Fighting Equipment

The Contractor shall pFire Authority adequate portable fire fighting equipment on the Site during the performance of his service until the issue of the Initial Taking Over Certific

4.12.12 Signboard

The Contractor shall, after having oband maintain at the Site two painted English and the other in Greek giving the Contractor's name and the names of the Purchaser, of the Engineer, if other than the Purchaser and of the Projeccommencement and the date of completion.

4.12.13 Erection Progress Report

(a) The Contractor's Site Manager shall submit weekly statements of thqualifications of the site personnel employed every day.

(b) He shall furthermore, submit to the Engineer at monthly intervals detailereports, including charts. These reports shall cand man-hours effected during the past month, and the actual stage of tcompared with the Work scheduled to be performed during the past moncompared with the contractual progress of Work schedule, special evenoccurred during the period of the said report and the anticipated Wduring the coming month. These reports shall be submitted not later thof the month for the period covering the previous month.

(c) The Contractor's Siteof special events, which may influence the smooth progress of Work, and of accidents that occurred on Site.

(d) PeriContractor's Site Manager. The frequency shall be agreed upon accordinrequirements.

4.12.1



4.13 TRAINING OF THE PURCHASER'S PERSONNEL

(a) During the construction and erection of the Work, the Contractor shall bfor the instruction and training of operation and maintenance personnel the Purchase for this Work as may be necessary. This training shall be carried out at

e responsible appointed by

works and site.

s or at ectures, films,

dels, manuals, drawings etc. In order that this training may be given the ll assistance

n paragraph (b) above f the purchaser and the

e proposed training.

rogram to the Engineer for ate of the training, but no later

he Engineer xamine and

nd to examine shall give due

are ready or about elay, unless

nd for the purposes of examining and measuring such work or of examining such foundations.

s in or through the same as the Engineer may, from time to n event and after examination the Contractor shall reinstate and

the Engineer.

Works

The Contractor shall progress the works in a systematic pattern and shall not interfere with any other Works at the site not relating to the Contract's execution; moreover, he shall keep and hand over the site clean and free from all unwanted materials, garbage

fuse affecting public health and shall hand over the work after being completed in good working condition. If the Contractor fails to perform these works, the Purchaser shall have the right to undertake the same at the Contractor's expense without any objection, notice or resort to the courts.

both Contractor's/ Sub-Contractor's premises or manufacturer's

(b) The training carried out at the Contractor's/ Sub-Contractor's premisemanufacturer's works shall be undertaken by means of simultaneous, lslides, moContractor shall be responsible to make all arrangements and provide aas necessary.

(c) The training carried out at site shall be similar to that detailed iexcept that all instruction material shall become the property oinstalled equipment shall be used in place of simulators.

(d) The Tenderer shall submit with his Tender details of th

(e) The Contractor shall submit a fully detailed training papproval at least eight weeks prior to the proposed dthan four weeks prior to the start of the trail operation of the plant.

4.14 EXAMINATION OF WORK BEFORE COVERING UP

(a) No work shall be covered up or put out of view without the approval of tand the Contractor shall afford full opportunity for the Engineer to emeasure any work which is about to be covered up or put out of view afoundations before permanent work is placed thereon. The Contractor notice to the Engineer whenever any such work or foundations is or to be ready for examination. The Engineer shall, without unreasonable dhe considers it necessary and advises the Contractor accordingly, atte

(b) The Contractor shall for the purposes of examination uncover any part or parts of the work or make openingtime, direct. In such amake good such part or parts referred to above, to the satisfaction of

4.15 SYSTEM OF WORKS AND COOPERATION WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS AT SITE

4.15.1 System of

and re



4.15.2 Cooperation with Other Contractors

If the construction of the Works provides for work to be done at the site with Contractor, or the Purchaser's employees or others, the Contractor shall makto cooperate with such persons without interfering with their affairs. Furthermprovide them with the required facilities, implement the instructions issued in this connection and advise the Engineer of any differences that may athem. The decisions issue

another e every effort ore, he shall

by the Engineer rise between

d by the Engineer in this respect shall be final and binding on the Contractor and he shall not claim any compensation or extension of the Contract period by virtue of the foregoing.



5. 132kV SF6 GAS INSULATED SWITCHGEAR

ENTS

suitable for

Site.

ith this Specification and the s from these

youts for 132 depend on the type

hgear offered, and on the manufacturer's recommendations, but overall sizes of ld be paid to

hall not be

etween chambers uipment

The design of the switchboard shall be such as to permit easy operation and easy end with the shutdown of the

plicate busbar equipment is supplied, the design shall allow high

ove that

ance of the specified

bers and any omponents must be capable of withstanding a gas overpressure of

ors shall be

ed. In no case f service of more

than half the switchboard.

Where single busbar equipment is specified suitable for future conversion to double

The Tenderer shall also demonstrate the repair steps to be taken for an arc fault leading to the loss of gas at the most critical location and the extent of interruption to supplies.

5.1 TYPE OF SWITCHGEAR AND GENERAL REQUIREM

The switchgear shall be of the SF6 gas insulated metal-enclosed typeaccommodation within a building or if so specified suitable for outdoor installations and capable of continuous operation under the climatic conditions existing at the

The design and performance of the switchgear shall comply wlatest revision of the relevant International and British Standards. Deviationspecifications and standards shall be stated in the appropriate Schedule.

The drawings issued with this Specification indicate proposed equipment lakV relay and control equipment. It is recognized that final layouts will of switcsubstations should be kept as per the specification drawings. Attention shouthe amount of spare space shown in the specification drawings which sreduced.

Particular emphasis is placed on the provision of adequate clearance bto facilitate maintenance. It is not desirable to compress the layout of the equnduly in order to minimize the space required.

replacement of any item and to enable extensions to be added at either minimum of disturbance to the installed equipment and without completesubstation. Where duvoltage testing of busbars after extension with the second busbar in service.

The equipment offered shall be adequately protected from all types of system voltage surges and any equipment necessary to satisfy this requirement over and abspecified shall be included.

The design shall include all facilities necessary to enable the performsite checks and tests.

Circuit-breakers, isolators, earth switches, VTs, CTs, cable termination chamother chambers and c130% of normal operating pressure continuously.

Where duplicate busbar switchgear is specified, busbar selector isolatprovided as specified in the schedules to facilitate the changeover of individual circuits from one busbar to the other with the circuit on load and a bus coupler closthe repair of a gas leakage or any other fault shall require the taking out o

busbar the Tenderer shall describe clearly all steps required in connection with the changeover with at least half of the substation remaining in service at all times.



5.2 CURRENT RATINGS

The temperature rise of the busbars, connections, isolators, fuses, contactrunking connections, etc, which form part of the contract works, when opercontinuously at the specified rating or under short circuit conditions and at

ts, cable boxes, ating

the specified site rating under the specified maximum design ambient conditions, shall not exceed the

ndard.

t and shall be

rmal damage, time currents pertaining to the rated

breaking capacity of the circuit breaker. Except as otherwise specified rated duration of primary rating of the current transformers

shall not differ from that of the associated circuit breakers.

5.3 CONNECTIONS TO OUTGOING CIRCUITS

6 ated bus ducts and/or open type ll be provided as specified for the outgoing circuits.

opper or eviations from

itchgear shall be supplied complete with auxiliary equipment necessary for safe

sary outages or

red to sign in these

d clearly designated with the respective function and

rating parts of the switchgear shall be suitably labelled. This shall include nd valves.

ch individual circuit assembly and on the local control cubicle.

The switchgear to be supplied shall have rated impulses and power frequency withstand es equal to or greater than the specified levels at the minimum operating SF6 gas

density or pressure.

The actual guaranteed withstand voltages applicable to the maximum filling pressure at 20oC minimum and nominal SF6 gas pressures shall be given in Schedules.

values specified in EN 62271 – 1, EN 62271 - 203 or equivalent National Sta

Any de-rating to meet the site ambient conditions shall be taken into accoundeclared in the schedules.

Every part of the switchgear shall also withstand, without mechanical or thethe instantaneous peak currents and rated short-

short-circuit shall be taken as one second. The

SF immersed cable sealing end chambers or SF insul6terminal bushings sha

5.4 DESIGN PRINCIPLES – 132 kV GIS SWITCHGEAR

5.4.1 General

The design of the SF6 gas insulated metal enclosed switchgear with either caluminium busbars shall comply with all the relevant EN 62271 standards. Dany of these shall be stated in the tender.

The swoperation, routine and periodic maintenance and repairs. The switchgear shall be designed to permit the removal and extension of any part without unnecesdisturbance to adjacent items of plant and it shall also be possible to maintain a supply from one section of busbar whilst extending the other. The Tenderer is requidemonstrate clearly in his submission the capability of the switchgear derespects.

Control facilities shall be simple aninstructions on operation and maintenance shall be unambiguous.

All main and opebut not necessarily be limited to primary switches, aux. switches, gauges a

Circuit identifying labels shall be fitted at the front and rear of ea

voltag



The minimum clearances between phases and from phase to earth at thworking density shall be consistent with the specified impulse withstand leveevent of leakage from any compartment, the power frequency voltage

e minimum l. In the

that the equipment 2271.

ology, deriving s of capacity,

anufacturing rge quantities of GIS bays

e and abroad, will be considered in assessing the Tenderer’s

imize losses

nt pressures . It shall also withstand the mechanical and thermal

ruction and

e effect of an internal fault in any section of the carried out.

without use of

The switchgear units and busbar systems shall be divided into several gas-filled leakage may be

necessary to usbars and to enable

to be completed with the minimum of delay. The partitions ar.

to each bay.

of switchgear that service as a result of gas leakage, planned

drawings

also be indicated in the technical schedules.

ime for gas evacuation and filling of the largest chamber shall not exceed the relevant requirements of this Specification.

On duplicate busbar switchgear, busbar chambers shall be so arranged as to allow maintenance on one busbar, i.e., gas removal, and retain the other busbar and circuits in service.

shall withstand with SF6 at atmospheric pressure shall be according to EN 6

In case the Tenderer offers a GIS range of equipment from a recent technfrom an existing range of equipment and providing some advantages in termreliability and/or monitoring, the experience of the Tenderer in designing, mand erecting large scale GIS projects and in having supplied laof a proven design at homability to comply with the required successful commercial operation period.

5.4.2 Enclosures

The material of enclosures shall be aluminium and shall be designed to minand heating due to circulating currents.

The metal enclosure shall be capable of withstanding the normal and transieto which it is subjected in serviceeffects of internal arc faults and to definitely prevent burning through within a rated short-circuit and earth-fault duration of 0,3 seconds for single encapsulation const0,2 seconds for three-phase encapsulation. The effects of any arc shall confine only to the compartment where the arc has ignited.

The Tender shall include information on thplant supported by the results of type tests

The electrical connection between adjacent enclosures shall be continuous external connecting straps.

5.4.3 Division into Compartments

compartments, sealed from each other by gas-tight partitions so that any quickly localized. The various gas zones shall be further sub-divided when restrict any internal arcing damage, particularly within sections of bgas-handling proceduresshould confine any internal faults to a respective section of the switchge

Busbars have to be segregated in independent gas-zones corresponding

The number of gas compartments shall be such as to limit the amount has to be isolated and taken out of maintenance or internal faults.

Proposals for the partitioning of gas zones shall be clearly indicated on the submitted with the tender. Gas volumes and duration of gas handling procedures shall

Total t



The equipment and connections within each compartment shall be so arallow ready removal and replacement of any section when the necessary service. This feature should also permit the erection and testing of extensioalongside equipment already in service with the minimum of outage time befor final connections. All external gas pipe work shall be connected via vaof proven design, which will en

ranged as to parts are in

n units ing required

cuum couplings able joints to be broken and remade without loss of gas.

for automatic nclosure can

y and exactly. not endanger

t or in the vicinity of the equipment, but shall be devices shall be

illing, emptying

onnectors, arthing switches, and other primary devices contained therein. The

al of the Engineer.

pe follows a common ify the gas zone with

ted by

traction of the orting structure or

detriment to the current carrying capacity or gas volume.

onnectors and joints shall be such that they ent. Where

re, together cribed in the maintenance

ence shall be provided to verify that enclosures have been designed and tested in accordance with established pressure vessel codes.

Voltages induced in the enclosures shall not be allowed to exceed reasonable safe limits. All chambers throughout the equipment shall be earthed at an approved number of points.

cessary earthing bars and associated fixings shall be provided.

Each enclosure shall be provided with lifting points to facilitate maintenance or repair works.

The Tenderer is required to demonstrate clearly in his submission the capability of the switchgear design in these respects.

Each pressure compartment shall be provided with a suitable device to allowpressure relief. The pressure relief must operate before any part of the eexplode or burn through. It must be possible to locate an internal fault quicklAll relief devices shall be located such that operation of the devices shallpersonnel working on the equipmenaccessible for resetting or overhaul after operation. Where necessary thefitted with cowls to deflect any gasses or fragmented parts away from locations where personnel may be expected to be present.

Gas compartments shall be fitted with permanent connection points for fand gas treatment without moving the switchgear.

Enclosures shall be clearly marked to identify gas compartment zones, disccircuit breakers, emethod proposed shall be subject to the approv

All gas pipe work shall be colour coded and where more than one piroute, each pipe shall be ring coded and at regular intervals to identwhich it is associated.

5.4.4 Enclosures and Conductor Expansion

Enclosures shall have reliable provision to absorb thermal expansion createmperature cycling.

Suitable arrangements shall be provided for the thermal expansion and conbusbars and busbar chambers without application of stress to the supp

The design of sliding type current carrying cmeet the aforementioned conditions over the full permitted range of movemsuch joints may be made or adjusted on site, full details of alignment proceduwith any necessary alignment tools or gauges shall be desmanual and included in the supply of special tools.

Evid

All ne



In order to compensate for any small variations in floor level each comparfitted with means of adjustment (jacking screws or similar). Suc

tment shall be h adjustments shall be

ovided by the manufacturer.

ompatible with ent for electrical insulation. It must be fully ensured that there is no possibility

eating of gas

hich the tests of the

n device for erature

hall be arranged to give individual e alarm and

perate an alarm

rned by ing shall be

d with the Tender

tion shall be provided for circuit breakers whenever SF than that permitted by the design satisfactory operation.

eter while the ot occur

cilitate the regular maintenance checking of moisture orb any moisture, ition products shall

ls. It shall be

6

Busbars and switchgear items shall be supported in the enclosures by insulators of als compatible with SF6 gas and the products of gas decomposition.

Gas barrier insulators and bushings, including gas-oil and gas-air bushings shall comply with the specified conditions for sealing of enclosures. The Engineer shall be advised of design pressures used and may require test evidence to substantiate performance under extremes of differential pressure and temperature.

fully described in the maintenance manuals pr

5.4.5 Gas Density, Monitoring, and Alarms

The nominal operating density of the SF6 insulating gas shall be as low as cthe requiremof the liquefying of the gas at minimum ambient temperature. The auxiliary his not allowed.

The nominal density shall be at least 15% higher than the density at winsulation level of the switchgear are made.

Each separate compartment or gas zone must be provided with its owmonitoring continuously the gas density or alternatively pressure with a tempcompensated gas pressure monitor. These devices scompartment indication in the local control units and initiation of remotautomatic tripping. These shall be set in two stages. The first stage shall oto warn that the gas pressure/density is falling to a critical level.

The second stage shall initiate automatic isolation of the gas section concetripping associated circuit breakers and disconnectors as appropriate. Trippwired into the main protection circuits and shall only be initiated when both alarm and trip conditions exist.

The philosophy of the automatic shut down sequence shall be submitteand agreed with the Engineer during initial contract discussions.

A lockout feature with remote indica6 gas pressure is less

Each gas compartment shall be fitted with a manometer with trip or block and alarm facilities. It shall be possible to remove each gas density relay and manomcompartment to which it is fitted remains in service. Spurious alarms shall nduring normal operation of the switchgear.

5.4.6 Gas Filters

Means shall also be provided to facontent. Each gas compartment shall be fitted with static filters to abswhich may be present. In addition filters for removal of SF6 decomposbe provided in those compartments in which arcing or corona discharge can take place. The filters shall be effective for the duration of time between major overhaupossible to replace the active materials without extensive dismantling.

5.4.7 SF Immersed Insulation

materi



The surfaces of insulation in contact with SF6 shall not be glazed osilica compounds or other materials, which may deteriorate in the presencedecomposed gas or arcing products. Alternative glazing or surface treatme

r otherwise treated with of nt, which is ven durability.

The insulators should be free at all times of partial discharges at all voltage levels within ing manufacture.

ring the service life of the equipment, shall satisfy the following

or by SF6 decomposition products

(c) Non-aging and non-shrinking

ble under all temperature conditions

orrectly service and the pressure differentials,

d subsequent

aphragms, and pressure relief devices shall be designed to be same conditions as stated for seals.

mit to the Engineer evidence of tests carried out for porosity and extended pressure testing to show

s used.

as loss of not annum in any single gas compartment.

all be of the

The enclosures shall be constructed from materials that will prevent overheating at the specified rated currents.

The bus ducts shall be terminated with either outdoor type porcelain-clad bushings or with facilities for direct termination on transformers, as stated in the Schedules.

Where direct termination on transformers or shunt reactors is called for, the bus ducts shall be constructed with the limitation on dimensional tolerances, between phases and from the ground, required by the manufacturer of the connected equipment.

compatible with SF6 and its by-products, may be acceptable subject to pro

the working range and shall be tested for voids and partial discharges dur

SF6 immersed insulation shall otherwise comply with the relevant clauses for insulators and bushings.

5.4.8 Sealing of Enclosures

To prevent ingress of moisture or leakage of gas duthe sealing materials used at all joints and interfacesrequirements:

(a) Not affected by SF6 gas

(b) Non-hygroscopic, containing no silicon

(d) Retain resilience for long periods under stress

(e) Sta

Seals including those at compartment partitions shall continue to function cthroughout the temperature and pressure ranges in including vacuum and test pressures, during erection, maintenance anrevisions.

Expansion bellows and difree of leakage under the

Where the use of cast aluminium is envisaged the Manufacturer shall sub

the quality of the casting

5.4.9 Gas Losses

The Manufacturer should be prepared to guarantee the equipment for a gmore than 1,0% per

5.4.10 SF6 Bus Ducts

SF6 insulated bus ducts shall be provided on the specified circuits and shphase isolated type or 3-phase encapsulated as specified.



Expansion joints, flexible connections, and adjustable mountings shall alcompensate for reasonable tolerances in the manufacture of associated eqwhich the SF6 switchgear may be connected an

so be provided to uipment to

d to ensure that unreasonably excessive

al expansion by means of

ified rated ecified test

voltages. The ducts and their supports shall include any non-magnetic material or vent overheating or the induction of overvoltage in secondary

r the initial filling 60480.

in service shall r. Details shall also be given as to the degree of gas deterioration

nt or replacement of the gas is necessary. Instructions of the gas treatment necessary to return it to a satisfactory operating condition

treatments

able Testing Facilities

withstand testing n cables and switchgear. Each testing flange shall be positioned in an independent

nsulated by such

ened during sts. Removable bolted links or similar can be provided as alternative. In such a

re that when removed the resulting

of 15 minutes, r pressure.

ppropriate

5.4.13 Circuit Disconnectors and Earthing Switches

Feeder circuits shall each be equipped with a circuit disconnector and not less than three earthing switches. These earthing switches shall comprise of two maintenance earthing switches, connected on each end of the feeder circuit breaker, and a high speed make-proof earthing switch, between the circuit disconnector and the connection to an overhead line or cable.

accuracy is not required when installing such equipment.

The design of bus ducts must make full allowance for thermtransverse erectable contact assembly and enclosure, and for associated transformer vibration by means of elastic bellows provided at the transformer end.

The bus ducts and their supports shall be designed and tested for the specnormal and short time current and for the maximum system voltage and sp

insulation necessary to precircuits.

5.4.11 Gas Handling

The tender shall include a complete specification for the gas to be used foof the plant. The gas shall fulfil the requirements of IEC 60376 and

Details of the method of taking gas samples from each compartment whilebe given in the tendethat can be tolerated before treatme

shall be given. Under normal operating conditions, the period between gas shall be at least 15 years.

5.4.12 HV C

Testing flanges shall be provided where relevant on each circuit for HVof maigas zone compartment, which shall be independent of adjacent disconnector and earthing switch gas sections.

Adequate precautions shall be taken to ensure that any section of busbars iSF6 gas is not subjected to any cable testing voltage unless able to withstandvoltages.

Where line disconnectors are provided, only the disconnectors shall be opcable tecase the design of the link and connections shall ensugap can withstand the impulse and power frequency test voltages applicable to the switchgear, and the HV DC test voltage applicable to the cable, for a periodwhen the chamber is filled to the minimum rated working SF6 gas density o

Details on the facilities provided and the method used shall be given in the aSchedule.



Transformer circuit modules shall be equipped with not less than two maintenance-er.

connector on ng switch

between each busbar disconnector and its associated circuit breaker, connected to the

rthing switch on the

sms

chanisms shall comply with EN 62271 - d to ensure free action and shall be sms shall be as simple as possible

current ratings. rential

ear is required to coordinate design of SF6 filled aling ends supplied by other manufacturers such that the re compartment is maintained.

able fault location

ors shall be provided for all disconnectors and earthing switches to show whether the main contacts of these switches are in the fully open or closed positions.

a reliable mechanical design and be positively driven in both drive stage of the contact operating mechanism. Each indicator shall

utes provided

5.5 SEALING ENDS

Where applicable the metal enclosed cable sealing end chamber necessary for enclosing the cable sealing end insulator suitable for termination of transformers and HV power cables shall be supplied as part of this Contract. Design shall be in accordance with EN 62271 - 305.

The dimensions of the enclosure which are necessary to accommodate the transformer bushing and cable sealing end shall be determined by the switchgear supplier who will be responsible for the dielectric performance of the combined arrangements.

earthing switches, connected on each end of the transformer circuit break

Bus coupler and bus section modules shall be equipped with a busbar diseach side of the circuit breaker and not less than one maintenance earthi

circuit breaker end.

Bus section modules shall also contain a high-speed make-proof eabusbar side of each busbar disconnector.

5.4.14 Disconnector and Earthing Switch Operating Mechani

Disconnector and earthing switch operating me102 and shall be of robust construction, carefully fitteunaffected by the climatic conditions at site. Mechaniand comprise a minimum of bearing and wearing parts.

5.4.15 Cable Feeder and Transformer Connections

Connections shall be suitable for the specified continuous and short circuit Where necessary, expansion joints shall be provided to accommodate diffemovements between the switchgear phase terminals and cable conductors.

The manufacturer of the switchgenclosures with that of cable seintegrity of gas and/or oil pressu

Facilities shall be provided for high voltage DC testing and conducting cmeasurements of the cable installation.

5.4.16 Position Indicators

Position indicat

Indicators shall be ofdirections by the finalbe clearly visible to operating staff at operating control points and access rounder this contract.

5.5.1 General



The dimensions and terminal arrangements, together with details of the fithe seali

lling medium of ng end shall be submitted for the Engineer’s approval before manufacture can

eder cables pplied by the

ll be supplied 6 switchgear manufacturer. The Tenderer shall submit drawings showing clearly

elaboration

he transformer to

cable isolation, provision shall be made to be able to r cable in service.

Gas monitoring of the chamber in service shall be maintained at all times and each

circuit.

onnecting link must be main connections.

ithout removal/refitting of the main connections. C testing of

that the following conditions are

ulating material, either gas or oil, from inside the cable does not escape and

6

ealing end

ifferential operating

exceed 10 and regassing.

uately seal off skets which

Sealing ends shall be designed with joint faces, which will ensure leak-free operation and e the entry of air, dust or moisture. Arrangements employing fluid or semi-fluid filling

media shall have flanged joints, the faces of which shall be machined. The fixing bolt centres for the flanged joints shall not exceed 100 mm. Filling orifices and drain plugs shall be so positioned as to enable efficient handling of the media and to discourage the formation of voids when filling. Expansion space not less than 8% of the total volume of the filling medium at 15oC shall be provided. The internal surfaces of cable boxes shall be

commence.

When the contract requirements do not include the supply of the outgoing fethen the stress cones for connection to the outgoing feeder cables will be sucable manufacturer under a separate Contract. The surrounding housing wiby the SFthe limits of his supply. Particulars of the HV outgoing cables will be given onof Contract.

The cable sealing end arrangement in transformer cells shall be clear of tallow removal of the transformer without disturbing the main cables.

For circuits equipped with doubleremove the gas from either cable chamber whilst maintaining the othe

chamber shall be separately monitored.

Fully cabled circuits shall provide access for test facilities at one end of the

In chambers equipped for 132 kV cable sealing ends a discprovided to allow easy isolation between the cable sealing end and the It must be possible to remove this link wThe design of the link when removed shall be sufficient to withstand HV Dcable and the full insulation requirements specified for the switchgear.

Design of cable termination equipment must ensuremaintained throughout the life of the equipment:

(a) The inspenetrate the switchgear enclosure.

(b) The SF gas does not enter the cable from the enclosure.

(c) The cable sealing end does not introduce moisture into the gas in the senclosure.

(d) The sealing end is capable of withstanding the cable test voltages and dpressures without damage including overpressure of +30% of normal pressure.

(e) Disconnecting links that can be renewed/replaced in a time that does nothours for the complete operation, i.e., including degassing, vacuum,

Both the earthed and high voltage ends of the cable sealing end shall adeqthe SF6 gas insulation by bolted flanges provided with multiple rings and gashall be coordinated with the cable sealing end design/manufacturer.

exclud



cleaned of all scale and rust and after cleaning and priming, shall be finished with a hard

ompletion of erection and testing of the

coordinated by the switchgear supplier so s or HV power cables

eating where single core cables are adopted,

ible ess shall be of 12 kV

between phases. Screwed, tapered or stepped brass wiping glands shall be provided and, chamber in an

strip shall be provided and combined armour and earthing

be capable of withstanding a dry high voltage test of 10 kV DC for

thing the body of each sealing end or cable box.

Moulded insulators used in the manufacture of cable sealing ends and terminal boxes

nditions, y to arise when

in the Site conditions and shall be designed so as to facilitate cleaning.

as been rejected, no further satisfy the lators which have lators being

ll normally be from a remote or supervisory position but facilities shall be provided for operation locally by electrical release and any direct manual release from stored energy devices when the circuit breaker is isolated for maintenance. It shall be possible to padlock each local control function in the open position. Position indication of

devices shall be provided via auxiliary contacts on their operating mechanisms and the Contract shall include the supply and fitting of the necessary local/remote and remote/supervisory control switches, as well as, of the necessary auxiliary switches, contactors, etc., as well as, their wiring and necessary cabling to the respective equipment terminal boards.

setting paint compatible with the filling medium.

End covers shall be provided to enable cswitchgear in the absence of cable terminations.

The design and sealing end pressure shall be as to minimize the risk of SF6 gas penetration into the transformerand to accommodate any movement due to expansion.

Where required to reduce local hnon-magnetic gland plates shall be provided or alternatively, not-magnetic inserts.

5.5.2 Insulation and Earthing

Sealing ends and cable boxes shall be provided with all fittings including flexconnections where necessary. Approved means for grading the voltage strprovided at the terminal insulation of cables operating at voltages in excess

where required by the Engineer, glands shall be insulated from the box or approved manner. An earthingclamps shall be fitted to all armoured cable terminations.

Gland insulation shallone minute during cable sheath test.

Provision shall be made for ear

5.5.3 Material

shall be sound and free from defects.

The insulators and fittings shall be unaffected by atmospheric and climatic coozone, acids or alkalis, dust deposits or rapid temperature changes likeloperating

When an insulator bearing a certain identification mark hinsulators bearing this mark shall be submitted, and the Contractor shallEngineer that adequate steps will be taken to mark or segregate the insubeen rejected in such a way that there shall be no possibility of such insure-submitted.

5.6 LOCAL, REMOTE, AND SUPERVISORY CONTROL

Operation wi

these



5.7 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

e of not less aker offered.

hall specify the ed by climate and environmental conditions.

ple of self-generating gas pressure within the tinction, e.g., puffer type.

peration and the ers.

certificates issued by an accredited Testing ding to the rated

nerous than the tender.

ly stated in the the TRV to which

the most severe -to-clear factor

circuit breaker to limit or control the rate of rise of restriking ker contacts shall likewise be to the Engineer's approval

ates.

g transformer rise will not exceed

Interrupting Duties

In addition to the requirements of EN 62271 - 100 for interrupting terminal faults, circuit rs shall be capable of coping with the interrupting duties produced by the switching

of transformer magnetizing current and of capacitive current associated with overhead line-charging, cable-charging, or capacitor banks as may be applicable. The circuit breakers shall have a rated cable charging breaking current of at least 160 A at rated voltage without exceeding the maximum switching overvoltage, which is included in EN 62271 – 100.

5.7.1 General

Circuit breakers shall be of the SF type. Operating mechanisms shall be with individual 6self-contained spring operated mechanisms.

Tenderers shall include proof that a satisfactory period of commercial servicthan three years has been obtained with the type and rating of the circuit bre

Circuit breakers shall be designed for minimum maintenance. Tenderers smaintenance requirements necessitat

Circuit breakers shall operate on the princiinterrupter for arc ex

5.7.2 Operating Duty and Performance

5.7.2.1 General

The requirements of EN 62271-100 with respect to type tests, service, omaking and breaking of fault current shall apply to the specified circuit break

5.7.2.2 Test Certificates

Circuit breakers shall be covered by testAuthority certifying the operation of the circuit breaker at duties corresponbreaking capacities of the circuit breakers. The test duty shall be not less othe requirements of EN 62271-100. Test Certificates shall be submitted with

5.7.2.3 Rate-of-Rise of Restriking Voltage

Attention is drawn to the requirements of International Standards wherein the standard values of rated transient recovery voltage are stated. Where not specificaltest certificates submitted with the Tender, the Tenderer shall certify that the circuit breaker was subjected during the short circuit tests was condition that could be imposed by the available test plant for a first phaseof 1,5.

Any device incorporated in a voltage across the circuit breaand full descriptions of any such device shall be given with the test certific

Evidence shall be submitted with the tender to verify that when interruptinsecondary faults the transient recovery voltage conditions that could athe tested interrupting capabilities of the circuit breaker proposed.

5.7.2.4

breake



Circuit breakers shall be capable of interrupting currents associated with shoand the out-of-phase switch

rt-line faults ing conditions that may occur in service. Circuit breakers shall

statement of the accumulative breaking capacity, which the le of, before maintenance is required.

.5 Opening Time

ible and shall preferably not exceed

te arcing contacts shall be provided on circuit breakers to protect the main e that arcing after

cing zone between the arcing

as or ingress of

6 ssures outside

Where single rods or tubes are utilized for operating the moving contacts of circuit be securely pinned at each end to prevent rotation or displacement of

ontacts or other re fixed to the tubes.

in this

ing releases

delayed auto-reclose whether or not this feature is specified in the Schedules. When specified in the Schedules, mechanisms shall also be suitable for high-speed three-phase auto-reclose to the duty cycle stated.

tripping pulse being applied to the circuit breaker during the closing stroke, or of the mechanism failing to latch in the closed position, the circuit breaker shall open fully and in such a manner as to be capable of interrupting its rated breaking current.

be of the restrike-free type only.

Test certificates demonstrating the ability of the circuit breakers for the above duties shall be submitted with the Tender.

Tenders should include acircuit breakers are capab

5.7.2

Circuit breaker opening time shall be as fast as poss50 ms.

5.7.3 Contacts, Arcing Chambers, and Insulation

Separacontacts from burning during operation and shall be arranged to ensurcommutation of the main current always occurs in the arcontacts.

Designs shall permit rapid repair or replacement of contacts of circuit breakers and removal of complete interrupting chambers of SF6 circuit breakers.

Static and moving seals shall be designed to prevent any leakage of gmoisture whilst in service and without deterioration.

Pressure sensitive devices to prevent switching at SF gas operating prethe declared limits of operation shall be included.

breakers, they shallthe contacts. Tubes shall be plugged in an approved manner where cparts a

5.7.4 Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanisms

5.7.4.1 General

The circuit breaker operating mechanism shall be one of the types specifiedChapter.

Circuit breaker operations shall be made with the shunt closing and openenergized at 110%, 100% and 85% of the rated supply voltage.

All mechanisms shall be suitable for use on circuits fitted with

The mechanism and its control scheme shall be such that, in the event of an electrical



The mechanism and its control scheme shall be such that the mechanrepeated attempts to close the circuit breaker when the control switch is heldCLOSE position in the event of failure

ism shall not make in the

to latch on the first closing attempt or in the event of

coils and ent temperature

any value within the voltage range stipulated of the

, utilizing such stainless steel, brass, or gunmetal, where necessary, to prevent sticking due

ical shock to a es, vibration,

vided on each circuit breaker . The colour green.

aker shall preferably be driven by a single mechanism coupled to the three

means of position upling

ible to make

the circuits ree phases). In

shall be made for te alarm in the

event of any phase failing out of synchronism.

perations as sign of the ed

sulting from short circuits, circuit breaker

t breaker operating mechanisms capable of storing energy for at least two complete s incapable of

tion DC supply for recharging the mechanism; other auxiliary mechanisms shall preferably utilize the LV

If a circuit breaker closing mechanism is not fully recharged for further operation within a predetermined time after a closing cycle, the mechanism shall be locked out and an alarm initiated.

When in operational service all mechanisms shall be arranged to lock out should the energy system employed reach a state that it is inadequate to successfully complete a

a trip signal being given to the circuit breaker.

The electrical closing and tripping devices, including direct acting solenoid solenoid operated valves, shall be capable of operation over the ambirange when the voltage at their terminals is in EN 62271 - 100, and in addition over the range of all operating conditionsbatteries and chargers supplied under this Contract.

Each part of the operating mechanisms shall be of substantial constructionmaterials as to rust of corrosion. The overall design shall be such as to reduce mechanminimum and shall prevent inadvertent operation due to fault current stressor other causes.

An approved mechanically operated indicator shall be prooperating mechanism to show whether the circuit breaker is open or closedfor the open position shall be (0) red and for the closed position shall be (I)

Operation counters shall be fitted to all circuit breaker mechanisms.

The circuit brephases.

Each phase shall incorporate a mechanical indicator or other approvedindication where operating mechanism designs do not utilize mechanical cobetween phases.

Where circuit breakers comprise three independent units, it shall be possindependent adjustments to each unit to ensure simultaneous operation of the three phases. For three-phase operation, the three units shall make and breaksimultaneously. Pole discrepancies shall be less than 5 ms on closing (ththe event of any phase failing to complete a closing operation, provisionautomatic tripping of all three phases of the circuit breaker or for a remo

Power closing mechanisms shall be recharged automatically for further osoon as the circuit breaker has completed the closing operation and the declosing mechanisms shall be such that the circuit breaker cannot be operatinadvertently due to external shock forces reoperation, or any other cause.

CircuiCLOSE-OPEN operations without recharging are preferred. Mechanismstoring energy for at least two complete operations shall utilize the substa

AC supplies for recharging duties.



close or trip operation under all specified duties. Alarms shall be providedlock out condition and advance warning that the conditions are deterioratinglock out condition. Alarms shall be delayed for su

to indicate a towards a

fficient time for the energy system to be

The circuit breakers shall be provided with facilities for measurement of contact resistance

circuit utton and facilities shall be provided for locking

trip mechanism l tripping inoperative.

o trip coils

lly powered shall not be possible

lose a circuit breaker when in normal service condition. Suitable interlock shall during maintenance.

sm housings, these shall be permanently

sing.

ans shall be mechanism

e equipment. A spare

ith the circuit breaker in either the ting springs shall

peration. The 30 seconds.

and release re fully charged.

a fully ation caused by

Means shall be provided for discharging the spring when the circuit breaker is in the open position without the circuit breaker attempting to close.

The state of the charge of the operating springs shall be indicated by a mechanical device which shows "SPRING CHARGED" when operation is permissible and "SPRING FREE"

operation is not possible. The indications shall be visible through glazed access doors or openings of the mechanisms cabinet. Provision shall also be made for remote and supervisory indication of the state of the charge of the operating springs.

restored to normal conditions following breaker operation.

and timing tests without removal of covers or SF6 gas.

Means shall be provided for the local manual "non-electrical" tripping of the breaker, preferably by a shrouded push boff this means of tripping. It shall not be possible to lock mechanically theso as to render the electrica

The circuit breaker shall be provided with two separate tripping coils. The twshall be kept electrically separate.

Where possible, circuit breakers shall be provided with slow acting manuaoperating devices for inspection and maintenance purposes only. It to slow cbe provided between slow and fast acting circuit breaker operation

Where heaters are provided in mechaniconnected.

Means for locking shall be provided for the doors of each mechanism hou

5.7.4.2 Spring Operated Mechanisms

Spring operated mechanisms shall be arranged for motor charging but meprovided for charging by hand. No electrical or mechanical operation of theduring this process shall endanger the operator or damage thnormally open spring-drive limit switch shall be provided.

It shall be possible to charge the operating springs wopen or closed positions. In normal operation, recharging of the operacommence immediately and automatically upon completion of the closing otime required to power charge the spring should not exceed

Closure whilst a spring charging operation is in progress shall be prevented of the springs shall not be possible until they a

Spring closing mechanisms shall be designed such that it is not possible forcharged spring to be released inadvertently due to external shock or vibrthe breaker opening under short circuit conditions or any other cause.

when



5.8 LOCAL CONTROL CUBICLES

All elements necessary for the control and monitoring of the bay shall be holocal control cubicle which in itself should be integrated with the switchgeunits should be connected to the local control cubicles by means of control cables with

used in the ar bay. The bay

rcuit breaker control

The following essential functions shall be implemented on the bay control level:

g elements

(b) Display of all indications necessary for operation and monitoring

curing each control switch in the "neutral" olator and

:

and any associated manual operating on.

itions.

(e) Gas system isolating valves in open or closed positions.

or maintenance with suitable maintenance shall be fit for

ce of any

ors and aking load

current.

Power operated drives shall be provided which shall be suitable for local, remote, and supervisory control (supervisory control of earth switches is not required) and should be fitted with a removable emergency manual operation facility. It should be possible to lock-off the manual and local facilities and padlock the mechanism in the open and closed positions with the motor automatically disengaged. The motor-operating mechanism shall be provided with an interlocking magnet for continuous duty to prevent mechanically the

coded multiple connectors manufactured and tested at the factory.

Control and monitoring shall be preferably be achieved by digital ciand monitoring devices.

(a) Fully interlocked local actuation and position indication of all switchin

(c) Transfer of all bay information to the substation control and protection equipment

5.9 LOCKING FACILITIES

Locking devices shall be provided for seposition, each control selector switch in all positions and for securing each isearthing switch operating handle in either the "open" or "closed" position.

The following locking facilities shall be provided

(a) Circuit breaker mechanisms in the open position device in the neutral positi

(b) Isolating switches in both open and closed pos

(c) Control position selector switches in all positions provided.

(d) Operating cubicle access doors.

Locks shall be designed, constructed and located on the equipment so that they will remain serviceable in the climatic conditions specified without operationfor continuous periods of up to two years andindefinite service.

5.10 ISOLATING AND EARTHING SWITCHES

Isolating and earthing switches shall be arranged to permit safe maintenansection of the equipment when the remainder is alive.

Isolating devices shall be interlocked with associated circuit breakers, isolatearthing switches, as necessary, to prevent the possibility of making or bre



manual operation and at least electrically the motor operation when the interlocking

ual operation, the electrical

ith an alarm contact.

d.

mechanism shall complete its action although the interlocking voltage is off-circuited during operation.

ing. An actuated hall not affect any operation when there is no voltage in the motor circuit.

the closed

and shall be clearly

Isolating Switches

d shall and EN

live, but will not connectors or ions which the

ers and the ith such

aintained at full gas pressure, to carry ons of busbar,

g capability shall be the equipment

, by forces l be self-locking in both the "open" and "closed"

ously.

Disconnectors incorporating metallic screens between contacts shall be interlocked to prevent operation of the metallic screen or closing of contacts if the contacts are not fully

r if the metallic screen is not fully withdrawn.

The insulation level for the isolating distance between disconnector contacts shall be 15% higher than that for the remainder of the equipment

In the event of gas leakage the disconnector shall be capable of withstanding the rated phase-to-phase voltage at normal atmospheric SF6 gas pressure.

magnet is off-circuited.

Wherever the manual crank is inserted into the drive for mansupply for the control of the device shall be automatically disconnected.

Each isolator and earth switch shall have its own separate power supply. The motor circuit shall be provided with a two-pole overload-tripping device w

Where a chain of interlocking contacts is used each switch shall be sub-fuse

The motor-operating mechanism shall be of pulse-operated type, that is, the

There shall be separate electrical circuits for motor, control, and interlockcontrol pulse s

The colour for the open position (0) of the disconnector shall be red and for position (I) green.

Local mechanical position indicators shall be provided for all switchesvisible from ground level.

5.10.1

Isolating Switches (disconnectors) shall be of the metal enclosed design angenerally comply with the requirements of EN 62271 - 102, EN 62271 - 10462271 - 203.

Isolating switches shall be arranged for operation while the equipment is abe required to break current other than the charging currents of associatedload currents shared by parallel circuits under the varying operating conditspecified interlocking permits.

Isolators shall be housed in compartments partitioned from the circuit breakbusbars or circuit side with which they are associated. It shall be possible wpartitioning and with the isolator compartments mout high voltage insulation withstand tests on outgoing circuits or on sectiwithout taking adjacent equipment or sections of busbars out of service.

When called for load making and breaking switches with fault makinprovided which shall be suitable for switching on load without detriment toand under normal duties up to the circuit rating specified.

Switch mechanisms shall be so designed that the isolator cannot be opened or closed inadvertently due to forces which may occur in service or under short-circuitsdue to currents passing through it and shalposition. The mechanism shall open and close all three phases simultane

open o



5.10.2 Maintenance Earthing Switches

Earthing switches shall generally comply with the requirements of EN 62271 - 102 and EN

nted shall be sulated switchgear in order to

ut it shall be

hing switch, when in the closed position shall have a short-time current withstand of contacts

rthing switches to ements, and

t the necessity to open gas filled compartments. Detailed ule. Fully

ed designs of earthing switches shall incorporate removable earth links suitable for

ne for safety

sociated circuit breakers and ible to close an earthing switch onto a live circuit

thing switch is closed.

ons shall be

danger immediate

e operation.

ctions of busbar by it breakers, shall incorporate high speed earthing switches as

specified above. The short-circuit making current of the earth switch shall be according to

low voltage ll be insulated from earth and incorporate a disconnectable earth strap.

These earthing switches shall otherwise be in accordance with the requirements for nance earthing switches.

5.11 INTERLOCKING

An interlocking scheme shall be provided which takes into account the following basic requirements:

62271 - 203.

Earthing switches integrally mounted with disconnectors or separately mouprovided for earthing already isolated sections of gas-inprovide safe maintenance. Motor operated mechanisms shall be provided bpossible to operate the switch manually in emergency conditions.

The eartas specified with a minimum duration of one second. No burning or welding shall occur.

Provisions for testing purposes shall be incorporated in the design of eafacilitate primary current injection tests, contact timing, voltage drop measurother low voltage checks withoumeans of performing these tests shall be provided in the appropriate Schedinsulatthe short-time current rating specified.

It shall be possible to apply maintenance earths on either side of the test zoreasons.

All earthing switchgear shall be interlocked with asdisconnectors so that it shall not be possor to make the circuit alive when the ear

Facilities for padlocking earthing switches in the open and closed positiprovided together with means for isolating the motor drives.

5.10.3 High-Speed Earth Switches

For safe earthing of the busbars and feeders, high-speed fault-making spring driven earth switches shall be provided. Such operation of the earthing switch shall not enadjacent compartments, cause contamination, or damage to the extent that removal from service for overhaul is necessary. The mechanisms shall be electrically operated with provision for local manual operation. With earthing switches of the high-speed fault-making type it shall not be possible to complete a slow clos

Each section of busbar, which can be electrically isolated from other semeans of isolators or circu

EN 62271 – 102.

Facilities integral with the earthing switch for primary current injection or checks sha

mainte



(a) To safeguard maintenance personnel who may be working on one section of the

hing sequences which could lead to a hazardous situation to

ks and preferably of ype for maintenance safety interlocks but shall be effective when the

te or

is used so that

ly and a system ation of ons to any

bolt interlocks shall be energized only when the operating handle of the mechanism is brought to the

echanism is bolt can be

ociated circuit breakers and isolators in

ess the

rs is specified, ar coupling

ralleled by means sbar isolating devices unless a parallel circuit is already closed through the circuit

In all other ar sectioning

all be so interlocked that their respective circuit breakers can only be coupled to one set of busbars at a time. It shall not be possible to parallel sections

the busbar coupling and sectioning equipment.

ar isolators of a

5.12 AUXILIARY SWITCHES AND CONTACTORS

5.12.1 General

Circuit breakers, isolators, and earthing devices shall be provided with suitably rated auxiliary switches, to relay circuit information for the purpose of control, protection, indication, and metering at the substation site as required by the relevant section of the Specification.

equipment with other sections live.

(b) To prevent incorrect switcplant, equipment and personnel.

The interlocking scheme shall be electrical for all operational interlocthe mechanical tequipment is being controlled locally, under emergency hand or from a remosupervisory position.

All mechanical interlocks shall be applied at the point at which hand power stress cannot be applied to parts remote from that point.

All electrical interlocks shall so function as to interrupt the operating suppof interlocks shall be provided which shall cover the emergency hand operapparatus which is normally power operated. Failure of supply or connectielectrical interlock shall not produce or permit faulty operation. Electrical

working position. Visible indication shall be provided to show whether the mlocked or free. Means, normally padlocked, shall be provided whereby theoperated in the emergency of a failure of interlock supplies.

All isolating devices shall be interlocked with assthe same station so that it shall not be possible to make or break current on an isolating device unless a parallel circuit in that station is already closed.

Earthing switches shall be interlocked such that they cannot be operated unlassociated isolator is open and line voltage is not present.

In double busbar stations where provision for on-load changeover of busbathe busbar isolating devices shall be so interlocked with the appropriate busband sectioning equipment that sections or sets of busbars cannot be paof the bubreakers of the appropriate busbar coupling and sectioning equipment. circumstances, the busbar isolating devices of equipment other than busband coupling equipment sh

of busbars except through the circuit breakers of

The busbar selector isolators of a circuit are not expected to remain closed once load transfer is completed and an alarm shall provide a warning if both busbtransferred circuit are left closed.



The fitting of auxiliary relays to achieve the number of auxiliary contacts required will not

n both and shall be

iliary switches

2271 - 102.

echanisms of

t be accepted er.

cal

ovided to ipment, approved

shall be capable of operation within the same voltage ils. The auxiliary

itive both directions. All adjustments to linkages shall be preset and locked at the

te after nection of the drive linkage in accordance with

. The take-off l drive shaft of

Unless otherwise agreed, passing contacts shall be so arranged that the time the contacts

be arranged e steps but each complete bank shall be preset at

efore make, the period

erials with ance may be used subject to approval. The thickness of the facing

material shall be such that at the end of the mechanical and electrical life tests there is still a layer of facing material at the point of contact.

cts shall have a self-cleaning action and have adequate contact pressure.

Auxiliary switches shall be designed for use under the specified climatic conditions and the contacts shall be either of the totally enclosed type or provided with tightly fitting covers over the contacts.

be acceptable.

Auxiliary switches shall be of an approved design and be positively driven idirections. All such auxiliary switches shall be enclosed in dust free housing mounted in an accessible position clear of the opposing mechanisms. Auxshall be strong and have a positive wiping action when closing. Contacts, which signal the position of an isolator or earth switch, shall operate in accordance with EN 6

Switches shall be provided to interrupt the supply of current to the tripping mthe circuit breakers directly after operation of the latter has been completed.

Auxiliary contactors shall be provided only where the circuit requirement cannot be met by the auxiliary switch arrangements and multiple contactors and relays will noin lieu of the auxiliary switches except as specifically approved by the Engine

All auxiliary switches/contacts shall be wired out to a terminal board in the lomarshalling kiosk whether they are in use or not in the first instance and shall be arranged in the same sequence on all equipment. Where adjustable linkages are prfacilitate the timing of the auxiliary switches with respect to the main equlocking devices shall be fitted.

Auxiliary switches and contactorslimits as specified for the associated circuit breaker close and trip coswitches shall comply with the following requirements:

5.12.2 Design and Construction

The mechanical drive to auxiliary switches shall be of robust design with posoperation in works where practicable. It shall not be necessary to disturb this setting at sicommissioning. Disconnection and reconthe manufacturer's instructions shall not entail any disturbance of the settingfor the drive to the auxiliary switches shall be as near as possible to the finathe mechanism.

are in engagement shall be a minimum of 10 ms.

The switch assembly shall be so constructed that each individual contact canto operate relative to the drive in suitablthe manufacturer's works. Where contacts are arranged for break bwhen both contacts are open shall tend towards the minimum practicable.

Contacts shall be faced with either silver or silver alloy. Alternative matcomparable perform

Conta



It is intended that designs of auxiliary switches to this specification should require little or

e lubricated for shall not adversely affect the electrical performance of the switch.

ubjected.

s shall have adequate making and breaking capacity and adequate through ample, current transformer, interlocking and

required for the substation control and monitoring, type of contacts.

ENT TRANSFORMERS

nstruments requirements of

this Specification.

ulated in epoxy located on ge.

e current rating sformers

ith currents up to rmer circuits up to

ent to the sformer shall be

ective terminals and in addition labels shall be fitted in a former.

d shall be nd as near to

nuts, and

Magnetization and core loss curves and secondary resistance shall be provided for each type and rating of current transformer. Where the Contractor wishes to provide current transformer ratios differing from those specified he should first obtain approval in writing

e Engineer for each specific instance.

The characteristics of current transformers shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval together with details of the protection, instrumentation or measuring equipment with which each current transformer is to be used.

no maintenance and adjustment on site.

Bearing and sliding surfaces shall either not require lubrication or shall blife. The lubrication

5.12.3 Duties

Switches shall be suitable for the duties under which they are likely to be s

The switchecurrent capacity suitable for use in, for excontrol circuits.

5.12.4 Number of Contacts and Timing

In addition to the number of contactsthere should be at least 20% extra contacts available as spares of each

5.13 CURR

Current transformers shall be suitable for the operation of protective gear iand/or metering equipment and shall comply with EN 60044 – 1 and the

Current transformers shall be of the toroidal core type preferably encapsresin. Where indicated on the associated schematic diagram they shall beboth sides of the circuit breaker to avoid "blind zones" in protection covera

Current transformers including primary conductors shall have a short timand duration not less than that of the associated switchgear. All current transhall have sufficient overload capacity to permit continuous operation w120% of the rated current of the associated equipment and for transfo150% of the maximum continuous rating of the associated transformer.

All current transformers shall be installed with the P1 (one) terminals adjacbusbars. The polarity of the primary and secondary windings of each tranclearly indicated at the respreadily accessible position to indicate the ratio, class and duty of each trans

Current transformer secondary circuits shall be complete in themselves, anearthed at one point only, through links situated in an accessible position athe current transformer as possible. Each separate circuit shall be earthed through a separate link, suitably labelled. The links shall be of the bolted type, have M6provision for attaching test leads.

from th



Where specified in the schedules, current transformers having accuracy cla0,1 and 1 may be provided with an extended current rating in accordance wiup to an equivale

sses between th EN 60044

nt primary current rating not exceeding that of the associated switchgear

rrent

fic instance.

rrent and uit level of the

system. The accuracy class of all protection current transformers shall be 5P or better and res applies to the

rovided is ts.

Where multi ratio secondary windings are specified, a label shall be provided at the tion required appropriate

means of cm +/- 5 cm from

e Local Control cubicle. All terminal boards in Relay and Control s, should be boards shall have d on load. The

d be

tability to ensured,

ere supplied, the ecurity factor of

dings are tendered, tion to the number

adjustment shall be made on the secondary side.

ain bushing with terminal

pproval, before commencement of manufacture, the calculations on the burdens of all current transformers, which are

It shall be possible to carry out primary injection testing of the CTs when the switchgear is fully assembled, or retesting of the CTs during the service life of the switchgear without interruption of supply to adjacent circuits or to dismantle the switchgear or to break down the cable termination, if applicable. The appropriate Schedule shall be completed to state the testing facilities provided in the design for site testing.

circuit current rating.

Current transformers for balanced protective schemes, including neutral cutransformers where appropriate, shall have identical turns ratio and shall have magnetization characteristics to the approval of the Engineer for each speci

Current transformers provided for protective gear purposes shall have overcusaturation factors not less than those corresponding to the design short circ

with an accuracy limit factor of 20. The rated burden of the protective colower rated current.

The Contractor shall ensure that the capacity of the current transformers padequate for operation of the associated protective devices and instrumen

secondary terminals of the current transformer indicating clearly the connecfor each ratio. These connections and the ratio in use shall be shown on theschematic and connection diagrams.

All connections from secondary windings shall be brought out and taken by separate insulated leads to a terminal board, mounted at a height of 100the gland plate, in thPanels, which carry shorting/disconnecting links for Current transformermounted at 100 cm +/- 5 cm from the respective gland plates. Terminal shorting/disconnecting links to allow testing with the circuit in service anrated insulation and inter-turn insulation levels for secondary windings shoulaccording to EN 60044-1

Where instruments or transducers are connected to protection CTs their suiwithstand high current generated by power system fault conditions shall beotherwise, saturable interposing current transformers fitted. Whinterposing winding shall be earthed at the control panel. The instrument sthe measuring cores in all connections shall not be greater than 5.

Where more than one ratio is specified and post CTs with multiple winit shall be possible to select either ratio for each winding without alteraof primary turns. All ratio

Neutral current transformers are to be of the outdoor totally enclosed, porceltype complete with suitable mounting steelwork as specified and complete box for secondary connections.

The Contractor shall submit for the Engineer’s a

supplied under the Contract.



The current transformer particulars as specified in EN 60044 shall be given on an accessible plate mounted external to the current transformer.

be compatible with the switchgear gas in either

g switching for this duty.

nnected

econdary hich are of the late

arly break type shall be employed.

ar, synchronizing

directional earth winding shall be provided.

rs shall not exceed the permissible

protection duty

connected han that stated in the Schedules.

ncluding ccount in

ous heating

provided as o indicate their

arate earth nnected

together at a single earth point in the local control cubicle. Earthing of the VT HV winding e through a link separate from the LV winding.

A minimum of two suitable main secondary miniature circuit breakers per phase shall be provided to allow implementation of secondary circuit failure supervision with self-reset alarm indication. Protection, synchronizing, instrumentation, etc, circuits shall be distributed and protected between as many secondary circuits as required in order to satisfy the independency and reliability of the individual systems. Suitable type of auxiliary

5.14 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

Voltage transformers shall comply with EN 60044 and the requirements of the Specification.

Voltage transformers of metal-enclosed design shall and contain no hygroscopic insulating material, which could affect the SF6 the voltage transformer or the associated switchgear chamber.

Electromagnetic voltage transformers shall be capable of discharging the capacitance of lines, cables, and switchgear, which may remain connected to them durinoperations. The Contractor shall declare any limitations of the equipment

It shall not be possible for voltage transformer secondary windings to be codirectly in parallel, except through interposing voltage transformers associated with the synchronizing scheme. To prevent any possibility of back energizing a VT swinding via synchronizing circuits, circuit breaker auxiliary contacts wmake e

Voltage transformers shall be suitable for the operation of protective geequipment, voltage regulating equipment, instruments including transducers, and metering.

When a polarizing source voltage is required for directional overcurrent orfault protection a broken delta connected residual voltage

The ratio and phase angle errors of voltage transformelimits prescribed in EN 60044 - 2. All transformers shall have measuring accuracy class between 0,1 and 1,0 as specified in the Schedules. Where required forthe relevant protection accuracy will also be stated in the Schedules.

All transformers shall have an output rating adequate to cater for the total burden, which shall not be less t

Maximum burdens imposed by transducers upon VT secondary circuits (itransducer auxiliary power source where applicable) should be taken into adetermining the output rating.

Voltage transformers shall be capable of carrying continuously without injuri5O% burden above their rated burden.

Suitable voltage transformer secondary miniature circuit breakers shall beclose to each voltage transformer as possible and shall be labelled tfunction, phase identification, etc. For single-phase voltage transformers seplinks for each secondary shall be provided and each neutral lead shall be co

shall b



contacts of adequate number shall be provided with the MCBs for satisfyinrequirements of the protection synchrocheck and alarm system

g the s. It shall not be possible

directly to the wired through

s open.

hey shall however ed in the protected zone afforded by the feeder protection.

sociated

d by suitable lose as possible condary

including both ends of the secondary winding shall be brought out to ected to

metallic label ating the connections

utral point of each voltage transformer secondary circuit shall be earthed at one d design.

situated in an accessible position and suitably labelled.

l be provided for each voltage transformer for the Engineer’s

switchgear shall be

M

e electrically tem. Any

minals on any part of the equipment required for this purpose shall be

If due to system conditions it is deemed necessary to incorporate surge arresters at the GIS Substation in addition to those at the line entries then these shall be of the metal

ed design.

Surge arresters shall be of the gapless metal oxide type. Metal oxide arresters shall be of proven design with type tests to EN 60099-4 or equivalent, demonstrating that thermal runaway or premature aging does not occur in service. They shall have proven records for the specified site conditions.

for the voltage transformer secondary circuits to be connected in parallel.

All transformers shall have a rated voltage factor of not less than 1,2 continuously and 1,5 for 30 seconds.

When meters are provided with voltage signals from VTs not connectedsame circuit as the current transformers then the voltage signals shall be auxiliary contacts to break the circuit automatically when the circuit breaker i

Voltage transformers on feeder circuits shall be located on the feeder side of the circuit breaker outside the protected zone covered by the busbar protection. Tbe includ

Primary connections shall have the same short time current rating as the asswitchgear.

Each secondary winding of the voltage transformers shall be protecteapproved miniature circuit breakers and links, which shall be located as cto the voltage transformer, preferably within a suitable terminal box. All sewinding connections,the miniature circuit breakers and links. The MCBs and links shall be connapproved isolating terminal blocks for termination of multicore cables. A shall be provided and fixed at the voltage transformer clearly indicrequired for each winding.

The nepoint only at the local control panel via a separate removable link of approveThe earth link shall be

A magnetization curve shalapproval.

The location of the voltage transformers to be installed on the primaryapproved by the Engineer.

5.15 EARTHING SYSTE

All metal parts other than those forming part of any electrical circuit shall bconnected to each other and shall also be connected to the earthing sysnecessary terprovided by the Contractor.

5.16 SURGE ARRESTERS

enclos



Metal-enclosed arresters shall be in their own gas zone, which shall be monitored. to atmosphere.

ions specified

current of 10.000 ef devices.

rrester

esistive current

d in the surge arrester monitoring units, and should be cordless transceiver, which then should be transferred to

mergency

obility within the filtering,

ined and comprise g and controls etc.,

ified. The unit eplenishing

allow for circulation pressure.

he largest quantity of gas 20 mm Hg. These

an operating time in excess of 4,5 h. The plant should olume

hould be capable of returning gas to the equipment and recirculating used gas through filters in

to normal

filling and evacuating procedures shall be provided at the time of tendering.

specified additional mobile or static storage shall be provided for use in combination with the gas trolley and to extend storage facilities.

All necessary pipe work, flexible hoses, couplings, valves, pressure and vacuum gauges shall be included to enable interconnection between the switchgear compartments, gas trolley and storage tanks and the cylinders provided by major producers of SF6 gas.

Operation of over-pressure devices shall only allow the release of gasses

Arresters shall be entirely suitable for operation under the system conditincluding system voltage rises on unloading long transmission lines charging currents without damage.

The arresters shall be of the station class, shall have a rated dischargeA, at least discharge class III, and shall be equipped with pressure reli

Individual surge arrester monitoring units shall be connected to each surge aseparately.

The surge arrester monitoring units should record the number of discharges, the amplitude of the surges together with their date and time, the total leakage current and the rthrough the arrester.

The measurements should be storecollected with the aid of a handheld a computer for statistical analysis.

5.17 GAS HANDLING EQUIPMENT

Gas handling equipment shall be provided at the GIS installation to permit etopping up of gas in the switchgear in the event of leakage.

In addition, a mobile gas-handling unit, the size of which shall allow full marea of the installation, shall be included for the complete sampling, testing, drying, extraction, and refilling of SF6 gas. This unit shall be self-contaof wheeled trolley housing, all necessary compressors, gauges, pipintogether with a gas storage tank with usable capacity not less than that specshall be capable of evacuating air from the switchgear compartments and rthem with gas at the end of a maintenance period. Facilities shall alsoof the gas from a compartment through filters in order to extract moisture

This plant should be capable of evacuating and storing tspecified and of evacuating the largest volume specified to a vacuum oftwo operations should not require also be capable of extracting air at atmospheric pressure from the largest vchamber to a vacuum of 1 mm Hg in a time not exceeding 2 h. The plant s

order to achieve the specified moisture level for the gas in service.

The filling time for the largest volume specified from a vacuum of 1 mm Hg working pressure should not exceed 2 h.

Details of the filling and evacuating apparatus included together with a description of the

Where



An approved portable SF6 gas leakage detector shall also be provided for each substation.



6. OUTDOOR SWITCHGEAR & EQUIPMENT

tinuous operation comply with this

ns from le.

uipment shall be

osition of plant in the substation is to be such that the operation of any item of ondition that could

ted

The Contractor is to ensure that the complete substation installation will satisfy the ecification and the appropriate Standards in respect of insulation,

tract Price.

the access facilities shall permit safe s are alive.

han those in the sions given in this

Specification and attached drawings whichever is the greater.

nd equipment on the substation site shall provide for sections of equipment

rest live rd section clearances.

e shall be carried out

6.4.1 General

-breakers shall be of the SF6 type with individual self contained. Operating mechanisms shall be with individual self-contained spring operated mechanisms. Hydraulic operating mechanisms although not preferred shall be considered.

Circuit breakers shall be designed for minimum maintenance. Tenderers shall specify the maintenance requirements necessitated by climate and environmental conditions.

6.1 SWITCHGEAR - DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE

The switchgear shall be suitable for outdoor location and capable of conunder the climatic conditions existing on site. It shall be designed toSpecification and relevant International Standards where applicable. Deviatiothese Specifications and Standards shall be stated in the appropriate schedu

In all cases the ancillary plant necessary to complete installation of the eqincluded in the Contract.

The dispplant under the specified service conditions shall in no way create a cadversely affect the performance of adjacent circuit breakers or any associaequipment.

requirements of this Spfault levels, mechanical stress etc., and any additional equipment found to be necessary to obtain these conditions shall be deemed to have been included in the Con

6.2 CLEARANCES

The clearances and positions of apparatus including maintenance of any section of the apparatus while the remaining section

Electrical clearances between live metal work and earth shall be not less tappropriate sections of BS 7354, or the clearances and dimen

The layout and design of plant aready access for operation and maintenance whilst the remaining are alive. Working clearances provided between isolated equipment and neametal work shall not be less than the British Standa

6.3 RADIO INTERFERENCE

Equipment shall be designed so as to minimise electrical discharge and radio interference. Type tests for electrical discharge and radio interferencby the Contractor and submit relevant test report with tender.

6.4 CIRCUIT-BREAKERS

Circuit



Circuit breakers shall operate on the principle of self-generating gas pressure within the

ircuit-breaker incapable of

performing in accordance with its rated duty. Gas monitors shall be temperature

ressure prior

f moisture and the decomposition products of in the gas shall be achieved by integral filters.

peration and the breakers.

certificates certifying the operation of the s of the

ts of EN

e requirements of International Standards wherein the

derer shall certify that cuit tests was

ere condition that could be imposed by the available test plant for a first f 1.5.

he rate or rise of it breaker contacts shall likewise be to the

iven with the

hot

Circuit breakers must be capable of coping with the interrupting duties produced by -synchronism conditions associated with auto-reclosure.

6.4.2.5 Interrupting Duties

In addition to the requirements of EN 62271 - 100 for interrupting terminal faults, circuit-breakers shall be capable of coping with the interrupting duties produced by

interrupter for arc extinction, e.g. puffer type or thermal blast.

A lockout feature shall be incorporated to prevent operation of the cwhenever the gas pressure falls to a value below which it would be

compensated.

An alarm feature shall also be incorporated to give indication of failing gas pto the lockout of the circuit breaker.

Suitable facilities shall be included for gas sampling and for draining and replenishing the gas volume for maintenance. Absorption oarcing or discharge

6.4.2 Operating Duty And Performance

6.4.2.1 General

The requirements of EN 62271-100 in respect of type tests, service omaking and breaking of fault current shall apply to all types of circuit-

6.4.2.2 Test Certificates

Circuit-breakers shall be covered by testcircuit-breaker at duties corresponding to the rated breaking capacitiecircuit-breakers. The test duty shall not be less onerous than the requiremen62271-100. Test Certificates shall be submitted with the tender.

6.4.2.3 Rate-of-Rise of Restriking Voltage

Attention is drawn to thstandard values of rated transient recovery voltage are stated. Where not specifically stated in the test certificates submitted with the Tender, the Tenthe TRV to which the circuit-breaker was subjected during the short cirthe most sevphase-to-clear factor o

Any device incorporated in a circuit-breaker to limit or control trestriking voltage across the circuEngineer's approval and full descriptions of any such device shall be gtest certificates.

6.4.2.4 Reclosure Duty

Circuit breakers shall be suitable for both high and slow speed single sauto-reclosure with three-pole switching.

out-of



the switching of transformer magnetising current and of capacitor current associated ay be applicable.

ted with short-line

bove duties

nt of the accumulative breaking capacity, which the

across the open circuit breaker shall be at least 15 per cent rength for all impulse, switching surge and

ably not

nd shall include n site shall be

nce and the replacement of either a complete breaker or any component parts of the assembly.

bject to pressures in excess of normal withstood approved pressure tests

ntenance of fixed oving contacts and other enclosed components.

the main shall be arranged to ensure that arcing after

he arcing

Designs shall permit rapid repair or replacement of contacts of circuit-breakers and removal of complete interrupting chambers of SF6 circuit breakers.

and moving seals shall be designed to prevent any leakage of gas or ingress of moisture whilst in service and without deterioration.

Pressure sensitive devices to prevent switching at SF6 gas pressures outside the declared limits of operation shall be included.

with overhead line-charging, cable-charging or capacitor banks as m

Circuit-breakers shall be capable of interrupting current associafaults and the out-of-phase switching conditions that may occur in service. Circuit-breakers shall be of the restrike-free type only.

Test certificates demonstrating the ability of the circuit-breakers for the ashall be submitted with the Tender.

Tenders should include a statemecircuit-breakers are capable of before maintenance is required.

6.4.2.6 Insulation Co-ordination

The insulation strength greater than the line to ground insulation stpower frequency voltage conditions.

6.4.2.7 Opening time

Circuit breaker opening time shall be as fast as possible and shall preferexceed 50 ms.

6.4.3 General Arrangement

Circuit-breakers shall be suitable for mounting directly on concrete pads aany necessary supporting steelwork. The arrangement of the switchgear osuch that adequate access shall be available for normal routine maintena

Evidence shall be provided that enclosures suatmospheric pressure during service operation havewithout leakage, permanent distortion or any temporary distortion such as might cause maloperation of the circuit-breaker.

Means shall be provided to allow easy access for the inspection and maiand m

6.4.4 Contacts, Arcing Chambers And Insulation

Separate arcing contacts shall be provided on circuit-breakers to protect contacts from burning during operation andcommutation of the main current always occurs in the arcing zone between tcontacts.

Static



Where single rods or tubes are utilised for operating the moving concircuit-breakers, they shall be securely pinned at each end to prevent rodisplacement of the contacts. Tubes

tacts of tation or

shall be plugged in an approved manner where

tion or create n contact with SF6 and its by-products under service

-products of

all specified conditions shall not a nuisance to residents beyond a radius of 100m.

General

in this

in the schedules to the duty

electrical r of the n fully and in

shall not make ld in the

n in the event of failure to latch on the first closing attempt or in the event of

ils and perature

n the voltage at their terminals is any value within the voltage range stipulated

utilising such sticking due to

nical shock to a minimum and shall prevent inadvertent operation due to fault current stresses, vibration or

An approved mechanically operated indicator shall be provided on each circuit-breaker operating mechanism to show whether the circuit-breaker is open or closed. Operation counters shall be fitted to all circuit-breaker mechanisms. Each phase shall incorporate a

nical indicator or other approved means of position indication where operating mechanism designs do not utilise mechanical coupling between phases.

The circuit-breaker shall preferably be driven by a single mechanism coupled to the three phases.

contacts or other parts are fixed to the tubes.

Circuit-breakers shall not comprise of materials that are liable to deterioraundesirable chemical action when iconditions. Precautions to minimise the presence of moisture and other byarcing in SF6 design shall be incorporated.

Noise made by the circuit-breaker when operating under be such as to cause

6.4.5 CIRCUIT BREAKER OPERATING MECHANISMS

6.4.5.1

The circuit-breaker operating mechanism shall be one of the types specifiedChapter.

All mechanisms shall be suitable for use on circuits fitted with delayed auto-reclose whether or not this feature is specified in the schedules. When specifiedmechanisms shall also be suitable for high-speed three phase auto-reclose cycle stated.

The mechanism and its control scheme shall be such that, in the event of antripping pulse being applied to the circuit-breaker during the closing stroke, omechanism failing to latch in the closed position, the circuit-breaker shall opesuch a manner as to be capable of interrupting its rated breaking current.

The mechanism and its control scheme shall be such that the mechanismrepeated attempts to close the circuit-breaker when the control switch is heCLOSE positioa trip signal being given to the circuit-breaker.

The electrical closing and tripping devices, including direct acting solenoid cosolenoid operated valves, shall be capable of operation over the ambient temrange whein EN 62271 - 100.

Each part of the operating mechanisms shall be of substantial construction,materials as stainless steel, brass or gunmetal where necessary to prevent rust of corrosion. The overall design shall be such as to reduce mecha

other causes.

mecha



Where circuit-breakers comprise three independent units it shall be possindependent adjustments to each unit. For three phase operation the three umake and break the circuits simultaneously. In the event of any phase faila closing operation, provision shall be made for automatic tripping the circuit-breaker or for a remote alarm in the event of any phase failing out of

ible to make nits shall

ing to complete of all three phases of

rther operations as design of the

ll be such that the circuit-breaker cannot be operated , circuit-breaker

se.

ating

peration within a out and an alarm

onal service all mechanisms shall be arranged to lock out should the complete a

specified duties. Alarms shall be provided to indicate a

red to normal

contact

ers or SF6 gas.

he circuit breaker ot be possible inoperative.

ers shall be provided with slow acting manually powered It shall not be possible

ormal service condition. Suitable interlock shall g circuit breaker operation during maintenance.

nently connected. Where two-stage heaters are provided, one stage shall be permanently connected and the other switched.

for locking shall be provided for the doors of each mechanism housing.

6.4.5.2 Spring Operated Mechanisms

Spring operated mechanisms shall be arranged for motor charging but means shall be provided for charging by hand. No electrical or mechanical operation of the mechanism

synchronism.

Power closing mechanisms shall be recharged automatically for fusoon as the circuit-breaker has completed the closing operation and the closing mechanisms shainadvertently due to external shock forces resulting from short circuitsoperation, or any other cau

Circuit-breaker operating mechanisms capable of storing energy for the opersequence O-0.3S-CO-3 min-CO.

If a circuit breaker closing mechanism is not fully recharged for further opredetermined time after a closing cycle, the mechanism shall be locked initiated.

When in operatienergy system employed reach a state that it is inadequate to successfully close or trip operation under all lock out condition and also advance warning that the conditions are deteriorating towards a lock out condition.

Alarms shall be delayed for sufficient time for the energy system to be restoconditions following breaker operation.

The circuit-breakers shall be provided with the facilities for measurement ofresistance and mechanical and electrical timing of the contact. Full details of the facility provided shall be stated in Schedule of particulars without removal of cov

Means shall be provided for the local manual "non-electrical" tripping of tpreferably by a shrouded push button with facilities for locking off. It shall nto lock mechanically the trip mechanism for rendering the electrical tripping

The circuit breaker shall be provided with two tripping coils. The two trip coils shall be kept electrically separate.

Where possible, circuit-breakoperating devices for inspection and maintenance purposes only. to slow close a circuit-breaker when in nbe provided between slow and fast actin

Where heaters are provided in mechanism housings, these shall be perma

Means



during this process shall endanger the operator or damage the equipment. A spare

mechanism shall have sufficient stored energy for the

er in either the springs shall

eration. is in progress shall be prevented and release

ired to power

a mechanical device ING FREE"

tions shall be visible glazed access doors or te and

made for remote and supervisory indication .

ovided for discharging the spring when the circuit breaker is in the open

es and contactors, ction, ction of the ition

system.

and shall be iary switches

be strong and have a positive wiping action when closing. Micro switches will not be

ipping mechanisms of d. The contacts

ction when

Auxiliary contactors shall be provided only where the circuit requirement cannot be met by the auxiliary switch arrangements and multiple contactors and relays will not be accepted in lieu of the auxiliary switches except as specifically approved by the Engineer.

ry switches and contactors shall be capable of operation within the same voltage limits as specified for the associated circuit-breaker close and trip coils. The auxiliary switches shall comply with the following requirements:

normally open spring-drive limit switch shall be provided.

When fully charged the springoperating sequence refer to above.

It shall be possible to charge the operating springs with the circuit breakopen or closed positions. In normal operation, recharging of the operating commence immediately and automatically upon completion of the closing opClosure whilst a spring charging operationof the springs shall not be possible until they are fully charged. The time requcharge the spring should not exceed 30 seconds.

The state of the charge of the operating springs shall be indicated by which shows "SPRING CHARGED" when operation is permissible and "SPRwhen operation is not possible. The indicaopenings of the mechanisms cabinet. Provision shall also be made for remosupervisory indication. Provision shall also beof the state of the charge of the operating springs

Means shall be prposition without the circuit breaker attempting to close.

6.4.5.3 AUXILIARY SWITCHES AND CONTACTORS

6.4.5.3.1 General

Circuit-breakers shall be provided with suitably rated auxiliary switchwhere permitted, to relay circuit information for the purpose of control, proteindication and metering at the substation site as required by the relevant seSpecification and in addition shall be provided with auxiliary contacts for posindication to the central system control room via the remote supervisory

Auxiliary switches shall be of an approved design and be positively driven in both directions. All such auxiliary switches shall be enclosed in dust free housingmounted in an accessible position clear of the opposing mechanisms. Auxilshall acceptable. Not less than six spare auxiliary switch ways shall be provided with each circuit-breaker.

Switches shall be provided to interrupt the supply of current to the trthe circuit breakers directly after operation of the latter has been completeof all auxiliary switches shall be strong and shall have a positive wiping aclosing.

Auxilia



6.4.5.3.2 Design and Construction

The mechanical drive to auxiliary switches shall be of robust design with posoperation in both directions. All adjustments to linkages shall be preset anworks where practicable. It shall not be necessary to disturb this setting at scommissioning. Disconnection and reconnection of the drive linkage in accothe manufac

itive d locked at the

ite after rdance with

turer's instructions shall not entail any disturbance of the setting. The take-off drive shaft of

e the contacts

tact can be arranged nk shall be preset at

make, the ble.

Contacts shall be faced with either silver or silver alloy. Alternative materials with ckness of the facing

tests there is still

ed for use under the specified climatic conditions and htly fitting

at designs of auxiliary switches to this specification should require little or

lubricated for

ng, the following r contacts and timing

ng: N.O. contacts with the exception of two sets of this type shall close in about 10 milliseconds after the making of

milliseconds before the separation of contacts. The two remaining sets shall close in about 5 making of the main circuit breaker contacts and open

ose 10 n at least 10

milliseconds before the making of the main circuit breaker contacts.

6.5 CURRENT AND VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

6.5.1 GENERAL

The CTs & VTs shall be suitable for outdoor location and capable of continuous operation under the climatic conditions existing on site. They shall be designed to comply with this

for the drive to the auxiliary switches shall be as near as possible to the finalthe mechanism.

Unless otherwise agreed, passing contacts shall be so arranged that the timare in engagement shall be a minimum of 10 ms.

The switch assembly shall be so constructed that each individual conto operate relative to the drive in suitable steps but each complete bathe manufacturer's works. Where contacts are arranged for break before period when both contacts are open shall tend towards the minimum practica

comparable performance may be used subject to approval. The thimaterial shall be such that at the end of the mechanical and electrical life a layer of facing material at the point of contact.

Contacts shall have a self-cleaning action and have adequate contact pressure.

Auxiliary switches shall be designthe contacts shall be either of the totally enclosed type or provided with tigcovers over the contacts.

It is intended thno maintenance and adjustment on site.

Bearing and sliding surfaces shall either not require lubrication or shall belife. The lubrication shall not adversely affect the electrical performance of the switch.

6.4.5.3.3 Duties

In addition to the number of contacts employed for control interlockiminimum requirements for auxiliary switches in respect of numbeshall be provided.

Minimum Number of Contacts: 12 N.O. and 12 N.C. Timi

the main circuit breaker and shall open in about 10the main circuit breaker milliseconds before the simultaneously with the main circuit breaker contacts. N.C. contacts shall clmilliseconds after the opening of the main circuit breaker contacts and ope



Specification and relevant International Standards where applicable. Deviations from le.

llary plant necessary to complete installation of the equipment shall be

e such that the operation of any item of vice conditions shall in no way create a condition that could ance of adjacent equipment.

ll permit safe aining sections are alive.

tal work and earth shall be not less than those given er.

mise electrical discharge and radio pplicable

ender.

the Schedules requirements of

ynchronising ers and metering.

e suitable for use as line couplers for the e top of all e traps will be

ed complete with High Frequency Drain coil and High Frequency grounding switch housed either in the

ich is to be

he capacitance of

this duty.

rectional earth ge winding shall be provided.

Capacitor voltage transformers shall be designed to minimise the possibility of ferro-resonance occurring.

The ratio and phase angle errors of voltage transformers shall not exceed the permissible limits prescribed in EN 60044. All transformers shall have measuring accuracy class between 0.1 and 1.0 as specified in the Schedules. Where required for protection duty the relevant protection accuracy will also be stated in the Schedules.

these Specifications and Standards shall be stated in the appropriate schedu

In all cases the anciincluded in the Contract.

The disposition of plant in the substation is to bplant under the specified seradversely affect the perform

6.5.2 CLEARANCES

The clearances and positions of apparatus including the access facilities shamaintenance of any section of the apparatus while the rem

Electrical clearances between live mein this Specification and attached drawings whichever is the great

6.5.3 RADIO INTERFERENCE

Equipment shall be designed so as to miniinterference. Relevant tests for electrical discharge and radio interference if ashall be carried out by the Contractor and submit relevant test report with t

6.5.4 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

Voltage transformers shall be of the wound or capacitor type as specified in and shall comply with EN 60044 – 2 / EN 60044 – 5 , BS.3941 and thethese Specifications.

Voltage transformers shall be suitable for the operation of protective gear, sequipment voltage regulating equipment, instruments including transduc

Capacitor type voltage transformers shall boperation of carrier accelerated tripping and communication systems and thvoltage transformers shall be suitable for mounting wave traps. Wave or linsupplied under another contract. All voltage transformers shall be suppli

voltage transformer terminal box or housed in a suitable separate cubicle, whmounted on the voltage transformer, steel support.

Electromagnetic voltage transformers shall be capable of discharging tline, cables and switchgear, which may remain connected to them during switching operations. The contractor shall declare any limitations of the equipment for

When a polarising source voltage is required for directional overcurrent or difault protection a broken delta connected residual volta



All voltage transformers shall have an output rating adequate to cater connected to them, which shall not be less than stated in the Schedules. Mburdens imposed by transducers upon VT secondary circuits (including tranauxiliary p

for the burdens aximum sducer

ower source where applicable) should be taken into account in determining the

an 1.2.

wired through aker is open.

shall be provided as dicate their

r phase shall be provided to allow cified in the hall be distributed

ontrol panel in

, both ends of each secondary winding shall be

ing shall be

out to

uch that they can be removed with

t in the local

shall not be paralleled.

itted for approval.

ormers shall be provided complete with galvanised steel supporting n 2440 mm

Current transformers shall be suitable for the operation of protective gear instruments metering equipment and shall comply with EN 60044 – 1 and the requirements of

this Specification.

Current transformers using oil impregnated paper as the insulant may be of the bar, single or multi-turn primary and shall be hermetically sealed.

The porcelain of current transformers shall comply with this Specification.

output rating.

They shall be capable of carrying continuously without injurious heating 50% burden above their rated burden.

All transformers shall have a continuous rated voltage factor of not less th

When meters are provided with voltage signals from VTs not connected directly to the same circuit as the current transformers then the voltage signals shall be auxiliary contacts to break the circuit automatically when the circuit bre

Voltage transformer secondary fuses or miniature circuit-breakersclose to each voltage transformer as possible and shall be labelled to infunction, phase identification, etc.

A minimum of two main secondary fuses peimplementation of fuse failure supervision with reclosing alarm when speSchedules. Protection, synchronising and instrumentation, etc circuits sbetween the two main secondary circuits and then sub-fused at the local caccordance with the appropriate schematic diagram.

For single-phase voltage transformersbrought out to insulated links. For three-phase voltage transformers, each phase end shall be brought out to fuses or mcb’s and the neutral of the secondary windbrought out to insulated links. Where a residual winding is required the open delta shall be brought out to insulated links. The fuses and links shall then be brought insulated terminals located in a terminal box.

Secondary fuses shall be provided in the terminal box sthe equipment alive and shall be labelled to indicate their function.

For single-phase units separate earth links for each secondary winding shall be provided. Each of the neutral leads shall be connected together at a single earth poincontrol cubicle.

Secondary circuits of voltage transformers

Magnetisation curves for each type of voltage transformer shall be subm

Voltage transfstructures such that the earthed end of the porcelain insulators is not less thaabove ground level.

6.5.5 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

and/or



Each current transformer shall be impregnated and filled with oil of the grade specified in

from ground level the level of oil within the transformers.

connection couldn’t

djacent to the

itted in a

and shall have a one gear.

mer secondary circuits shall be complete and shall be earthed at one point rent

parate link, ision for

tisation and core loss curves and secondary resistance shall be provided for each for extending ctly matched.

rom those ch specific

er for approval nt with which pable of

ociated with SCADA.

asses between ith EN 60044

hat of the associated switchgear

rent have ecific instance.

All current transformers shall have a maximum continuous primary current rating not less e primary current rating of the bay in which they are installed.

Current transformers provided for protective gear purposes shall have overcurrent and saturation factors not less than those corresponding to the design short circuit level of the system. The output of each current transformer shall be as specified in the relevant schedules of requirements with an accuracy limit factor of 15 and the Contractor shall

BS148.

The following facilities shall be provided:

• Visual means of determining

• Oil drain cock and sampling device.

• Earth terminal of adequate dimensions so arranged that the earthbe inadvertently removed.

All current transformers shall be installed with the PI (one) terminals abusbars. The polarity of the primary and secondary windings of each transformer shall be clearly indicated at the respective terminals and in addition labels shall be freadily accessible position to indicate the ratio, class and duty of each transformer.

Primary winding conductors shall be not less than 100 mm2 sectionsecond short time current rating not less than that of the associated switch

Current transforonly, through links situated in an accessible position and as near to the curtransformer as possible. Each separate circuit shall be earthed through a sesuitably labelled. The links shall be of the bolted type have M6 nuts and provattaching test leads.

Magnetype and rating of current transformer. Where current transformers are usedan existing protection scheme the Contractor shall ensure that they are correWhere the Contractor wishes to provide current transformer ratios differing fspecified he should first obtain approval in writing from the Engineer for eainstance.

The characteristics of current transformers shall be submitted to the Enginetogether with details of the protection, instrumentation or measuring equipmeeach current transformer is to be used. Each current transformer shall be caproviding the necessary output to operate the related connected devices satisfactorily at the lead burdens involved including bay controllers/transducers ass

Where specified in the schedules, current transformers having accuracy cl0.1 and 1 may be provided with an extended current rating in accordance wup to an equivalent primary current rating not exceeding tcircuit current rating.

Current transformers for balanced protective schemes, including neutral curtransformers where appropriate, shall have identical turns ratio and shallmagnetisation characteristics to the approval of the Engineer for each sp

than th



ensure that the capacity of the current transformers provided is adequate for operation of

d at the tion required

for each ratio. These connections and the ratio in use shall be shown on the appropriate

means of l cubicle.

r secondary

quirements.

ers are connected to protection CTs their suitability to nsured or

oser winding

s are tendered, to the number

elain bushing ith suitable mounting steelwork as specified and complete with terminal

box for secondary connections.

shall be provided complete with galvanised steel supporting earthed end of the porcelain insulators is not less than 2440 mm

e housed in

s and fitted with the surge counter.

lloy clamp. The C conductor with

rester the clamp should be able to accept an AAAC conductor size of 12±10% mm diameter.

The earth end of the surge arresters as well as both sides of the surge arrester monitoring ould accept a copper conductor of 14,5±10% mm.

Surge arrester monitoring units must be suitable for connecting on the common earth of a three phase set of gapless surge arresters and should be housed within a weatherproof housing suitably treated to withstand corrosive atmospheres.

the associated protective devices and instruments.

Where multi ratio secondary windings are specified, a label shall be providesecondary terminals of the current transformer indicating clearly the connec

schematic and connection diagrams.

All connections from secondary windings shall be brought out and taken byseparate insulated leads to a terminal board mounted in the Local ControTerminal boards shall have shorting/disconnecting links to allow testing with the circuit in service and on load. The rated insulation and inter-turn insulation levels fowindings should be according to EN 60044-1

The accuracy class of all CTs is as specified in the relevant schedules of re

Where instruments or transducwithstand high current generated by power system fault conditions shall be esaturable interposing current transformers fitted. Where supplied, the interpshall be earthed at the control panel.

Where more than one ratio is specified and post CTs with multiple windingit shall be possible to select either ratio for each winding without alterationof primary turns. All ratio adjustment shall be made on the secondary side.

Neutral current transformers are to be of the outdoor totally enclosed, porctype complete w

Current Transformersstructure such that theabove ground level.

6.6 SURGE ARRESTERS

6.6.1 General

All surge arresters shall be of the Metal Oxide type for outdoor use and shall bpolymeric housing sealed against the entry of moisture and oxygen.

Surge arresters shall be bottom supported or suspended on tower cross-armsuitable insulators to facilitate the connection of

On the live side the arresters shall be fitted with a suitably rated aluminium aclamp for the 120kV rated surge arrester should be able to accept an AAA25±10% mm diameter. For the 60kV rated surge ar

unit sh



The surge arrester monitoring units should record the number of discharges, thethe surges toget

amplitude of her with their date and time, the total leakage current and the resistive current

d should be collected with the aid of a handheld cordless transceiver, which then should be transferred to

ing units should be maintenance free meeting general design

d after all sawing, g, bending and machining is completed. The zing coating is to

It shall adhere ny way

ing of at least ickness, and

ithstand the tests set out in the relevant standards.

versely affect al. After galvanizing holes shall be free from nodules

ust spots or other defects ring the period of guarantee, then the affected material is to be

replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.

ble of ed.

y the electro-ir maximum

loads shall be not less than two and a half.

y part of the insulators do not lead to development of defects.

atmospheric conditions producing weathering, pid changes in temperature that may be experienced under working

n approved manner, preferably by means of bolts or metal clamping plates with suitable packing material interposed.

6.7 ISOLATORS AND EARTH SWITCHES

6.7.1 ISOLATOR

All isolating and earthing devices shall be designed for outdoor installation and shall be complete with supporting steelwork.

through the arrester.

The measurements should be stored in the surge arrester monitoring units, an

a computer for statistical analysis.

The surge arrester monitorrequirements.

6.6.2 Galvanizing

All iron and steel used in the assembly of the arrester shall be galvanisesheaving, drilling, punching, filinbe of uniform thickness, clean, smooth and as free from spangle as possible.firmly and completely to the surface of the steel and is not to blister or be in aremovable during handling or erection.

Galvanizing shall be applied by the hot dip process and shall consist of a coat600 g of zinc per square meter of surface and be not less than 0,084 mm in thshall w

The preparation for galvanizing and the galvanizing itself shall not distort or adthe mechanical properties of the materiof spelter.

If any galvanized part is found to be damaged or abraded and/or if rin galvanizing develop du

To facilitate transport, lifting lugs, jacking pads or other handling devices capasupporting each unit when fully erected and ready for service shall be provid

6.6.3 Insulators

Insulators of polymer housing and silicon rubber sheds shall satisfactorily withstand the climatic and service conditions specified. The strength of insulators as given bmechanical test load shall be such that the factor of safety when supporting theworking

Designs shall be such that stresses during expansion and contraction in an

Outdoor insulators shall remain unaffected byacids, alkalis, dust and raconditions.

Insulators shall be secured in a



All power driven isolators shall be suitable for local, remote and supervshould be fitted with a removable emergency manual operation facility. It shpossible to lock-off the manual and local facilities and padlock the mechanand closed positions with the motor automatically disengaged. The motor-mechanism shall be provided with an interlocking magnet for continu

isory control and ould be

ism in the open operating

ous duty to prevent

, the electrical ted.

otor circuit tact.

echanism shall operation.

separate electrical circuits for motor, control and interlocking. An actuated

en position (O) of the disconnector shall be red and for the closed

all be clearly und level.

ing post type to approval by

tives if applicable,

tor open shall 5 per cent of

less than the m corresponding figure for the isolating distance as given in EN 62271 - 102.

switch current currents shunted

allel circuits or transformer HV magnetising currents. Main contacts shall be of the ngineer’s

ing locked intenance free

eration and maintenance of all

n continuous or periods of up to two years in corrosive atmosphere over a wide temperature

range and without operation or maintenance. The contacts shall carry their rated load and ircuit currents without overheating or welding and at the end of the two year period

the maximum torque required at the operating handle to open a three-phase isolator should be within the capabilities of one man (i.e. approx. 250N).

All isolators fitted with earthing devices shall be mechanically coupled or interlocked with the main isolator so that the earthing device and main isolator cannot be closed at the same time.

mechanically the manual operation and electrically the motor operation, when the interlocking magnet is off-circuited.

Wherever the manual crank is inserted into the drive for manual operationsupply for the control of the device shall be automatically disconnec

Each power driven isolator shall have its own separate power supply. The mshall be provided with a two pole overload tripping device with an alarm con

The motor-operating mechanism shall be of pulse-operated type, i.e. the mcomplete its action although the interlocking voltage is off-circuited duringThere shall becontrol pulse shall not affect any operation when there is no voltage in the motor circuit.

The colour for the opposition (I) green.

Local mechanical position indicators shall be provided for all switches and shvisible from gro

Isolators shall preferably be of the single throw double air break, centre rotator of the double rotating post type with single air break and shall be subjectthe Engineer. Pantograph or semi-pantograph designs, or other alternawill be considered.

The minimum total air gap between terminals of the same pole with the isolabe of a length to withstand a minimum impulse withstand level of at least 11the specified impulse insulation rating to earth and shall in no case beminimu

Isolator switches shall be designed for live operations and will not require toother than the charging current of open busbars and connections or loadby parhigh-pressure line type and arcing contacts, if provided, shall be to the Eapproval.

The mechanisms of all isolators and earthing switches shall be capable of beand secured by padlock in the open and closed positions. Reliable and maelectrical bolt interlocking is required in addition, for opisolators.

Service conditions require that isolating switches shall remain alive and iservice f

short-c



Isolator operating mechanisms shall be of robust construction, carefully fittedfree action and shall be unaffected by the climatic conditions at site. Mechaas simple as possible and comprise a minimum of bearing and wearing partgrease lubricating devices shall be fitted to all principal bearings, which alubricating type. The mechanisms shall be housed in a weatherproofed enclcomplete

to ensure nisms shall be s. Approved

re not of the self-osure

with auxiliary switches, anti-condensation heater, terminal blocks and cable

t be opened by ng in both the "open"

ultaneously.

upled to the main drive signalling contacts for indication, control, interlocking and

d interlocked

the applicable requirements for isolators.

g the rated r welding.

6.7.3 INTERLOCKING FACILITIES

h an interlocking system, .

olators so that is impossible to close either switch or isolators without first opening the other.

be provided to y padlocked

Locks and locking facilities shall be provided on isolating and earthing switches in both open and closed positions and shall be additional to the electro-mechanical interlocking devices specified.

ion for locks shall be designed, constructed and located on the equipment so that locks will remain serviceable in the climatic conditions specified without operation or maintenance for continuous periods of up to two years and with suitable maintenance shall be fit for indefinite service.

gland plates. All steel and malleable iron parts including the supporting steelwork shall be galvanised.

Isolator mechanisms shall be so designed that the primary contacts cannoforces due to currents passing through them, and shall be self-lockiand "closed" positions. The mechanism shall open and close all poles sim

Each isolator shall be provided with auxiliary switches comechanism and with sufficientother services as specified. Signalling contacts shall be arranged and operate in the manner specified in the relevant clauses of the specified standards.

6.7.2 EARTH SWITCH

Earth switches shall be manually operated and shall be combined with anwith their associated isolating device.

Earth switches shall otherwise conform to

The earthing switch, when in the closed position, shall be capable of carryinshort time current for one second without the contacts burning o

All isolating devices and earthing switches shall be provided witwhich ensures safe operation of the equipment under all service conditions

Interlocks shall be of the electrical bolt type.

Earthing switches shall be electrically interlocked with all associated is

Electrical bolt interlocks shall be electrically energised only when the operating handle of the mechanism is brought to the working position. Visible indication shall show whether the mechanism is locked or free. Approved means, normallshall be provided whereby the bolt can be operated in the emergency of a failure of interlock supplies.

6.7.4 LOCKING FACILITIES

Provis



6.7.5 AUXILIARY SWITCHES

102, with regard ise specified. The

and driving mechanism must be uxiliary switches are :

Switches connected to CT circuits for high impedance busbar protection.

tection, interlocking and position indication circuits.

maximum

ening of the

ch a position time withstand excluded.

All of the auxiliary switches with “break contact” or “normally closed” (NC) type shall not such that the

nce, or unless osition (EN 62271 - 102).

) switches must be such that the “normally open” closed” (NC) contact breaks and vice versa so

eration.

ry (d) switches must be such that the “normally open” n of the isolator than the one specified above.

ble busbars

be provided with the following set of auxiliary switches:

tegory (a)

1 “NO” and 1 “NC” of category (c)

• 2 “NO” of category (d)

Isolators - Single Busbars

The line isolators must be provided with the following set of auxiliary switches:

• 10 “NO” and 10 “NC” of category (b)

• 1 “NO” and 1 “NC” of category (c)

6.7.5.1 General

Isolator auxiliary switches must be generally in accordance to EN 62271 - to definitions and terms, rating and operating sequence unless otherwcontact material, type (preferably wiper contact type) such as to ensure best quality and maximum reliability. The aclassified to the following categories according to their function

Switches connected to control, pro

Switches connected to supervisory signalling circuits (SCADA) suitable forinterrogation current of the order of 2mA.

Switches connected to alarm circuits for non-normal closure or complete opmain contacts (intermediate position).

All of the auxiliary switches with “make contact” or “normally open” (NO) type shall not indicate closed position unless it is certain that the movable contacts will reain which the rated normal current, the peak withstand current and the short-current can be carried safely (EN 62271 - 102). Switches of category (d) are

indicate open position unless the movable contacts have reached a position clearance between contacts is at least 80% of the gap or the isolating distait is certain that the movable contacts will reach their fully open pSwitches of category (a) and (d) are excluded.

The sequence of operation of category (a(NO) contact makes before the “normally as to ensure that the CT’s are never open circuited during isolator op

The sequence of operation of catego(NO) contact makes in any other positio

6.7.5.2 Busbar isolators - Dou

The busbar isolators must

• 6 “NO” and 6 “NC” of ca

• 10 “NO” and 10 “NC” of category (b)

•

6.7.5.3



• 2 “NO” of category (d).

with the following set of auxiliary switches:

ory (b)

” of category (c)

(d)

hall be galvanised ending and machining is completed.

from spangle as teel and is not to

.

coating of at 4 mm in

dversely rial. After galvanizing, holes shall be free

pots or other ted material is

ithstand the climatic and service conditions l test load shall be

shall be not

ses during expansion and contraction in any part of the

trified. Glaze shall be posed parts of

ric conditions e that may be

lain insulators shall be secured in an approved manner, preferably by means of bolts or metal clamping plates with suitable packing material interposed.

Porcelain shall not engage directly with hard metal and where necessary approved water and oil resistant yielding material shall be interposed between the porcelain and the fittings. All porcelain clamping surfaces shall be accurately ground and free from glaze. Fixing materials used shall be of approved quality applied in an approved manner and shall not be chemically active with the metal parts or cause fracture by expansion in service.

6.7.5.4 Earth switches

The Earth Switches must be provided

• 6 “NO” and 6 “NC” of categ

• 1 “NO” and 1 “NC

• 2 “NO” of category

6.7.6 GALVANIZING

All iron and steel used in the assembly of the isolator and earth switch safter all sawing, sheaving, drilling, punching, filling, bThe zinc coating is to be of uniform thickness, clean, smooth and as freepossible. It shall adhere firmly and completely to the surface of the sblister or be in any way removable during handling or erection

Galvanizing shall be applied by the hot dip process and shall consist of aleast 600 g of zinc per square meter of surface and be not less than 0,08thickness, and shall withstand the tests set out in the relevant standards.

The preparation for galvanizing and the galvanizing itself shall not distort or aaffect the mechanical properties of the matefrom nodules of spelter.

If any galvanized part is found to be damaged or abraded and/or if rust sdefects in galvanizing develop during the period of guarantee, then the affecto be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.

6.7.7 INSULATORS

All types of insulators shall satisfactorily wspecified. The strength of insulators as given by the electro-mechanicasuch that the factor of safety when supporting their maximum working loads less than two and a half.

Designs shall be such that stresinsulators do not lead to development of defects.

Porcelain shall be sound, free from defects and thoroughly vismooth, hard, of a uniform shade of brown and shall completely cover all exthe insulators. Outdoor insulators shall remain unaffected by atmospheproducing weathering, acids, alkalis, dust and rapid changes in temperaturexperienced under working conditions.

Porce



Where cement is used as a fixing medium, the cement thickness shall be as even as possib

small and as le and care shall be taken correctly to centre and locate the individual parts

during cementing.

m or as er stranded conductors or tubes as specified in

acers shall be

, whether insulated or % proof

r expansion and erature.

cognised finished

S 159 and EN g and material

finish and be suitably id corona and RIV

interference. The maximum allowable height of sharp protrusions should not exceed y d b t a e blen the adjoining

surfaces.

connections when carrying rated current shall be:

mpressed erminals

BoldeConnecti Welded

6.8 OUTDOOR BUSBARS

6.8.1 BUSBARS, CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTIONS

Busbars and busbar connections shall be of electrolytic copper or aluminiuspecified. The busbars may consist of eiththe schedules and indicated on drawings. Approved non-ferrous metal spused for stranded conductors having hollow cores.

Material used for busbars, busbar connections and their supportsotherwise, shall not be stressed beyond two fifths of its elastic limit or its 0.1stress, whichever is applicable. Satisfactory provision shall be made focontraction of busbars and busbar connections with variation in temp

Where aluminium busbars and connections are used, tubular conductors shall be of alloy E91E to EN 755 and stranded conductors to BS 215 or other equivalent reStandard. The number and diameters of the individual wires forming the conductor and the thickness of the tubes shall be subject to approval.

Copper busbars and connections shall be in accordance with BS 7884, B1977 or other equivalent recognised Standard, in respect of current ratinanalysis.

Busbars, conductors and their fittings should have smooth surface designed in accordance with the relevant Standards in order to avo

1.5mm. An efects should e smoothed ou nd should b ded with

The maximum permissible temperature of unprotected, bare busbars or busbar

Bus Material d Co Pad Connection on T

90oC 90oC NA NA AAC OR AAAC

Al Cable 90oC 90oC NA 90oC

Al Pipe NA 90oC 70oC 90oC

Cu Pipe NA 75oC 75oC NA

Cu Pipe NA 75oC 70oC NA

Provision shall be made for expansion and contraction with variation in conductor temperature and busbars shall be arranged so that they may be readily extended in length with a minimum of disturbance to existing equipment. The design of joints and connections shall be such as to permit ready dismantling. All necessary terminals and connectors shall be provided under this Contract including those required between equipment provided in this Contract and in other Contracts.



Busbars shall normally be in continuous lengths between supports. Coof approved type, and, if necessa

nnectors shall be ry, type tested. Connections dependent upon site

o between live metal

roval.

nnections to

nd power

hall be as light ession type in

d tension clamps shall be designed to avoid individual strands. d adjustable

ilure of the complete conductor or any part thereof at a load less than 95 percent of the ultimate

rantees.

mpatible with alvanised.

vided to prevent oints and surfaces of

gging. The

each ment.

ns are oportions. Any required damping will be assumed to

nections are

nuts to eep of aluminium under pressure.

Torque values must be quoted on drawings.

Where current carrying surfaces of connections are bolted together such surfaces shall have the oxide film removed and shall be cleaned and de-greased. A coating of approved

compound shall be applied to contact surfaces and voids before bolting.

The bending of tubular aluminium sections shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer in respect of the angle and length of any such cranked connection.

welding techniques will not be accepted.

Busbars and connections shall be so arranged and supported that under ncircumstances, including short circuit conditions, can the clearances and earth or earthed metalwork or between other conductors be less than the specified distances. Relevant calculations shall be submitted to the Engineer for app

All clamps, and fittings necessary for attaching the busbars and busbar cotheir insulated supports, together with all connectors, terminals and accessories required for attaching the connections to the busbars, switchgear, transmission lines atransformer bushings shall be provided.

Suspension and tension conductor clamps shall be of approved types and sas possible. Those for aluminium conductor shall preferably be compraccordance with BS 3288. Suspension anany possibility of deforming the stranded conductor and separating the Tension assembly sets of busbar connections should include at one enturnbuckles to enable adjusting the conductor sag.

Tension conductor clamps shall not permit slipping of, or damage to, or fa

strength of the conductor as stated in the Schedule of Particulars and Gua

All clamps and fittings and their components shall be electro-chemically cothe conductor material and those made of steel or malleable iron shall be g

Where dissimilar metals are in contact approved means shall be proelectro-chemical action or corrosion. Unless, otherwise approved, jcopper or copper alloy fittings shall be tinned. Hollow stranded copper conductors shall be supported against crushing at clamping positions by sweating solid or pluopen ends of all tubes shall be fitted with caps.

Conductors and connectors provided for extending existing connections at substation shall be as nearly as possible identical with the existing equip

Busbar supports shall be designed and constructed so that resonant vibratioeliminated or reduced to negligible prbe included in the Contract.

All bolts and nuts shall be locked in an approved manner. Where bolted conused for current carrying joints torque spanners shall be used for tightening bolts and nuts. Also where necessary washers shall be provided under bolt heads andspread the load and reduce the effect of compressive cr

jointing



6.8.2 INSULATORS, BUSHINGS AND FITTINGS

etely cover all cted by atmospheric

is, dust and ditions.

and shall retain haracteristics in service. Special precautions shall be taken to exclude

e surfaces of all h, which cannot

sily damaged.

hall be sound and free from defects or blemishes, which might ave a smooth

d service he electro-mechanical test load shall

ads shall be

any part of the

solid or hollow porcelain is

Engineer.

bly by means of

not engage directly with hard metal and, where necessary, esistant yielding material shall be interposed between the

of approved ith the metal fixing d care shall

individual parts during cementing.

6.8.2.3 Identification

nsulator shall have marked on it the manufacturer's name or trademark, the year of manufacture and the insulator reference. Marks shall be visible after assembly of fittings and shall be imprinted and not impressed. For porcelain insulators, the marks shall be imprinted before firing and shall be clearly legible after firing and glazing. Glass insulators shall be similarly marked in an approved manner.

6.8.2.1 Material

Porcelain shall be sound, free from defects and thoroughly vitrified and the glaze shall not be dependent upon the insulation.

Glaze shall be smooth, hard, of a uniform shade of brown and shall complexposed parts of the insulators. Insulator fittings shall remain unaffeconditions due to weather, proximity to the coast, fumes, ozone, acids, alkalrapid changes in temperature that may be experienced under working con

Paper insulators shall be of approved design and method of manufacture, their insulating cmoisture from paper insulation during manufacture and assembly. Thpaper insulators shall be finished with approved non-hygroscopic varnisbe ea

Toughened glass sadversely affect the life of the insulator. All exposed glass parts shall hsurface.

6.8.2.2 Design

All types of insulators shall satisfactorily withstand the specified climatic anconditions. The strength of insulators as given by tbe such that the factor of safety when supporting their maximum working lonot less than two and a half.

Designs shall be such that stresses due to expansion and contraction ininsulators and fittings do not lead to development of defects.

All insulators shall be manufactured in one piece. Jointing ofnot permitted except by use of metal fittings.

Damaged insulators may not be repaired without the written consent of the

Porcelain insulators shall be secured in an approved manner, preferabolts or metal clamping plates with suitable packing material interposed.

Porcelain or glass shall approved water and oil rporcelain or glass and the fittings. All porcelain clamping surfaces shall be quality applied in an approved manner and shall not be chemically active wparts or cause fracture by expansion in service. Where cement is used as amedium, the cement thickness shall be as small and as even as possible anbe taken to correctly centre and locate the

Each i



When a batch of insulators has been rejected no further insulators from thissubmitted, and the Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that adequate stepsto mark or segregate the insulators constituting the rejected batch in such ais no possibility o

batch shall be will be taken

way that there f the insulators being subsequently resubmitted for tests or supplied for

/spheroidal the necessary 137 and EN

sion imum average

sed for oating must be uniform, clean, smooth and as

1461 zinc aving, shearing, drilling,

detailed in 8.

the hard teel split pins to

e such that when set under any condition of handling

aced. The nits or fittings

ve nce and characteristics in accordance with EN 60672 class G 120. The profile of

the skirt shall be in accordance with the profile parameters defined in IEC 60815.

emically and shall not give rise to chemical reaction with cted to an expansion limit shall be lower

hangeable withstand all shocks which may be met in

operation. Post type insulators of uniform composition shall be designed so that they can be used either upright or under hung.

Suspension and Tension Clamps and Fittings

Suspension and tension conductor clamps shall be as light as possible. Suspension and tension clamps shall be designed to avoid any possibility of deforming the stranded conductor and separating the individual strands.

the Purchaser's use.

6.8.2.4 Suspension and Tension Insulators

Pins and caps shall be made of drop forged steel and malleable cast irongraphite iron/drop forged steel respectively, duly hot dip galvanised havingstrength to enable the completed unit to satisfy the requirements of EN 6060383. All pins shall be equipped with a suitable zinc sleeve to act as a corroretardation ring. All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanised to give a minadherent coating of zinc equivalent to 790 g/m2 (110μm coating) and the zinc ugalvanising shall be of grade Zn 99.95. The cfree from spangle as possible and shall withstand the tests set out in EN ISOcoating shall be applied following necessary treatment and after all spunching, filing, bending and machining is completed.

The specified coupling designations shall be of the type 16A, 16B and 20 asthe schedule of requirements and in accordance with IEC 60120 and BS 328

Locking devices for the insulator units shall be phosphor bronze supplied in condition, the composition of which shall comply with BS B 24, or stainless sEN 60372. The locking devices shall bor service nothing but extreme deformation shall allow separation of the insulator units or fittings or shall cause any risk of the locking devices being accidentally displdesign shall be such as to allow easy removal for replacement of insulator uwithout the necessity to remove the insulator string from the cross-arms. Locking devices shall be incapable of rotation when in position.

The shell shall be made of a toughened glass. The dielectric material shall haperforma

The cement shall be inert chmetal fittings. Cement shall be aluminous cement, which is not subjephenomenon. In accordance with ASTM C151 the cement expansion than 0.12%.

6.8.2.5 Post Type Insulators

Post insulators shall be of the cylindrical post type or made up of intercpedestal post units, sufficiently strong to

6.8.2.6



Tension conductor clamps shall not permit slipping of, or damage to, or complete conductor o

failure of the r any part thereof at a load less than 95 per cent of the ultimate

rmit the ost point of

e the outermost uctor being

t, shall be t distance to btained in

th of the supporting groove shall also be slightly flared in plan. The

waves, ridges

or suspension shall be

is necessarily cut approved means shall be isture. The

ethods of erection lving the use of "come along" or similar erection clamps before, during, or after

give a minimum clearance of l50 ator unit or

olts and nuts sed before erection.

tachment of fittings of insulator sets shall be of stainless .

oad shall not be

al shall be nd to the conductor

clamp fittings, but not to the clamps themselves, of all suspension and tension insulator sets. Tension insulator sets shall have arcing rings at their outboard end, unless otherwise specified. The design of the arcing horns or rings shall be such as to reduce, as far as reasonably possible, cascading and damage to the conductors, clamps, insulator units, bushings, insulators and to other fittings under all flashover conditions. The arcing

strength of the conductor.

Suspension clamps shall be free to pivot in the vertical plane, and shall pecomplete conductor to slip before failure of the latter occurs. The outermclamping pressure shall not be less than two conductor diameters insidpoint of contact between the conductor and its supporting groove (the condassumed to be horizontal). The supporting groove, beyond the latter poincurved in the vertical plate to a minimum radius of l50 mm and for a sufficienallow for the conductor leaving the clamp at the maximum inclination to be oservice. The mougrooves in the clamping piece or pieces shall be bell-mouthed at each end. All conductor grooves and bell-mouths shall, after galvanising, be smooth and free fromor other irregularities.

Bolted type tension clamps shall be radiused at the mouth as specified fclamps, and the above specified requirements for the conductor grooves observed where applicable.

In tension clamps in which the conductor taken to treat the cut ends of the conductors to prevent ingress of air or momechanical efficiency of such tension clamps shall not be affected by minvoassembly and erection of the tension clamp itself.

Tension insulator sets and clamps shall be arranged to mm between the jumper conductor and the rim of the live end of the insulstring.

Clamps and fittings made of steel or malleable iron shall be galvanised. All bshall be locked. All bolt threads shall be grea

All split pins for securing the atsteel and shall be backed by washers of approved size and thickness

The factor of safety of the fittings when supporting the maximum working lless than 2.5 based on the elastic limit of the material.

6.8.2.7 Arcing Horns and Rings

Where specified arcing horns or rings of approved type, size and materiattached in an approved manner to bushing and post type insulators a

horns or rings shall be of substantial design in order to minimise the damage to them when flashover occurs and to bear the weight of a man during cleaning operations.



6.9 STEEL STRUCTURES

sulators, switchgear, overhead conductors, busbars, earthwires and other equipment and fittings

learances and lectrical n masts are to ecifications.

ns to comply

roval by the , wind,

angement can be or high level to

istributed in the nd level, all

ntract.

ther standard uirements of

as small as

ts of the

Steel sections forming the framework shall be heavily galvanised in accordance with this .140 mm (993

th EN 729 , EN fitted with spring

ess diameter

All members shall be cut to jig and holes shall be drilled or punched to jig. Parts shall be carefully cut and holes accurately located so that when the members are in position the holes can be accurately aligned before being bolted up. Drifting of holes will not be

ted.

Stress diagrams and calculations shall be submitted as required by the Engineer and the dispositions and sections of all members and the design of joints and fittings shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.

6.9.1 GENERAL

Steel structures shall be provided under this Contract for supporting the in

generally as shown on the drawings and called for in the Specification.

Structures shall be designed to meet the conditions specified for electrical cto give at least the minimum phase, earth and section clearances for the econnections. Line entry gantries, busbar support gantries and earth screebe manufactured ONLY to the approved designs that are included in the sp

The structures shall include all necessary access ladders to give access to the various levels of the high-level equipment and shall incorporate all necessary screewith the requirements of this Specification.

The design and arrangement of supporting structures shall be subject to appEngineer. Such structures shall be rigid and self-bracing against all deadearthquake, pull-off and other applied loads. Wherever such an arradopted, structures shall be braced by horizontal beams at intermediate provide an integrated framework such that all bending moments shall be dstructures with zero overturning moments at ground level. At or near grouuprights shall be provided with holding down bolts provided under this Co

Rolled steel sections, flats, plates, bolt and nut bars shall, unless otherwise approved, consist of mild steel to EN 10025, EN 10027-1 Grade S235J2G3 or such oas may be approved. High tensile steel where approved shall be to the reqEN 10025, EN 10027-1 Grade S355J2G3 or such other standard as may be approved. Steel shall be free from blisters, scale or other defects.

Bolt holes are not to be more than 1.5mm larger in diameter than the corresponding bolt diameter. The design is to be such as to keep the number of different partspossible and is to facilitate transport, erection and inspection.

Pockets and depressions likely to hold water shall be avoided, and all parstructures shall be properly drained.

Specification. Galvanising shall consist of a coating of nominal thickness 0g/m3 average coating weight for any individual test area) in accordance wiISO 12944 and EN ISO 14713. Bolts and nuts shall be galvanised andwashers. Taper washers are to be added where necessary. Threads of bolts shall be spun galvanised and the threads of nuts shall be oiled. No bolt shall be of lthan 6mm.



6.9.2 LOAD COMBINATIONS FOR DESIGN PURPOSES

The structures shall be designed to meet the maximum of the total forces calculated

ht of conductor, insulators and electrical apparatus.

it forces including "snatch" in the case of bundled conductors.

alternatively transversely

e.

ding and seismic forces shall not be assumed to act simultaneously.

tures or structure parts other

d a figure obtained from an Schedule of Particulars based on the elastic limit

shall not

upon elastic limits under the maximum simultaneous effect of the

tions a factor of 1.1 t for both uplift and compressive loads shall be used

The following loading combinations shall be considered in the design of structures to the to above.

1.0 Load Combination 1 - High Wind

ght.

2. A wind pressure of 960N/ m2 applied to one and a half times the projected area of the members of lattice structures.

1.3. A wind pressure of 575N/ m2 applied to conductors and electrical equipment.

1.4. Tensions associated with line terminating tower to be as defined in the Specification.

vectorially from the following loadings:

• Self weig

• Wind loading

• Short circu

• Seismic forces

• Loads arising during assembly and erection

Seismic forces shall be applied as a horizontal force parallel and to the conductor axis and shall be equal in value to the seismic coefficient times the vertical self-weight load and applied at the centre of gravity of the structur

Wind loa

Allowance shall be made for any additional loads to which strucmay be subjected during their erection and the erection of conductors and equipment.

6.9.3 INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED WITH THE TENDER

The ultimate stress in compression members shall not exceeapproved basis to be entered in the strength.

The maximum allowable slenderness ratio for various classes of membersexceed the values given in clause “Design Criteria” of this Specification.

6.9.4 FACTORS OF SAFETY

The minimum factor of safety based resultant working loads and conditions shall be 2.5. When considering the self-weight of the structure in either structural or foundation calculatimes the actual structure self-weighfor both normal unbalanced loading conditions.

6.9.5 LOAD COMBINATIONS

requirements of assumed working load and factors of safety referred

1.1. Self wei

1.



2.0 Load Combination 2: Short Circuit, Maximum Normal Wind

. 2 ectrical

tower to be as defined in the n.

Short circuit load

3.0 Load Combination 3: Earthquake and Short Circuit at Minimum Temperature, No

t.

3.2. Earthquake load in the most unfavourable direction.

ilure not less

d to tion with wind

th and dynamic wind pressure as stated in the specification. The associated forces s are to be calculated using BS6399 or approved

The force due to short circuit current is to be based on the maximum force resulting from a ith appropriate factors

between system frequency and natural frequency of the

force.

The Contractor shall submit for approval loading diagrams for each type of structure

Subsequently the Contractor shall submit outline drawings, wire clearance diagrams, force calculations of an approved format indicating the design load for each member under every loading case and a summary setting out for each member the critical design load, member size, L/R ratio, permissible load, material and end connection details.

2.1. Dead weight.

2.2. A wind pressure of 450 N/m2 applied to one and a half times the projected area of the members of one face of lattice structures

2.3. A wind pressure of 255N/m applied to conductors and elequipment.

2.4. Tensions associated with line terminating Specificatio

2.5. Conductor temperature at time of short circuit: 50oC.

2.6.

Wind.

3.1. Dead weigh

3.3. Short circuit load.

3.4. Conductor temperature for short circuit.

Details and fastenings shall be designed to have a factor of safety against fathan the main members of the structure.

For the purposes of calculating the maximum wind load which may be appliestructures it shall be assumed that the wind may blow in any horizontal direcstrengon electrical equipment and structureequivalent.

"2 phase to earth" short circuit using the specified fault levels and wto cover:

3.5. A fully asymmetric condition.

3.6. The relationshipvibration of the equipment concerned.

3.7. A dynamic factor for sudden application of the short circuit

6.9.6 APPROVAL OF DESIGNS



After agreement to the structure design, the Contractor shall prepare and sArrangement and Erection Drawings, calculations of design foundation loadsdesigns and drawings (where appropriate), and anchor bolt and stub settindra

ubmit General , foundation

g diagrams. All wings, calculations and details shall be available before commencement of any type

bers to the relevant radius of gyration (L/R) shall not exceed:

200

e s ress 250

50

• All other tension members 500

In no case shall the outstanding flange to thickness ratio exceed 16 i.e.,

tests.

6.9.7 DESIGN CRITERIA

Maximum ratio of effective unsupported length of steel mem

• For leg members 120

• For other load bearing compression members

• For redundant memb r without calculated st

• For tension members of tower cross-arm hangers 3

16<− t

tb

Where: b = flange width

t = flange thickness

mbers 6,0mm

The minimum thickness and diameter of material used in members and bolts shall be as follows:

For leg me

For other members carrying calculated stresses 4,8mm

For redundant members without calculated stress 3,2mm

Gusset plates 6,0mm

Minimum bolt diameter for members carrying calculated stress 16,0mm

Minimum bolt diameter for redundant members without calculated stress 12,0mm

Each member whose longitudinal axis makes an angle less than 45 degrehorizontal shall be of s

es with the ufficient section to withstand independently of all other loadings a

concentrated load of l00 kgf applied normal to the longitudinal axis at any point along its length.

The minimum angle between any two intersecting members shall be 15 degrees with 20 degrees preferred.

ers shall be of such size, shape and length as to preclude damage or failure from vibration or stress reversal. Memb



6.9.8 APPARATUS AND CONDUCTOR TERMINATIONS

Slack spans from overhead line terminating towers complete with tension and conductors will be supplied under another Contract. C

insulator strings onnections from these slack

ctures shall be provided with such holes, bolts and fittings as may be necessary to nder the

steelwork at sufficient

rth

hall be pre-drilled to accommodate earth

rovided with table positions

cation.

If required step bolts of an approved type shall be at not more than 450 mm centres of the

p bolts are to be removed after construction provided

se.

diameter, project not less with nut, washer and nut.

tegrally or less than 300 rovided

quivalent to a cage with three back straps and hoops at l,500 mm intervals.

rames shall be cut to jig and all holes shall be punched or that when the

efore being bolted

The drilling, punching, cutting and bending of all fabricated steelwork shall be such as to prevent any possibility of irregularity occurring which might introduce difficulties in the erection of the structures on the site.

° shall be made hot. For material below 12 mm thick the preferred range is 600-650°C and above this thickness the range should be 850-950°C.

spans to the substation equipment shall be made under this Contract.

All struaccommodate insulators, isolating switches and other apparatus provided uContract.

Means shall be provided for fixing and bonding copper strips to thepoints to ensure efficient earthing. Earth connections shall be made to a vertical face clear of the ground. Foundation bolts shall not be used for attachment of eaconnections.

Structures carrying isolators and earth switches sbonding for earth conductor to the base of the plant item in accordance with the approved earthing drawing.

6.9.9 SAFETY AND ACCESS REQUIREMENTS

To facilitate safe inspection and maintenance, the structures shall be pladders or step bolts, inter-circuit screens, guards and other facilities in suias detailed in the approved drawings that are appended in this specifi

starting as near as practical to the base and continuing to 1 m below the topstructure. It is noted on the drawing that stefor a distance of 2.0 m above ground level. Adequate clearance shall bebetween the step bolts and any obstruction which might interfere with their u

The bolts shall have a shoulder, shall not be less than 16 mm in than 150 mm, and be fixed

If ladders are required they shall be incorporated into the structure either inseparately and shall start 2.0 m above ground level. The rungs shall be notmm wide and regularly spaced at intervals of 225 mm. Protection must be pe

6.9.10 FABRICATION

All members of prefabricated fdrilled to jig. All parts shall be carefully cut and holes accurately located somembers are in position the holes will be truly opposite to each other bup.

All bends in High Yield Steel over 5



Punching of holes will only be permitted for Mild Steel members less thanand for High Yield Steel less than 14 mm thick, and in no case sha

20 mm thick ll a hole be punched

ole.

sts and open joints

ed but if

ck workmanship when presented for inspection not less than one per cent at random and

eer at the

If the structures are fabricated or galvanised by sub-contractors the Contractor shall, if t to the Contract, provide a resident inspector at

rk is being

oretically required etailed 3 mm shorter. Un-spliced

m in length shall be detailed shorter to a maximum d members 1.5 mm for each lap splice and 3 mm for each

escribed etails shall

been shortened.

pered washers. All

be of the hexagonal type. All nuts and bolts shall de of the structure

they are provided.

least three shall form part

en members.

All bolts and screwed rods shall be galvanised including the threaded portion(s) to a um average coating weight of 305 g/m2. The threads of all bolts and screwed rods

shall be cleared of spelter by spinning or brushing. A die shall not be used for cleaning the threads unless specially approved by the Engineer. All nuts shall be galvanised with the exception of the threads, which shall be oiled. The nuts of all bolts attaching insulator sets, droppers and earth conductor clamps to the towers shall be locked in an approved manner, preferably by locknut.

where the thickness of the material exceeds the diameter of the punched h

Approved steel gauges of the stud type shall be provided to enable the Engineer to carry out such checking of members as may be considered necessary.

Built members shall, when finished, be true and free from all kinks, twiand the material shall not be defective or strained in any way.

Where possible pockets and depressions likely to hold water shall be avoidunavoidable they shall be properly drained.

In order to cheof the members corresponding to each type of structure shall be selectedassembled to form part of complete structures in the presence of the Enginfabricator's works.

required by the Engineer at no extra costhe works of each sub-contractor during the time that the bulk of the steelwofabricated or galvanised.

6.9.11 LONG TENSION MEMBERS

All members carrying tension only shall be detailed shorter than the thelength. Members 3,000 mm or less in length shall be dmembers greater than 3,000 mreduction of 6 mm. For splicebutt splice shall be added to the amount computed for the overall length, as dabove, by which the member is to be shortened. The Contractor's shop dindicate the amount by which each member has

6.9.12 BOLT AND NUTS

All metal parts shall be secured with bolts and nuts with single flat or tanuts and bolts shall conform to an approved Standard, which shall not be inferior to the requirements of the appropriate ISO Recommendations.

Nuts and heads of all bolts shall wherever possible be so placed that the bolt head is either on the outsior underside of all horizontal members. If bolts and nuts are placed so thatinaccessible by means of an ordinary spanner a suitable spanner shall be

When in position all bolts shall project through the corresponding nuts by atthreads, but such projection shall not exceed 10 mm. No screwed threadsof a shearing plane betwe

minim



The bolts of any one diameter on a structure shall be one grade of steel.

rts shall be stamped with distinguishing numbers and letters to correspond with approved drawings and

least 16 mm in size, and shall be clearly legible after

requirements t are attached to this specification together with the necessary

copper strip, 30mm X 5mm, to connect the overhead conductor screen (supplied by others) to the substation earthing system. The rest of the materials shall be supplied by others under a separate contract.

6.9.13 ERECTION MARKS

Before galvanising, all members, including all plates and fabricated pa

material lists.

The number of letters shall be at galvanising.

6.9.14 EARTHING SCREEN

The contract includes ONLY the supply of the necessary earth masts to the of the detailed drawings tha



7. SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM

ification covers the requirements for the procuring of a substation

ioning. Offered rom different

s and minimum-change solutions for interoperability of equipment from

nd between

blishment of communication between the substation and the National on IEC 61870-5-101 standard including testing and commissioning

2 DEFINITIONFor the purpose of this specification the following terms and definitions apply. Bay bparts with

ples are the switchgear he busbar, the ed isolators its related

resenting the two ker

rrangements (breaker very often transformer such a

mutual ces. The

nt for switched off at

rest of the as to be added if

alled “bays” names “bay nality of these trol level

below the overall station level that is called “bay level”. Physically, this level must not exist in any substation; i.e. there may be no physical device “bay controller” at all.

7.1 SCOPE

This part of the specautomation system based on IEC 61850 standard, “Communication Networks and Systems in Substations”.

It covers design, manufacture, supply, installation, testing and commisssubstation automation systems shall provide interoperability of equipment fmanufacturerdifferent generations. It shall take into account all the automation functions in the substation and cover communications within the station level, the bay level athese two levels.

It also coves the estaControl Centre basedof all the required signals.

7. S

A substation consists of closely connected susome common functionality. Exambetween an incoming or outgoing line and tbuscoupler with its circuit breaker and relatand earthing switches, the transformer with switchgear between the two busbars repvoltage levels, the diameter in a 1 ½ breaarrangement, virtual bays in ring aand adjacent isolators), etc. These subparts comprise a device to be protected such as a or a line end. The control of the switchgear insubpart has some common restrictions likeinterlocking or well-defined operation sequenidentification of such subparts is importamaintenance purposes (what parts may bethe same time with a minimum impact on thesubstation) or for extension plans (what ha new line is linked in). These subparts are cand managed by devices with the generic controller” and “bay protection”. The functiodevices represents an additional logical con

Bay Level Functions Bay level functions are functions using mainly the data of one bay and acting mainly on the primary equipment of one bay. In the context of this part of specification a bay means any subpart of the substation like a line feeder, a



diameter or a transformer feeder. The definiticonsidering some kind of a meaningfuprimary substation configuration and some lofunctionality or autonomy in the secondary s(substation automation). Examples for suline protection or bay control. These functioncommunicate via the logical interface 3level and via the logical interfaces 4 aleve

on of a bay is l substructure in the

cal ystem

ch functions are s

within the bay nd 5 to the process

l, i.e. with any kind of remote I/Os or intelligent ay be sensors and actuators. Interfaces 4 and 5 m

hardwired.

Device designed to serve a er, relay, or vant properties

el.

A mechanism or piece of equipmentpurpose or perform a function. e.g., breaksubstation computer. Communication releare described in a proper device related mod

Diameter ement and hgear between the two

d VTs. It has both for

A diameter applies to a 1-½-breaker arrangcomprises the complete switcbusbars, i.e. the 2 lines and the 3 circuit breakers with all related isolators, earthing switches, CTs ansome common functionality and relationshipoperation, maintenance and extensions

Distributed Functio more logical devices

te in some way, r a distributed function is not

of the functional is completed. In

unication or show a

n A function is called distributed when two ornodes that are located in different physicalperform it. Since all functions communicathe definition of a local ounique but depends on the definitionsteps to be performed until the function case of loosing one LN or one included commlink the function may be blocked completelygraceful degradation if applicable.

Function y the

ich exchange gical nodes

at exchanges one logical d in logical

Functions are tasks, which are performed bsubstation automation system. Generally, a function consists of subparts called logical nodes, whdata with each other. By definition, only loexchange data and, therefore, a function thdata with other functions must have at least node. As a consequence, only data containenodes can be exchanged.

Intelligent ElectronDevice

more processors with the ntrol from or to an

external source, e.g. electronic multifunction meters, digital relays, controllers. An entity capable of executing the behaviour of one or more specified logical nodes in a particular context and delimited by its interfaces. If not stated otherwise intelligent electronic devices have an internal clock by definition providing e.g. time tags. This adds the requirement of a system wide time synchronization of all these clocks if applicable.

ic Any device incorporating one or capability to receive or send data/co



Interchangeability e vendor, or munication e

f the system.

The ability to replace a device from the samfrom different vendors, utilizing the same cominterface and as a minimum, providing the samfunctionality, and with no impact on the rest o

Interface Related Station Level Functions

he SAS to the chine interface), to a

ace) or to the g and . These aces 1 and 6

face 7 and the ld. Logically, remote. In the st a virtual

e for the SAS at the boundary of the substation. se virtual

ntations as

The functions representing the interface of tlocal station operator HMI (human maremote control centre TCI (telecontrol interfremote engineering workplace for monitorinmaintenance TMI (telemonitoring interface)functions communicate via the logical interfwith the bay level and via the logical interremote control interface to the outside worthere is no difference if the HMI is local or context of the substation there exists at leainterfacSame holds both for the TCI and TMI. Theinterfaces may be realised in some implemeproxy servers.

Interoperability of two or more intelligent electronic devices endors, to exchange

information and use that information for correct co-f

The abilityfrom the same vendor, or different v

operation. Interoperability is a prerequisite ointerchangeability

Logical Connection es. The communication link between logical nod

Logical Node function that ion within a

physical device; it performs some operations for that ts data and

quipment are t its intelligent part or

A logical node (LN) is the smallest part of a exchanges data. A LN represents the funct

function. A LN is an object defined by imethods. Logical nodes related to primary enot the primary equipment itself buimage in the secondary system, i.e. local or remote I/Os, intelligent sensors and actuators, etc

Physical Connectio devices. n The communication link between physical

Physical Device ntelligent electronic dard.

A physical device is equivalent to an idevice as used in the context of this stan

PICOM A PICOM (Piece of Information for COMmunication) is a description of an information transfer with given communication attributes between two logical nodes. It contains also the information to be transmitted and, in addition, requirement attributes like performance.

Primary System All power system equipment and switchgear is often called primary equipment or primary system.



Process Level Functions

rfacing to the I/O functions

ing of

Process level functions are all functions inteprocess, i.e. basically binary and analogue like data acquisition (incl. sampling) and issucommands. These functions communicate via the logical interfaces 4 and 5 to the bay level.

Process Related Station Level Functions

unctions using plete

pment of more ation. Examples of

tions e 8.

Process related station level functions are fthe data of more than one bay or of the comsubstation and acting on the primary equithan one bay or of the complete substsuch functions are station wide interlocking, automatic sequencers or busbar protection. These funccommunicate mainly via the logical interfac

Secondary System , protect, monitor, ting and

ull application ystem is

ystem.

All components and systems to operateetc.. The secondary system allows operamonitoring the primary system. In case of fof numerical technology, the secondary ssynonymous with the substation automation s

StatioFunctions

n Level hole. There e. Process

ace related station

These functions refer to the substation as ware two classes of station level functions; i.related station level functions and Interflevel functions

System gical nodes) ming some

n”. The osting these

network. The boundary of a system is given by its logical or physical interfaces. Examples are industrial systems, management systems, information systems, etc. Within

ification, system refers to substation ned otherwise.

The logical system is a union of all (via its locommunicating application functions perforoverall task like “management of a substatiophysical system is composed of all devices hfunctions and the interconnecting physical communication

the scope of this specautomation systems always if not mentio

7.3 ABBPS oning System (time source)

REVIATIONS G Global PositiHMI achine Interface Human MI/O channels (depending on context) Input and Output contacts orIED evice Intelligent Electronic DIF (Serial) Interface ISO al Standard Organization InternationLAN Local Area Network

Logical Connection LC LN Logical Node MMS Manufacturing Message Specification NCC Network Control Centre OSI Open System Interconnection PC Physical Connection PD Physical Device



PICOM r COMmunication Piece of Information foSAS Substation Automation System TCI Telecontrol Interface (for example, to NCC) TMI Telemonitoring Interface (for example, to engineers workplace)

7.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

station and has to fulfil all

secondary tasks of the substation. The system shall provide interoperability between all fulfil all the requirements of

n.

o upstream network control/process control centre with

tronic devices, e.g. protection devices, voltage regulators, bay computers)

, earth switches, etc.

and status monitoring

display

tering

ent recording (SOE)

mprising of measured values, event and alarm data, including protection relay

r control

l, fire alarm control panel, HV and MV room temperatures and other devices of the substation

ols (engineering PC with 21 inch screen and software both locally and remotely) for analysing engineering data and interrogating relays including updating of parameters and settings

Functions required for this specific project are listed in this specification or marked in the relevant single line diagrams and other protection and control drawings that are included in the specification documents.

7.4.1 Introduction

The Substation Automated System shall monitor and control the entire subshall be based on IEC 61850. It shall be a fully integrated system and

devices. Communication between these devices has to protection and control functions that are described in this specificatio

It shall fulfil at least the following functions but not being limited to:

• Telecontrol interface tcommunication protocol IEC 60870-5-101

• interface to IEDs (intelligent elec

• Control of switchgear devices, e.g., CBs, isolators

• Switchgear alarm

• Switchgear alarm and status

• Acquisition, pre-processing and display of measured values

• Operational me

• Sequence of ev

• Archiving of data cothose obtained from the

• Tap change

• Feeder protection

• Switchgear interlocking

• Automatic Control Sequences

• Synchrocheck

• Monitoring of station batteries and battery charger, LV AC control pane

• To



Control devices shall incorporate all necessary control and indication facilioperation of the plant and equipment at the associated substation. In additishall be remotely controlled and supervised from network control centres orcontrol centres. The equip

ties for the on, the plant process

ment for this purpose shall be an integral part of the substation

on equipment, all witches, relays

r shall be rface cubicles complete with

ting facilities and shorting links, where required for connection to

nce

rs Approved by EAC are the following:

, UK

Switzerland, Germany

ible for the ther system

r of the substation automation system must have at least 20 years experience design, engineering and system implementation. A reference list

IEC 61850 ed systems must also be listed in the reference list and their status (in progress

d) must be indicated.

n Name

el

• Protocol type

7.4.3 System Operation

The system shall be state of the art design. It shall be easy to operate, maintain and extend. Modifications of the configuration shall require no knowledge in source code programming languages. Monitoring and control of the whole plant shall be possible via Human Machine Interface (HMI) facilitated with a suitable printer and a 21-inch screen.

control and monitoring system.

The substation control and monitoring system including the communicatinecessary DC and power frequency equipment connections, auxiliary sand changeover switches shall be provided under this Contract. The Supplieresponsible under this Contract for the provision of inteterminal blocks with isolainterposing relays and transducers supplied under this Contract.

7.4.2 Experie

Control and protection manufacture

• AREVA – France

• ABB – Sweden,

• SIEMENS – Germany

• GE Multilin – Canada

The approved manufacturer that shall provide the equipment shall be responsconfiguration and commissioning of the system including controllers, relays, odevices and communication equipment as well as the SCADA signals.

The tenderein development, including at least the details as shown below must accompany the offer. implementor commissione• Customer

• Substatio

• Country

• Voltage Lev

• Number of Bays

• Order Date

• Date Commissioned



To ease trouble-shooting, LEDs shall display bit patterns which indicate tcomponents and modules and give fault information in case of failureand Diagnostic tools have to indicate to th

he status of . Modern Service

e operator the status of the system, e.g. ssing, etc.

ion and hall be

est availability. Depending odule shall either be reset or blocked. Failure

omponents.

ll comprise of:

g for modules and apparatus by reply check procedures

tages

Software supervision by watchdog circuit

lts and for remote access

al battery shall

ither fans nor mechanical disk drives or any other constantly

ies. All necessary

ut-off of the

To ease maintenance and to reduce repair time, defective modules may be replaced without switching off the Station Control Unit

CTs shall be automatically be shortened when a related module is drawn out.

processor modules requiring customized configuration data for operation shall be pre-loadable. Being pre-loaded they shall be ready for operation immediately after replacement without the need of loading any additional software or configuration data.

connector missing, external voltage mi

7.4.4 System Safety and Reliability

The apparatus and modules of the microprocessor-based substation protectcontrol system shall be self-monitoring. Failure of a module or component simmediately detected and displayed thus guaranteeing the highon the type of fault detected the affected mof a single module may not impact operation of other system c

Self-monitoring and diagnostics sha

• Live monitorin

• Monitoring of internal auxiliary vol

• Memory checks

•

• Continuous monitoring of all serial connections

• LEDs on the I/O-modules to indicate internal and external faults

• Software tools for the diagnosis of the fau

A loss off power may not cause the loss of configuration data. An additionnot be necessary. After restoration of power the system shall restart automatically. During start-up all output contacts shall be reset and blocked until after the completion of the restart with all settings being set to the default status.

To enhance availability nemoving mechanical components are acceptable for use in the bay units or the Station Control Unit.

The complete system shall be connected to the 110 V DC station batterrectifiers/inverters shall be provided.

7.4.5 Maintenance

Maintenance, modification or extension of components may not cause a shwhole substation automation system.

Spare



7.4.6 Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)

To avoid electromagnetic interference causing malfunction the system shall operation under the ambient conditions present in medium up to high voMicroprocessor based bay units as well as the system’s Station Controshielded and be based on hardware components designed fo

be suitable for ltage substations.

l Unit must be r operation under such

conditions. These components shall be tested according to applicable international icates shall be furnished to the Purchaser.

y on three se functions shall communicate by

logical interfaces 1 – 10 as described by Figure 7-1. The devices of the substation automation system may be installed physically on different functional levels. Process level and bay level functions may be integrated in a single device.

standards. A copy of test certif

7.5 SYSTEM STRUCTURE

7.5.1 General

The functions of the substation automation system shall be allocated logicalldifferent levels, station, bay/unit, and process. The

Figure 7-1 Levels and logical interfaces in the substation automation system

aning of the interfaces The me

tation level

otection-data exchange between bay level and remote protection

IF3: data exchange within bay level

IF4: CT and VT instantaneous data exchange (especially samples) between process and bay level

IF5: control-data exchange between process and bay level

IF1: protection-data exchange between bay and s

IF2: pr




rkplace

en the bays especially for fast functions like interlocking

ontrol centre

ally on different

of the functions in a communication environment may occur

any single

perator’s workplace, interfaces for remote communication, etc.

Figure 7-2 shows the required communication in the substation automation system which can be either with hardwired process interface or mixed hardwires and process bus. In both cases CTs and VTs shall be conventional and tripping shall be initiated by hardwires.

00 Mbit/s redundant switched Ethernet ring as per t less than 300ms. The

shall provide mechanisms as specified in SNMP in order to locate the failure of the system.

thernet Switches shall support the following standards:

• Priority tagging specified in IEEE 802.1P and Q. • Automatic address learning and aging • SNMP V2 • Auto-sensing / Auto-negotiation function capable of being disabled.

Cabling:

IF6: control-data exchange between bay and station level

IF7: data exchange between substation (level) and a remote engineer’s wo

IF8: direct data exchange betwe

IF9: data exchange within station level

IF10: control-data exchange between substation (devices) and a remote c

The devices of a substation automation system may be installed physicfunctional levels (station, bay, and process).

NOTE: The distributionthrough the use of Wide Area Network, Local Area Network, and Process Bus technologies. The functions are not constrained to be deployed within/over communication technology.

(1) Process level devices such as remote process interfaces like I/Os, intelligent sensors and actuators connected by a process bus as indicated in Figure 7-1

(2) Bay level devices such as control, protection or monitoring units per bay

(3) Station level devices such as the station computer with a database, the o

Figure 7-2 Substation Communication Architecture

7.5.2 Communication Architecture

Communication shall be based on a 1Figure 7-3. The ring redundancy shall provide a recovery time asystem

The E

Station HMI Station Control Unit

Telecontrol

Bay Units (Control & Metering)

Switchgear

CTs/VTs

Engineering PC

Process level

Bay level

Substation level

Protection

Station HMI Station Control Unit

Telecontrol

Bay Units (Control & Metering)

Engineering PC

Switchgear

CTs/VTs Process

level

Baylevel

Substationlevel

Protection


Outside a cabinet 100Base FX shall be used. The cables shall be rugged and suitable for ed.

fiber optic connectors shall be MTRJ or ST. The connectors to the devices shall be RJ45

outdoor use. Inside the cabinets shielded twisted pair (STP) CAT 5 is requir

The

Figure 7-3 Communication Architecture

7.5.3 Communication Stack An overview of the communication stack is shown in Figure 7-4. The link layer shall conform to ISO/IEC 8802.3 standard.

Figure 7-4 The mapping of the IEC 61850 data model and services

N

The communication Network Control Centre shall be based on the IEC 60870-5-101 protocol.

The Network Control Centre uses a 2-wire, 1200-baud, ABB type 23WT22 Modem and re Station Control Unit shall be equipped with a compatible Modem.

The required SCADA signals are as detailed in Chapter “Items of Equipment

7.6 NETWORK CONTROL CENTRE COMMUNICATIO

therefo



7.7 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

the IEDs from different suppliers, by

ommon protocol

able

Evidence shall be provided that conformance tests were performed to verify that the ied devices is compliant with the interoperability

ES OF FUNCTIONS

d on the following categories of functions:

ization

functions

identification

e management

ent

l of Logical Nodes

functions

management

d) Synchronous switching (point-on-wave switching)

Parameter set switching

f) Alarm management

g) Event (management and) recording

h) Data retrieval

i) Disturbance/fault record retrieval

7.7.1 Interoperability

The system shall support interoperability between supporting the following:

(1) The devices shall be connectable to a common bus with a c

(2) The devices shall understand the information provided by other devices

(3) The devices shall perform together a common or joint function if applic

communication behaviour of the supplspecification of IEC 61850.

7.7.2 CATEGORI

The system shall be base

1) System support functions

a) Network management

b) Time synchron

c) Physical device self-checking

2) System configuration or maintenance

a) Node

b) Softwar

c) Configuration managem

d) Operative mode contro

e) Setting

f) Test mode

g) System security management

3) Operational or control

a) Access security

b) Control

c) Operational use of spontaneous change of indications

e)



4) Local process automation functions

nction (Generic)

er quality monitoring

upport functions

synchrocheck

ns

lure

otection adaptation (Generic)

e) Voltage and reactive power control

nd transformer change

CAL NODES

g logic nodes re def ed, depending on the project and the application as by the dra a ag is specification.

gical Nodes

a) Protection fu

b) Bay interlocking

c) Measuring, metering and pow

5) Distributed automatic s

a) Station-wide interlocking

b) Distributed

6) Distributed process automation functio

a) Breaker fai

b) Automatic pr

c) Load shedding

d) Load restoration

f) Infeed switchover a

g) Automatic switching sequences

7.8 LOGI

The followin al a indescribed wings nd di rams of th

1.0 Lo

1.1 Logical Nodes for protection functions

1.1.1 Protection Logical Node 61850 IEEE Description Transient earthfault PTEF s a fault to ground

networks. The fault ufficient current to ction/location has to

ast the reported

protection Transient earth faults happen if there i

(isolation breakdown) in compensateddisappears very fast since there is not sfeed it. No trip happens but the fault direbe detected to repair the faulted part. At ledegradation of the impacted line/cable is

Zero speed and underspeed protection

PZSU ions when the -determined value

14 Underspeed device is a device that functspeed of a machine falls below a pre

Distance protection PD hen the circuit reases or . The change of

is caused by a fault. The impedance characteristic is a closed line set in the complex impedance plane. - The reach of the distance protection is normally split into different zones (e.g. 1…4 forward and 1 backward) represented by dedicated characteristics.

IS 21 Distance relay is a relay that functions wadmittance, impedance, or reactance incdecreases beyond a predetermined valuethe impedance seen by PDIS

Volt per Hz protection PVPH 24 Voltage per Hertz relay is a relay that functions when the ratio of voltage to frequency exceeds a preset value. The relay may have an instantaneous or a time characteristic.

(Time) Undervoltage protection

PTUV 27 Undervoltage relay is a relay which operates when its input voltage is less than a predetermined value.



Directional power /reverse power protection

PDPR perates on a given direction, or

rime mover

32 Directional power relay is a relay which opredetermined value of power flow in aupon reverse power flow such as that resulting from the motoring of a generator upon loss of its p

Directional earth faprotection for comp

ult

rks

PWDE is a relay which operates on a predetermined value of earth fault power flow in a given

ensated netwobased on wattmetricprinciple

32 This directional power relay

direction in compensated networks

Undprotection

ercurrent/underpow PU ay that functions ases below a

er CP 37 Undercurrent or underpower relay is a relwhen the current or power flow decrepredetermined value

Loss of n

PUEX given or abnormal , or on an rmature current

field/Underexcitatioprotection

40 Field relay is a relay that functions on a low value or failure of machine field currentexcessive value of reactive component of ain an ac machine indicating abnormal low field excitation. Underexcitation results in under power

Reverse phase or phase balance current protect

PPBR is a relay that e of reverse-phase

nts are unbalanced ponents above a

ion 46 Reverse-phase or phase-balance current relay

functions when the polyphase currents arsequence, or when the polyphase curreor contain negative phase-sequence comgiven amount

Phase sequence or phase-balance voltage

P relay is a relay upon a pre-determined value of polyphase

nce or when the r when the negative en amount.

protection

PBV 47 Phase-sequence or phase-balance voltagethat functionsvoltage in the desired phase sequepolyphase voltages are unbalanced, ophase-sequence voltage exceeds a giv

Motor start-up protection PMSU protection prevents 48, 49, By supervising the motor start-up, these51, 66 any overload of the motor

Thermal overload PTTR 49 Machine or transformer thermal relay is a relay that tions when the temperature of a machine armature

winding or other load-carrying winding or element of a redetermined

protection func

machine or power transformer exceeds a pvalue

Rotor thermal overload protection

PROL 49R See above (49)

Stator thermal overload protection

PSOL 49S See above (49)

Instantaneous overcor rate of rise protec

urrtion

PI e relay is a relay that functions instantaneously on an excessive value of current

ent OC 50 Instantaneous overcurrent or rate-of-ris

or on an excessive rate of current rise AC time overcurrent PTOC ay when the ac input

hich the rsely related

of the performance range

protection 51 Ac time overcurrent relay is a rel

current exceeds a predetermined value, and in winput current and operating time are invethrough a substantial portion

Voltage controlled/dependentovercu

tirrent protection

PV me

OC 51V See above (PTOC/51) with voltage control/dependency

Power factor protection PPFR 55 Power factor relay is a relay that operates when the power factor in an ac circuit rises above or falls below a predetermined value

(Time) Overvoltage tion

PTOV 59 Overvoltage relay is a relay which operates when its input voltage is more than a predetermined value protec

DC-overvoltage protection PDOV 59DC See above (PTOV/59) Voltage or current balance protection

PVCB 60 Voltage or current balance relay is a relay that operates on a given difference on voltage, or current input or output, of two circuits



Earth fault protection/Ground detection

PHIZ or other apparatus insulation to ground

64 Ground detector relay is a relay that operates on failure of machine

Rotor earth fault protec PR e (PHIZ/64) tion EF 64R See abovStator earth fault protection

PS e (PHIZ/64) EF 64S See abov

Interturn fault protection PITF 64W See above (PHIZ/64) AC directional ovprotection

ercurr PD nal overcurrent relay is a relay that functions on a ent flowing in a predetermined

ent OC 67 Ac directiodesired value of ac overcurrdirection

Directional earth fault PDEFprotection

67N See above (PDOC/67)

DC time overcurrent protection

PDCO s when the lue

76 DC overcurrent relay is a relay that functioncurrent in a dc circuit exceeds a given va

Phase angle or out-of-sprotection

PPA ective relay is a se angle between

etween voltage

tep M 78 Phase-angle measuring or out-of-step protrelay that functions at a predetermined phatwo voltages or between two currents or band current

Frequency protection PFRQ onds to the frequency of the frequency or change

cy exceeds or is less than a predetermined value

81 Frequency relay is a relay that respan electric quantity, operating whenof frequen

Differential protection PDIF 87 Differential protective relay is a protective relay that on a percentage or phase angle or other ve difference of two currents or some other

electrical quantities

functionsquantitati

Phase comparisonprotect

ion

PPDF 87P See above (PDIF/87)

Differential line protection PLDF 87L See above (PDIF/87) Restricted earth fault protection

PNDF 87N See above (PDIF/87)

Differential transformer protection

PTDF rmers are inrush ave to be

ansformer protection

87T See above (PDIF/87) – Special for transfocurrents with dedicated harmonics which h

ed by the trconsiderBusbar protection PBDF 87B See above (PPDF/87) – The complexity of the busbar node

ging topology up to a split into two or more nodes needs special means like a dynamic busbar image.- It has to

t a second busbar protection

with chan

be considered that at leasalgorithm exists which is based on the direction comparison of the fault direction in all feeders.

Motor differentiprotection

al PMDF 87M See above (PDIF/87)

Generator differential prot. PGDF 87G See above (PDIF/87)

1.1.2 Protection Related Functions

Logical Node 61850 IEEE Description Disturbance recording (bay/process level : acquisition)

RDRE Acquisition functions for voltage and current waveforms from the power process (CTs, VTs), and for position indications of binary inputs. Also calculated values like power and calculated binary signals may be recorded by this function if applicable.

Disturbance recording n level : evaluation)

RDRS The disturbance recording evaluation is needed as a server for HMI on station level (or even on a higher level) or for calculation of combined disturbance records.

(statio



Automatic reclosing RREC automatic terrupter. After

n with different

79 Ac closing relay is a relay that controls thereclosing and locking out of an ac circuit inany successful protection trip the automatic reclosing tries 1 to 3 times to reclose the open breaker agaitime delays assuming a transient fault

Breaker failure RBRF elay is a relay that sive value of current

eighbouring

50BF Instantaneous overcurrent or rate-of-rise rfunctions instantaneously on an excesor on an excessive rate of current rise. In case of a breaker failure the fault is not cleared. Therefore, nbreakers have to be are tripped

Carrier or pilot wire protection

RCPW y that is operated tion with carrier-

pilot-wire fault relaying.

85 Carrier or pilot-wire receiver relay is a relaor restrained by a signal used in conneccurrent or dc

Fault locator RFL ction information e function) the

O The fault locator calculates out of the prote(e.g. the fault impedance of the LN distanclocation of the fault in km

Synchrocheck / Synchronizing or

RSYN ce is a device that the desired limits of

rmit or to cause d stress for the f circuit breaker

voltage, frequency and phase angle are within certain limits.

Synchronism-Check

25 Synchronizing or synchronism-check devioperates when two ac circuits are withinfrequency, phase-angle and voltage, to pethe paralleling of these two circuits. To avoiswitching device and the network, closing ois allowed by the synchrocheck only, if the differences of

Power swing blocking RPSB 78 Phase-angle measuring or out-of-step protective relay is a relay that functions at a predetermined phase angle between

o voltages or between two currents or between voltage twand current

1.2 Logical Nodes for Control

1.2.1 Control Logical Node 61850 Description Alarm handling (Creation of group alarms and group

CALH ence between ed to any data have to be combined e function is

d to calculate new data nodes. Remote d authority shall alarms is an

engineering issue.

events)

For the communication, there is no differalarms and events, if a time tag is addtransmitted. If several events or alarmsto group alarms, a separate, configurablneeded. The related LN may be useout of individual data from different logicalacknowledgement with different priority anbe possible. The definition and handling of

Switch controller - Controls any switchgear, i.e. the devices described by XCBR and XSWI

CSWI The switch control LN handles all switchgear operations from the operators and from related automatics. It checks the authorization of the commands. It supervises the command execution and gives an alarm in case if improper ending of the command. It asks for releases from interlocking, synchrocheck, autoreclosure, etc. if applicable.



Point-on-wave breakecontroller Controls abreaker with point-on-

r circuit

wave switching capability

CPOW provides all aker at a certain

voltage or current CSWI or RREC. the voltages on

m stress. This . For opening the ferring to the current

voltage m stress and

on the intended olute time referring

. For these calculations the red. If switching

n times are provided.

The point-on-wave breaker controller LNfunctionality to close or open a circuit breinstant of time, i.e. a certain point of thewave. It is started by request either fromFor closing it compares similar as RSYNboth sides of the breaker to get the minimuholds also if one of the voltages is zeropoint of minimum stress is calculated rewave. The selection command activates theselection. It calculates the point of minimuissues a closing or opening (depending command) execute command with an absto the requested point-on-waveconditions in all three phases are consideper phase is applicable three executio

Interlocking function at station and/or bay level

CILO r totally nterlocking rules are basically the

on all related cking LNs may be s Interlocking (IL).

at bay level included in this mmands are

affecting interlocking

2) Interlocking of switchgear at station level l interlocking rules referring to the station are included in

d commands are

Interlocking may be totally centralized odecentralized. Since the isame on bay and station level and basedposition indications the different interloseen as instances of the same LN clas1) Interlocking of switchgearAll interlocking rules referring to a bay areLN. Releases or blockings of requested coissued. In case of status changesblocking commands are issued.

Althis LN. Releases or blockings of requesteissued. Information with the LN bay interlocking is exchanged

1.2.2 Interfaces, logging, and archiving

Logical Node 61850 Description Operator interface • control local at bay

level • control at station level

IHM y level to be used for

el to be used as

r most of the

I 1) Front-panel operator interface at baconfiguration, etc. and local control

2) Local operator interface at station levwork place for the station operator

The role of the different HMI is not fixed fofunctions and is defined in the engineering phase.

Remote control interor Te

face lecontrol interface

ITC control from

e data as the these data

ot fixed for most of the ng phase

I Telecontrol interface to be used for remotehigher control level Basically, the TCI will communicate the samstation level HMI or a subset ofThe role of the different interfaces is nfunctions and defined in the engineeri

Remote monitoring interface / Telemonitoring interface

ITMI Telemonitoring interface to be used for remote monitoring and maintenance using a subset of all information available in the substation and allows no control. The role of the different interfaces is not fixed for most of the functions and defined in the engineering phase

Archiving IARC Archiving to be used as sink and source for long-term historical data, normally used globally for the complete substation on station level



1.2.3 Automatic Process C ontrolLogical Node 61850 Description Automatic tap changer control

ATCC bar within a ngers. This node operates the

tap changer automatically according to given setpoints or by

Automatics to maintain the voltage of a busspecific range using tap cha

direct operator commands (manual mode).

Automatic voltage control AVCO ar within a used

Automatics to control the voltage of a busbspecific range independent of the means

Reactive control ARC in a substation rs and/or reactances.

O Automatics to control the reactive power flowwithin a specific range using capacito

Earth fault neutrcontrol (control of

alizer

Petersen coil)

ANC nt influences the dynamically

R The grounding of the transformer star poishort circuit in a network. This grounding isdetermined by a Petersen coil (LN ENF) controlled byENFC.

Zero-voltage tripping AZV If a line connected to a substation is without voltage longer d off automatically.

iation from the only (voltage/no

T than a predefined time, the line is switcheIn contrast to the PTUV having settable devnominal voltage, AZVT is a binary function voltage)

Automatic process control Means a generic , programmable LN for sequences, unknown functions, etc.

GAP tions are sequences. They are collected in the ess control (GAPC). This is

hese sequences anguages. The

e same as for all

ay parts of e network. This

not be restricted on frequency power balance etc.

etect a weak infeed e.g. to an industrial plant and to over to another feeding line. Boundary conditions

ization of motors if

r transformer or ated transformers

4) Busbar change To start by one single operator command a sequence of switching operations resulting in a busbar change of a dedicated line or transformer if applicable 5) Automatic clearing & voltage restoration to trip all circuits connected to a busbar after detecting zero-voltage conditions (black-out) and to close the same breakers following certain pre-defined rules

C Several funcLN type Generic automatic proca generic node for all undefined functions. Tmay be implemented with standard PLC ldata access and exchange is completely th

mples are other LNs. Exa1) Load shedding to shed in overload situations in a very selective wthe consumers to avoid the collapse of thload-shedding function maycriteria only like PFRQ but include actual 2) Infeed transfer switching to dswitchhave to be considered like the synchronapplicable 3) Transformer change to switchover in case of overload to anotheto distribute the load more evenly to all relon the busbar.



1.2.4 Metering and Measur ementLogical Node 61850 Description Measuring • for operative purpose

MMX lculate nd voltage or power

current samples. tional purposes

vision and management, screen ed accuracy for

the protection devices m represented by

hms like any munication

standard. Therefore, the LN Mxyz shall not be used as input k value, etc. are and not by LNs of

U to acquire values from CTs and VTs and cameasurands like rms values for current aflows out of the acquired voltage andThese values are normally used for operalike power flow superdisplays, state estimation, etc. The requestthese functions has to be provided. Note: The measuring procedures in are part of the dedicated protection algoriththe logical nodes Pxyz. Protection algoritfunction are outside the scope of the com

for Pxyz. Fault related data like fault peaalways provided by the LNs of type Pxyztype Mxyz.

Metering • for commercial

purpose

MMT alculate the quired voltage and

rent samples. Metering is normally used also for billing acy. e the energy values

from external meters e.g. by pulses instead directly from

R to acquire values from CTs and VTs and cenergy (integrated values) out of the accurand has to provide the requested accurA dedicated instance of this LN may tak

CTs and VTs.

Sequences and imbalances e.g. for stability purpose

MSQ s and to calculate the sequences and imbalances in a three/multi-phase power system.

I to acquire values from CTs and VT

Harmonics and Minterharmonics

uality purpose

HAI acquire values from CTs and VTs and to calculate ues in the power

. e.g. for power q

toharmonics, interharmonics and related valsystem mainly used for determining power quality

1.3 Physical device

1.3.1 Common identification and behaviour Logical Node 6185 Description 0 Logical node device LLN0 he IED of Physical

cluded logical nodes n/name plate, messages from device

self-supervision, etc.). his LN may be used also for actions common to all

ode setting, settings, etc.) if

This LN doesn’t restrict the dedicated access to any single LN by definition. Possible restrictions are a matter of implementation and engineering.

This LN is containing the data related to tDevice (PD) independent from all in(device identificatio

Tincluded logical nodes (mapplicable.

1.4 System and device security

Logical Node 61850 Description General security application

GSAL Containing logs about security violations



1.5 LNs related to primary equipment

1.5.1 Switching devic su ones and bstati parts

Logical Node 61850 IEEE Description The LN “circuit brcovers all kind obrea

eaker” f circuit

n-wave

ve ility

XCBR ed to close and interrupt an ac power circuit under normal conditions or to

ency conditions

per phase. These three instances may be allocated to three

kers, i.e. switches able to interrupt short circuits • Without point-o

switching capability• with point-on-wa

switching capab

52 AC circuit breaker is a device that is us

interrupt this circuit under fault or emerg(IEEE 52). If there is a single-phase breaker this LN has an instance

physical devices mounted in the switchgear.

The LN “switch” covers all g devices

short

breakers • Disconnectors • Earthing switches

s

XSWI cting, load- or dc power circuit

If there is a single-phase switch this LN has an instance per phase. These three instances may be allocated to three physical devices mounted in the switchgear.

kind of switchinnot able to switchcircuits • Load

• High-speed earthing switche

89 52

Line switch is a switch used as a disconneinterrupter, or isolating switch on an ac(IEEE 89).

1.5.2 LN for Monitoring by Sensors

Logical Node 61850 IEEE Description Insulation MSupervision

edium SIMS e.g. the gas volumes arding density,

pressure, temperature, etc.

LN to supervise the insulation mediumof GIS (Gas Insulated Switchgear) reg

Monitoring and Arcs

SA to supervise the gas volumes of GIS (Gas Insulated lt arcs Diagnostics for

RC LNSwitchgear) regarding arcs switching or fau

Monitoring and Diagnostics for Partial

SPDC (Gas Insulated ignatures of partial discharges

Discharge

LN to supervise the gas volumes of GISSwitchgear) regarding s

1.5.3 Instrument Transformers

Logical Node 61850 IEEE Description Current transformer R here is one instance per phase. These three/four instances

al devices mounted in ase.

TCT Tmay be allocated to different physicthe instrument transformer per ph

Voltage transformer R e three/four instances d to different physical devices mounted in

TVT There is one instance per phase. Thesmay be allocatethe instrument transformer per phase.

1.5.4 Power Transformers

Function 61850 Description Power transformer YPTR ifferent configurations (Δ, Y, two/three

windings) the voltage levels of the power system Connects in d

Tap changer YLTC Device allocated to YPRT allowing changing taps of the winding for voltage regulation

Earth fault neutralizer (Petersen coil)

YEFN Variable inductance (plunge core coil) allowing adaptive grounding of transformer star point to minimize the ground fault current

Power shunt YPSH To bypass the resistor of a resistive grounded transformer star point for fault handling



1.5.5 Further power system pment equi

Function 61850 Description Auxiliary network ZAXN with auxiliary Generic node for information exchange

networks (power supplies)

Battery ZBAT control of the ycles

Provides data about battery status and for charging/de-charging c

Bushing ZBSH nd supervision of bushings as used for GIS-line connections

Provides properties atransformers or

Power Cable ZCAB Supervised power system element Capacitor bank ZCAP Controls reactive power flow Converter ZCO nversion incl. AC/DC conversion N Frequency coGenerator ZGE nge with generators N Generic node for information exchaGas isolated Line (GIL) ZGIL from SIMS, SARC and SPDC Mixture of data Power overhead line ZLIN rhead line Supervised oveMotor ZMOT Generic node for information exchange with motors Reactor ZREA Controls reactive power flow Rotating reactive ZRRC er flow component

Controls reactive pow

Surge arrestor ZSAR Generic node for information exchange with surge arrestors (Thyristor controlled) frequency converter

ZTCF Frequency conversion incl. AC/DC conversion

Thyristor controlled reactive component

ZTCR Controls reactive power flow

1.5.6 Generic process I/O

Function 61850 Description Generic I/O GGIO elays, etc. not

d switchgear related LNs are sometimes needed. On the other side, there are additional

's representing not predefined devices like horn, bell, and outputs from non-

ed auxiliary devices also. For all these I/O's, the represent a generic

Outputs like analog outputs, auxiliary rcovered by the above-mentione

I/Otarget value etc. There are input defingeneric logical node GIO is used toprimary or auxiliary device (type X…, Y…, Z…).

1.6 LNs related to system serv icesFunction 61850 Description Time master STIM LN to provide the time to the s

synchronization) ystem (setting and

System supervision SSYS LN to start , collect and process all dasupervision

ta for system

Test generator GTES LN to start tests by using process signals but avoiding any n the process (blocking of process outputs) impact o

7.8.1 Substation Configuration Language The engineering of the Substation AutomatioSubstation Configuration description Language (SCL), which shall provide the means to

n System shall be supported by the

exchange standardized configuration data between engineering tools. hould be capable of reading and editing all of the SCL files defined in IEC 61850-6:

• System Specification Description (SSD file extension)

• Substation Configuration Description (SCD file extension)

• IED Capability Description (ICD file extension)

SCL s



• Configured IED Files (CID file extension)

Engineering of a substation automation system may start either with the allofunctionally pre-configured devices to switchyard parts, products or functionsdesign of the process functionality, where functions are allocated to physicabased on functional capabilities of devices and their configuration capabilitimixed approach is preferred: a typical pr

cation of , or with the

l devices later, es. Often a

ocess part such as a line bay is pre-engineered, ed. For SCL,

the needed

with no process

function part.

art of a certain line feeder.

ess functions and possible

orks for all possible clients.

d client server if an IED is not

ing associations or reporting connections (either on

and e) are the result after SAS engineering, S engineering, and b) and c) are

possible results after IED pre-engineering.

scription of the r the device engineering tools in a standardised way.

L data exchange in the above mentioned engineering

The IED configurator shall be the specific tool that shall be able to import / export data

l provide IED specific settings and generate IED specific configuration files, or it shall load the IED configuration into the IED.

IEDs shall be compatible of IEC61850, by

• accompanied either by an SCL file describing its capabilities, or by a tool, which can generate this file from the IED.

and then the result is used within the process functionality as often as needthis means that it must be capable of describing:

a) A system specification in terms of the single line diagram, and allocation of logical nodes (LN) to parts and equipment of the single line to indicatefunctionality.

b) Pre-configured IEDs with a fixed number of logical nodes (LNs), but binding to a specific process - may only be related to a very general

c) Pre-configured IEDs with a pre-configured semantic for a process pstructure, for example a double busbar GIS

d) Complete process configuration with all IEDs bound to individual procand primary equipment, enhanced by the access point connectionsaccess paths in subnetw

e) As item d) above, but additionally with all predefined associations anconnections between logical nodes on data level. This is neededcapable of dynamically buildthe client or on the server side).

Case e) is the complete case. Both cases d)while case a) is a functional specification input to SA

The scope of SCL as defined in this standard is clearly restricted to these purposes:

1) SAS functional specification (point a) above),

2) IED capability description (points b)and c) above), and

3) SA system description (points d) and e) above)

for the purpose of system design, communication engineering and the deengineered system communication fo

Figure 7-5 shows the usage of SCprocess.

It shal



• the use a system SCL file to set its communication configuration, as is possible at all or it is acco

far as setting mpanied by a tool which can import a system SCL file

d by IEC 61850 system level

rmation shared by different IEDs. It shall then generate a substation related configuration file, which shall be fed back to the IED configurator for system related IED configuration.

to set these parameters to the IED.

The System configurator shall be able to import / export data (files) define- 6. It shall import configuration files from several IEDs, as needed forengineering, and used to add system info

Figure 7-5 Reference model for information flow in the configuratio

7.9 STATION CONTROL UNIT

The Station Control Unit shall be a multi-micro processor computer system. microprocessors are to perform different tasks such as da

n process

Different tabase and system

munication. Software as well as configuration data shall be stored in , EEPROM or NV RAM. The Station Control Unit shall be easy

d if required, uration data is to . The different us integrated into

a back plane. Future extensions shall not require any modifications.

Tasks

The Station Control Unit shall permanently monitor itself and all subsystems and shall poll data from the bay units and I/O modules. This data shall comprise of time tagged switchgear status information, system status information, alarms, measured values, metered values and fault records from protective IEDs. The Station Control Unit shall

management or comnon-volatile EPROMconfigurable and extendible by plugging additional modules into free slots anadding extension racks to increase the number of slots. Only the configbe updated. The extensions shall not require any firmware modificationsslots of the Station Control Unit shall be interconnected via an internal b

7.9.1



update the real-time system database and transmit selected data to its communication e HMI(s).

via the or operator

stations. Control and monitor via HMI of all substations connected to this LAN shall be

the Station Control Unit shall be able to perform

g including the reset of the output contacts after

ynchronization by GPS

r minute from an external clock. It shall synchronize all IEDs via

lly extensible. It must be possible to replace the

The modules shall be protected against touch by a module capsule consisting of provided with

iagnostic indicators: All modules shall be equipped with LEDs on the ernal and

• Process indicators: The digital input, control output and control modules should be equipped with LEDs indicating the status of the process inputs and outputs. The process indicators shall be directly assigned to the connection terminals on the front of

• Coding element: Confusion of the connection cables has to be prevented by snapping in a coding element on each of the function modules and on the front plug connector.

processors, which shall pass it on to the network control centre or th

The Station Control Unit shall be capable to connect and exchange data communication bus with other substation control and monitoring systems

possible.

Beside those general tasks mentionedenhanced automation functions which include:

• Station wide automatic control sequences

• Station wide interlocking

• Processing of analogue values, e.g., threshold monitoring and alarming

• Command output time monitorinsuccessful switching

7.9.2 Time Synchronization

The Station Control Unit is to include an interface for time ssignals. Synchronization shall also be possible with messages from the Network Control Centre or by one pulse peits interfaces.

It must be possible to synchronize the whole system from one source.

7.9.3 I/O-Modules

Slots for different types of I/O-modules shall be an integral part of the Station Control Unit. The Station Control Unit should be fumodules without switching off the Station Control Unit. Further requirements to be fulfilled:

•housing shell and cover. They shall have a protection rating of IP20 andESD protection.

• Real time acquisition of process changes

• Spontaneous acquisition of events

• Operating and dfront of the housing capsule for the indication of operating states, and intexternal errors.



7.10 OPERATOR CONSOLE

ws XP MI software package. It is to be connected to the Station Control

usly print out the chronological event list and to print

nd by detailed single ts which d values and

itional status. Multi window capability is required

trol the plant A printer shall

e tagged event and alarm data.

plant as modify the configuration on-line

e.g. display design, alarm and event processing and display.

gration into existing computer

its database for other applications using ODBC/SQL

access the functions of the package with third-

olour screen shall present customized displays. e diagram of the entire substation

rapid overview on the switchgear layout and its status. The overview diagram must show:

which feeder there are alarms ready to be acknowledged

• Busbar voltages

• Buttons to open other windows

In the overview diagrams, no control or acknowledgement shall be permissible. The operator has to select a detail diagram where the action may be carried out.

7.10.1 Components

An operator console shall be made up of a PC with operating system WindoProfessional running a HUnit(s) via a substation LAN. Up to two HMIs should be connectable to this LAN. Future extensions shall be possible.

A printer shall be provided to continuoout historical event data and records of analogue values.

7.10.2 Functional Requirements

The HMI shall display switchgear status by a customized overview aline diagrams with colour mimic display of the different switchgear componenrepresent status including, but not being limited to, measured values, meteretransformer tap position. On-line alarm list and event list shall provide addinformation on historical and present substationto present detailed information from different plant sections simultaneously on one screen. The system shall be suitable to be extended to multi-display mode to confrom different locations. Typical display update time shall be one second.continuously print out tim

The HMI package is to include all software and configuration data for thisdescribed below. Additional tools shall be delivered towithout any programming or knowledge in source code,

To meet future requirements and to ease the system intesystems of the Purchaser the software shall be open providing:

• Access to

• Capability to integrate objects from other applications (OLE)

• Dynamic data exchange with other windows applications (DDE)

• API and related development kit to party software

All displays shall be fully graphical; the cAn overview diagram shall show a simplified single linintended to give a

• Which feeder is connected to which Busbar

• How the Busbar sections are interconnected

• In



Via buttons in the overview diagram windows presenting detail diagrams ofsectio

different plant ns can be opened. Those detail diagrams show all relevant information of feeders,

of switches, operational equipment, auxiliary equipment

• Measured values, e.g., current, voltages, power

display an event and an alarm list on the screen and archive this ns in the overview diagram the related

d. One line shall be displayed for each event and alarm comprising the ion:

date, hour, minute, second, millisecond,

oltage level

y

r the lists shall be configurable by the operator to modify the a from the

nt data.

by the operator

Switchgear Control

shall be

To control a circuit breaker or switch the operator shall have to run through the following ure:

• Selecting the switch: A click with the left mouse button on the switch symbol opens the popup window for choosing the actuating direction. The mouse pointer has to change its appearance if the mouse is within a region in the picture where mouse clicks are possible. ToolTips shall give the user additional information.

such as:

• Status

• Alarms

• Metered values

In the detail picture details of station components can be controlled.

7.10.2.1 Event and Alarm List

The system shallinformation on the hard disc of the PC. Via buttowindow is openefollowing informat

• Time tag with

• Information with

⇒ V

⇒ Ba

⇒ Text of the information

• Value

• Cause

• Destination of the command/information

The memory management fotime period for recording. Software tools shall be available to export datdatabase to a mass memory to keep a copy of all historical sequence of eve

Serious alarms displayed in the alarm list requiring to be acknowledged shall be marked.

7.10.2.2

Sequence of single operation steps. If an operation step is not permissible it rejected by the system. No more than one command shall be executed at the same time. A new command may not be released before the previous one has been executed or cancelled.

proced



• Selecting the actuating direction: Choosing the actuating direction by corresponding button in the p

clicking the opup window shall define the command and open the

he switch symbol has to depend upon its state. For the following states,

• Normal state

the tag assigned to .g. if a circuit breaker

ip.

ing as soon as the set g when the

l user-over measured

ues and metered values.

rams and charts. The operator may select the values d, zoom the diagrams and read out values. Settings for

d below shall be available to

in diagrams and tables

inimum and maximum values (15 min, per hour, per day)

ze for the database shall be configurable by the operator.

The system shall support the operator in creating and printing user-defined reports. The r these reports shall cover:

• Current event and alarm data

• Archived event and alarm data

• Diagrams and charts of archived analogue values

popup window for command output.

• Outputting the command: Upon clicking the Execute button in the popup window, the command shall be executed.

The colour of tdifferent colours have to be defined:

• Value not up to date

• HMI state not OK

The switch symbol has to flash spontaneously as soon as the value ofit has changed and spontaneous has been indicated as the cause, ewas opened by a protection tr

During command output, the switch symbol has to start flashactuating direction (ON or OFF) has been chosen. It shall stop flashincommand is terminated or aborted.

7.10.2.3 Display and Archiving of Analogue and Metered Values

The HMI is to store historical analogue data continuously with a time intervadefinable from 500 ms to 1 day in the database. The archived data shall canalogue val

The data is to be displayed in diagand the time period to be displayerecording and display e.g. time resolution or values to be stored can be modified by the operator on-line.

An additional tool that comprises at least the functions listeprocess the data stored in the data base:

• Read out the data from the data base

• Display the data

• Calculate and display average values (15 min, per hour, per day)

• Calculate and display m

The management and the si

7.10.2.4 Reporting

data fo



• Hard copies

• Operator reports

• System configuration data

The layout shall be user definedefined reports can be initiated

d, a print preview shall ease the design. Printing of pre- by events, time schedules, or by the operator.

e system must be password protected. Different groups of users with different jurisdictions shall be

ontrol, for configuration, or for

commands from all higher levels. The operation level having currently the proper authority to control

shall be indicated at the HMI screen and the control centre. A change in he following modes of operation shall

e switch at the process level:

LOCAL: Emergency control via push buttons that are independent of the control or .

n either from

BAY LEVEL or

Mode selected at Bay panel:

CY: Operation without interlocking function. This mode shall be ntrol when the control system is down.

• LOCAL: Operation with interlocking function via an independent interlocking unit.

⇒ STATION LEVEL or

Control Centre Level

(c) STATION LEVEL

Mode of control selected via the HMI:

• Local: Operation via HMI at the station control room.

7.10.2.5 Password Protection

To minimize the risk, which might be caused by unauthorized access, th

definable, e.g., for monitoring only, for monitoring and csupervision.

7.10.3 Operation Levels and Control Mode Selection

Each of the hierarchical operation levels shall have the possibility to block

the switchgear control authority shall be logged in the event list. Tbe provided:

(a) LOCAL LEVEL

Mode selected via local/remot

•interlocking system

• REMOTE: Operatio

⇒

⇒ Station Level or

⇒ Control Centre Level

(b) BAY LEVEL

• LOCAL/EMERGENused as back-up co

• REMOTE: Operation either from



• Remote: Operation from the control centre.

ated in indoor al control cubicles and for outdoor installations at the protection

ventional copper

Isolators and Earth Switches shall incorporate the following :

rotection (I>>)

• ording of the SF6-density

6

nd Monitoring

ge Regulating Relays

nsformers shall be initiated by Voltage Regulating Relays ing manufacturers:

lays and Network Control

ltage 44 - 2. The

step percentage.

The relay shall be insensitive to frequency variation between the limits of 47Hz and 51Hz. The relay shall be complete with a time delay element adjustable between 10 and 120 seconds. The relay shall also incorporate an under voltage blocking facility which renders

7.11 BAY UNITS

7.11.1 Bay Control and Monitoring

The bays shall be controlled and monitored through the bay controller situinstallations at the GIS loccubicle. Communication with primary equipment can be either with conwires or through a process bus.

• The Circuit Breaker, protection and monitoring

• motor protection (I>)

• short circuit p

• supervision of motor running time

• SF6-monitoring

calculation and rec

• permanent evaluation of the SF6- gas values

• indications:

⇒ loss of SF6 alarm

⇒ general lockout SF

• trip coil circuit supervision

7.11.2 Transformer Control a

7.11.2.1 Volta

Automatic Voltage Control of Tramounted at the 22kV Incoming Cubicles, supplied by one of the follow

• Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen – Germany

• Eberle - Germany

• ABB - Re

The reference voltage to the relay shall be obtained from the LV side of a votransformer of ratio 22000-11000/110, having accuracy class 0,5 to EN 600relay voltage reference balance point shall be adjustable.

The relay bandwidth shall preferably be adjustable to any value between 1,5 and 2,5 times the transformer tap step percentage, the nominal setting being twice the transformer



the control inoperative if a reference voltage falls below 80% of the nominal value with f nominal value.

monitored for

r is on manual control.

T

Isinφ and ΔIsinφ (S) principle.

• a PC via a front serial port (software to be included)

buttons

adjuster

•

former Monitoring

er shall be monitored for the following:

emperature – Stage 1

re

• Low Oil Level

• OLTC AC Fail

nitoring of fans

• AC fail

In addition to trips initiated by differential, restricted earth fault, or overcurrent relays, direct trips via copper conductors shall be given to the relevant circuit breakers under the following conditions:

automatic restoration of control when the reference voltage rises to 85% o

The LV voltage transformer supply to the voltage regulating relay shall bepartial or complete failure with the exception when the circuit breaker controlling the 22-11kV side is open or when the tap change

The relay shall have the following characteristics:

• Adequate free programmable analogue ports and binary inputs and outputs

• Communication interfaces for connection with Bay Level

he unit shall perform the following functions but not limited to:

• Parallel control of 3 Transformers

Control using circulating current method based on Δ

• Control of motor drive unit using the step-by-step method

• Adjustment of all configurations for the measuring transformers

Parameter setting with

• Remote/Supervisory control

• Raise/Lower pushbuttons

• Auto/Manual push

• Voltage and Current reference

• Measurement (U, I, cosΦ) and Event Recordings

Tap Position indication

7.11.2.2 Trans

The Transform

• Buchholz Gas

• Winding T

• Oil Temperatu

• Marshalling Kiosk AC Fail

• Mo



• Buchholz Oil surge

– Stage 2

Feeders

either ventional copper wires or thought a process bus.

the Station Control

a variety of o be directly connected to the Protection

per wires.

ess and device information can be ferent lists.

board and display

al pages

f automation sequences

Interlocking via pear to pear communication

t the Station Control Unit

ion channels

of the A/D converters

• Synchro-check

• Display measured values and status information.

• Self-monitoring routines

Bay Units shall be built in a compact closed housing with terminal blocks mounted at the rear side. To ensure proper earthing a threaded pin must be welded on the housing and

• OLTC Oil surge

• Winding temperature

• Pressure Relief Operated

• Buchholz Oil Surge – Earthing Transformer

7.11.3 Bay Units for Transmission

At the bay level, Bay Units shall communicate with their respective bays via con

They shall collect all switchgear information provided and transmit it toUnit.

They shall be the input for all ac-analogue values from CTs and VTs. The analogue values shall be sampled at a high rate and pre-processed to calculate measurement values. The CTs and VTs shall alsdevices via direct cop

It shall be equipped with a large LCD where procdisplayed as a one-line diagram or as text in dif

Their general tasks cover:

• Controlling of the switchgear via key

• Control figure in display can consist of sever

• Implementation o

•

• Standalone operation withou

• Release of commands

• Trip Circuit monitoring

• Supervision of the communicat

• Cyclic check

• Supervision of the auxiliary voltages

• Calculation of the rms values of current and voltage

• Calculation of P, Q, S, φ, cosφ, sinφ, f



the surface surrounding the pin must be coated with high circuit capacity conducting

Bay Units shall include all the necessary functions for the protection of distribution feeders

ted to the Station

ith a large LCD where process and device information can be ists.

fault (Option)

g (Option)

requency

oltage

ure

⇒

of circuit breakers

earth switch

ear to pear communication

ns:

Self-Monitoring of internal measurement circuits, power supply, hardware and software

⇒ Current transformer and voltage transformer secondary circuits

⇒ Trip circuit monitoring

• Measuring Functions

material.

7.11.4 Bay-Units for Distribution Feeders

and the control and monitor of the circuit breakers.

All the necessary information concerning the feeder should be transmitControl Unit via the communication interface.

It shall be equipped wdisplayed as a one-line diagram or as text in different l

Their general tasks cover:

• Protective Functions (Options as per specification drawings):

⇒ Inverse and Definite Time Overcurrent Protection –Characteristics according to EN 60255 standard

⇒ Instantaneous Overcurrent

⇒ Sensitive Earth

⇒ Autoreclosin

⇒ Under/Over F

⇒ Under/Over V

⇒ Breaker Fail

⇒ Reverse Blocking

Switch on to Fault

• Control Functions:

⇒ Open/Close

⇒ Open/Close of Disconnector

⇒ Open/Close of

⇒ Monitoring of above conditions via double pole auxiliary contacts

⇒ Bay Interlocking

⇒ Interlocking via p

• Monitoring Functio

⇒



⇒ Current

eactive power

tor

aveform capture

cuit breaker statistics including the number of trip signals and the

d pin must be welded on the housing and with high circuit capacity conducting

2 SWITCHGEAR INTERLOCKING SYSTEM

tion of the ands, to protect

r of the entire

remely reliable the whole

ensured at any time and unclear information, such as intermediate er allow

Mal-operation of control and regulation facilities such as on-load switching of an isolator, hronous status

onsider the tation wide

n bus section nnectors, Busbar earthing etc., e.g. to avoid closing of both

isolators of a double Busbar feeder when the bus-tie is open. The bay units shall check the interlocking conditions concerning the switchgear status of the respective bay and

Bay units shall be installed in the bay related control cubicles. Data exchange between bay units, and between individual bay units and Station Control Unit, shall take place via the communication interfaces.

⇒ Voltage

⇒ Real & R

⇒ Power fac

• Other Functions

⇒ Recording and saving of fault data in chronological order of the last faults

⇒ Recording and saving of w

⇒ Recording of ciraccumulated interrupted currents

⇒ Commissioning aids

Bay Units shall be built in a compact closed housing with terminal blocks mounted at the rear side. To ensure proper earthing a threadethe surface surrounding the pin must be coatedmaterial.

7.1

The switchgear interlocking system shall be though pear to pear communicabay units. It must be so designed, to prevent inadmissible switching commpersons and to avoid either damage of equipment and blackout of lines ogrid.

The function and design of the switchgear interlocking systems shall be extand safe. Real-time monitoring and processing of all switchgear positions of substation must beswitchgear positions, switchgear fault, faulty data transfer, etc., must nevswitching operations.

out of step operation of on-load tap changer control, CB close during asyncetc., must be blocked.

The system shall be designed in such a way that the interlock conditions cstatus of the whole substation. It shall be distinguished between bay and Sinterlocking conditions.

The system shall check all Station wide interlocking conditions depending oor couplers, bus-tie disco

request the other bay units to acknowledge that the Station wide interlocking conditions are fulfilled before it releases a command.



Bay Units shall be equipped with key locks to select local, remote and nomode. Via select and execute push buttons control commands may be inlocal mode operation. Local control must always h

n-interlocked itiated during

ave priority; commands from higher

Mal-operation of the switching device and the interlocking system itself have to be ystem.

always block execution of commands.

lays, intelligent process devices, system automation, SCL, SCADA , etc., shall be included to ease operation, maintenance and modifications of the complete system. Software should run on a PC with a 32-bit multitasking operating system, preferably Windows XP Professional.

control levels must be rejected when this mode is activated.

indicated on the faceplate and signalled to the higher level control s

In case of internal fault, the bay unit must

7.13 ENGINEERING PC AND SOFTWARE

All required software, i.e. protection devices, voltage regulating re



8. CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS FOR NON-AUTOMATED SUBSTATIONS

specified and t buildings as

ntrol boards shall be segregated from f the panels shall

, colour and me room as

ting boards. nd scaling

nnections of equipment to be associated with existing equipment shall be such that they are fully

ing equipment. pproval of the

lities for the ion, the plant res.

r a separate s including

ansducers and changeover switches shall be provided under sponsible under this Contract for the provision of les. All circuits provided under this Contract

e system control requirements at the present time, shall be designed and constructed so that the standard facilities specified can be readily

). The tions or other

reinforcement where necessary to prevent distortion or the maloperation of relays or other the size of the

ished surface.

Each cubicle shall form a complete enclosure and is preferably to be associated with only one circuit of main equipment. The enclosures shall afford IP4l degree of protection for

and IP54 for outdoor cubicles, as categorised by EN 60529 in accordance with this Specification.

Cubicles shall be so constructed that the front panel or the equipment-mounting panel is removable without disturbing the remainder of the cubicle structure.

8.1 ARRANGEMENT OF FACILITIES

Control and relay equipment shall be mounted on panels and boards as shall be erected in permanent buildings on the substation sites or in adjacenspecified. Except where otherwise specified, cometering and protection boards. Unless otherwise approved, the order obe as specified reading from left to right facing the board.

Panels provided for installation in the same room shall be of same designappearance. Also panels provided as extensions or for erection in the saexisting boards shall be of similar design, colour and appearance to the exisEquipment, meters, etc., mounted on such panels shall likewise be of style asimilar to the existing equipment. Characteristics of relays, etc., and all co

compatible with and can operate satisfactorily in conjunction with the existThe characteristics and appearance of all such equipment shall be to the aEngineer.

Control boards shall incorporate all necessary control and indication facioperation of the plant and equipment at the associated substation. In additmay be remotely controlled and supervised from central system control cent

The system control and communications equipment will be supplied undecontract but all necessary DC and power frequency equipment, connectionauxiliary switches, relays, trthis Contract. The Contractor shall be reterminal blocks in relay and control cubicwhether or not they are subject to th

provided as required in the future.

8.2 CONSTRUCTION OF CUBICLES

8.2.1 General Construction

Cubicles are to be sheet metal having a minimum thickness of 2mm (14SWGconstruction shall employ folding techniques with use of standard rolled sec

apparatus by impact, having regard to the number and size of cut-outs andpanel. The front of the panel is to have a smooth well-fin

indoor



Close fitting, lockable and lift-off rear access cubicle steel doors shall be provided and

ing. Handles and bottom doors

shall not be interlocked and cross stiffeners shall not impede access to the cubicle. ling.

device (eg

an interior lamp supply and controlled by a door operating switch, shall be fitted

oof louvers

and shall provide ardwood

imum of chieving this,

e less than s mounted on

re cable terminal boards shall be

ble terminations te removable gland plates shall be provided within the cubicles, so located as

ged front to minimise shock and wiring shall be so arranged as to

ounted on rear

icle shall be suitably labelled in accordance with the rear with the access doors either open or closed shall also

ting of all indicating devices, control switches, relays and e approval of the Engineer. The exterior finish and colour of

One cubicle may accommodate apparatus associated with not more than two circuits in case vertical barriers must be provided within the cubicle.

8.2.3 Relay Cubicles

Separate cubicles must be provided for the protection relays associated with each primary circuit. Equipment may be mounted on either a removable panel or a rack-type arrangement. Each cubicle shall be provided with a front door. The door shall consist of

hinged to lie back flat to avoid restricting access.

Integral handles shall secure doors and provision shall be made for padlockand padlocks shall not be more than 1.5 metres above floor level. Top

Moulded gaskets of non-ageing material shall be used to provide close sea

All cubicle doors shall be closed by handle that operates on a 3-point closingEspagnolette type).

The interior of each cubicle shall be finished with a matt white surface andsuitable for the local LVACat the top of each section. Anti-condensation heaters shall also be fitted in each section and each cubicle shall be well ventilated top and bottom through vermin prfitted with brass gauze screens.

Unless otherwise approved, panels shall be suitable for floor mountingfor bottom entry of power and multicore cables via vermin proof plates and hsealing bushes.

Equipment and terminals shall be readily accessible and shall require a mindisturbance of associated and adjacent equipment for access. To assist in acubicle widths shall not be less than 600 mm wide and the depth shall not exceed the width. The width between apparatus mounted on the cubicle side shall not bthat which will permit full and easy access to all terminals and for apparatuthe panels. The arrangement of panel wiring and multicoin accordance with the relevant Clause of this Specification.

The floor plates of cubicles shall not be used as gland plates for control cabut separato provide adequate working clearance for terminating the cables.

Where relay movements and other sensitive equipment are mounted on hinpanels, these shall be designedimpose no strain on terminations. No equipment whatsoever shall be maccess doors.

All sections of a composite cubSpecification and labels at the readily identify each section or panel.

The arrangement and mounother apparatus shall be to thall cubicles shall be to the approval of the Engineer

8.2.2 Control Cubicles



a full length and width translucent window contained in a steel frame. The window shall all relays mounted behind the door.

They shall be complete with any supporting steelwork necessary for mounting on concrete

plates etc., for

ate conditions

ell ventilated ured to the

to assist air

ch separate bay to be erected at the position shown on the respective drawing. Each such cubicle is to contain

inations mentioned in these specifications and in addition the cubicles space and termination for marshalling the AC and DC supplies, CT, r outputs/signals detailed in the relevant Schedules.

Control panels provided under the Contract shall afford all facilities necessary for the safe this and associated

tations, as n.

nvenient operating height and so constructed, eed to

Lab

8.3.2 Control of Circuit Devices

• On Local Control Cubicles the control switches for all devices and the lockable local/remote selector switch shall be mounted behind the lockable glass panelled front door.

Lockable control switches with spade type handles shall be provided for the maintenance circuit earth and busbar earth switches.

allow a full view of the status of

8.2.4 Outdoor Cubicles

foundations, steelwork or plant as appropriate.

Cubicles shall be provided with the necessary terminal blocks, cable glandtermination of multicore cables.

Door shall be fitted with weatherproof sealing material suitable for the climat site.

The cubicles shall comply with enclosure category IP54 but shall also be wthrough louvers having a brass gauge screen attached to a frame and secinside of the cubicle.

Any divisions between compartments within the cubicles shall be perforatedcirculation.

A suitable outdoor marshalling cubicle is to be supplied for ea

all controls and termare to have adequateVT and circuit breake

8.3 CONTROLS

8.3.1 General

and effective control of the plant and equipment being supplied undercontracts.

Controls at each substation shall be operated at the battery voltage of the sspecified under the appropriate section of this Specificatio All switches shall be located at a comounted and wired to facilitate the maintenance of contacts without the ndisconnect wiring. Switches shall have locks incorporated in the design. Control switches must be lockable in the inactive or neutral position and selector switches in all positions.

els shall clearly indicate all positions and function of each switch.



Control switches with pistol grip type handles for circuit breakehandles for both busbar selector isolators, circuit iso

rs and spade type lators and circuit earth

le.

ted.

ic diagram. nce.

pancy switches and indicators shall form shall be labelled

switches as

and busbar nd lamp or locks.

the front sheet he control mode

ntrol panel are

ircuit breakers, busbar selector isolators, circuit isolators en the mode

position and the mode .

and so that two sed to open or

se position the switch must be pushed in to permit rotation to the operate

d by the operator the handle nd interrupt the pancy switches

associated

to the operate positions. They shall be free to move to either of the dressed positions.

pancy switches shall not be lit when dressed to the same position as the primary device but shall show a steady light when switch and device are in disagreement. The switch shall show a flashing light during the period that the controlled device takes to move fully from one position to the other.

A lamp test facility shall be provided in association with any discrepancy switch.

switches shall be provided. These switches shall be lockab

All control switches shall be effective only when local mode is selec

A semaphore indicator is required for each device as part of the mimEach semaphore is to be labelled with the device identification refere

• On the Remote Control Panels all discrepart of the mimic diagram on the front sheet. The mimic diagramwith each primary device identification reference.

Discrepancy control switches with locking facilities are required for the circuit breakers, busbar selector isolators, circuit isolators and circuit earthspecified in the Schedule of Requirements.

Discrepancy indicators are required for the maintenance circuit earthearth switches. These indicators are to have the same appearance afacilities as discrepancy switches but without either operate positions

A lockable remote/supervisory selector switch shall be mounted onfor each circuit. The control switches shall be effective only when tselector switches on both the local control cubicle and the remote coin the 'Remote' position.

• Supervisory control of cand circuit earth switches where specified is to be effective only whselector switch on the local control cubicle is in the 'remote' selector on the remote control panel is in the 'supervisory' position

8.3.3 Control Switches

Control switches shall be of either the handle type or, where specified, discrepancy type and shall be arranged to operate clockwise when closing the circuit devices anticlockwise when opening. Discrepancy type switches shall be arranged discrete movements are required to effect operation, ie. from either the dresdressed to clopositions.

Handle type switches shall be so designed that when releaseand mechanism shall return automatically to the centred neutral position asupply of current to the operating mechanism of the circuit device. Discrewhen released from the operate position shall return automatically to thedressed position.

When locked it shall not be possible to move discrepancy switches

Discre



Pistol grip type handles shall be used for circuit breaker control switches and not for any

witches shall have additional labelling giving the reference identification of the

he required only. All key

switches for a particular voltage level at a substation shall have a common lock change one key available only one switch can be in an operated position at

Control boards and panels shall be provided with mimic diagrams to the following colour code showing the main power connections in single line schematic format at a convenient height so as to permit ready operation of the circuit-breaker control switches and discrepancy type indicators which shall be incorporated in such diagrams.

Sy Voltage kV BS.381C

other switch.

All control sprimary device.

8.3.4 Selector Switches

Selector switches shall have spade type handles.

Where key operated switches are specified inserting and turning the key to tposition shall operate these. The key shall be removable in the 'off' position

number such that withany one time.

8.4 INDICATIONS

stem Colour to

220 N.A.

132 Black

66 Golden Brown No. 414

11 Signal Red No. 537

Background To be approved

Control switches and pushbuttons shall comply with this Specificationindicators shall operate reliably at voltages from 120 to 80 per cent of normal. They shall

. Semaphore

eous indication.

y the supervisory control scheme shall be derived from separate normally open and closed auxiliary

d up, under this Contract, to terminal blocks in the nels.

when the the indicator

osition.

8.5 SUPERVISION RELAYS

8.5.1 General

Each auxiliary control circuit but no trip circuit shall be protected by means of two-pole miniature circuit breaker supplied with an auxiliary contact. The auxiliary contacts of all mcb's of the same circuit e.g. isolators and earthing switch motor circuits, heater etc. shall be grouped to give an alarm on the respective control panel annunciator.

be arranged so that a supply failure does not at any time create an erron

Position indication signals of switches and breakers for transmission b

contacts, provided and connecteassociated control pa

All discrepancy lamps shall be arranged to light and give an audible alarmposition of the circuit breaker or isolating switch is at variance with that of and shall be arranged to extinguish when the indicator is set to the correct p



In addition to the VT no-volt relay specified for synchronising purposes, the following VT

he local control cabinet for alarms and

ss of or directional overcurrent and

cuit breaker is

g faults on d.c. operation of a trip relay contact. Series resistances ping a circuit-breaker if a relay element is short-

self-resetting flag indicators.

of the 132kV d indication

purposes.

Main 2, ly for each trip

each alarms/indications supply.

endent of alarms from the trip circuit supervision rly differentiate

CB and

uit breaker trip ing wires as possible in either the open or closed

position and independent of the selected operating position. The relay shall also supervise subject to approval by the Engineer.

n or closed sing relay coil

ing the breaker or reaker.

For each line feeder a three-phase voltage transformer is to be provided by others, for this an automatic voltage selection scheme shall be provided to derive a busbar

voltage reference from the circuit voltage transformers. The paralleling of voltage transformer secondary windings is not permitted.

The scheme shall employ voltage transformer secondary windings with the neutral point earthed and synchronising across Brown (L1) and Black (L2) phases.

supervision relays are required:

• A VT fuse fail detector relay mounted in tinterlocking purposes, to detect failure of all fuses.

• A VT supply-monitoring relay mounted in the relay panel to detect loprotection supply for such equipment as distanceearth fault protection. This relay should give an alarm when the circlosed and one or more phases of the VT output are dead.

Relay elements shall be delayed on drop-off to prevent false alarms durinwiring on adjacent circuits, or due toshall be provided to prevent mal-tripcircuited. Relay alarm elements should be equipped with

8.5.2 Supply Supervision Relays

Supervision relays shall be provided for both A.C. and D.C. supplies.

All protection equipment supplies shall be fully supervised and failure conditions alarmed. Trip circuit supervision relays shall be provided to monitor each trip circuitcircuit breakers. The relays shall have sufficient contacts for visual alarm an

Supervision relays are required for each protection D.C. supply e.g. Main 1, Back-up, Breaker Fail, Intertrip Send/Receive, Trip Relay Reset. Similarcircuit supply e.g. Trip Circuit 1 and Trip Circuit 2 and for

These supervision relays are to be indepscheme specified in the following paragraphs so that the operator can cleavia the available alarms between loss of supply due to a blown fuse/tripped Mfailure of a trip circuit supervision relay coil/faulty supervision wiring.

8.5.3 Trip Circuit Supervision Relays

The trip circuit supervision scheme shall monitor the continuity of the circcoils and as much of the associated tripp

the alarm supply. The scheme shall be

The relay shall be able to monitor the coils with the circuit breaker in the opeposition. The circuit shall be arranged so that any failure of the supervi(short or open circuit or earth fault) will not prevent a trip signal opencause inadvertent opening of the circuit b

8.6 BUSBAR VOLTAGE SELECTION

reason



8.7 SYNCHRONISING

its.

tem provided under the Contract is to be to the approval of the Engineer and is to -breaker can

stems are to equipment.

oltage difference chronising with contacts connected to prevent inadvertent manual synchronising

d, where oreclosing

absent. A voltage is less

steps from 80% to 90% of nominal rated difference ll be available ting, which shall

ntly closed. on be detected, closing of the circuit breaker shall be blocked.

se "running"

eck function

en and upply failure.

able perated, the CK position transformers

shall operate for the remote control mode only and shall be rendered inoperative when supervisory control is selected.

The burden imposed on either the running or incoming supply shall not exceed 5 VA.

switch, this mode of operation shall cause the synchronising selector relay to be sealed in for a period of 5 seconds to ensure completion of the synchronising operation. At the end of this period the equipment shall restore to its de- energised condition.

8.7.1 General

Where specified, manual check synchronising facilities shall be employed for all circuit-breakers controlling feeder circuits, bus section and bus coupler circu

The sysbe such that the synchronising circuit must be established before the circuitbe closed.

Synchronising systems and equipment provided as extensions to existing syprovide identical facilities and be of similar style and design to the existing

Synchronising check relays shall check the phase and magnitude of the vat synoutside acceptable limits. Synchronising check relays shall also be usespecified, for the automatic reclosing of the feeder circuits equipped with autfacilities.

Synchronising check relays shall not operate when any auxiliary supply isvoltage check feature shall be incorporated to inhibit synchronising if eitherthan a preset value, which shall be adjustable involtage. The synchronising relay shall prevent closure when the phaseexceeds 35o, but alternative settings ranging from 20o to 45o at least shaalso. Closure shall be prevented also if the slip frequency exceeds a setbe adjustable over the approximate range 0,25% - 0,1%.

A guard feature shall be provided to monitor the contacts of the check synchronising relays to ensure that these are not welded together or otherwise permaneShould the latter conditi

The relay should be capable of operating with either single phase or two phaand "incoming" voltages.

The relay should be capable of having two parallel functions: a synchro chand a voltage check function.

A voltage transformer-monitoring relay shall be so wired using normally opnormally closed contacts to block the synchro-check process in case of VT s

Each circuit shall be provided with a synchronising selection switch to enMANUAL-OFF-CHECK positions to be selected. This switch shall be key okey being released in the OFF position only. In both the MANUAL and CHEthe synchronising instruments shall be connected to the appropriate voltageand the circuit-breaker closing circuit prepared. This switch

The check synchronising operation shall be initiated by the remote circuit-breaker control



When supervisory control mode is selected a specific command synchronising selection a

signal shall cause the rrangement to be made independently of the above

sed in association with the supervisory control scheme e transmitted.

bstations shall have a synchronising panel situated preferably in the

nted at the

eters onising lamps and

y rest position. A switch shall be provided with each synchroscope to nnections of circuit by means of

ed, shall be

itched off, if so

g lamps, if employed, shall in general be normally energised

larm facia equipment may be arranged for normal

lamps and lamp holder assemblies shall be suitable for continuous operation

Indicating lamps and lamp holders shall be arranged so that replacement of lamps and the cleaning of glasses and reflectors employed can be readily effected.

uce heating and fouling of the panels, lamps, which are continuously illuminated, shall have the minimum consumption consistent with good visibility of indications in a brightly-lit room.

Spare lamps of 100% of each type and size shall be provided.

MANUAL-OFF-CHECK switch.

This will be followed by a breaker close command, which shall be arranged to operate in a similar way to the remote close command.

Synchronising facilities will not be uand synchronising signals will not b

8.7.2 Synchronising Panel

Where specified, sucentre of the control panel suite with a draw out synchronising panel and hinged such that it can be viewed easily from either end of the control panel or it may be mouend of the control board.

The synchronising panel shall be equipped with incoming and running voltmcalibrated in percent, synchroscope, frequency indicator, bright synchrsynchronising keenable it to be disconnected and the voltmeters left in circuit. The coregulating voltmeters shall be arranged so that they are connected inthe synchronising selection arrangement of any panel equipped with synchronising voltage transformers.

Synchronising check relays and under frequency relays, where specifimounted in either the bus section or coupler control panel.

8.8 INDICATING LAMPS

A switch shall be provided on the bus section or coupler panel labelled "Substation Attended"/"Substation Unattended" so that all indicating lamps can be swdesired, at unattended substations.

Normally energised indicatinfrom the station LVAC supply.

Lamps and relays incorporated in aoperation from the station battery, subject to the approval of the Engineer.

Lamp fittings shall allow adequate ventilation and allow for easy removal for replacement of the lamp in the event of failure.

All indicatingat the maximum site ambient temperature.

To red



Indicating lamp glasses on control and relay panels shall conform to the following standard colou

ur of Glass dication

r code:

Colo In

Red Device closed

Green Device open

White mally alight Indications nor

Amber cation (on which

Alarm indiaction is necessary)

Blue Circuit earthed

Lamp test facilities shall be provided so that all lamps on one panel can be tested simultaneously by operation of a common key. Where alarm facias are specified, all

tions (apart from circuit-breaker and isolator position

Alarm schemes for equipment at extensions of existing stations shall be linked with and

nged to operate

uzzer free to sound if any other alarm circuit is energised.

n a common en an alarm is initiated

f the accept y light.

which will silence annunciator

in in the flashing mode until individual accepted and reset.

s) shall be

shall not be re-initiated

before reset, the annunciator shall return to the first state of audible

Annunciators which are initiated from signals of a long duration (persistent alarms) shall et until the initiating device returns to the normal non-alarm state.

Annunciator circuits shall be readily adaptable for use with either fleeting or persistent alarm initiation signals. Spare ways shall be fully equipped, half of which should be ready to accept fleeting alarms.

The test button on equipment of each circuit shall operate a full functional test sequence on the associated annunciators including the spare ways.

alarm and monitoring indicaindications) shall be incorporated in the facia.

8.9 ALARM SCHEMES

be fully consistent with existing alarm schemes.

Alarms shall be sub-divided into trip and non-trip functions and each arraa common bell or buzzer as specified.

Means shall be provided for silencing alarms whilst leaving the bell or b

Annunciators shall be grouped on a per circuit basis with station alarms opanel. Each group shall have accept, reset test push buttons. Whan audible alarm shall sound and the facia lamp shall flash. Operation obutton shall silence the audible alarm and set the facia to show a stead

An acknowledgement button shall also be mounted on a common panel, the audible alarm initiated by any annunciator on that suite of panels. The shall however rema

Annunciators that are initiated from signals of short duration (fleeting alarmretained by the equipment through the audible, flashing and steady state sequence. Operation of the reset button shall clear the annunciation but this button effective until after the alarm has been accepted. Where a fleeting alarm is after acceptance butalarm and flashing facia.

not res



The flasher relays shall be arranged to be cut-out by the auxiliary contacts of the

ecified alarms shall be displayed by means of individual lamps

common alarms ld be

tion.

legend can be

t affect the sending of

contacts. rticular device

tly the e contact on the initiating device so that both remote and SCADA alarm

basis and ing an alternative a.c.

a SCADA repeat alarms

celled its and shall be

control switch mounted on the front of the common panel.

LAYS, MINIATURE CIRCUIT-BREAKERS AND FUSES

tion or adjustment

clearances between relay stems or connecting studs shall not be less than 30 mm and in no case less than 25 mm.

Unless otherwise stated all relays for front of panel mounting shall be flush pattern and withdrawable.

Relays associated with the three phases shall be marked with the appropriate phase identification and the fuses and links shall also be suitably labelled. In addition to the

"substation Attended/Substation Unattended" switch, which is specified.

When no alarm facia is spmounted on the control panels.

Where multi-window alarm fascias are specified, individual display of alarms should be in accordance with the Schedule of Requirements.

Where no separate control panel is specified for the Bus Section the together with the discrepancy indicators for the bus section isolators, shouaccommodated on the two control panels, which are adjacent to the Bus Sec

The facia legends shall comprise black letters on a white background, which should not be of the 'secret' type. The duration of the lamp flash shall be such that theeasily read with not more than 3 flashes per second.

The design of the facia shall be such that a coloured screen or bulb cap can be added at a later date.

All lamps shall be accessible from the front.

Facilities shall be provided to enable the whole alarm and indication equipment to work into a Remote/Supervisory System.

The operation of the substation attended/unattended switch shall noalarms to the control centre.

The alarm annunciator equipment shall be equipped with initiation repeat Where supervisory alarm initiation contacts are not provided directly on a pathese repeat contacts may be used. The repeat contacts must mimic exacoperation of thsystems operate independently.

Where stabilising power packs are used these shall be on a per circuit groupoutput monitored. Failure shall be alarmed on a per circuit basis ussource. A contact shall also be available and wired out to givefailure per circuit.

Both the audible alarm and all fascias, other than supply failure, shall be canautomatically after a time delay. The timer shall be adjustable over wide limfitted with an override

8.10 RE

All relays shall be mounted in sup-positions that no part requiring inspecis less than 450 mm or more than 2 metres above floor level. Where practicable the



labelling to identify relays on the front of panels, all relays and components shall be

um and where approved .

o facilitate the ork on the panel

ls. Carriers red white for links and black for

s an alternative akers will be accepted.

supplies,

ccepted. Fuse e use of

g of fuses and ted with tripping

m of the front face

Mcb’s shall be accommodated within the cubicle or at the rear of d spaced

Spare fuses and Mcb’s of at least 50% of each type and size shall be provided and

6 hexagon ze or stainless

e fed through terminal, which

act with live metal cannot be made when the moving portion is

istance boxes shall be so mounted inside the cubicle that their adjustment screws are terminals.

truments shall be of the flush mounting type and shall be fitted with non-reflecting glass.

All instruments and apparatus shall be capable of carrying their full load currents without undue heating. They shall not be damaged by the passage of fault currents within the rating of the associated switchgear through the primaries of their corresponding instrument transformers. All instruments and apparatus shall be back connected and the

identified from the rear of the panels.

The use of permanently energised relays shall be kept to a minimthese shall be of a type having a low burden, to prevent drain on the battery

Isolating links and fuses of approved type shall be provided on each panel tisolation of all sources of electrical potential to permit testing or other wwithout danger to personnel or interference with similar circuits on other paneand bases shall be of moulded plastic material coloufuses. Fuse carriers shall be clearly marked with the correct fuse rating. Ato fuses and links, miniature circuit bre

Where miniature air circuit-breakers are used on control, protection and alarmtripping shall cause an alarm to be displayed.

Fuses shall be of the HRC cartridge type; re-wirable type fuses will not be aholders shall be designed to lock the cartridges firmly into position without thscrew clamping devices.

Except on panels forming extensions to existing boards where the mountinlinks shall conform with the existing panels, MCBs fuses and links associacircuits and protective gear test circuits shall be positioned at the bottoof relay and control boards.

Other links, fuses andthe cubicle above the cubicle doors. Fuses and links shall be grouped anaccording to their function in order to facilitate identification.

delivered to the Purchaser.

Links in current transformer circuits shall be of the bolted type having size Mnuts. M5 size may be used provided the material used is phosphor bronsteel.

All incoming circuits in which the voltage equals or exceeds 125 volts shall binsulated fuses and/or links, the supplies being connected to the bottomshall be shrouded. The contacts of the fixed portion of the fuse or link shall be shrouded so that accidental contwithdrawn. Reson a vertical and accessible face. Resistances shall be provided with stud Setscrews shall not be used.

8.11 INSTRUMENTS

All ins



cases thereof shall be earthed. Means shall be provided for zero adjustment of

rthed phase of inals, or,

ain connection. shall have the star point of their current coils brought out to a

ument current

rked and the pointers shall be of clean outline. The marking on the dials shall be restricted to the scale

s shall not

d on the same . Instruments shall have 2400 circular

scales.

s shall be used in all instances where the instruments or

.

All cables shall enter vertically from below and at their point of entry to the equipment . These shall be of an approved, non-flammable, vermin-

onduits. Means

r secondary injection of current transformers and protective relay rovided. These facilities shall be such that testing can be carried out

appropriate to

r earth bar of not less than 85 that the bars of

all be tinned.

mmon earthing busbar of control and relay panels shall be connected to the main station earthing system via a copper earthing connection of not less than 85 mm2

Metal cases of instruments and metal bases of relays on the panels shall be connected to this bar by conductors of a sectional area of not less than 2.5 mm2.

Current transformer and voltage transformer secondary circuits shall be complete in themselves and shall be earthed at one point only, through links situated in an accessible

instruments without dismantling.

All voltage circuits to instruments shall be protected by a fuse in each uneathe circuit placed as close as practicable to the instrument transformer termwhere instruments are direct-connected, as close as practicable to the mAll power factor indicators separate terminal, which shall be connected to the star point of the instrtransformer secondary windings.

All indicating instrument scales shall be clearly divided and indelibly ma

marking. Instrument transformer ratios, maker's name and accuracy gradeappear on the dials. Busbar voltmeters shall be calibrated while hot.

Instrument scales shall be submitted for approval. All instruments mountepanel shall be of similar style and appearance

Interposing current transformertransducers are not designed to carry full fault current.

8.12 CABLE TERMINATIONS

For the reception of external cables removable gland plates shall be provided

fitted boards shall seal themproof material. Cable glands and conduits shall project at least 20 mm above the gland plate to prevent any moisture on the plate draining into cable crutches or cshall be provided to drain water off the surface of the gland plate.

8.13 TESTING FACILITIES

Testing facilities fosystems shall be pwithout disconnection of any permanent wiring.

If these facilities are provided as part of draw-out type relays any test plug the design shall be provided.

8.14 EARTHING

All control or relay panels shall be provided with a coppemm2 cross-section run along the bottom of the panels and arranged soadjacent panels can be joined together to form a common bus. All joints sh



position. Each separate circuit shall be earthed through a separate link, suitably labelled. The links shall be of the bolted type, having M6 nuts and provision for attaching test leads.

ORY CONTROL AND TELEMETERING CABINETS

to form the yard and the remote supervisory

ions shall be

ling kiosks is document each termination shall incorporate terminal blocks, each

rmer circuitry, ut disturbing the

.

d with shorting may be operated without disturbing

the related

rminal blocks Control. All

lied under this

initiating devices and controls etc. shall be tory operation in conjunction with the supervisory

isory channel required by the Switchgear

he equipment shall be arranged under this

Wiring to enable the following signals to be received from the tele-metering and

• Resetting of electrically reset type trip relays.

sing relays are to be provided under this contract in the control or relay panels with contacts capable of handling the switchgear tripping and closing currents. The operating coils of these relays are to be suitable for operation from a 50V battery and shall have a resistance to suit the supervisory control scheme automatic checking facility; all relay coil resistances shall be identical and the value required till be determined during the design stage.

8.15 SUPERVIS

8.15.1 General

A separate floor mounting marshalling cabinet shall be provided by othersinterface between the switchgear in the substationcontrol equipment. The rest of the measuring, indication and control functmarshalled in the remote control panels and/or relay panels.

In addition to the standard requirements for control/relay panels and marshalspecified in thterminal of which, with the exception of those connected to current transfoshall be provided with an open-circuiting link which may be operated withoconnected wiring

Terminations connected to current transformers circuitry shall be providelinks on the switchgear side of the terminals, whichthe connected wiring.

Terminal blocks or sections of terminal blocks shall be clearly labelled withcircuit description (eg feeder circuit, transformer circuit etc.).

The plant side terminal blocks shall be grouped on the basis of individual circuits. Intermixing of circuit terminations will not be accepted. The SCADA side teshall be grouped on a circuit basis but split into Analogues, Indications andcross connections facilities between the terminal blocks shall be suppContract.

All supervisory indicating devices, alarmarranged as required to ensure satisfacchannel. Further, the duration of the pulse employed by the supervequipment, shall be two seconds and any further delaycontractor for the satisfactory operation of tcontract.

8.15.2 Reception of Remote Controls

supervisory equipment is to be cabled to the marshalling cabinet.

• Control (trip/close) of all circuit breakers.

• Control (open/close) of all power operated disconnectors.

Interpo



8.15.3 Teleprotection Signals

At the protective relay panels, the cables for the teleprotection signals areterminated on terminals, which are wired directly to isolating links. This is toteleprotection equipment to be readily isolated from the protective relays an

to be enable the

d the 110V d.c. tripping and control supplies. Disconnecting links incorporated in the terminal blocks

vice") is to be ripping

and duplicate ovided for indicating that the test switch is in the "test"

position. A pushbutton is to be provided to initiate a test trip signal to the teleprotection indicate that a test trip signal

8.16 MULTICORE CABLES AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

chemes should, in general, be based on the use of single 1.5 mm2 1/0,9 (0,8) mm telephone cores are specified.

he network situation, transducers shall be required as specified. The transducers will be driven from the

and the requirements listed below.

The Transducer output shall be proof against short-circuit and open-circuit conditions and CADA

ctions for t and calibration shall be provided. The Tenderer shall suggest calibration

lly, the current overload

rating of the transducers shall not be less than 1.3 times the rated voltage and 2 times the rated current.

The burden imposed upon a CT circuit by a Transducer shall not exceed 1 VA. The corresponding burden imposed upon a VT circuit shall not exceed 2 VA.

Auxiliary electrical supplies required for Transducer operation shall be derived by internal connections from the voltage circuit input. Where the VT circuit powers a Transducer the

will not be accepted for this purpose.

For each discrete intertripping channel, a two-position test switch ("Test/serinstalled on the front of the relay panel to enable the functioning of the intertchannel to be tested. the switch is to be lockable and provided with a lockkeys. An indication lamp is to be pr

equipment. A second indicating lamp shall be provided tohas been received from the remote station.

Protection and control scores, except where

8.17 TRANSDUCERS

8.17.1 General

To provide the Supervisory Control Centre with an accurate view of t

substation VTs and CTs.

The transducers shall be installed in the respective control panels.

The Transducers shall comply with EN 60688

Transducers shall be of the static type.

shall be rated to drive a load of up to at least 1000 Ohms connected to the Sinterface terminals (after allowing for any other loads).

User adjustment of Transducer output shall be provided. All necessary instruadjustmeninstruments for the approved types of transducers.

Transducers connected to CT secondary windings shall have a short-term overload withstand capability of 25 times rated input current for 3 seconds. Additionacircuits shall withstand twice the rated current continuously. The continuous



total burden imposed shall not exceed 10 VA. Self-powered current Transducers shall not

ts to prevent esting of current

transducers without disturbing the protection circuits. Isolating links for voltage circuits

0.5 or better for voltage and current and between 0.1% and cer response

time shall not exceed 0.5 seconds.

cer output shall not exceed 0.5% r.m.s. (1.4% peak to peak).

hall be:

10 V

r rated input (110V, 1A) and the instrument

awings as well as operation and

ce shall also be

proportional to the ac power or reactive VA input for the measurement of three-phase unbalanced loads and shall be suitabl ows

Where active and reactive power measurements of the same power circuit are required, a single ith two c esp ou s ca sed

Voltage (%) 100 100 100 100 100

impose a burden greater than 3 VA.

Shorting and isolating links shall be provided in the secondary current circuiopen circuited CT's under any conditions and to permit disconnecting or t

shall be provided.

The accuracy shall be class 0.3% of reading for watt and var (but not for the fiducial value). The Transdu

Ripple current in the Transdu The rated input parameters s

• Input Voltage: 1

• Input Current: 1A

• Frequency: 50Hz

The Transducer rating label shall include, as applicable:

• VT ratio, CT ratio, mA output foscale for which the Transducer has been calibrated.

• Circuit diagrams, component layout drservicing instructions shall be supplied.

A comprehensive list of recommended spares for three years maintenansupplied.

8.17.2 Active and Reactive Power Transducers

These Transducers shall provide a dc output current

e for reversible fl .

transducer w orr onding tput n be u .

Output shall be in accordance with the following requirements:

Input

Input Current (%) 120 100 0 100 120

Output (mA) 4 +5,333 12 18,66 20

An output greater than 12 mA shall correspond to a power flow out of the busbar of the gear concerned whilst an output less than 12 mA shall correspond to a power flow

towards the bus bar.

8.17.3 Voltage Transducers

The Transducers will be used for busbar and synchronising voltage measurements.

switch



Output shall be according to the following requirements

ltage Input Output Vo

% (mA)

0 0

60 4

100 10,66

120 20

The voltage Transducers for phase angle measurement shall have an inverted output of

8.17.4 Current Transducers

8.17.5 Frequency Transducers

The output of the Transducers shall be 4-20 mA, corresponding to a measuring range of 45 to 55 Hz.

20 to 4 mA, corresponding to an input voltage range of 0 to 264V.

The output of the Transducers shall be 4-20 mA, corresponding to a measuring range of 0 to 120% of the nominal input.



9. PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT

high speed and esigned that, occur as a

omena not arising from a faulty condition of the section of line or eriods due to

during transient stem.

tor shall be responsible for ensuring the correct operation of the protective proval ctive equipment

culations to rotection shall be sufficiently sensitive to cater for faults under the

be suitable in uivalent to the

imes of main protection equipment and circuit breakers (i.e. from xtinction) of transmission circuits shall not exceed 100 ms. This fault e achieved under all system conditions including maximum dc offset

IEDs

All protective IEDs shall be manufactured by one of the following suppliers, approved by

• GE Multilin – Canada

tion equipment shall be numerical and unless otherwise stated only the latest algorithm based protective IEDs that are in commercial operation shall be accepted.

Protective IEDs shall be of approved types complying with EN 60255 or equal, shall have approved characteristics and be flush mounted in dust-proof and moisture-proof cases complying with IP 51 according to EN 60529. The connection terminals shall be allocated at the case rear side and shall allow alternatively screw or crimp-snap-in connection.

9.1 General

Protective equipment shall be designed to disconnect faulty circuits withcertainty, without interference with healthy circuits. They shall also be so dwhen properly applied, incorrect operation of the circuit-breakers does notresult of transient phenplant associated with each set of relays but which may occur during fault pdisturbances on the system.

Protection equipment shall be designed and applied to provide maximum discrimination between faulty and healthy circuits. All equipment is to remain inoperativephenomena, which may arise during switching or other disturbances to the sy

The Contracequipment and shall at least 3 months before commissioning submit for aprecommended relay settings, supported by design calculations for all protebeing supplied.

Within three months of the award of Contract, the Contractor shall submit caldemonstrate that the pspecified minimum fault levels indicated.

The protection equipment and all associated current transformers shall alsoall respects for a prospective system 3 phase fault level at all substations eqspecified switchgear rating.

Overall fault clearance tfault initiation to arc eclearance time shall band any time delay caused by the use of capacitive voltage transformers.

9.2 Protective

9.2.1 General

EAC:

• AREVA – France, UK

• ABB – Sweden, Switzerland

• SIEMENS – Germany

Protec



Protective IEDs shall have an integrated setting keypad and an alphdisplay. The setting shall be menu-guided and setting values shall be enterenumbers. The setting ranges shall be limited and checked for plausibilitypossible on-line without restart of th

anumeric LCD d as

. Setting shall be e microprocessor system. The setting values shall

te selectable load values, such as currents or voltages, se, tripping

t for local setting ta using a PC.

Windows

ction functions d as software

ameters of the er of setting

mediately be lity checks. ed.

pplicable).

le for read-out by a PC p to 3 s, three

control rtain cases IEC 60870-5-

eer.

l be freely

ce and overcurrent l inputs.

e the latter shall be mounted

Protective IEDs shall be of approved construction and shall be arranged so that ments, testing and replacement can be effected with the minimum of time and

labour. Protective IEDs shall be capable of being reset without opening the case.

Current transformer operated relay coils shall have continuous thermal ratings of not less than the maximum continuous secondary current of the current transformer at the full rating of the circuit in which the current transformer is connected.

only be valid after a final code word check.

The display shall normally indicaand shall automatically change over to fault indications, such as faulted phatime etc, when a system faults occurs.

Protective IEDs shall possess an RS 232 serial interface at the relay fronand read-out of da

Menu-driven operating programs shall be delivered that run on PC's using aoperating environment.

The numerical protective IEDs shall be multi-functional and additional protesuch as auto-reclosure, carrier interface or fault locator shall be integrateroutines.

It shall be possible to switch additional functions on or off. The setting parswitched-off additional function shall not be displayed to reduce the numbparameters.

The protective IEDs shall be self-monitored and relay failures shall imdetected. Additionally, the measuring inputs shall be supervised by plausibiThis way the availability of the protective IEDs shall be significantly increas

The numerical protective IEDs shall further provide metering function for local display or transmission to local or remote control centres (I, V, P, Q, cosφ, f, as a

The events of the last three faults shall be stored and kept availabor by the digital substation control. Distance protective IEDs shall store uvoltages and four currents with a resolution of 1 ms.

The serial interface and the data protocols for the communication with local systems shall be standardized according to IEC 61850 and in ce103, depending on the application and subject to the approval of the Engin

The function assignment of binary inputs, relay outputs and indications shalprogrammable. It shall also be possible to build group alarms or group indications.

It shall further be possible to store up to four setting groups in impedanprotective IEDs. The required setting group can be enabled by digita

All metal bases and frames of protective IEDs shall be earthed except whermust be insulated for special requirements. All principal protective IEDs on the front only of each bay panel.

adjust



All DC protective IEDs used shall operate over the auxiliary supply voltagein EN 62271 – 1 and 62271 - 100 and shall be compatible under all operaof the battery system installed. Protective IEDs shall be rated for 125V dcapable of satisfactory

range specified ting conditions

c and shall be se of voltage

erived from the ction. Protective IEDs shall

could reach the

test technology algorithm based protective IEDs shall comply with the Impulse Withstand and

reports covering all be provided.

nce. Radio

gineers l. If such tests have not been carried out, the contractor shall carry out RFI tests

n of the Engineer and submit test reports for approval.

lectromagnetic interference shall be assisted by the following

ut-transformers

uts

urrents, which they may be required to control in normal service. Separate contacts shall be provided for

by external The contacts shall be

oration. Relay contacts shall make firmly

Withdrawable pattern protective IEDs shall be designed so that, when in the withdrawn position, associated current transformers shall be automatically short-circuited. An

Protective IEDs, which rely for their operation on an external DC supply, shall utilize for this purpose the trip supply of the associated circuit breaker. This supply shall be monitored and an alarm provided in the event of failure.

operation over the range 88-137,5V without the udropping resistors or diodes. Any auxiliary supplies necessary to power solid-state circuits shall be dmain station battery and not from batteries internal to the protebe protected against externally impressed transient voltages, whichcircuitry via connections to instrument transformers or the station battery.

The routing of cables shall be such as to limit interference to a minimum. La

High Frequency disturbance tests specified in EN 60255, and Type Test these tests for all latest technology algorithm based protective IEDs sh

Protective IEDs shall also remain stable under conditions of Radio InterfereInterference tests acceptable to the Engineer shall have been carried out by the Manufacturer and in this case RFI test reports shall be submitted for the EnApprovato the satisfactio

Reliable shielding against emeasures:

• Metal relay case

• Shielded inp

• Opto-coupler binary inp

• DC/DC converter supply

• Relay outputs

• Optical fibre serial interfaces

Relay contacts shall be suitable for making and breaking the maximum c

alarm and tripping functions.

Protective IEDs shall not be affected by mechanical shock or vibration, ormagnetic fields consistent with the place or method of mounting. capable of repeated operation without deteriwithout bounce.

All tripping relays shall be of the high speed, high burden type.

interlock shall be provided to prevent withdrawal of the protective IEDs before disconnection of the contact associated with tripping.



Protective IEDs mounted in panels shall be provided with clearly inscribed labels e labels.

dc relay

cal climate and relay designs should be entirely

9.2.2 Displays on the Protective IEDs

tion:

p indications and status For complex

ce protection, it is required to have some of these indications mer-specific requirements.

ces, internal faults and monitors shall

s.

event. e retained if the power supply fails and displayed when power is

tion on request like fault and, line primary values etc. The software

from serial on the rrents and

lay monitor, line parameters and setting values.

When the protection relay is used for detection and storage of protection information fault record then fault reporting data shall be stored for at least the last three

events (three general start signals). The memory shall be arranged in a first-in, first-out manner. The memory capacity shall cover sequences up to 3 sec. Fault records must be started by the general pick-up signal and the preceding 100 ms must also be recorded. When the memory is full, always the earliest record shall be erased.

describing their application and rating in addition to the general-purpos

In order to minimize the effects of electrolysis, operation indicator coils and operating coils shall be so placed in the circuit that they are not connected to the positive pole of the battery except through contacts, which are normally open.

Attention is particularly drawn to the tropisuitable for duty under these conditions.

The following important information must be displayed without operator ac

• Protection information arising from network disturbances

• Information about internal faults and monitors, possibly grouindications. These indications may be given by LED’s or LCD displays.systems such as distanfreely programmable in order to meet custo

• Protection information about network disturbanbe indicated with red LED’s.

• Status shall be indicated with white or yellow LED’s

• Ready for operation shall be indicated with green LED’s.

• Freely programmable indications shall be indicated with red LED’

• Protective IEDs must be designed in such a way so as to show the last Information must brestored.

Furthermore, protective IEDs shall display further informaimpedance, fault current at instant of trip commversion must be displayed on request.

9.2.3 Contacts

As with the LED indicators, some contacts must be freely allocated.

9.2.4 Remote Interrogation via Serial Ports

Provision must be available which will allow information to be interrogatedports for off-line PC’s and on-line central units. The scope of data depends protection type and application like system fault reporting, fault records (cuvoltages, time resolution 1 to 2 ms), status indications, re

and/or



The relationship between protection information and analogue disturbance values must be

shall there be

be available to ease fault analysis.

tective IEDs to have suitable signal inputs to receive

Fault Reporting

terrogated both from an integral keypad and from a

t only affect the indications and not the reset. For protective IEDs in individual

n must be tective IEDs built into cabinets.

Information in Memory

be possible to erase data stored in memory but the method must be such that .

th locally and

protective IEDs must have integral ossible without reference to the handbook

prevent of set values by the use of a password. Input of

terrogate

types of protective IEDs must be possible with common PC hardware. Communication e based on standard protocols.

9.2.9 Self Monitoring and Failure Annunciation

The protection systems must provide the best possible level of self-monitoring. Failure of the self-monitoring function must be indicated and signalled. The scope of the self-monitoring must be comprehensively documented. Internal relay faults and monitoring

definitive.

Disturbance data shall also be transmitted to the Substation Controller and archived together with real time data from the control system. A single tool for evaluation of data from both sources shall

9.2.5 External Signal Inputs

It is desirable for complex proindividual signals from other protective IEDs.

9.2.6

Numerical protective IEDs shall be inserial port.

9.2.7 Operation from Keypad

9.2.7.1 Resetting Indicators

Resetting must be possible at the relay but musmemory content. The same applies for remotehousings, reset must be possible without opening the case. A reset buttoprovided on the front of pro

9.2.7.2 Erasure of Stored

It mustaccidental erasure is prevented

9.2.7.3 Selection of Indications

Selection of indications on the LED’s or the LCD display must be possible boremotely.

9.2.7.4 Setting and Interrogation

For setting and interrogation of the set values, operating elements. These functions must be pmenu guide for sufficient instructions on the relay.

Inputs, which are outside the design range, must be rejected. Design must accidental or careless alterationparameters must be in secondary values.

9.2.8 Man-Machine Dialogue via Serial Port

With complex protective IEDs it must be possible to comfortably set and inprotective IEDs using an external device. Operation and setting of the various makes and

shall b



must be selectively stored as far as technically possible and indicated and sgroup alarms. The occurrence of a single fault (hardware or software) shall over-function in the command range of the relay. For critical relay failures dthe protective system, the re

ignalled as not lead to an

uring faults on lay must be able to be selectively blocked. Blocking means

e provided for DC supply monitoring. The signal made ready for service when the supply returns.

ystem, protective

es and protocols must be unified, to ensure compatibility between different 850 and in certain e approval of the

quirements with respect to the external arge (ESD)"

easures may

pment must be nd

icable to other interfaces do not apply to these interfaces but it must lay.

Protective IEDs relying for their operation on an external DC supply shall utilize for this red and an alarm

alvanic isolation between the internal static circuits and

the relay in

rmer ssociated D.C. may consist of

provision for ndary circuits by means of a switch

or by movement of links from their normal operating position or any other testing ement approved by the Engineer.

If any forms of modular protective IEDs or systems are provided for which specialized test blocks or test plugs are available, these should be provided for each complete relay or scheme. If any other specialized test blocks are required to obviate any disturbance to external wiring during testing, monitoring of currents or voltages or to enable secondary injection testing to be carried out, these shall also be provided.

disabling of one or more functions.

A separate, potential-free contact shall bmust be reset and the relay automatically

9.2.10 Serial Communication Interface

For integration into a numerical, co-ordinated protection and control sIEDs must be provided with an additional serial interface.

Interfacmanufacturers. Communication shall use the standard protocol IEC 61cases IEC 60870-5-103, depending on the application and subject to thEngineer.

Interfaces must comply with international standard reinsulation and interference values given for circuits, which are connected toterminals. The "interference radiation test" and "test with electrostatic dischand the "fast transient disturbance test" must be observed. The necessary malso be fitted in the plug module of the corresponding interface.

The interface for the connection of external operating and diagnostic equiaccessible at the front of the relay. The requirements regarding insulation ainterference tests applbe permissible to carry out these functions during normal operation of the re

purpose the trip supply of the station battery. This supply shall be monitoprovided in event of failure.

DC/DC converters shall provide gthe external station battery circuits.

An integrated DC voltage buffer shall ensure uninterrupted performance of case of DC voltage interruptions <50 ms.

9.3 Test and Earthing Facilities

Separate test facilities shall be provided for each current and voltage transfosecondary circuit so as to give access for testing of protective IEDs and acircuits without any need of taking the circuit out of service. The facilities either test terminal blocks of approved type for front of panel mounting withautomatic short circuiting of current transformer seco

arrang



Each current transformer circuit shall be earthed through a removable link at one point

ks may be

n the front of the panel and shall be clearly labelled.

er Protection

Only latest technology algorithm based protective IEDs shall be provided. The auto-Main 1 and Main

p protective IEDs. ing protective

m different manufacturers.

tance rrent differential"

ction shall be based on “current differential” tion”

ection with le inverse and definite time characteristics.

rotection relay.

nt differential in ders. Back-up protection shall be of the same type as that of a 132

In/Out switches to enable the isolation sting purposes. An LED on the relay shall

n protective IEDs shall have the following features:

er-on diagnostic routine

• Fault locating facility

• Remote interrogation via a serial link.

9.4.2 Distance Protection

Distance protection shall be of the latest technology and shall be able to provide full numerical processing of all its functions in the device from the acquisition of the measured

only.

Links shall be provided for isolation of trip circuits such that operational checcarried out on individual components with the remainder still in service. The links shall be readily accessible, preferably o

9.4 132 kV Feed

9.4.1 General

reclosing and synchronizing check features shall be incorporated in both 2 protective IEDs.

Each 132kV feeder shall be provided with two main and one back-uThe two main protections shall operate either on different principles or usIEDs fro

For O/H transmission lines the first main protection shall be based on "disprotection" principles and the second main protection scheme on "cuprinciples.

For underground cables the first main proteprinciples and the second main protection shall be based on “distance protecprinciples.

Back-up protection shall provide both phase and earth fault overcurrent protselectab

Each 66 kV feeder shall be provided with only one main and one back-up p

The main protection shall be distance in overhead line feeders and curreunderground cable feekV feeder.

Protective IEDs shall be equipped with Protectionof all tripping, fault recordings, alarms etc for teindicate if the protection is out of service and this indication shall be repeated into the remote/supervisory system.

• Feeder protectio

• Self monitoring facility and pow

• Giving alarm for loss of voltage, algorithm failure etc

• Event recording (pre-fault) and fault recording data storage



values up to the output of commands to the circuit breakers. Only protectivproof of successful commercial use will be accepted. A reference list sThe relay shall have sufficient programmable and/or non-programmable oindependent tripping of duplicated circuit-breaker trip coils. Appropriate nuprogrammable and non-programmable inputs for monitoring and control purposes shall

e IEDs having hall be provided.

utputs for mber of

rotected zone ndependent of

g characteristic of the distance relay shall be of able feeders

ur distance ually adjustable as forward,

features shall be l types of fault and to allow

ill operate

e memory. hen the voltage

supplied to the relay falls to zero on all three phases. Nor shall they operate due to the owing the

. The relay characteristics shall ensure utage conditions

eprotection equipment or the communications link shall cause the distance relay scheme to revert to a normal distance scheme with correct zone

r the following in-built schemes selectable through software re-used on future schemes:

me and

• Blocking scheme.

case of the permissive overreach and the blocking schemes it is preferable if separate underreaching measuring elements which trip independently of the end to end signalling are provided for additional reliability.

A weak infeed function shall be provided to allow tripping for faults that cannot be detected due to weak or zero infeed.

also be provided.

The protection shall operate for all types of phase and earth faults in the pand direction and the operating time on each step shall be substantially ithe magnitude of fault current. Measurinthe mho and/or quadrilateral type and shall be suitable for underground cwhere specified in the specification documents.

Six Independent measuring elements shall be provided for a minimum of fozones. The reach of each measuring zone shall be individreverse, or non-directional reaching. Phase and earth fault compensationincorporated to ensure accurate distance measurements on alfor variation in the path of earthfault currents returning to the system.

The Tenderer will be required to guarantee that the distance relay offered wsatisfactorily under the system and fault level conditions described herein.

Direction determination shall be done with quadrature voltages and voltagUnder no circumstances shall the relay operate for reverse faults even w

transient response of the line capacitive voltage transformers during or follclearance of close up faults behind the relayadequate fault resistance coverage under minimum plant and single ospecified.

Distance protection shall be suitable for use with power line carrier signalling equipment or multiplexed fibre optic channels for aided tripping.

Failure of the tel

discrimination.

Distance protection shall offeon the relay to allow them to be

• Basic Scheme

• Zone 1 extension scheme

• Permissive underreach scheme

• Permissive overreach sche

In the



A switch on to fault (SOTF) feature shall also be provided to ensure instantaneous tripping in the event that the circuit breaker is closed onto a fault on a previous de-energized line.

e accepted.

lay shall be undamaged by the al current

ing speed shall

otective IEDs

endent of fault and, in addition,

gree of istance and by

supervision feature to prevent e phases of

former secondary ree phases,

ny power e.

units under any

which the

earth fault if nt of a supply failure. Metering facilities

auto-reclosing

ns shall be provided to block auto-reclosing feature in case auto-reclosing has already been initiated in the parallel circuit.

ion facilities are required to either block auto-reclose or allow initiation of three-pole auto-reclose as desired.

The distance protection shall also include an echo feature to facilitate tripping of the local circuit breaker if a line fault occurs at a time where the remote end circuit breaker is open for maintenance or any other reason.

Starting shall be by impedance measuring. Overcurrent starting will not b

The thermal rating of the relay shall be such that the recontinuous application of 1,1 times the nominal voltage, 1,2 times the nomintransformer output and maximum auxiliary power supply voltage.

Distance protection equipment shall be of the high-speed type. The operatbe such that the general protection speed requirement shall be achieved for faults up to 80% of the Zone 1 reach with any communication link between distance prout of service and with source/line impedance up to 50/1.

Operating times of the protective equipment shall be substantially indepcurrent magnitude. The operating times shall be stated in the Schedulescurves showing the effect of variation in line and source impedance and operating current, shall be provided. Tenderers are also required to submit evidence of the detolerance of impedance measurement to varying values of fault arc reswhat means this tolerance is achieved.

The distance protection shall include a voltage transformerpossible unwanted operation in the event of a failure of one, two or threvoltages caused by open or short circuit faults in the voltage transcircuits or due to opening of VT mcb’s. In the event of loss of one, two or ththe distance relay shall be blocked and a time delayed alarm initiated.

The VT supervision shall not operate during energization of the line or of asystem transformers, nor during any other power system primary disturbanc

The VT supervision unit shall be faster than the distance relay-measuringcircumstances.

The distance protective IEDs shall incorporate indicators to show the zone inrelay tripped and the phase or phases faulted, whether the relay operation was due to an aided trip, switch onto fault, power swing blocking, VT fuse fail or directional appropriate. Indication must not be lost in eveshall also be provided.

Where specified each distance protection for the 132kV feeders shall incorporate 3-phase autoreclosing and synchrocheck function.

Protection protective IEDs shall remain fully operational during and after ancycle irrespective of load transfer during these periods.

In case of parallel feeders mea

Select



The distance protection shall also have power swing blocking and current guard reversal

shall be entage of the protected line.

d crystal ective IEDs

numerical co-ll be effected

e associated software and hardware required

ver.

scriptive on where

with the distance protective IEDs shall

itchgear rating

nted current n relay. The relay shall offer phase segregated current differential

with a dedicated optical fibre link or a multiplexed 56/64 kbits/s d when it fails an

rement shall be

plant status inputs to the

lphanumeric liquid crystal hall also be

provided for interrogating the relay via a PC either locally or remotely. An additional serial tion and

with the relay shall be -5-103, depending on the

application and subject to the approval of the Engineer. All the associated software and hardware necessary to communicate with the relay shall be provided.

Power-on diagnostic tests and continuous self-monitoring shall be carried out by the relay.

In the event of failure an error message shall be displayed on the front panel LCD and the relay shall be blocked depending on the type of failure detected.

Event and fault recording facilities shall also be provided with the relay.

facilities.

Distance protection shall also incorporate a fault locator. The fault distancedisplayed in km, in secondary or primary ohms or as a perc

Compensation of the mutual effects of parallel lines shall be possible.

The relay shall be accessed both locally through front arrow keys and a liquidisplay and via a personal computer for reading and setting the relay. Protshall be provided also with an additional serial interface for integration into aordinated protection and control system. Communication with the relay shavia IEC 61850 and in certain cases IEC 60870-5-103, depending on the application and subject to the approval of the Engineer. All thto communicate with the relay shall be provided.

The relay shall be reset without removing its co

Tenderers are required to submit AC and DC schematic diagrams with full deliterature and sequence of operations. The Tenderer shall submit informationand how many identical sets of equipment are installed.

Design calculations for current transformers for usebe submitted to the Engineer for approval within three months of contract award. CT design shall be based on a maximum fault level equivalent to the 132 kV swand the X/R ratios quoted in this Specification.

9.4.3 Fibre Optic Current Differential Protection

Current differential protection shall consist of a fully numerical and flush moudifferential protectioprotection with high sensitivity for two terminal feeders.

It shall be suitable for usechannel. The communication channel shall be monitored by the relay analarm shall be initiated. Continuous channel propagation delay and measucarried out by the relay.

Intertripping commands through differential protection or throughrelay shall also be carried out.

The user shall communicate directly with the relay via an adisplay together with a push button keypad. A serial communication facility s

communication interface for integration into a numerical co-ordinated proteccontrol system shall be also provided. Communicationaccomplished via IEC 61850 and in certain cases IEC 60870



Plant status and control signals shall be received by the relay via opto-isolated inputs or

cilities shall also be provided. Resetting of the

ble the isolation rdings, alarms etc for testing purposes. An LED on the relay shall

ted into the

connection of ich will be

l fibres to nsmission whereas the connection to the

. The optical ith suitable optical connectors at the two

d inside the

cting the he

to the converter

rect connection of the current differential protective IEDs at the two ends, the n of the protective IEDs to

relay and fibre optical

mounted relay

lements. Both the relay being the relay out of m time (IDMT)

se and earth

ys and the PC. An

additional serial interface shall also be provided for an integrated numerical co-ordinated tion and control system. Serial communication with the relay shall be implemented

via IEC 61850 and in certain cases IEC 60870-5-103, depending on the application and subject to the approval of the Engineer. All required communication software and hardware shall be provided.

The relay shall be provided with the appropriate number of programmable inputs and outputs for monitoring its operation and for signalling and tripping purposes respectively.

binary inputs and output relays shall be provided for tripping and signalling.

Tripping indication and fault identification farelay shall be made without removing its front cover.

Protective IEDs shall be equipped with Protection In/Out switches to enaof all tripping, fault recoindicate if the protection is out of service and this indication shall be repearemote/supervisory system.

In case of a multiplexed fibre optic channel the Contract shall include the the protective IEDs to the telecommunication multiplexer equipment, whsupplied by others. The connection to the relay shall be by means of opticaensure the integrity and reliability of signal tramultiplexer equipment shall be made via an optical to electrical converterfibres shall be 50/125 μm, multimode 850 nm wends for the connection to the relay and the converter.

The converter shall support a G703 interface and shall be physically locatemultiplexer equipment in the telecommunications room.

The multimode fibres, the optical to electrical converter and the cable conneconverter with the multiplexer equipment shall be provided by the Contract. Tinterconnecting cable shall be suitably terminated so as to be connectedat the one end whereas on the other end loose wires shall be provided.

In case of difibres shall be single mode 1300 nm or 1550 nm. The connectiothe optical dedicated channel is made with single mode fibres of 1300 nm or 1550 nm wavelength with suitable optical connector on the one end depending on thewith FC/PC type of connector on the other end so as to be connected to theconnection box.

9.4.4 Back up Overcurrent Phase and Earth Fault Protection

Overcurrent protection shall include a fully numerical, non-directional, flush appropriate for both phase and earth faults. The relay shall comprise minimum a two pole phase fault and a one pole earth fault low set and high set overcurrent ecurrent and time settings of the relay shall be adjustable, the design of the such that the setting adjustments can be carried out on load without taking service. The relay shall have both definite time and inverse definite minimucharacteristics according to EN 60255 independently selectable for both phafaults.

Relay setting parameters shall be input via the relay front panel function keliquid crystal display. Interrogation with the relay shall be possible also via a

protec



The relay shall have tripping indication and fault identification facilities eitheprogrammable LED’s on the relay

r through front panel or through the relay LCD display. The relay

wing functions:

n load measured current values

est

• Fault recorder

ent in 0,01

the rated current 0,01 steps for the

he definite time hall be

High set instantaneous elements with low transient overreach shall be provided.

d such that the operating time of the relay at the highest f current and time multiplier settings shall not

biased current differential type providing protection for phase and earth faults.

biased differential . Both the bias and the differential current settings shall be individually

n 20 per cent t and a high set

pensation and terposing

The low set differential protection setting shall be in the range 0,15 to 0,5 of rated current e high set differential setting shall be between 5 to 20 times the rated current.

The relay shall have a dual bias characteristic with the initial slope allowing a maximum of 20% transformer tap changer deviation and current transformers ratio errors. The bias shall increase for higher currents above rated in order to compensate for CT saturation errors under maximum through fault conditions with maximum DC offset in the fault

shall be reset without removing its cover.

The relay shall incorporate also the follo

• Display of o

• Trip circuit t

• Event recorder

The range of current settings for the phase fault elements shall be 0,1 to 2,0 times the rated current in 0,01 steps for the low set and 0,1 to 20 times the rated currsteps for the high set.

For the earth fault element the current setting shall be 0,05 to 0,8 timesin steps of 0,01 for the low set and 0,05 to 8 times the rated current inhigh set.

Time settings shall be adjustable from 0 to 60 sec in 0,01 steps for tcharacteristics and for the IDMT characteristics the time multiplier setting sadjustable between 0,05 to 1,2 sec in steps of 0,025 sec.

The relay shall be thermally ratepractical current levels on any combination oexceed the thermal withstand time of the relay.

9.5 Transformer Protection

9.5.1 Transformer Differential Protection

Overall differential protection shall be of the low impedance, two winding

The relay shall be a fully numerical, flush mounted and shall contain a element per phaseadjustable. The minimum differential current setting shall not be greater thaof the rated load current of the relay. The relay shall have both a low sedifferential elements.

Protective IEDs shall be three phase units with internal vector group comline current transformer ratio correction eliminating the need for external incurrent transformers.

and th



current. For the purpose of stability calculations, an infinite source is to be assumed and only.

tation.

meric liquid A separate

nated protection tain cases IEC

5-103, depending on the application and subject to the approval of the Engineer. elay shall be

on the front panel LCD and

y.

or non-ts and the relay shall give a tripping or

elays.

Tripping indication and fault identification facilities shall be also provided. Resetting of the

e phase currents for each input, the differential

ection

ferably

pedance type. ected to class PX current transformers on the transformer

the biased

rate with any type such that it will

nitude in the primary winding of the neutral current transformer alone:

When the protected winding of the transformer is connected to a solidly earthed power , the fault setting shall be between 10 per cent and 60 per cent of the rated current

of the protected winding. When a transformer winding has more than one rating, the percentage setting shall be based on the lowest of the ratings. When more than one transformer winding is connected in parallel, the percentage setting shall be based on the lowest of the rated currents of the individual transformers.

the through fault current calculated using the transformer impedance

The relay shall provide harmonic stabilization against inrush and over-exci

The user shall be able to communicate directly with the relay via an alphanucrystal display together with the relay front panel function keys and by a PC. serial communication interface shall be provided for an integrated co-ordiand control system. Communication interface shall be IEC 61850 and in cer60870-The necessary software and hardware required for communicating with the rprovided.

Power-on diagnostic tests and continuous self-monitoring shall be carried out by the relay. In the event of a failure, an error message shall be displayedthe relay shall be blocked depending on the type of failure detected.

Event and fault recording facilities shall also be provided with the rela

Plant status and control signals shall be input to the relay via programmableprogrammable optically isolated binary inpusignalling command through programmable or specifically assigned output r

relay shall be made without removing its front cover.

The relay shall display the magnitude of thcurrent and the restraining current.

Operation of main and HV back-up protection shall trip both HV and LV circuit breakers

9.5.2 Restricted Earth Fault Prot

Restricted earth fault protection for both transformer windings shall be preincorporated in the transformer differential protection relay.

When restricted earth fault protection is not integrated within the transformer main protection relay, a separate relay shall be provided.

Restricted earth fault protection relays shall preferably be of the high imThe protection shall be connneutral connections and shall share the same line current transformers asdifferential protection.

Restricted earth fault protection shall be so arranged that it does not opeof fault external to the transformer winding. The setting of the relay shall be operate reliably with current of the following mag

system



Where the prescribed settings cannot be obtained special approval of the performance

ng resistors of adequate rating and non-linear overvoltage protection

ntractor will be expected to calculate adequate performance of the high impedance l be to the approval of the

132 kV transformer back up overcurrent protection shall comprise a 3-pole overcurrent d elsewhere in

shall be provided for instantaneous overcurrent protection of the transformer main 132kV connections and these shall be of

erreach type.

relevant

. The on under gassing and under

Transformers will be provided with oil and winding temperature protection. These will be of table settings giving alarm and trip facilities.

relief devices, each of which

sformers will be provided with an oil surge or pressure operated device having

Earthing Transformer Restricted Earth Fault Protection

The LV winding of the Earthing Transformer shall be protected by Restricted Earth Fault tion. The protection shall be connected to class PX current transformers on the

transformer neutral connection and to line current transformers on the LV AC distribution board.

The restricted earth fault relay shall comply with the requirements described elsewhere in this document.

shall be obtained.

All necessary stabiliziresistors shall be included.

The Corestricted earth fault scheme. The method and calculations shalEngineer.

9.5.3 Back-up Overcurrent Phase and Earth Fault Protection

and single pole earth fault relay complying with the requirements describethis Document.

Additionally, high set overcurrent elements

the low transient ov

9.5.4 Other Transformer Protection

9.5.4.1 General

Transformer Buchholz, temperature and tap changer protective devises andintelligent I/O devices shall be supplied and mounted under this Contract.

9.5.4.2 Buchholz Protection

Power and earthing transformers will be supplied fitted with Buchholz devicesBuchholz device will be of the two element type giving operatisurge conditions.

9.5.4.3 Oil and Winding Temperature

the two stage type with adjus

9.5.4.4 Low Oil Level and Pressure Relief Devices

Transformers will be provided with low oil level and pressurehaving contacts for purposes of remote alarms and trips.

9.5.4.5 Tap Change Oil Surge

Trancontacts for purposes of remote alarm or trip as directed by the Engineer.

9.5.4.6

Protec



9.6 132 kV Busbar and Circuit Breaker Fail Protection

The busbar protection shall be of the numerical, low impedance, phase segregated

nel and one y unit shall be the

tion and the primary system process comprising of main CTs, ition, pre-

ontrol

he fault and in tion.

In the event of exceeding and signalling usly monitored.

.

ting currents

d type test link n bus-wires or to any other apparatus. In one

the unearthed osition the link

k from one position n circuiting the current transformers. Suitable Klippon

it protection, the akers. Instead,

for each

e busbar wise

-way switch of ch zone of the busbar protection. These switches

shall include contacts for alarm and indication functions.

Means shall be provided to permit tripping and intertripping of individual circuit breakers st operations of the protection without tripping all circuit breakers connected to the

protected busbars.

Full provision for testing each part of the equipment shall be made so that it is not necessary to disconnect wires from terminals.

current differential type and shall protect against phase and earth faults.

It shall comprise of a central unit (master) situated on the bus-section bay pabay unit for each feeder circuit situated on the bay relay panel. The bainterface between the protecisolators, and circuit breaker and shall perform the associated data acquisprocessing, and control functions.

The central unit shall be the system manager. It shall configure the system, contain the system replica, assign bays within the system, manage the sets of operating parameters, act as process bus controller, assure synchronization of the system, and ccommunication with the station control system.

The busbar protection shall give clear indication of the phase involved in tcase of external faults it shall ensure high stability even in case of CT satura

The measuring current circuits must be continuously monitored.a set threshold, phase segregated and busbar section selective blocking must be provided. The tripping circuits within the device must be continuoTesting of the tripping paths of the circuit breaker must be provided. The isolator positions and the transition times must be monitored and faults selectively signalled

The busbar protective equipment shall not be affected by harmonic circulasuch as may be experienced in a multiple earthed power system.

The unearthed side of CT circuits shall pass through a two-position boltebefore being connected to any commoposition the link shall short-circuit the transformers as well as disconnect side of the residual circuit from the rest of the equipment and in the other pshall give normal connection. It shall be possible to change the test linto the other on load without opetype terminals can be utilized for this purpose.

Where common circuit-breaker trip coils are used for busbar and circubusbar protection shall not use a separate trip supply common to all brethe segregation of trip circuits shall be maintained by taking the trip supply breaker from its associated bay panel.

Means shall be provided for interrupting, the trip and intertrip functions of thprotection while leaving the operation and indication of the equipment otherunimpaired. These means shall comprise insulated links, distinctively labelled, and connected in the trip and intertrip circuit connections. One master twoapproved type shall be provided for ea

from te



Current transformer rings shall be formed at the protection relay cubicles and not at the

iring should be suitably dimensioned to reduce

.

protection ircuit breaker

l initiate

lower voltage

and a liquid lay. Protective ion into a

numerical co-ordinated protection and control system. Communication with the relay shall on the ware and

nd calculations shall be to the approval of the Engineer. on the characteristics of the actual equipment to be

g etc. and such

:

f a circuit breaker branch infeed of fault current to the associated part of the network

ly to the

wing reclosure during which a primary e fault had been

sing signal is

• Reclosure shall only take place on overhead line circuits and shall be initiated following tripping by the current differential protective IEDs, the distance relay Zone 1

uipment or receipt of a carrier acceleration intertripping signal.

• Reclosure shall not be initiated in the event of any type of fault in the second or third back-up zones or when the circuit breaker is closed onto a fault on a previously de-energized line.

switchgear cubicles.

Current transformer secondary bus wcurrent transformer burdens to a minimum.

Circuit Breaker failure protection shall be integrated in the busbar protection

The breaker failure protection on circuit breakers shall be initiated by alldevices, which normally initiate tripping of that breaker. In the event of the cfailing to open within a pre-selected time, the breaker failure protection shaltripping of all adjacent circuit breakers. It shall also incorporate provision for initiating direct intertripping of any remote infeed via teleprotection channels and thecircuit breaker on transformer circuits.

The protective IEDs shall be accessed both locally through front arrow keyscrystal display and via a personal computer for reading and setting the reIEDs shall be provided also with an additional serial interface for integrat

be effected via IEC 61850 and in certain cases IEC 60870-5-103, dependingapplication and subject to the approval of the Engineer. All the associated softhardware required to communicate with the relay shall be provided.

The Contractor will be expected to calculate adequate performance of the busbar protection scheme. The method aThe calculations should be basedused on this Contract e.g. Current Transformers, Relays, wirincharacteristics should be given in the data section of the calculations.

9.7 Auto-Reclosing Function

For the purpose of this Specification, the following definitions shall apply

(a) Dead Time (DT) -The minimum time interval between the opening oto eliminate that and the subsequent reclosure of that circuit breaker to re-establish suppnetwork.

(b) Reclaim Time (RT) -The time interval follosystem fault causes the auto-reclose program to continue as if thpresent on reclosure.

(c) Close Pulse Time (CP) -The time period during which a continuous cloapplied to the circuit breaker mechanism during an auto-reclose cycle.

The following requirements shall govern auto-reclosing:

eq



It shall also be possible to block auto-reclose from other protection, such as busbar tection.

the circuit hich further faults result in three phase tripping and lockout, shall be

st available

ettable between 0,05 – 320 sec (the reclaim time commences herefore, includes

time the

d.

s been switched off manually such that an inadvertent initiation of the auto-reclosure equipment does not close the circuit

ed line. Auto-reclose shall be blocked for a settable time after

vided to initiate the following indications:

ssful

lose blocked

t of service

uired to initiate alarm depending on the nature of the

ady contact to o enable it to

orm a further trip for a permanent fault.

sides of the open circuit breaker terminals as well as the phase angles and frequency nce between the voltages. Closing will be permitted when these are within pre-set

limits.

Separate voltage settings must be allowed for live and dead conditions. The voltage setting shall be adjustable between 40 to 130 Vac in steps of 1 V.

The phase angle setting shall be adjustable between 0 to 45 ° in steps of 1 °.

protection, overcurrent protection and breaker failure pro

Dead time shall be adjustable in the range between 0,01 - 320 sec.

The reclaim time, i.e., the time period following the automatic reclosing ofbreaker during wchosen to match the duty cycle of the circuit breakers, assuming the shortedead time is chosen.

The reclaim time shall be sat the instant the re-close command is given to the circuit-breaker and, tthe circuit breaker closing time).

The closing command shall be limited to the set close pulse time after whichreclosing equipment shall be automatically reset without resetting the reclaim timer.

Where synchronism supervision is applied, the reclosing command shall be blocked if the dead line live busbar check and synchronism check conditions are not fulfille

A counter shall be provided to record the number of reclosures.

Auto-reclosure shall be blocked if the circuit breaker ha

breaker on a de-energizenergizing the line.

• Facilities shall be pro

• Autoreclose succe

• Autorec

• Autoreclose ou

• Autoreclose in progress

• Final trip

Some or all of the above may be reqscheme requirements.

The automatic reclosing equipment shall be capable to accept a circuit reprevent automatic reclosing unless the circuit breaker is in a healthy state tperf

9.8 Synchronizing Check Function

The synchronizing check function shall monitor the magnitudes of the voltage on both

differe



The slip frequency shall be settable between 0 to 1 Hz in steps of 0,01 Hz. Synchronism ers.

all also have the following features:

command.

system shall allow manual close without the synchronizing function but the ll be displayed graphically on the station MMI when using this

g and running volts

The voltages that must be selected for the synchro-check functions depend on the making use of the auxiliary l system should provide to the

.

ipment shall be provided under a separate Contract and shall be suitable for operating with optical fibres. Where specified intertrip send/receive

nt shall be suitable for high speed intertripping and the operating

the

relays, where specified shall be of the heavy-duty type suitable for panel

quired duty and operating coil to

ntacts and hand reset flag indicators. Resetting of the flag indicator and the contacts shall be possible without having to open the relay case. Remote resetting should also be possible.

Tripping relays rated for operation on a 110 volts battery shall have a normal working e of 125 volts and an operating voltage range of 66-143 volts. The minimum

operating current shall not be less than 50 milliamps and the trip relay shall not operate when a 10-microfarad capacitor charged to 150 volts is discharged into the tripping relay operating coil. The tripping relay shall have a thermal withstand of 143 volts for 8 hours.

check function shall be provided for all specified circuit break

The synchronizing check function sh

• Energizing for DL/DB, DL/DB or DL/DB.

• Different energizing settings for manual close command and auto-reclose

• The following information shafeature:

⇒ incomin

⇒ slip frequency (synchroscope) and

⇒ frequency

positions of the breakers and/or the disconnectors. By contacts of the breakers and disconnectors, the controrespective relay the right voltage for the synchronism and energizing function

9.9 Intertrip Send/Receive Teleprotection Equipment

Teleprotection signalling equ

teleprotection equipmespeed should not exceed 40ms. Provision shall be made to continuously monitor the integrity of the communications circuit and provide an alarm if a fault oncommunications circuit is detected.

9.10 Tripping Relays

All trippingmounting.

Tripping relays built into protective IEDs shall be preferred.

Trip relay contacts shall be suitably rated to satisfactorily perform their rerelay operating time shall not exceed 10 ms from initiation of trip relaycontact close.

Where specified latching type relays shall have hand or electrically reset co

voltag



9.11 Trip Circuit Supervision Schemes

Trip circuit supervision shall preferably be provided by the main protective IE

The trip circuit supervision scheme shall provide continuous supervision of the trip circuits

Ds.

g faults on DC

eaker if a relay

ors. Sufficient contacts should be provided for alarm and blocking of the close circuit.

Wherever practical physical segregation shall be arranged so that no common plant nd Main protection inoperative. This includes

ulticore cable failure but excludes consideration of a multicore trench

rical, multi-functional, protective and control device shall provide the 22-11kV tities, issuing of t, shall be

ions for the protection of 22-11kV underground feeders are the

efinite Time Overcurrent Protection - Characteristics according to EN

ercurrent (Option)

aker Failure

• Switch on to Fault

p Circuit Supervision

For the protection of 22-11kV overhead feeders the following additional functions are required:

• Instantaneous Overcurrent

of the circuit breaker in either the open or closed position.

Relay elements shall be delayed on drop-off to prevent false alarms durinwiring on adjacent circuits or due to operation of a trip relay contact.

Trip circuit supervision circuits shall prevent false tripping of a circuit brelement is short-circuited.

Relay alarm elements shall be equipped with self-resetting flag indicat

The relay shall give alarm signals and also block the closing circuit when operated.

9.12 Segregation

failure will render First and Secoconsideration of a mfailure.

9.13 22-11 kV Feeder Protection

9.13.1 General

A numefeeder protection. All tasks, such as the acquisition of the measured quancommands to circuit breakers and other primary power system equipmenprocessed in a completely digital way.

The required functfollowing:

• Inverse and D60255 standard

• Directional Ov

• Under Frequency

• Bre

• Reverse Blocking

• Tri



• Autoreclosing

• Sensitive Earth Fault

The required functions are detailed in the 22-11kV feeder schedules.

lay. It shall have and Earth Fault Protection”

irectional. The

ocking function shall be available. All overcurrent o be blocked via l signal to the

th Switch-On-To-Fault function. Under this situation, the itch, thus

ttings for both operating current and time over a ds for time.

ore balance neutral CT.

ion

ct any low frequency present in the eder if it exceeds the preset frequency value.

aluation shall be

be from 45 Hz to 52 Hz in steps of 0,1 Hz.

tion shall monitor the reaction of the circuit breaker to a trip ened, a breaker

breakers that represent sources to

termine if the circuit breaker has properly opened in response to a trip signal shall be both the current flow through the circuit breaker and the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact.

The initiation of the breaker failure function shall be either from the internal protective function of the relay or from external trip signals via binary inputs.

The evaluation of the circuit breaker status shall depend on both “a” and “b” type auxiliary contacts connected.

9.13.2 Overcurrent Protection

Time-overcurrent protection shall be the main protective function of the reall features as mentioned in Paragraph “Back up Overcurrent for 132 kV Feeders. In certain cases the overcurrent protection may be dspecific relay requirements are detailed in the 22-11kV feeder schedules.

In addition to the above, a reverse blelements, inverse and definite time, enabled in the device shall be able tan external signal to the binary inputs of device. Removal of the externabinary input shall re-enable these elements.

The relay shall be provided witime delay shall be by-passed via an impulse from the external control swresulting in high speed tripping.

9.13.3 Sensitive Earth Fault

Sensitive Earth Fault function shall comply to the general requirements of overcurrent protection. It shall have adjustable serange of at least 1% to 15% of rated CT current and at least 0,5 to 15 seconThe relay shall be equipped with a separate current input to be fed from a c

9.13.4 Under Frequency Protect

The Under Frequency protection shall be able to detesystem and initiate tripping of the fe

Through the use of filters and repeated measurements, the frequency evfree from harmonic influences and very accurate.

Setting ranges shall

9.13.5 Breaker Failure Protection

The breaker failure protecsignal. If after a programmable time delay, the circuit breaker has not opfailure trip signal shall be issued and all adjacent circuitthe fault shall be tripped.

The criteria to de



If one of the criteria that led to pickup of the breaker failure scheme is nobefore the time del

longer met ay elapses, then the breaker failure timer shall drop out and no trip

stabilization of rnal trip signals shall take place. The external signal must be

y time, otherwise the time shall reset and no

urrent uit breaker has tripped.

without entering

The automatic reclose function shall lockout after unsuccessful reclosure and an LED it breaker without

n shall be

ns.

The relay shall have provision for adjustment of the dead and the reclaim times. The dead claim time (the

omatic reclosure during which further fault occurrences result in lockout) shall be adjustable between 5 and 25 seconds, or such values required by the circuit breaker manufacturer.

The instantaneous element shall be blocked during the reclaim and when the automatic reclosing function is disabled.

signals shall be issued.

To protect against nuisance tripping due to excessive contact bounce, athe binary inputs for extepresent for the entire period of the delatripping signal shall be issued.

9.13.6 Automatic Reclosing Function

Where specified relays shall be provided with a single shot automatic reclosing function. The function shall be initiated from the instantaneous elements of the overcprotection after the circ

It shall be possible to easily enable or disable the Autoreclosing functioninto the menus of the relay.

shall indicate the status. It shall not be possible to close the circuresetting the Autoreclose lockout condition. Resetting of the lockout conditiopossible locally through the MMI or the Energy Centre.

The Autoreclosing function shall be able to record the number of operatio

time shall be adjustable between approximately 5 and 20 seconds. The retime period following aut



132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Specification Page 190 of 365

10. MEDIUM VOLTAGE GAS INSULATED SWITCHGEAR DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE

10.1 SWITCHGEAR TYPE

The specified metal-enclosed switchgear and controlgear shall be SF6-insulated, type-tested to EN 62271-200 and suitable for indoor installation. The rated voltage shall be 22kV. According to the corresponding version, the switchgear panels (transformer incomers, bus section, feeders, and capacitor bank feeders) have to be equipped with maintenance-free vacuum circuit breakers and three-position switches. The switchgear shall be designed as single-busbar switchgear.

10.2 CURRENT RATINGS

The temperature rise of each current carrying component of the equipment supplied when operating continuously at the specified ratings or under short circuit conditions at the specified site rating or under the specified maximum design ambient conditions shall be according to EN 62271-1.

Every part of the switchgear and equipment shall also withstand, without mechanical or thermal damage, the instantaneous peak currents and rated short time current pertaining to the rated breaking capacity of the circuit breakers.

Tenderers are requested to state in the Schedule of Particulars the permissible overload rating for the switchgear operating under emergency conditions, complete with its associated auxiliary equipment such as current transformers etc, together with the duration and ambient temperature for which it applies.

10.3 DESIGN AND CONTRUCTION

Metal-enclosed switchgear and controlgear shall be designed so that normal service, inspection and maintenance operations, determination of the energized or de-energized state of the main circuit, including the usual checking of phase sequence, earthing of connected cables, locating of cable faults, voltage tests on connected cables or other apparatus and the elimination of dangerous electrostatic charges, can be carried out safely.

Operational reliability and personnel safety must be fulfilled and ensured by eliminating any external influence on the primary circuits such as busbar connections and cable Connections.

Compartments should be subdivided into the Busbar, Circuit Breaker, Cable Connection and Low Voltage compartments: The busbar and circuit breaker compartments shall be SF6 insulated.

Compartments containing SF6 shall be made of a welded, anticorrosive stainless steel enclosure or alternatively aluminium enclosure. These compartments should be interconnected electrically by means of a fully insulated connection system without the need of SF6 gas work on site. A similar system shall also be used to connect the busbar compartments from panel to panel enabling switchgear extension without any SF6 gas work on site. It should also be possible to replace any panel from any position (e.g. the middle) of the switchgear installation without the need to move the adjacent panels. Any work on one section of the switchboard shall not require the shut down of other sections.


132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Specification Page 191 of 365

Tenderers should submit with their tender a detailed description of the method used on site for switchgear extension and / or panel replacement indicating clearly the technology used to facilitate the described work.

The external effects of an internal arc shall be limited by a suitable design to prevent any danger to an operator during the time he is performing his normal duties. Test evidence to verify the design will be required.

Pressure shall be relieved through a rear duct directed to the top.

The cable and low voltage compartments shall be capable of operating in humid conditions and electric heaters shall be provided to prevent condensation

Cast iron shall not be used for any part, which may be subjected to mechanical shock. Insulating materials shall have a high resistance to tracking.

The switchboard shall be suitable for installation in a building with a cable basement or trench. All necessary foundation or fixing bolts and rails shall be provided.

Electrical wiring in compartments containing primary connections or equipment is to be enclosed in metal conduit or equivalent.

10.4 COMPARTMENTS CONTAINING SF6

Compartments shall be filled with SF6 gas. Gas density must be monitored with temperature compensation. Its status has to be transmitted and signalled to the outside.

The pressure of the compartment housings must be relieved through rupture diaphragms away from the operator.

The compartments must ensure tightness for a lifetime greater than 30 years according to EN 62271 - 1.

10.5 COMPARTMENT COUPLINGS

Compartment couplings, where used, should be solid-insulated, screened (semi-conductive, earthed screen) and covered against mechanical damage with a suitable material. They must enable the connection and separation of all compartments without gas work.

10.6 CIRCUIT BREAKER COMPARTMENT

Circuit breaker compartment shall consist of the high-voltage part containing the circuit breaker poles with the vacuum interrupters and an external operating mechanism.

The requirements of EN 62271-100 with respect to type tests, service operation and the making and breaking of fault current shall apply to all types of circuit breakers.

Circuit breakers shall be covered by test certificates, certifying the operation of the circuit-breaker at duties corresponding to the rated breaking capacities of the circuit-breakers. The test duty shall not be less onerous than the requirements of EN 62271-100. Test Certificates shall be submitted with the tender.

Circuit breakers shall be suitable for rapid autoreclosure. The rated operating sequence shall be as follows:


0 - 0,3 sec - CO - 3 min - CO

In addition to the requirements of EN 62271 - 100 for interrupting terminal fabreakers shall be capable of coping with the interrupting duties produced byof transformer magnetizing current and of capacitor current associated with overhead line-

ults, circuit the switching

bove duties shall

ity, which the

the shock it current.

ure produced nts. The material shall be declared by the

manufacturer.

facility to measure wear of contacts or preferably have

rmal

cuit-breaker the circuit-breaker is open or closed. The

eaker is in 'earthed' locations

se whether

tial construction, utilising such materials to prevent sticking due to rust or corrosion. The overall designs shall be such as

operation due to

the mechanism failing to latch in the closed position the circuit-breaker

Operation counters shall be fitted to all circuit-breaker mechanisms.

solenoid operated valves, shall be capable of operation over the ambient temperature range when the voltage at their terminals is any value within the voltage range stipulated in EN 62271 - 100.

It shall be possible to charge the mechanism spring with the circuit breaker in either the 'open' or 'closed' positions. It shall not be possible for the circuit breaker to close unless

charging, cable-charging or capacitor banks as may be applicable.

Test certificates demonstrating the ability of the circuit breakers for the abe submitted with the Tender.

Tenders should include a statement of the accumulative breaking capaccircuit breakers are capable of, before maintenance is required.

Circuit-breakers shall be mounted on insulators strong enough to withstandload produced by the circuit-breaker when clearing rated short-circu

The live tank shall be of robust manufacture to withstand the internal presswhen clearing rated short-circuit curre

Circuit breakers shall either have automatic compensation for contact erosion.

10.7 OPERATING MECHANISM

The operating mechanism must be maintenance-free for 30 years under noenvironmental and service conditions

An approved mechanically operated indicator shall be provided on each ciroperating mechanism to show whether indicators shall be driven positively in both directions to show whether the circuit-breaker is in the 'open' or 'closed' position, and shall be operative when the circuit-brthe 'service', 'isolated' and

All mechanisms shall be suitable for use on circuits fitted with rapid autorecloor not this feature is specified in the schedules.

Circuit-breaker mechanisms shall be of the trip-free type as defined in EN 62271 and shall have an anti-pumping feature.

Each part of the operating mechanism shall be of substan

to reduce mechanical shock to a minimum and shall prevent inadvertentfault current stresses, vibration or other causes.

In the event of shall be arranged to open at normal speed.

The electrical closing and tripping devices, including direct acting solenoid coils and



the spring is fully charged. A visual indicating device, preferably mprovided to indicate the state of the spring. The device shall indicate 'SPRCHARGED', in red on white background when the spring is in a condition tocircuit breaker and 'SPRING FREE', in black on white background when thin a condition to close the circuit-breaker. Provision shall also be made for sand, if applicable, remote indication of the state of the spring. Closure wcharging operation is i

echanical, shall be ING close the

e spring is not upervisory

hilst a spring n progress shall be prevented. If a charged spring is released when

either shall such

f the y upon

e shall be 35 aker closing mechanism is not fully recharged for further operation

all be locked out and the

entre.

harging device shall be supplied. No electrical or echanism during this process shall endanger the operation

through three ices shall be off load type but shall be suitable for operation

rcuits are live. It shall not be possible to operate the reaker is in the closed position.

mounted in

THING FACILITIES

either closing an nance earthing switch through a

er is in the open position.

l service position

circuits or the busbars of the switchboard shall be fully rated, i.e., it shall be able to make and carry the specified short-circuit rating of the switchboard.

10.10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FAULT-MAKING EARTHING SWITCHES

A fault making earthing switch for use with switchgear in accordance with this Specification shall be of the 3-pole type and shall comply with EN 62271 - 102.

the circuit breaker is closed, the circuit breaker shall not open and noperation result in damage.

AC motors shall be used for charging the spring mechanism. Re-charging omechanism operating spring shall commence immediately and automaticallcompletion of each circuit-breaker closure. The maximum rewind timseconds if a circuit brewithin a predetermined time after a closing cycle, the mechanism shan alarm initiated. Provision shall be made for making available this alarm tosupervisory Control C

An emergency hand operated cmechanical operations of the mor damage the equipment.

10.8 ISOLATING FACILITIES

The circuit breakers shall be connected to the busbars and feeder circuits position switches. The devwhilst the busbars or feeder ciisolating devices if the circuit b

The main isolating contacts shall be silver plated, self-cleaning and shall beporcelain or cast resin bushings.

10.9 EAR

Means shall be provided to earth both outgoing circuits and busbars by integral fully rated spring-assisted switch or a maintecircuit breaker.

It shall not be possible to select an earthing position unless the circuit break

Also, it shall be impossible to return the circuit breaker to the normawithout bringing first the earthing switch in the “OFF” position.

The earthing switch to be employed for earthing either the outgoing



The switch shall have a rated short-circuit making current and a rated sholeast equivalent to those of the switc

rt-time current at hgear with which it is to be used. It shall have two

not be ism to be left in such a condition that any energy stored

N" or "EARTH

hall be provided. perating

her the equipment is in the "EARTH ON" or "EARTH OFF" position. The positions shall be clearly indicated and the indicators shall be inscribed

ight yellow background and "EARTH OFF" in white

learly the methods of earthing used on the the equipment

he case may be. EARTH" or

y relays, instruments, etc., mounted on the switchboard, shall rth bar, which runs along the full length of the switchboard.

withstand oard.

Cable connections shall be performed exclusively under this Contract with fully insulated side-cone system. All functional

be safe-to-touch and mounted in an arc-resistant

ojects, the terminations of all incoming cables to transformer panels shall be carried out by the Contractor.

Cable testing must basically be possible from the front.

The cable connection compartment must be totally enclosed and accessible through a able cover.

10.13 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

Current transformers shall be suitably designed possibly as LV ring-core transformers. They must be fitted outside the high voltage part and outside the gas compartment. Feeder current transformers have to be placed above or below the circuit breaker,

positions: "EARTH OFF" and "EARTH ON".

The closing of the switch shall be by independent manual operation. It shall possible for the operating mechanin the initial part of an incomplete operation remains in the spring when the switch is in the "EARTH OFF" or "EARTH ON" positions.

It shall be possible to lock the operating mechanism in either the "EARTH OOFF" position.

Mechanical indication of the operating position of the switch equipment sThe indicator shall be positively driven in both directions from the switch omechanism so as to show whet

"EARTH ON" in black letters on a brletters on a Grass Green background.

10.11 EARTHING OF METAL PARTS

Labels shall be provided to indicate cequipment. A suitable form of indication shall be provided to show whether is prepared for "SERVICE", "BUSBAR EARTH" or "CIRCUIT EARTH" as t For bus section equipment it shall show whether "LEFT-HAND BUSBAR"RIGHT-HAND BUSBAR EARTH" is applied.

All metal parts, including anbe connected to a copper ea

The cross-section of the bar shall be sufficient to carry the rated short time current of the switchgear for the rated short time withstand of the switchb

10.12 CABLE CONNECTION

cable plugs according to the outside-cone or incomponents of the primary part must panel enclosure.

For turnkey pr

Cables must be supported by cable brackets.

remov



according to the panel version. It must be possible to replace current transformers without

uty specified in the Schedule of

winding conductors, shall have a short-time e design

ating not less ay in which they are installed. Furthermore,

of the rated ry current rating

d current rating.

point only l be earthed

rate link, suitably labelled.

T secondary wiring of feeders controlling capacitor banks

rovided for each

itability to ensured or

ndividually labelled and serial plates are to be provided lti ratio secondary als of the current se connections

grams.

in a metal . For cable

testing purposes they must be easy to detach or isolated using suitable disconnecting facilities. Cable testing should be made possible through a suitable adaptor.

Voltage transformers shall be supplied as specified in the Schedule of Requirements. They shall comply with EN 60044 - 2. They shall be three-phase with a secondary phase-to-phase voltage as specified in the Schedule of Requirements.

Voltage transformers for protection shall be suitable for the operation of protective gear, voltage regulating equipment, instruments including transducers and metering.

gas work.

Current transformers shall be supplied suitable for the dRequirements and comply with the requirements of EN 60044 - 1.

All connections from secondary windings shall be brought out and taken, by means of separate insulated leads, to a suitable, accessible terminal board.

Current transformers, including primarycurrent rating and duration on all taps not less than that corresponding to thshort-circuit level of the associated switchgear.

All current transformers must have a maximum continuous primary current rthan the primary equipment rating of the bcurrent transformers shall have rated continuous thermal current of 120%primary current. The current error and phase displacement at rated primashall be retained up to the extende

The secondary windings of each current transformer shall be earthed at onethrough links situated in an accessible position. Each separate circuit shalthrough a sepa

The current transformers and Cshould be suitable to avoid secondary flashover due to transient inrush currents through the circuit breaker.

Magnetization and core loss curves and secondary resistance shall be ptype and rating of current transformer.

The Contractor shall ensure that the capacity is adequate for the operating of the associated protective devices and instruments at the lead burdens involved.

Where instruments or transducers are connected to protection CTs, their suwithstand high current generated by power system fault conditions shall besaturable interposing current transformers fitted.

Each current transformer shall be ifor fitting to the outside of current transformer chambers, etc. Where muwindings are specified, a label shall be provided at the secondary termintransformer indicating clearly the connection required for each ratio. Theshall be shown on the appropriate schematic and connection dia

10.14 VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

Voltage transformers shall be suitably insulated (preferably cast-resin) withenclosure, safe-to-touch. They must be located outside gas compartments



When a polarizing source voltage is required for directional overcurrent or directional earth e provided.

with EN 60044

l earth fault protection, the residual burden of

se colour to the

r other e respective e signals from

VTs not connected directly to the same circuit as the current transformers then a voltage e wired through

also of the bus section circuit circuit-breaker is open.

nt of 200A

the switchgear shall be equipped with a capacitive

e

king

ocket for phase comparison

URE

e shall consist of the following pressure-resistance

• Panel roof

• Lateral switchgear termination (end walls)

• Partitions between panels

The metal-enclosed switchgear must have an Internal Arc Classification (IAC) to EN 62271 – 200 for 1s. Corresponding test reports have to be enclosed.

fault protection a broken delta connected residual voltage winding shall b

The transformers shall have a rated voltage factor of 1,5 in accordance and have a rated burden of 50/25VA with accuracy class 0,5 plus 3P to the specified standards.

Where provided for directional overcurrent and directionaresidual voltage winding shall have a voltage factor of 1,9 and a rated25VA per phase with accuracy class 3P to the specified standards.

Secondary winding shall be connected through suitable miniature circuit breakers, isolating terminals and links labelled to indicate their functions and phaappropriate circuits. MCBs shall comply with EN 60947.

Secondary circuits of voltage transformers shall not be paralleled. Meters oinstruments with voltage input shall be connected directly to the VT of thcircuit, if available. When meters or instruments are provided with voltag

selection scheme shall be established and the voltage signals shall bauxiliary contacts of the respective circuit breakers andbreakers to break the circuit automatically when the

The voltage transformer connection shall be capable of carrying a currecontinuously so that primary injection testing may be carried out.

10.15 CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE DETECTION SYSTEM

For the safe isolation from supply voltage detection system with the following functions:

1. Voltage indication per phas

2. Relay outputs with potential-free contacts for signalling and interloc

3. Test s

10.16 SWITCHGEAR ENCLOS

The arc-resistant switchgear enclosurunits with appropriately located pressure relief duct :

• Panel front

• Rear wall with likely pressure relief duct



10.17 INTERLOCKS AND CONTROLS

ures safe operation of the equipment under all service conditions. Preventive interlocks or measures

k mechanisms shall be mechanical and, when manually operated, they shall be ructions for

ing shall be effective at the point where hand power is applied so that

the r supervisory

eover selector mote". Where

circuit breakers shall be supplied with a multi-pole lockable changeover switch labelled "Local" and "Supervisory".

y control facilities are required, electrical interlocking shall ng supply to

hall be provided enclosures.

made at that part of the mechanism where the operating power is applied, and not to remote or

d shall not lock. It shall not be

hanism, which

The circuit breakers shall be provided with suitably rated auxiliary switches to relay circuit information for the purposes of control, remote and supervisory indication, circuit

ision, protection and metering as required by the specification. Switches shall be provided to interrupt the supply of current to the tripping mechanisms of the circuit breakers directly after operation of the latter has been completed. In addition, at least two normally open and two normally closed auxiliary switches of the same type and rating as those specified above shall be provided as spare items on each circuit breaker.

10.17.1 Interlocks

The circuit breakers shall be provided with an interlocking system, which ens

shall comply with EN 62271 - 200 and EN 62271 - 1.

Interlocprovided with labels, which are readily visible and contain clear, concise instoperation.

Mechanical interlockstresses cannot be transferred to parts remote from that point.

10.17.2 Controls

Circuit breakers shall be electrically and mechanically controlled locally at switchboard. In addition circuit breakers shall have facility for remote and/ocontrol.

Where separate control panels are specified, a multi-pole lockable changswitch shall be provided at the circuit breaker and labelled "Local" and "Reonly local and supervisory control is specified,

Where remote or supervisoralso be provided to prevent closure of the circuit, by interrupting the operatithe spring release coil of the spring closing mechanism.

10.18 LOCKING FACILITIES

In addition to the interlocking facilities specified above, locking facilities sto the access doors or gates to the circuit breaker compartment and circuit

Where a mechanism is to be locked in a specific position provision shall be

ancillary linkages.

Each requirement shall be met by the fitting of a separate single padlock anentail the fitting of any loose components prior to insertion of the padpossible readily to gain access to the tripping-toggle or any part of the mecwould permit defeat of the locking of the manual tripping.

10.19 AUXILIARY SWITCHES AND CONTACTORS

superv



The contacts of all auxiliary switches shall be strong and shall be positively ddirections with a wiping action, and where necessary discharge resistors to prevent arcing when breaking inductive c

riven in both shall be provided

ircuits. They shall be mounted so as to be nd adjustment.

S 159 and shall be pper material is

bars. The insulating material used shall be current

provision shall d currents and

short-circuit currents.

The busbars shall be contained in a separate SF6 compartment within the general casing hall be extensible at both ends.

switches.

f the fixed portion of the itchboard

a main label sized 50 mm x 150 mm x 3 mm in a prominent position. Circuit labels shall not be fitted on detachable doors or covers.

All circuit labels shall be engraved with black lettering on a white background.

Labels shall be secured with brass or steel screws, which have received an approved rust preventative treatment.

readily accessible for maintenance a

10.20 BUSBARS AND CONNECTIONS

The busbars and connections shall comply with the requirements of Bcontinuously rated for the site conditions and current specified. Only coaccepted for the construction of the buscapable of withstanding the heating effects of the rated short time withstand without permanent deformation or deterioration.

The busbars shall be adequately supported against short-circuit forces and be made to allow for thermal expansion of the conductors due to normal loa

of the switchgear and s

All bus sections shall be individually earthed through suitable three-position

10.21 CIRCUIT LABELS

The switchgear shall be adequately labelled at the front and rear oequipment, and on moving portions in a clear and concise manner. Each swshall be fitted with



11. POWER AND EARTHING TRANSFORMERS

of Transformers and Operating Conditions

lation and

shown in the relevant pecified

lop within a the transformer operating at full load, under the highest ambient

temperature, will not exceed 45oC at a height of 1,8 m from the transformer floor. For the be taken as 40 0C.

e letters fication and

as for AN condition

cooling NAF Unit.

radiators each ipating 50% of the losses at continuous maximum rating. It shall be capable of

blowers ture exceeding

Failure of one fan in each group of blowers shall not reduce the continuous maximum rating

s, extraction fans

ity as with the air blowers on the transformer lled by suitable thermostats.

to operate satisfactorily in parallel with one another when operating on the same tap.

Continuous Maximum Rating

11.1.2.1 Basis of kVA Rating

Transformers shall have on both the High Voltage and the Low Voltage Windings the rating stated in the Schedule of Requirements and shall comply with the requirements as regards temperature rise and overloads on all tapings irrespective of the direction of power flow and

11.1 GENERAL

11.1.1 Types

11.1.1.1 General

All transformers shall be of the oil immersed type and suitable for outdoor instalshall comply with EN 60076, Parts 1 to 5 inclusive.

For indoor substations the transformers shall be installed within cells asspecification drawings. The transformer cells shall be forced ventilated as selsewhere in this Specification so that the maximum temperature that can devetransformer cell with

purposes of this calculation the temperature of the incoming airflow should

11.1.1.2 Cooling

The types of cooling shall be as stated in the Schedule of Requirements and threlating to the method of oil circulation and cooling used hereafter in the SpeciSchedules shall be in accordance with EN 60076.

Where a combination of two methods of cooling is applied to one transformer ONAN/ONAF Units, the transformer shall be capable of operating under the ONup to a certain load as stated in the Schedule of Requirements, after which theequipment is to come into operation and the transformer will operate as an O

The forced cooled transformer shall be fitted with two coolers or two banks of capable of dissremaining in operation at full load for twenty minutes in the event of failure of associated with both coolers without the calculated winding hot spot tempera140oC.

of the transformer.

In addition to forced cooling directly connected on the transformer radiatorshall be incorporated, fitted on the side wall of the transformer cell. These extraction fans shall be at least equivalent in air flow capacradiators and shall be contro

11.1.1.3 Parallel Operation

Transformers supplied of same rating and nominal voltages shall be suitable

11.1.2



with the voltage of the lower voltage winding at the normal voltage stated in the Schedule of

loads at the

rise and overloads on all tapings with the voltage of the intermediate voltage winding at the

tapings rated currents at an applied

in accordance with IEC 60354.

e of Requirements.

based on the turns ratio, i.e., no load values.

h transformer hall be those corresponding to the normal ratio of transformation stated

ordance with the

group symbol

All electrical connections within windings shall be brazed but, subject to approval, ed joints may be used for round stranded conductors on tapping, bushing

roved by type

tand Short Circuit

damage the

system voltage is

Evidence shall be submitted with the Tender as to the extent to which the manufacturer has proved by test the ability of the specified transformer to withstand short circuit.

The Tenderer shall state in the Schedule of Particulars a brief description of those rmers or parts thereof, which have been subjected to short circuit test. It is preferred

that this information relates to designs comparable with the transformers Tendered but in the event this is not so the Engineer reserves the right to require calculations to prove that the design of transformers tendered will satisfactorily comply with this Clause.

Requirements.

In the case of multi winding units the rating shall permit delivery of the specifiedterminals specified and they shall also comply with the requirements as regards temperature

normal voltage stated in the Schedule of Requirements.

The transformers shall be capable of delivering at all voltage equal to 110% of the tapping voltage as per clause 4.4 of EN 60076 -1.

The overload capability shall be

The service conditions will be those specified in the Schedul

11.1.2.2 Basis of Voltage Rating

The voltage rating shall be

The voltages between phases on the higher and lower voltage windings of eacmeasured at no load sin the Schedule of Requirements.

Means shall be provided for varying the normal ratio of transformation in accSchedule of Requirements.

11.1.3 Electrical Connections

Transformer windings shall be connected in accordance with the EN 60076 specified in the Schedule of Requirements.

mechanically crimpor earthing connections and on bundle conductors where design has been ptest and application is subject to rigorous quality control.

11.1.4 Ability to Withs

11.1.4.1 General

All transformers shall be capable of withstanding, on any tapings and without thermal and dynamic effects of external short circuits under the conditions stated in EN 60076, Part 5. For this purpose the design short circuit level for eachstated in Schedule of Requirements.

11.1.4.2 Calculations and Tests

transfo



11.1.5 Stabilizing Windings

Unless otherwise specified in the Schedule of Requirements, the product of turns of the stabilizing windings and the cross-sectional area of

the number of one such turn must not be

ents, the stabilizing winding shall be capable of ein.

MR and auxiliary loss) of the total loss which shall be port restrictions, reliability and economic use of materials.

ers will be assessed using the following:

+ Aux)

and €26

The acceptance of transformers yielding component losses higher than the guaranteed v

( the tolerance permitted

l be acceptable subject to full compliance with all other technical rer accepting of component

rance permitted

shall be entirely at the discretion of the Purchaser accepting deduction from the Contract Price of charges for

teed values, at the

er equal to or

reduction in losses below the guaranteed values.

11.1.7 Variation in prices

The Contract price of each type of transformer of the tender is to be firm, except for copper, steel, oil and insulation material price variation. The variation in the Contract price is to be based on the variation of the cash price of these materials, as described below in the "Contract price adjustment formula".

less than 33% of the corresponding product for the untapped main winding.

When required in the Schedule of Requiremcarrying continuously the load specified ther

11.1.6 Losses and Evaluation of Losses

The Tenderer shall state in the Schedule of Particulars guaranteed values for component losses (i.e. no-load loss, load loss at Cas low as is consistent with trans

Tend

Total Cost = P + 10,27 (Fe + Cu

Where,

P = Tender price of transformer in Euro

Fe = Product of “no-load” loss in kW and €385

Cu = Product of “full load” copper loss in kW

Aux = Product of the transformer auxiliaries full load in kW and €7

alues shall be governed by either of the following:

a) Component losses in excess of guaranteed values but within under EN 60076, Part 1.

Transformers shalparticulars including temperature rises at CMR and subject to the Tendededuction from the Contract Price of charges for each KW or part thereoflosses in excess of the guaranteed values, at the above evaluation rates.

(b) Component losses in excess of guaranteed values and exceeding the toleunder EN 60076, Part 1.

The acceptance of the transformers and subject to the Tenderereach kW or part thereof of component losses in excess of the guaranabove loss evaluation rates.

In the event of transformers yielding component and total losses which are eithbelow the guaranteed values, the Tenderer will not be entitled to any premium in respect of



After the price adjustment, the final price will constitute the firm Contract price for each

ct shall be ectrolytic copper,

t the date of ractor in the performance of his

all be added e case may be.

aterial shall be

Oil/Oilo+0,06Is/Iso)

sformer

Po: former

London Metal

type of transformer.

11.1.7.1 Contract price Adjustment Formula

If the cost to the Contractor of performing the obligations under the Contraincreased or reduced by reason of any rise or fall in the cost of the elsteel, oil or insulating material above or below such rates and costs ruling asubmission of the tender that shall affect the Contobligations under the Contract, the amount of such increase or reduction shto or deducted from the Contract price as th

The variations in the cost of Electrolytic Copper, Steel, Oil, or Insulation Mcalculated in accordance with the following formula:

P = Po x (0,45 + 0,16 C/Co + 0,10 ST/STo + 0,18 SM/SMo + 0,05

P: Final calculated Contract price CFR Cyprus Port of each type of Tran

Tendered Contract price CFR Cyprus Port of each type of Trans

C: The official cash price in EURO of electrolytic copper grade A on the Exchange (LME) (http://www.lme.com/dataprices_daily_metal.asp) ocontract awa

n the date of rd or four (4) calendar months before delivery, which-ever is the

Co: ondon Metal

nearer to the date of delivery.

The official cash price in EURO of electrolytic copper grade A on the LExchange (LME) (http://www.lme.com/dataprices_daily_metal.asp) ondate of the tender

Price of Steel in EURO as

the closing

ST: published by Statistisches Bundesamt German federal l above

ory 17, Row 2) No. s

bureau for statistics according to the monthly average index for Stee600mm (Kaltgewalztes Blech…) “Fachserie 17, Reihe 2” (Categ278 (http://www-ec.destatis.de/csp/shop/sfg/bpm.html.cms.cBroker.cl ), on the

ry, which-ever is

STo atistisches Bundesamt German federal l above

17, Row 2) No. oker.cls

month of contract award or four (4) calendar months before delivethe nearer to the date of delivery.

: Price of Steel in EURO as published by Stbureau for statistics according to the monthly average index for Stee600mm (Kaltgewalztes Blech…) “Fachserie 17, Reihe 2” (Category278 (http://www-ec.destatis.de/csp/shop/sfg/bpm.html.cms.cBr ), on the

SM of Magnetic Steel in EURO as published by ZVEI (Zentralverband der

month of the closing date of the tender.

: Pricedeutschen Elektroindustrie) quarterly average index (http://www.zvei.de/index.php?id=376), on the month of contract awacalendar months before delivery, which-ever is the nearer to the date

rd or four (4) of delivery.

SMo: Price of Magnetic Steel in EURO as published by ZVEI (Zentralverband der deutschen Elektroindustrie) quarterly average index (http://www.zvei.de/index.php?id=376), on the month of the closing date of the tender.

Oil: Price of Oil in EURO as published by Statistisches Bundesamt German federal bureau for statistics according to the monthly average index for Mineral Oil Product (Mineralőlprodukte) “Fachserie 17, Reihe 2” (Category 17, Row 2) No. 169


http://www.lme.com/dataprices_daily_metal.asp

http://www-ec.destatis.de/csp/shop/sfg/bpm.html.cms.cBroker.cls




http://www.zvei.de/index.php?id=376





(http://www-ec.destatis.de/csp/shop/sfg/bpm.html.cms.cBroker.cls), on the month r (4) calendar months before delivery, which-ever is the

Oilo an federal ral Oil Product

serie 17, Reihe 2” (Category 17, Row 2) No. 169 s

of contract award or founearer to the date of delivery.

: Price of Oil in EURO as published by Statistisches Bundesamt Germbureau for statistics according to the monthly average index for Mine(Mineralőlprodukte) “Fach(http://www-ec.destatis.de/csp/shop/sfg/bpm.html.cms.cBroker.cl ), on the month

Is: undesamt rage index for

ppe) “Fachserie 17, Reihe 2” (Category 17, Row .cBroker.cls

of the closing date of the tender.

Price of Insulating Material in EURO as published by Statistisches BGerman federal bureau for statistics according to the monthly avePaper and Board (Papier und Pa2) No. 127 (http://www-ec.destatis.de/csp/shop/sfg/bpm.html.cms ), on

livery, which-

Iso: undesamt German federal bureau for statistics according to the monthly average index for

” (Category 17, Row oker.cls

the month of contract award or four (4) calendar months before deever is the nearer to the date of delivery.

Price of Insulating Material in EURO as published by Statistisches B

Paper and Board (Papier und Pappe) “Fachserie 17, Reihe 22) No. 127 (http://www-ec.destatis.de/csp/shop/sfg/bpm.html.cms.cBr ), on

sed.

ial cash price of the t.

or the power specific quality of

11.1.8 Impedance

of equired to operate in parallel with up to two other

The transformer sound pressure level (Lp) shall be measured as a type test and in sformers shall

In addition, with the tender documents, calculations of the transformer sound pressure level shall be submitted that demonstrate that with the transformer energized at the maximum

ing flux density, the sound pressure level of the transformer shall not exceed 80 dB(A) at the worst possible operating conditions.

Where the bottom plate of the transformer tank will be in direct contact with the surface of the foundation, anti-vibration pads shall be provided under the contract for insertion between the transformer and its foundation.

the month of the closing date of the tender.

In case a range of prices is given, the average price of this range shall be u

If there is no official cash price on the dates mentioned above, the officfirst available morning market after the said dates shall be taken into accoun

Contract Price adjustment shall be calculated for each type of transformer of this tender, separately.

The types of steel or oil referred to above, are to be used as the basis ftransformer price calculation, and not to restrict the manufacturer to anysteel or oil in any way.

The value of reactance measured on all tapings shall be as stated in Schedule Requirements. The transformers are rsimilar units.

11.1.9 Sound Level

accordance with EN 60076-10. The acceptable sound pressure level of the tranbe as stated in the Schedule of Requirements.

operat














11.1.10 Harmonic Suppression

Transformers shall be designed with particular attention to the suppressiovoltages, especially th

n of harmonic e third, fifth and seventh harmonics and minimize the detrimental

IT AND WINDINGS

evelopment of short circuit paths internally or to the earthed clamping structure, and the production of flux

insulated with a

nobstructed flow cooling ducts to ensure efficient core cooling.

pable of ne minute.

gn shall be such

visaged in EN c circuit does not exceed 19.000

r squar metre (i.e. 1,9 Tesla). The maximum flux density of the transformers

The Contractor shall determine the operating conditions under which the maximum flux sity will be a

Frequency 48

hedule of Requirements.

verloading in

ng.

ed to withstand the impulse-voltage levels and power frequency voltage tests specified.

The windings shall be located in a manner, which will ensure that they remain electrostatically

The windings shall also be thoroughly seasoned during manufacture by the application of axial pressure at a high temperature for such length of time as will ensure that further shrinkage is unlikely to occur in service.

effects resulting there from.

11.2 MAGNETIC CIRCU

11.2.1 Magnetic Circuit

The design of the magnetic circuit shall be such as to avoid static discharges, d

components normal to the plane of the laminations. Each lamination shall be material stable under the action of pressure and hot oil.

The winding structure and major insulation shall be designed to permit an uof cooling oil through core

The magnetic circuit shall be insulated from all structural parts, and shall be cawithstanding a test voltage to core bolts and to the frame of 2.000 V RMS for o

11.2.2 Flux Density

Cores shall be constructed from cold rolled grain oriented steel sheets. Desithat there will be no adverse effects due to core or stray flux heating with the quality of steel employed, and that when operating under the most onerous conditions en60076 and IEC 60354, flux density in any part of the magnetilines pe e centiwhen operating with rated winding voltage at the principal tap shall not exceed 1,50 Tesla.

den ttained within the following simultaneously applied limits:

Hz

Voltage HV Up to but not exceeding the maximum system voltage specified in the Sc

Load The transformers may be subjected to intermittent oaccordance with IEC 60354 with:

Load = 150% of Rated MVA & Power Factor = 0.85 Laggi

11.2.3 Windings

The transformers shall be design

balanced and that their magnetic centres remain coincident under all conditions of operation.



The windings and leads of all transformers shall be braced to withstand may occur through rough handling and vibration

the shocks which during transport, switching and other

t equal pressures are applied to all columns of spacers.

al Earthing

ception of the individual core laminations, core ed potential.

cted to the tank body by a copper strap. The bottom main core clamping structure shall be earthed by one or more of the following

earth

mping structure at one point only through a ing in the tank

and clamping chable re as the main

ctional construction shall be provided with a separate

lane of the te parts, the ducts

aintain electrical continuity.

Where coil clamping rings are of metal at earth potential, each ring shall be connected to the adjacent core clamping structure on the same side of the transformer as the main earth connection.

.5 Earthing of stabilizing windings

Where a stabilizing winding is provided, one corner of the delta winding shall be earthed externally by a removable link to the main tank earthing terminal.

transient service conditions including external short circuit.

If the winding is built up of sections or of disc coils separated by spacers, the clamping arrangements shall ensure tha

11.2.4 Intern

11.2.4.1 General

All metal parts of the transformer with the exbolts and associated individual clamping plates shall be maintained at some fix

11.2.4.2 Earthing of Core Clamping Structure

The top main core clamping structure shall be conne

methods:

(a) By connection through vertical tie rods to the top structure.

(b) By direct metal-to-metal contact with the tank base maintained by the weight of the core and windings.

(c) By connection to the top structure on the same side of the core as the mainconnection to the tank.

11.2.4.3 Earthing of Magnetic Circuits

The magnetic circuit shall be earthed to the claremovable link placed in an accessible position just beneath an inspection opencover and which, by disconnection, will enable the insulation between the core plates, etc., to be tested at voltages up to 2,0 kV. The link shall have no detacomponents and the connection to the link shall be on the same side of the coearth connection. These requirements are compulsory.

Magnetic circuits having an insulated selink for each individual section and the arrangement of the connections shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Where oil ducts or insulated barriers parallel to the plaminations divide the magnetic circuit into two or more electrically separaand insulating barriers which have a thickness greater than 2,5 mm are to be bridged with tinned copper strips so inserted as to m

11.2.4.4 Earthing of Coil Clamping Rings

11.2.4



11.2.4.6 Size of Earthing Connections

Main earthing connections shall have a cross-sectional area of not less thanconnections inserted between lamination

80 mm2 but s may have cross-sectional areas reduced to 20

2 lose thermal contact with the core.

tank such that the transformer can be lifted and transported without permanent deformation or oil leakage. The

elding of

the transformer, including core and vided with at least

re required,

gned to tand full vacuum without deflection exceeding the value stated in the Schedule of Tests.

ovision can be made not to

ot inhibit full vacuum being applied to the tank and conservator

vibrations from earthquakes as set out in this Specification including a strengthened base and anchorage of the core and windings to this base.

Where the design of the tank is such that the bottom plate will be in direct contact with the surface of the foundations, the plates shall have the following minimum thickness:

nsformer Tank Minimum Thickness

mm when in c

11.3 TANKS

11.3.1 Transformer Tanks

Each transformer shall be enclosed in a suitably stiffened welded steel

construction shall employ weldable structural steel of an approved grade. Wstructural steel shall be to an approved International Code of Standard.

Lifting lugs shall be provided, suitable for the weight ofwindings, fittings, and with the tank filled with oil. Each tank shall be profour jacking pads not less than 350 mm to the transformer foundation, and whewith lugs suitably positioned for transport on a beam transporter.

The transformer tank and conservator vessel, when empty of oil, shall be desiwiths Ancillary apparatus e.g. tap changers etc need not be so designed if prnot to subject them to full vacuum during any site processing and their inabilitywithstand full vacuum does nvessel.

The transformer tank must be designed and secured to withstand the

Length of Tra

Side Plates Bottom Plates

Less than 2500mm 6mm 19mm

Greater than 2500mm 9mm 25mm


Where skid type bases are provided, the plates shall have the following minimum thickness:

Length of Transformer Tank Minimum Thickness

Side Plates Bottom Plates

Less than 2500mm 6mm 9mm




The base of each tank shall be so designed that it is possible to move in any dcomplete transformer unit, full with oil and fitted with all specified fittings, withusing rollers, plates, crane or rails without overstraining any joints and withousubsequent leakage of oil. A design which requires that slide rails be placedposition is not to be used. Pulling eyes shall be provided at the base of the transformer for

irection the out injury when t causing any in a particular

r.

or skid bases, but unless

er shall be designed in such a manner as to leave no external pockets in

all external

e main tank alves mounted on the tank at top and bottom and each bank shall be fitted

into the tank

d at both ends of the tank so that the cooler can be mounted at either end. Valves shall be provided on the tank at

header of the ll be provided for

hall be dling.

shall be provided with suitable flanges having sufficient and properly spaced bolts. Inspection

internal connections of ach opening shall

intended. Each shall not exceed

.

hermometer and for the bulbs of temperature ed in the position of maximum oil

il level in the to the

outdoor weatherproof neutral current transformers.

11.3.2 Conservator Tanks, Breathers and Air Dryers

Each transformer shall be provided with an overhead conservator tank formed of substantial steel plates and arranged above the highest point of the oil circulating system. Connections into the main tank shall be at the highest point to prevent the trapping of air or gas under the main tank cover.

enabling skidding of the transformer to either centre line of the transforme

Unless elsewhere specified transformers may have either flat specifically approved by the Engineer, detachable underpasses must not be used.

All joints other than those, which may have to be broken, shall be welded.

The tank and covwhich water can lodge, no internal pockets in which oil can remain when draining the tank or in which air can be trapped when filling the tank, and to provide easy access tosurfaces for painting.

Where built-on radiators are used, each radiator bank shall be connected to ththrough flanged vwith drain valve and air release plug.

Where cooling tubes are used, each tube shall be of heavy gauge steel weldedsides, top and bottom.

Where separate coolers are used drilled flange facings shall be provide

each point of connection to the cooler, and between the pump and bottomcooler to facilitate the removal of the pump. Gasketted blanking plates shathe alternative oil connections to the tank. The alternative oil inlet to the tank scomplete with shut-off valve and gasketted blanking plates to facilitate site han

Each tank cover shall be of adequate strength, must not distort when lifted and

openings shall be provided to give access to and removal of thebushings, current transformers, winding connections and earthing links. Ebe correctly located and must be of ample size for the purpose for which it isinspection opening cover shall be provided with lifting handles and its weight 25kg.

It must be possible to remove any bushing without removing the tank cover

Pockets shall be provided for a stem type tindicators where specified. These pockets shall be locattemperature and it must be possible to remove any bulb without lowering the otank. Captive screwed caps shall be provided to prevent the ingress of water thermometer pockets when they are not in use.

Where called for in the Schedule of Requirements, accommodation shall be provided for



The location of the conservator tank shall be so arranged that it does not opassage of high voltage conductors above the transformer. The pipe work beconservator and the transformer shall comply with the relevant requirementsTechnical Requirements s

bstruct the tween the

of the General ection and a valve shall be provided at the conservator to cut off

servator tank shall be adequate for the expansion and contraction of ecified operating conditions. Conservator tanks shall also

p

the bottom inside

ing the sump

actuated relay

top oil able by a

tor. To be

r. This shall be n the pipe line

xceeded a self-ulating heating element inside the silica gel shall be activated. It shall be equipped

ote output control system. Due to the climatic conditions at site, the breathers shall be larger than would be fitted for use in a temperate climate. All

r and ultraviolet rays. breathers shall be mounted at a height of approximately 1400 mm above ground

the oil supply to the transformer.

The capacity of each conoil in the whole system under the spbe provided with the following:

(a) A removable end for cleaning purposes

(b) A filling orifice with ca

(c) A sump formed by projecting the feed pipe a minimum of 75mm abovesurface of the conservator

(d) A drain valve with captive cap arranged to drain the conservator includ

(e) An isolating valve arranged on the conservator side of the oil and gas

(f) An oil level indicator, magnetic type, with indicating levels corresponding totemperature of 5oC, plus 30oC and plus 60oC and mounted so that it is readperson standing on the ground within 600mm of the end of the conservasupplied with low oil level alarm contacts

(g) Each conservator shall be fitted with a maintenance free silica gel breatheequipped with a sensor controlled heating system. The humidity of the air ishall be continuously measured by the sensor and if a preset value is eregwith a self monitoring with rem

external parts shall be resistant against transformer oil, sea wate All level.

11.3.3 Valves and Location

Each transformer shall be fitted with the following valves as a minimum requirement.

Main Tank

(a) One horizontally mounted 50mm bore filter valve located near to the top of the tank.

gonally design permits, this valve may be

ined with item (c).

(c) One 50mm drain valve with such arrangements as may be necessary inside the tank to ensure that the tank can be completely drained of oil as far as practicable. This valve

all also be provided with an approved oil sampling device 15mm diameter.

(d) One 25mm bore valve at the bottom of the main tank and directly opposite to valve item (b) for connecting the pressure transducer of the oil filtration unit.

Conservator

(b) One 50 mm bore filter valve located near to the bottom of the tank and diaopposite to the filter valve required against (a). Wherecomb

sh



(e) One valve between the conservator and gas actuated relay for the main tank and, where

lve for oil conservator tank so arranged that the tank could be completely

il inlet of the oil filtration unit similar to valve item (b)

appropriate, for the tap change diverter switch tank.

(f) One drain vadrained of all oil.

(g) One horizontally mounted 50mm bore valve that has to be at the bottom of the conservator for the o

Tap Changer Selector Switch

(h) One 50mm filter and one 50mm drain valve where selector switches are contained in a separate tank.

Diverter Switch

(i) One 50mm drain valve to be fitted to each tank. An approved oil-sampling device shall also be provided.

nd pipe ends not .

above requirements, he Engineer before manufacture.

shall be arranged to prevent the ingress of water or leakage of oil with a

nthetic rubber is or similar material or where metal inserts are provided to

ossible consistent with faces are precision machined thinner

ails of all gasket sealing arrangements shall be shown on

at new gaskets , which are

pressure that k and designed to operate at a static pressure lower than the

hydraulic test pressure called for in the Schedule of Works Tests, shall be provided.

An equalizer pipe connection shall be provided between the pressure relief device and the

In the event that the device is a spring operated valve type, it shall be provided with one set of normally open signalling contacts.

Blank flanges, plates or captive screw caps shall be fitted to all valves anormally connected in service

The omission of any, or the provision of alternative arrangements to the will not be accepted unless approved in writing by t

11.3.4 Joints and Gaskets

All joint faces minimum of gasket surface exposed to the action of oil or air.

Oil resisting synthetic rubber gaskets are not permissible except where the syused as a bonding medium for corklimit compression.

Gaskets, having a minimum thickness of 5 mm, shall be as thin as is pthe provision of a good seal except that where jointinggaskets may be used and full detthe Plant drawings submitted for approval.

One set of gaskets should be supplied separately for each transformer so thare available for use during the assembly of any part of the transformersdispatched separately (e.g. radiators, conservators, valves etc.).

11.3.5 Pressure Relief Device

An approved pressure relief device of sufficient size for the rapid release of anymay be generated in the tan

conservator. The relief device is to be mounted on the tank cover or sides and is to be provided with a skirt to project at least 25mm into the tank to prevent gas accumulation.



11.3.6 Earthing Terminals

Four steel flag terminals having two 14mm diameter holes on 55 mm centres shone on each side and near to the bottom of the transforme

all be located r to facilitate connection to the local

icated on the drawings.

sformer tank

short circuit current

ternal connections and the N 60076, Part 1,

of the inals.

ocks or plugs. warn operators to refer to the Maintenance Instructions

m. The mass of oil shall be stated in litres and kg.

l or other approved material capable of withstanding the ice at site.

igned so that all painted surfaces can be design shall ding the

sts for the transformer main tank.

h that failure of any one part of the cooling plant ed cooling capacity.

onnected Directly to the Tank

e tank shall be detachable and shall be provided with . Plugs shall be fitted at the top of each

r draining.

A valve shall be provided on the tank at each point of connection to the tank.

Cooler banks

Each cooler bank shall be provided with:

(a) A valve at each point of connection to the transformer tank.

(b) A valve at each point of connection of radiators.

earthing system. Their location should be ind

11.3.7 Rating, Diagram, and Valve Plates

The following plates, or an approved combined plate, shall be fixed to each tranat an average height of 1500mm above the ground level:

(a) A rating plate bearing the data specified in EN 60076, Part 1. This plate shall also include a space for the Purchaser's serial number and in addition include therating and time factor for each winding.

(b) A diagram-plate showing in an approved manner, the involtage vector relationship of the several windings, in accordance with Ewith the transformer voltage ratio for each tap and, in addition, a plan viewtransformer giving the correct physical relationship of the term

(c) A plate showing the location and function of all valves and air release cThis plate shall also if necessarybefore applying vacuu

Plates are to be of stainless steerigors of continuous outdoor serv

11.4 COOLING PLANT

11.4.1 Cooling Plant General

Radiators and coolers, where required, shall be desthoroughly cleaned and easily painted on site with a brush or spray gun. The also avoid pockets in which water can collect and shall be capable of withstanpressure tests specified in the Schedule of Works Te

The clearance between any oil or other pipe work and live parts shall be not less than the minimum clearances stated in the Schedule of Requirements.

The cooling of the transformers shall be sucwill not result in the loss of more than 50 per cent of the total forc

11.4.2 Radiators C

Radiators connected directly to thmachined or ground flanged inlet and outlet branchesradiator for air release and at the bottom fo

11.4.3



(c) Loose blanking plates to permit the blanking off of the main oil connections.

ptive screw cap, in the inlet and in the outlet oil pipes.

ovision of alternative arrangements to the above requirements will not be accepted unless approved in writing by the Engineer before manufacture.

chedule of Particulars and Guarantees.

nsformers of similar rating and design shall be completely

ecting of each transformer to the cooler banks shall be

roved material with machined flanged joints.

rilling of all pipe

iece having anti-vibration characteristics shall be provided in each

nd drain

n and be suitable for le of withstanding the

tly from the m of anti-vibration mounting shall be provided.

bing or dismantling the cooler structure framework.

Blades shall be of galvanized steel unless otherwise approved.

Blower casings shall be made of galvanized steel of thickness not less than 2,6mm (14 SWG) and shall be suitably stiffened by angles or tees.

Galvanized wire with mesh not exceeding 12,5mm guards shall be provided to prevent accidental contact with the blades. Guards shall also be provided over all moving parts.

(d) A 50mm filter valve at the top of each cooler bank.

(e) A 50mm drain valve at the lowest point of each interconnecting oil pipe.

(f) A thermometer pocket, fitted with ca

(g) Air release and drain plugs on each radiator.

The omission of any or the pr

11.4.4 Forced Cooling

The type of forced cooling shall be as stated in the S

Forced cooling equipment for trainterchangeable with one another without modification on size.

11.4.5 Oil Pipes and Flanges

All oil piping necessary for the connsupplied under this Contract.

The oil piping shall be of app

Copper pipe work is to comply with BS 61.

Dimensions of steel pipes shall be in accordance with EN 10220 and the dflanges shall comply with BS 4504.

An approved expansion poil pipe connection between the transformer and each oil cooler bank.

It shall be possible to drain any section of pipe work independently of the rest avalves or plugs shall be provided as necessary to meet this requirement.

11.4.6 Air Blowers

Air blowers for forced air-cooling shall be of approved make and desigcontinuous operation outdoors and indoors. They shall also be capabstresses imposed when brought up to speed by the direct application of full line voltage to the motor.

To reduce noise to the practical minimum, motors shall be mounted independencoolers or, alternatively, an approved for

It shall be possible to remove the blower complete with motor without distur



Guards shall be designed such that blades and other moving parts can not be touched by

Where multiple fan cooling using small single-phase motors is employed, the motors in each

ling fans shall be controlled by means of a suitably rated isolating switch provided in the

tors shall be provided with a three pole electrically operated

ol panel when

rature indicating e to allow the

le fans cooling.

ort circuit protection. Each motor circuit breaker shall have an auxiliary contact to provide an alarm to

otors totalling more

rol gear accommodated in the marshalling kiosk together with all

ovided with voltage control equipment of the tap changing type for varying the effective transformation

alled for in the Schedule of Requirements shall be provided on the high voltage winding.

All terminals shall be clearly and permanently marked with numbers corresponding to the cables connected thereto.

Tap positions shall be numbered consecutively ranging from one upwards. The lowest number shall represent the tapping position corresponding to the maximum number of high voltage winding turns.

test fingers.

11.4.7 Cooler Control

cooling bank shall be grouped so as to form a balanced three-phased load.

The supply to the coocapable of being locked in the open position. A phase failure relay is to bemain cooler supply circuit.

Each motor or group of mocontactor and with control gear of approved design for starting and stopping manually. Auxiliary contacts on each contactor shall provide an alarm to the remote contrany of these contactors is open.

Where forced cooling is used on transformers, provision shall be included under this Contract for automatic starting and stopping from the contacts on the winding tempedevice. The control equipment shall be provided with a short time delay devicstarting of only one group of fans at a time, in case of multip

Each motor shall be protected by a suitable circuit breaker with thermal and sh

the remote control panel in the event of the circuit breaker being open.

The control arrangements are to be designed to prevent the starting of mthan 15kW simultaneously either manually or automatically.

All contacts and other parts, which may require periodic renewal, adjustment or inspection, shall be readily accessible.

All wiring for the contnecessary cable boxes and terminations and all wiring between the marshalling kiosk and the motors shall be included in the Contract.

11.5 VOLTAGE CONTROL

11.5.1 General

Where called for in the Schedule of Requirements, transformers shall be pr

ratio.

Winding taps as c



11.5.2 On-Load Tap Changers

wer flow in both ccordance with these standards will

ased on vacuum switching technology and shall be

hausen – Germany

rs or otherwise e head of oil is

independent of that on the transformer itself. The head of ain conservator

dicator and a

-load tap nt. Diverter

switch life span shall be for at least 1 million operations.

compartment ing contacts used for making and breaking current and their measured values shall be

late.

ision of alarm approval of the

30 V or three -change motor for

isolating the motor and the control gear from supply.

s been ys and ntingency would

, mechanical stops

tap change equipment these stops shall withstand the full torque of the driving mechanism t damage to the tap change equipment.

Thermal devices or other approved means shall be provided to protect the motor and control circuit.

A permanently legible lubrication chart shall be provided and fitted inside the tap change mechanism box.

11.5.2.1 General

On-load tap changers shall comply with EN 60214 and shall be suitable for podirections. Only designs that have been type tested in abe accepted. Tap changers shall be bmanufactured by any one of the following approved manufacturers:

(a) Maschinenfabrik Rein

(b) ABB Components - Sweden

Current making and breaking vacuum switches associated with the tap selectowhere combined with tap selectors shall be contained in a tank in which thmaintained by means, completelyoil in this tank shall be maintained either by a separate compartment of the mor by a separately mounted tank. An oil surge detector relay, an oil level indehydrating breather shall be provided.

The tap changer shall have a 300.000 operations maintenance interval. Contacts used for making and breaking current shall be capable of performing at least 600.000 onchange operations under maximum rated current conditions without replaceme

Transition resistors for on-load tap change equipment shall be mounted in thecontaininscribed on the rating p

Details of maintaining oil separation, oil levels, detection of oil surges and provor trip contacts will be dependent on the design of tap-changer and be to theEngineer.

11.5.2.2 Mechanisms

The tap change equipment shall be suitable for operation from a single phase 2phase 400V, 50Hz supply. Means shall be provided adjacent to the tap

The tap change mechanisms shall be designed such that when a tap change hainitiated, it will be completed independently of the operation of the control relaswitches. If a failure of the auxiliary supply during tap change or any other coresult in that movement not being completed an approved means shall be provided to safeguard the transformer and its auxiliary equipment.

Limit switches shall be provided to prevent over-running of the tap changing mechanism. These shall be directly connected in the operating motor circuit. In additionshall be fitted to prevent over-running of the mechanism under any conditions. For on-load

withou



Switches, contacts and the driving mechanism shall be mounted in suitable cplaced in accessible positions on the transformer. Any enclosed compartment shall be adequately ventilated and provided with low temperature heaters. All crelay coils

ompartments not oil-filled ontactors,

and other parts shall be suitably protected against corrosion or deterioration due to

for local manual and electrical operation shall be provided in an outdoor cubicle. le of

riving mechanism is ately 1,4m above ground level.

Storage for the handle shall be provided within the casing of the tap changer driving

trols:

perating gear is

e same time.

ion from the local or remote control switch shall cause one tap movement only operations.

roup to be more than one tap out of step with the other transformers in

ctrical control switches and local manual operating gear shall be clearly labelled to

Indications

d on each

the remote control point of the number of the tapping in use. This indication shall not be capable of being

e electrical indication, separate from that specified above, of tap position at the

indication to continue until the tap change is completed.

give indication at the remote control point and at the supervisory control point when the units of a group of transformers operating in parallel are operating at more than one tap apart.

(e) To indicate at the tap change mechanism the number of operations completed by the equipment.

condensation.

11.5.2.3 Local and Remote Control

Equipment Electrical remote control equipment shall be supplied if specified in the ScheduRequirements.

The mounting of driving mechanisms shall minimize projection from the transformer and shall be arranged such that the detachable manual operating handle in the dapproxim

mechanism.

The following operating conditions are to apply to the on-load tap selector con

(a) It must not be possible to operate the electrical drive when the manual oin use.

(b) It must not be possible for two electric control points to be in operation at th

(c) Operatunless the control switch is returned to the off position between successive

(d) It must not be possible for any transformers operating in parallel with one or more transformers in a gthe group.

(e) All eleindicate the direction of tap changing i.e. raise and lower tap number.

11.5.2.4

Apparatus of the latest technology and of an approved type shall be providetransformer:

(a) To give indication mechanically at the transformer and electrically at

reset.

(b) To givremote supervisory point.

(c) To give indication at the remote control point that a tap change is in progress, this

(d) To



(f) To indicate at the tap change mechanism the maximum and minimum position to which se indications to be resettable.

Automatic control, where specified, shall be suitable for the control of transformers in parallel,

ing methods shall

er of the

e possible using the minimum circulating current method or he Master/Follower method.

ing Copper based solid rod

e minimum gs shall be as specified in the Schedules.

.

mid conditions ent exposed to direct sunlight when

ls within the for voids and partial discharges during manufacture.

hing insulators showing the internal construction, method of securing

to a separate terminal for testing ping values of

Hollow porcelain shall meet the test requirements of BS 4963 (IEC 62155) and shall be , free from defects and thoroughly vitrified. Designs based on jointed porcelains will not

be acceptable. The glaze must not be depended upon for insulation.

The glaze shall be smooth, hard, of a uniform shade of brown and shall cover completely all exposed parts of the insulator. Outdoor insulators and fittings shall be unaffected by atmospheric conditions producing weathering, acids, alkalis, dust and rapid changes in temperature that may be experienced under working conditions.

the mechanism has moved. The

11.5.3 Automatic Voltage Control

up to three transformers in the future.

In addition to the methods of control covered in the Clause above, the followalso be provided.

(a) Automatic Independent: It shall be possible to select automatic independent control for each transformer irrespective of the method of control selected for any othassociated transformers.

(b) Automatic Parallel: It shall bwhere specified t

11.6 TERMINAL BUSHINGS

11.6.1 General

Unless otherwise stated in the Schedule of Requirements, transformers are to be provided with outdoor type bushing insulators for phase and neutral terminals.

The conductor used must be to the requirements of EN 60137 usor stranded draw-lead fitted to a suitable outer terminal.

All bushings shall be designed and tested in accordance with EN 60137 and thcreepage distance for outdoor bushin

Bushings for 66 kV and above shall be provided with adjustable arcing horns

Bushings shall be of sealed construction suitable for service under the very huat site and, in addition, to the very rapid cooling of equipmthis is followed by sudden heavy rainstorms.

The insulation should be free at all times of partial discharge at all voltage leveworking range and shall be tested

Typical sections of busthe top cap and methods of sealing shall be included in the Tender.

On all condenser bushings a tapping shall be brought out purposes on site. Space on the bushing nameplates shall be provided for staminitial field dissipation factor (tan δ) tests.

11.6.2 Porcelain

sound



The porcelain must not engage directly with hard metal and, where necesbe interposed between the porcelain and the fittings. All p

sary, gaskets shall orcelain clamping surfaces in

ust not enter e fracture by expansion in service. Cement

nting.

rs shall be designed to facilitate cleaning.

with the manufacturer's name or identification mark, accordance y of fittings and

tain identification mark has been rejected, no further ll be submitted and the Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer to mark or segregate the insulators constituting the rejected

ing re-submitted for

ings

external can be taken away clear of all obstacles. Neutral bushings shall be mounted in a

er mounted on a

the Schedule of

quired, will be provided under this Contract and the g the current

.

winding copper shall be oltage bushings and is to be continuous to the connector

er-oil end of a re-entrant type are used the associated flexible gas bubble deflector.

Clamps and fittings made of steel or malleable iron shall be galvanized and all bolt threads be greased before erection.

11.6.5 Identification and Arrangement of Terminals

The terminals of the transformer, 1U, 1V, 1W for the primary side and 2U, 2V, 2W for the secondary side, shall arranged from right to left as viewed from the low-voltage, with their inscriptions visible from the low-voltage side, Fig 11-1

contact with gaskets shall be accurately ground and free from glaze.

All fixing material used shall be of suitable quality and properly applied and minto chemical action with the metal parts or causthickness are to be as small and even as possible and proper care is to be taken to centre and locate the individual parts correctly during ceme

All porcelain insulato

11.6.3 Marking

Each porcelain insulator shall be marked year of manufacture serial number, electrical and mechanical characteristics inwith EN 60137. These marks shall be clearly legible and visible after assemblnot impressed but shall be imprinted before firing.

When a batch of insulators bearing a cerinsulators bearing this mark shathat adequate steps will be takenbatch in such a way that there can be no possibility of the insulators bethe test or supplied for the use of the Purchaser.

11.6.4 Mounting of Bush

Bushing insulators shall be mounted on the tank in a manner such that the connectionsposition from which a connection can be taken to a neutral current transformbracket secured to the transformer tank.

The clearance from phase to earth must not be less than those stated inRequirements.

The line current transformers, where rebushings are to be so arranged that these can be removed without disturbintransformers, secondary terminals and connections or pipe work

A flexible pull-through lead suitably sweated to the end of the provided for the 66 kV and higher vwhich is housed in the helmet of the bushings.

When bushings with an undpull-through lead is to be fitted with a suitably designed

The bushing flanges must not be of re-entrant shape, which may trap air.

The quality of flange surfaces shall be N7.

are to



Figure 11-1 Identification and arrangement of the terminals of a transformer

Cable Boxes and Sealing End Chambers

able boxes shall

The cable box and disconnecting or sealing end chamber shall be capable of withstanding for fifteen minutes both at the time of the first test on the cables and at any subsequent time as

to:

where, E = RMS nominal system voltage in kV between phases.

withdrawn arthed.

cubicle and ancillary equipment shall be installed, glanded

ent, to auxiliary

le Support Brackets

e transformers shall be supplied with er normal

ircuit.

TEMPERATURE AND ALARM DEVICES AND MARSHALLING CUBICLES

11.8.1 Temperature Indicating Devices and Alarms

The transformers shall be provided with two approved devices for indicating the hottest spot HV and LV temperatures. The devices shall have a dial type indicator, and in addition, a

11.7 CABLES AND TERMINATIONS

11.7.1

Where 132 kV, 66 kV, and 22 kV cables terminate on transformers, suitable cbe provided.

Means shall be provided for easy disconnection of the cables from the transformer bushings for testing purposes.

11.7.2 Testing

may be required, between phases and phases to earth, a test voltage equal

2E kV DC or an AC test equal to 1,3E kV,

During these tests, the links in the disconnecting or sealing end chamber will beand the transformer windings with connectors thereto will be e

11.7.3 Supply of Cables

Auxiliary power and multicore control cables between the integral parts of the transformer, its marshalling kiosk or tank mountedand have individual cores identified and terminated under this Contract.

Similarly, cables from each transformer to its associated protective equipmsupply switchboards and interconnections with other transformers will be supplied, glanded and have individual cores identified under this Contract.

11.7.4 Cab

Where 132kV, 66kV, and 22kV cable boxes are fitted thsuitable cable support brackets for supporting adequately the cables both undoperating conditions and under abnormal conditions such as during short c

11.8



pointer to register the highest temperature reached. Each winding temperatuhave three separate contacts fitted, one of which shall be used to control the motors, one to give an alarm and one to trip the associated circuit-breakers. Ttemperature indicators shall have a scale ranging from 30oC to 150oC preferab

re device shall cooling plant he dial of the ly uniformly

r remote indication.

vice shall ting device

d for thirty associated with a sensing bulb installed in an oil tight

termination and

icle. The tripping etween 80oC and

oC.

stable to close desired

nd must be accessible on the removal of the 50VA between

its of 110V and otor control contacts shall be suitable for operating the cooler contactors

d that it is possible to move the pointers by hand for the purpose of checking the operation of the contacts and

sion of cut-away dials shall be easily

accessible.

ards placed inside the

meter shall be provided in the

(c) Disconnecting the bulb heaters from the current transformer secondary circuit to enable the instrument to be used as an oil temperature indicator.

libration of the indicator shall be related to the winding having the maximum temperature rise. If the values on the winding temperature indicator vary by more than plus or minus 3oC from the values derived during the temperature rise tests specified in the Schedule of Particulars, adjustment shall be made to the equipment to achieve these limits.

divided. The temperature indicators shall be equipped with transmitter fo

To simulate indication of the hottest spot temperature of the windings the decomprise a current transformer associated with one phase only and a headesigned to operate continuously at 130 percent of transformer CMR current anminutes at 150% of CMR current, pocket in the transformer top oil. One CT shall be installed in the HV windingthe second in the LV winding termination.

The winding temperature indicators shall be housed in the marshalling cubcontacts of the winding temperature indicators shall be adjustable to close b150oC and to re-open when the temperature has fallen by not more than 10

The alarm contacts and the contacts used to control the cooling plant motors and initiate automatic start-up of the reserve cooler on the above devices shall be adjubetween 50oC and 100oC and to re-open when the temperature has fallen by aamount between 15oC and 30oC.

All contacts shall be adjustable to a scale acover. Alarm and trip circuit contacts shall be suitable for making or breaking 1the limits of 30V and 250V AC or DC and of making 500VA between the lim250V DC. Cooler mdirect, or if necessary, through an interposing relay.

The temperature indicators in the marshalling kiosk shall be so designe

associated equipment.

The working parts of the instrument shall be made visible by the proviand glass-fronted covers and all setting and error adjustment devices

Connections shall be brought from the device to terminal bomarshalling cubicle.

Isolating and test links and a 63 mm moving iron ammarshalling kiosk for each winding temperature indicator for:

(a) Checking the output of the current transformer.

(b) Testing the current transformer and thermal image characteristics.

The ca



11.8.2 Gas and Oil Actuated Relays

Each transformer shall be fitted with gas and oil-actuated relay equipment hacontacts, which close on

ving alarm collection of gas or low oil level, and tripping contacts which close

lume.

settings of the el of the relay.

meter of the rnal diameter of

pproximately hall have

the cooling ormal service

ether by emperatures.

ill pass into the

, nor is it to be teed into or connected through the pressure

ided with two gas and oil-actuated relays piped separately to ger.

nted in an approved heated and ventilated

accommodation of the following equipment.

links and

ting switch in the incoming circuit capable of carrying and breaking the full load current of the motor and of being locked in the open position.

(c) Control and protection equipment for the cooling plant including an isolating switch in the incoming circuit capable of carrying and breaking the full load current of all cooling plant motors and of being locked in the open position. The control facilities shall include a cooler selector switch, which can be padlocked in either position to select either cooler for remote control. Local control of the selected cooler shall be provided.

following oil surge conditions.

Each gas and oil-actuated relay shall be provided with a test cock to take a flexible pipe connection for checking the operation of the relay.

Each relay shall be fitted with a calibrated glass window for indication of gas vo

A machined surface shall be provided on the top of each relay to facilitate therelays and to check the mounting angle in the expansion pipe and the cross lev

A straight run of pipe shall be provided for a length of five times the internal diapipe on the tank side of the gas and oil actuated relay and three times the intethe pipe on the conservator side of the gas and oil-actuated relay.

To allow gas to be collected at ground level, a small bore pipe shall be connected to the gas release cock of the gas and oil-actuated relay and brought down to a point a1.400mm above ground level, where it shall be terminated by a cock which sprovision for locking to prevent unauthorized operation.

The design of the relay mounting arrangements, the associated pipework andplant shall be such that maloperation of the relays will not take place under nconditions, including starting or stopping of oil circulating pumps, if available, whmanual or automatic control under all operating t

The pipework shall be so arranged that all gas arising from the transformer wgas and oil-actuated relay. The oil circuit through the relay must not form a delivery path in parallel with any circulating oil piperelief vent. Sharp bends in the pipework shall be avoided.

The transformer shall be provthe conservators for the transformer main tank and for the tap chan

11.8.3 Marshalling Cubicles

The transformer ancillary apparatus shall be moucubicle, attached to the transformer.

The cubicle shall preferably be divided into four separate compartments for the

(a) Temperature indicators, cooler control "Auto-Hand" selector switch and testammeter for the winding temperature indicator circuits.

(b) Control and protection equipment for the tap change gear including an isola



(d) Terminal boards and gland plates including glands where specified for outgoing cables. Provision sha

incoming and ll also be made for termination of secondary wiring of

door.

ture indicators shall be so mounted that the dials are not more than 1700mm zed windows

perature indicators with capillary tubing and bulbs d sharp bends

f metal clad heater shall be provided

e of the kiosk

phase relays, contactors, isolating switches and thermal devices shall be marked ounted

red brown, black, grey from left to right when viewed from the front rey from top

• Weatherproof 15A 3-pin switched socket, Walsall type SP51/55 list No. 2193 for 240V AC g. The switched socket shall be connected to the cubicle heater supply

the remote control

r's works and ite. The

hich they t prove

Clear instructions shall be included in the Maintenance Instructions regarding any special precautionary measures (e.g., strutting of tap changer barriers or tank cover) which must be

efore the specified vacuum treatment can be carried out. Any special equipment necessary to enable the transformer to withstand the treatment shall be provided with each transformer. The maximum vacuum which the complete transformer, filled with oil, can safely withstand without any special precautionary measures being taken is also to be stated in the Maintenance Instructions.

current transformers where specified.

All doors shall be fastened by integral handles with provision for locking each

The Temperafrom ground level and the door(s) of the compartment shall be provided with glaof adequate size.

Facilities shall be provided to permit the temto be removed from the cubicle. Mechanical protection shall be provided anavoided where the capillary tubes enter the cubicle.

To prevent internal condensation an approved type ocontrolled by a switch and a 5A fuse inside the cubicle to be supplied from a separate substation "heating" supply circuit.

All internal wiring shall be so placed as not to obstruct access.

Labels in addition to those specified elsewhere shall be provided on the outsidto identify the compartments.

All three-with appropriate phase colour. Apparatus in which the phase elements are mhorizontally shall be colouof the panel, and when mounted vertically they shall be coloured brown, black, gand bottom.

The kiosk shall be fitted with the following interlocked switch sockets, mounted externally to provide auxiliary supply points:

complete with plucircuit through a 15 A fuse or MCB in the live lead.

All supply circuits in the marshalling cubicles shall be monitored to alarm topanel in case the supply to the circuit is OFF or tripped.

11.9 DRYING OUT

All transformers shall be dried out by an approved method at the manufactureso arranged that they might be put into service without further drying out on sContractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval details of the method wrecommend should be adopted for drying out the transformers on site should inecessary to do so.

taken b



11.10 OIL

The Contractor shall supply the first filling with transformer oil. The requirproduced from naphthenic base oil. It shall be inhibited mineral insulating oextremely good electrical and excellent ageing properties meeting the lates

ed oil shall be il with t EN 60296

special applications and with the minimum properties shown in table below. The quantity certificate.

iphenyls ) (EN 61619). A certificate stating the oil is free from PCB’s must be submitted with

r to release delivery from

The required properties of the Insulating Oil shall be as in the table below:

TY ING

VALUES

of 2,6-di-tert-butyl-p-cresol antioxidant additive shall be stated in the quality

The required Insulating Oil shall be completely free from Polychlorinated B(PCBsthe offer and shall accompany the shipping documents, in ordecustoms.

PROPER REQUIRED LIMIT

Appearance free from sediment and ded matter

Clear, suspen

Viscosity at 40 C (EN ISO 3104) Max 12mm2/s o

at -30oC Max mm2/S 1800

Pour point (EN ISO 3016) Max -40oC

Water content Max 30 mg/kg for bulk supply / 40 mg/kg livery in drums

(EN 60814) for de

Breakdown voltage kV

(EN 60156)

Min 30 kV / 70kV after treatment

Density at 20 C

(EN ISO 367

o

5 or EN ISO 12185)

x 0,895 g/ml Ma

Dielectric dissipation factor, at 90oC Max 0,003

Acidity (EN 62021) Max 0,01 mg. KOH/g

Corrosive Sulphur (ASMT 1275B, DIN 51353, and IEC 62535)

Not corrosive

Anti-oxidant additive 0,35 – 0,40%

Furfural content (EN 61198) Max 0,1 mg/kg



Oxidation stability, (EN 61125 – method )

tion:500h

l acidity

0oC

0,1 mg KOH/g

C

Test Dura

Tota

Sludge

DDF at 9

Max

Max 0,03 Wt%

Max 0,030

Flash Point Min 135oC

PCB Content (IEC 61619) Non Detectable

Where the transport weight of transformers does not exceed 50.000 kg these can be tion.

es.

e shipped without oil with the tanks filled with nitrogen under pressure of about 30,4kPa. The Tenderers shall submit with their offer details on

val by the Engineer. The Tenderers

e delivered full with oil.

eral

il immersed nected star

the tank

g point for the neutral of the system.

ary winding 0V, three-

rating stated in

and Short Circuit Characteristics

to continuous eriod of three

seconds the application of normal three-phase line voltage to the line terminals of the interconnected star winding with one line terminal and the neutral terminal connected

to earth. The zero phase sequence impedance and resistance of the interconnected star winding under these conditions shall be as stated in the Schedule of Particulars and Guarantees.

Additionally, the earthing and auxiliary transformers shall, when operating continuously at any load up to CMR, be capable of withstanding for three seconds the current obtained

shipped partly oil filled with sufficient oil to cover the windings and the insula

The oil shall be under controlled nitrogen pressure of about 0,3 atmospher

Alternatively the transformers can b

how they propose to ship the transformers for appromust also supply full details on filling up the transformers with oil after delivery. Earthing transformers shall b

11.11 EARTHING AND AUXILIARY TRANSFORMERS

11.11.1 Gen

The earthing transformers shall comply with EN 60289 and shall be of the oONAN type suitable for outdoor installation and are to have a main interconwinding which will be directly connected to the lower voltage terminals of the associated system transformer.

The neutral point of the interconnected star winding shall be brought out ofthrough a bushing insulator. This point may be isolated or connected to earth directly or through an impedance in order to provide an earthin

The earthing transformers shall also be provided with a delta connected tertiand also with a star connected auxiliary winding arranged to give a 400/23phase, four-wire supply. The auxiliary winding shall have the continuousthe Schedule of Requirements and shall conform to EN 60076.

11.11.2 Electrical

The earthing transformers shall, when operating continuously at any load upmaximum rating of the auxiliary winding be capable of withstanding for a p

solidly



when a short circuit is applied between any or all of the lower voltage terminals with full

is the sum of

aximum esigned to carry

ting an earth fault current not less than the full load ain transformer to which it is connected or otherwise the

ansformers shall be provided with the following fittings:

cover and prismatic oil gauge

sor controlled ously measured

by the sensor and if a preset value is exceeded a self-regulating heating element inside be activated. It shall be equipped with a self monitoring with remote

conditions at site, this breather shall be larger than would be fitted for use in a temperate climate. It shall be mounted at a height of

400 mm above ground level.

ted neutral link and gland entry for a CEANDER type XLPE cable or other equivalent. This shall be

e 400V system

located earthing terminal to which the system earth can be connected.

Three spare fuses shall be supplied with each transformer.

11.11.5 Tappings

Tappings shall be provided on the low voltage winding to give the no-load voltage variation specification in Schedule of Requirements.

line voltage maintained at the higher voltage terminals.

The foregoing conditions shall assume an initial winding temperature whichthe maximum ambient temperature stated in the relevant Schedule and the temperature rise obtained by continuous operation at CMR.

The interconnected star winding of the earthing transformers when at its mtemperature due to continuous full load on the auxiliary winding shall be dfor thirty seconds without injuries healower voltage current of the mcurrent stated in Schedule of Requirements.

11.11.3 Tanks and Fittings

The earthing tr

(a) Conservator vessel with removable end

(b) Buchholz relay

(c) One thermometer pocket with captive screw cap

(d) A maintenance free silica gel breather. This shall be equipped with a senheating system. The humidity of the air in the pipe line shall be continu

the silica gel shalloutput control system. Due to the climatic

approximately 1

(e) Pressure relief device

(f) Filter valve and combined filter and drain valves

(g) Oil sampling device

(h) Rating plate

11.11.4 Auxiliary Winding

The three-phase, four-wire auxiliary windings shall be terminated at a three-pole combined fuse switch unit to EN 60947-3 with bol185mm2 3 1/2 - coreaccommodated in a lockable, fully weatherproof compartment together with a neutral earthing link. The purpose of the neutral earthing link is to connect thneutral to earth. It shall be connected between the transformer winding end and a suitably



11.11.6 Tap Changing

Tap changing shall be carried out with the transformer off-circuit by moperated self-positioning tapping switch. All phases of the tapping switchoperated by one handwheel, which shall be positively located and lockabtapping switch position. Indication

eans of an externally shall be le at each

plates shall be fitted to show clearly the tap position ich the transformer is operating. Switch position number one shall the maximum plus tapping.

11.11.7 Oil

The specification of oil shall be as per paragraph 11.10 above.

number at whcorrespond to



12. STATION DC EQUIPMENT

ELLS

nding resistance l/cadmium type

al resistance) and shall be designed for a life expectancy of at least 25 years tailed in this

generally with EN 60623, any variations being

The Charge/Discharge characteristic of the battery shall be submitted with the tender and evel, shall be

ch that the battery can recover to between 75% to 100% capacity within 24 dition, with minimum electrolyte loss.

tain ampere-

shall be of The cells shall

a life expectancy of 25 years under the conditions of service to be cified plant. They shall be suitable for use in remote locations or ll be minimal and shall be suitable for tropical climate.

shall be such that inspection

give ease of maintenance and provide mechanical

ct, durable e containers shall

ed under heavy conditions and high gas pressure in case of blocked vent plugs.

12.1.5 Positive Pocket Plates

The positive pocket plates shall be designed for optimum performance and shall utilize high quality nickel-plated perforated steel, which shall form pockets containing the active material. The individual pockets shall form a homogenous plate enclosed in an outer frame for robustness. Latest means of providing an excellent electrical conductivity shall be adopted.

12.1 BATTERY C

12.1.1 General

The Battery shall be of long service life, high reliability and have an outstato electrical abuse. The battery cells shall be of the high performance nicke(low internunder the conditions of service likely to be encountered by the equipment deSpecification.

The nickel/cadmium batteries shall complysubject to the approval of the Engineer/client.

12.1.2 Battery Voltage Characteristic

an optimal float charge voltage per cell, which is just below the gassing ldeducted suhours from a fully discharged con

The final volts/cell for boost charging shall be as high as possible to mainhour efficiency.

12.1.3 Battery Construction

The cells of alkaline batteries shall be of long service life high reliability androbust construction and resistant to both mechanical and electrical abuse. be designed for encountered by the spewhere maintenance sha

The electrolyte capacity and general design of the batteriesand maintenance, including topping up of the electrolyte, shall be at intervals of not less than twelve months.

12.1.4 Cell Boxes

Cell boxes shall be designed tostrength and stability of the material used throughout the extended life.

Cell boxes shall be manufactured from translucent or transparent high impaplastic polymers, making the product well suited to the environment. Thnot deform or buckle under high room temperature, abnormal heat generatcharging



Sufficient space shall be provided beneath the plates to accommodate any dmay accumulate at the bottom of the cell witho

eposit, which ut short-circuiting the plates. The life of the

ulation of deposit.

lates shall be similar to that of the positive pocket nsity and cadmium-plated.

nal posts in such a way as to provide a low resistance path for

ion whilst tion. Separators shall be suitable for continuous immersion

ut distortion.

all last at

nd the terminal

hall be manufactured of high conductivity materials to keep the the cells to a minimum. The size and number of these connectors

"Bolted-on"

sign of the vent plug shall be such that it can effectively prevent the electrolyte from ding sufficient

The vent shall also

al filling and electrolyte and extraction of the fluid using a syphon hydrometer for test

purposes.

The plugholes shall be so designed such as to minimize spraying of the electrolyte when lls are accidentally rocked or moved from places with the plugs withdrawn.

During transit blank plugs shall be fitted to prevent the formation of carbonate in the residual electrolyte that might be available and also to prevent the collection of dust and foreign particles.

cell shall not be limited by the accum

12.1.6 Negative Pocket Plates

The design of the negative pocket pplates above with high perforation de

12.1.7 Plate Inter-Connections

All the positive and negative plates shall be welded together in their respective groups and brought out to the termioptimum cell electrical performance.

12.1.8 Separators

Separators shall be provided between plates to prevent metallic conductpermitting electrolyte conducin the electrolyte witho

The inter-plate separators shall ensure minimum electrical resistance and shleast as long as the life of the cell.

12.1.9 Terminals

The terminals shall be of a high conductivity and corrosion free materials apillars shall match the size and discharge currents of the cell.

12.1.10 Inter-Cell Connectors

Inter-cell connectors svoltage drop between shall be capable of carrying the full discharge current.

The connectors shall be of rigid construction and shall be interchangeable.type of connector is preferred.

12.1.11 Vent Plugs

The despraying when the cells are under boost charge and at the same time proviventilation for the gas to escape under the worst charging condition.be designed such that it can effectively act as a flame retardant.

The size of the plug holes shall be large enough to permit convenient normtopping of the

the ce



12.1.12 Polarity Identification

The positive (+) identification terminal shall be indicated on a red disk on thepillar and/or lid next to the

appropriate pillar. Similarly for the negative (-) identification terminal which

isk.

l be marked on both sides of the cell.

us lines on both sides els shall be clearly drawn or formed as part of the container and r and lower permissible levels of the electrolyte under normal

ectively.

s

ed block form.

12.1.16 Battery Fuse Box

d with a suitable size set of fuses, mounted in a wall removable using suitable fuse handle.

ES

bust d a total

of 90 cm. Stands shall be treated with two coats of acid adily accessible

ping up of electrolyte.

sulators and shall be so dimensioned such eparate stand

6L of 2.0mm

onnectors and f the battery cells and termination

chargers. All connectors and cable lugs shall be rated according to the current discharge rating of the batteries.

Accessories

Each battery installation shall be provided with a durable instruction card placed inside a strong wooden or suitably treated steel box with a full set of test accessories, installation tools, etc., which shall include the following minimum requirements:

(a) 3-0-3 volts Voltmeter for cell testing,

shall be marked on a blue d

12.1.13 Type Reference

The cell type reference shal

12.1.14 Electrolyte Level

The upper and lower electrolyte level markings shall form continuoof the containers. The levthey shall denote the uppeoperations and appropriately marked as "UPPER" and "LOWER" resp

12.1.15 Battery Crate

For convenience of handling, the plastic cells may be supplied in tap

Each battery shall be provideenclosure. The fuses shall be

12.2 BATTERY MOUNTING, CONNECTIONS, AND ACCESSORI

12.2.1 Battery Mounting

Batteries shall be mounted on anti-seismic single tier multistep racks of roconstruction and shall be arranged in single parallel rows that shall not exceeheight of one meter and a depth resisting enamel of approved colour and arranged such that each cell is refor inspection, test and maintenance including top

The stands shall be mounted on porcelain inthat the bottom of the lower step is not less than 30 mm above the floor. A sshall be supplied for each battery bank.

Each battery stand shall be installed on a stainless steel tray, type AISI- 31thickness that will collect the electrolyte in case of spillage.

12.2.2 Connectors and Termination Lugs

Apart from the requirements of inter-cell connectors previously described, ctermination lugs shall be supplied complete for tapping oof multicore cables to the battery

12.2.3



(b) Small syphon hydrometer,

ometer,

onnector,

number each separate cell in numerical order. These shall be supplied loose and affixed at site once the cells are connected together.

r the battery installation as follows:

(concentrated): 10%

ators: 5%

ter-cell connectors: 2%

d for greasing of terminals and connectors for

spares and as such are to be considered as part and parcel of the main battery equipment. Correspondingly, these are

s.

g and Site Assembly

ing, steel general

cification and giving full access to all components and cable rom the 110 V

ined C converter cubicle. As detailed in the drawing the battery

chargers shall be physically situated in the substation battery room, the 110 V DC distribution board with the DC to DC converters and the 110 V DC to 230 V AC inverter

Where ventilation openings are provided, these shall be fitted with drip-proof louvers and fine mesh wire or perforated screens to exclude small insects and vermin. Cubicle design shall be equal to IP31 or better.

(c) Large syphon hydr

(d) Cell bridging c

(e) Level testing tube,

(f) Topping up bottle/equipment as appropriate to the type of installation.

Labels shall be provided to

12.2.4 Battery Spares

Spares shall be provided fo

• Electrolyte

• Stand and cell insul

• Battery cell: 4

• In

• Mineral jelly: 1 standard tin

The mineral jelly shall be specially selecteall cells.

The above spares are deemed to be consumable

not shown separately on the Schedule of Spare

12.2.5 Shippin

The batteries shall be shipped dry to be assembled on site.

12.3 DC CONTROL & CHARGING EQUIPMENT

12.3.1 General

The DC charging equipment shall be contained in a ventilated, floor standcubicle, having a hinged front door with locking facilities, complying with therequirements of this Speconnections. The Charger cubicle shall be mounted in a separate cubicle fDC distribution panel and the 110/48 V DC converters that shall form a combDistribution Board/DC to D

shall be situated in the relay room and the 48 V DC distribution board shall be situated in the telecommunication room.



Status indication shall be provided locally by means of LEDs mountecharger cubicle and in addition relays shall be provid

d on the front of the ed, having a minimum of two

ed.

g in the event of continuous overload or short circuit and ent to correct for

be suitable for

r components shall be of modular construction with chassis onic control

wed for dismantling

the whole DC system is shown in Figure 12-1. The DC system 400 V AC / 110 V DC Chargers, one 110 V DC Distribution

110 V DC to 230 V AC inverter

ing applications:

arging for Nickel/Cadmium Alkaline batteries as specified elsewhere in provide high security DC supply.

rt durations with

shall maintain the battery installation normally in the float/trickle ds and the

of the fluctuations in the voltage and frequency of the AC supply within the specified limits.

12.3.4 Regulation

Each charger shall be designed with a performance on float charge such that, with the output voltage set at approximately 1,45 volts per cell, the output voltage shall not vary by more than ±1% with any combination of input supply voltage and frequency variations as

ted under this Specification and output current variation from 0-100%.

normally open contacts, for the transmission of remote alarms.

Chargers shall be designed to operate from a three-phase 400 V AC supply, except when the input rating is low enough for a single-phase 230 V AC supply to be us

Chargers shall be self-protectinshall have current limiting facilities. They shall be suitable for re-adjustmthe aging of rectifiers and other parts.

The charger shall be of constant voltage, current limiting type that shall unattended charging of station batteries.

The design of the Chargemounting such as to facilitate fault locating and testing of individual electrunit/card. Easy access from the front or top of the cubicle shall be alloeach component/unit package.

The block schematic of mainly incorporates twoBoard, a battery set, two 110/48 V DC to DC converters, a and a 48 V DC Distribution Board.

12.3.2 Application

Generally the chargers shall be suitable for the follow

(a) Unattended chthis specification to

(b) Simultaneous supply of load current and re-charge current.

(c) Switch duties such as tripping and closing of circuit breakers for shohigh peak current.

12.3.3 Operation

The automatic charger charge mode, such that no discharge occurs with the normal standing loabattery remains fully charged.

Battery Chargers shall maintain the float charge automatically irrespective

stipula



Figure 12-1 Typical Diagram of DC System in Transmission/Distribution Substations



12.3.5 Output Voltage

The output voltage regulator shall be adjustable within reasonable limits and shall be so

Under all circumstances the following minimum range of charger output voltage allowed:

5%

it to which the

ved overvoltage detection relay shall be provided on each charger to give local when the charger voltage rises by more than 5 volts above its

rger shall be capable of bringing a completely discharged battery to a fully

shall be capable ad still

re that the above er should fail.

t charger shall be equal to the normal battery standing load plus the hing charger rate for the battery which shall not be less than

be capable of delivering the following minimum continuous output

All charger components shall be rated at a minimum of 125% of the nominal full load for uous operation.

12.3.8 Boost Charging

A boost charger shall be provided to quickly recharge the battery after a heavy discharge. The voltage/current characteristics of the boost charger shall be such as to minimize gassing during the finishing period of a conditioning charge. The maximum voltage of the

designed such that the setting cannot be inadvertently disturbed.

adjustments shall be

• Float: 100% to 12

• Boost: 110% to 145%

The float voltage level shall be set at or as near as possible to the upper limload can accept with the battery charged at just below gassing level.

An approindication and remote alarmnormal automatic float voltage. This alarm shall be disconnected whenever boost charge is selected.

12.3.6 Charger Rating

The selected rating of the battery charger shall be such that the following duties can be met:

(a) The chacharged state in 10 hours with the normal load disconnected.

(b) Following a 4-hour discharge into the normal load circuit, the charger of restoring the battery to a fully charged condition in 8 hours with the loconnected.

(c) Where dual batteries are specified, provision must be made to ensuconditions (a) and (b) can be met for both batteries even if one charg

The rating of the floarecommended finisnumerically equal to 10% of the battery capacity at the 10 hour rate.

The chargers shall currents:

• 300Ah system – 90A



12.3.7 Power Rating



boost charger when delivering the recommended finishing charge shall be not more than

acity is available, a charging rate of the Nominal-

with the load disconnected or with a dropping diode cuit, to prevent applying overvoltage to the load.

cted manually, when on float.

ter a mains vel has

hed a preset time period of 0 to 24 hours, the charging time

current limit to constant voltage mode in g 1,65V battery voltage.

ommissioning

n and as such, a nently

connection

eel case.

Unless otherwise approved all rectifiers and semi-conducting devices employed in the ard to the air ture. The

ed to detect low ng method and

rth fault detection circuit shall consist in principle of a resistance connected across the battery output on the distribution side of the fuses with a relay connected between the centre point of this resistance and the earth terminal. Any unbalanced leakage current due to the low insulation resistance of the wiring connected to either pole of the battery shall cause a current to flow in the relay, which will operate at the predetermined value. The relay shall discriminate between positive and negative earth faults and test circuits shall be incorporated to simulate positive or negative earth faults by operation of push buttons.

1,8 volts per cell for a nickel/cadmium battery.

Regardless of how much charging capAmpere-Hour/5 will not normally be exceeded.

Boost charging must be affordedassembly inserted in the load cir

12.3.9 Fast Charge Facility

Beside the above 2-level float and boost charge modes which can be selethe Charger design shall incorporate automatic fast/quick charge mode The fast charge mode shall be triggered through a voltage-sensing device affailure over a preset period of between 0 to 10 hours. After the voltage lerecovered to a preset value and/or reaccharger will automatically return to the float/trickle charge mode. During thisthe rectifier should change automatically fromorder to avoid exceedin

A third level charging mode for manual boost charging and for testing and cpurposes shall be provided for in the above situation.

12.3.10 Control Unit

Control circuit failures in S.C.R. type of battery charger is rather commospare control card, together with one main circuit S.C.R. shall be permaaccommodated in each charger and labelled accordingly.

12.3.11 Transformers

Each charger shall be completed with a transformer of suitable rating anddesign for the specified auxiliary supply voltage.

It shall be of indoor, natural air-cooled type, enclosed in a ventilated sheet-st

12.3.12 Rectifiers

charger shall be of the silicon type. They shall be adequately rated with regtemperature within the charger enclosure for the maximum ambient temperaoutput from the rectifier shall be controlled in response to originals from the control circuits and appropriately smoothed.

12.3.13 Battery Earthing and Earth Fault Indication

110 V (nominal) batteries shall operate unearthed. Means shall be providinsulation resistance of all the wiring connected to the battery by the followito give an earth fault alarm.

The ea



12.3.14 Charge Fail Indication

An approved charge fail relay shall be provided for each charger to detect faDC output of the low-rate charger and also fall of battery voltage below the This relay shall not operate on transient loss of charger input voltage due

ilure of the low-rate value.

to faults on the power system or due to normal surges. The alarm shall not be initiated when any one

its shall be provided on both float and boost operations hout damage to

l components or blowing of fuses.

stant voltage characteristic shall be allowed at the end of an

on

ted:

fuse in the transformer secondary and DC output for protection of thyristor

fuse

all be provided with the following instrumentation, indication and control facilities:

een)

)

(white or red)

st (orange or red)

12.3.17.2 Voltmeter

• Charger output DC voltage

• Charger input AC voltage

12.3.17.3 Ammeter

• Charger output DC current

charger is switched off.

12.3.15 Overload Protection

Independent current limiting circufor overload protection, which extends down to continuous short circuit, witinterna

Automatic recovery to a conoverload.

12.3.16 Fault Protecti

The following fault protections are normally employed and shall be incorpora

(a) Thermal input circuit breakers

(b) High speedstack and reverse battery connection

(c) RC suppression network for protection of thyristor stack

(d) Voltmeter

12.3.17 Instruments, Indications, and Controls

Each charger sh

12.3.17.1 LED

• Mains ON (gr

• Charger fail (red

• Charger on Float

• Charger on Boo

• Battery earth fault

• Battery low-voltage

• Battery over-voltage



12.3.17.4 Selector Switch

t selection

ut

all be equipped with either an off-load isolator or

rm Facilities

alarms shall be provided for remote indication:

•

common alarm to sum up all the alarms shall be provided for

ate for aging

rovided, to limit the voltage at the outgoing terminals of the distribution rating of the

te counter or back-off diodes, shall function particularly during boost charging. Means shall be

battery and duplicate battery

tput lead of by auxiliary

Where necessary, a DC output suppressor shall be fitted to provide an alternative energy r inductive DC current and thus preventing it from damaging the thyristor stack.

12.3.20 Wiring of Charger Unit

All wiring internal to the charger i.e. between the various relays, controller, etc., should be numbered (ferruled) so as to facilitate circuit tracing in the occurrence of a circuit failure. A schedule of the wiring so numbered shall be provided for each charger equipment.

• Float/Boos

12.3.17.5 MCB

• Mains ON/OFF inp

12.3.17.6 Push Button

• Lamp test

In addition, each charger shdisconnecting links for the DC output.

12.3.18 Ala

The following

• Mains failure

• Charger fail

Battery earth fault

• Battery under-voltage

• Battery over-voltage

In addition to the above, asupervisory connection to the grid control centre.

All alarm relays shall be supplied complete with the charger.

12.3.19 Other Facilities

Particulars shall be given on the method of adjustment included to compensof rectifier elements.

Means shall be pboard to a value not greater than the lowest continuous maximum voltagerelays, instruments etc., connected to it. The scheme, which may incorporacells provided for an automatic selection of silicon diodes positioned between thethe loads to drop the excess voltage. This requirement does not apply toand charger system.

For the dual charger schemes, blocking diodes shall be connected in the outhe charger to allow independent sensing and ensure minimum battery draincircuits.

path fo



12.3.21 Wiring Diagrams

Each charger unit shall be provided with a set of schematic drawings of the cinstalled in the unit. Block diagrams as well as complete internal circuit diagrconnections shall be included together with a booklet with circuit description and operation

omponents ams and

plete with systems block diagram shall be placed in a slot ubicle door.

Wiring Termination

tion and terminal block requirements shall be in accordance with the

with the specification shall be supplied to denote and signify all

12.3.24 Spares

nd parcel of the charger system:

LEDs: 20%

l be mounted in a stand alone cubicle together with the 110V DC to 230V AC inverter as specified in detail in

the

istribution panels shall be mounted in the telecommunications room.

Construction

le free-standing tructed of sheet steel or cold rolled steel not less

rably of folded construction. Doors should be 2mm

wing minimum incoming and outgoing circuits:

• 1 Incoming double pole MCB - At least 63A

• 5 Outgoing 2P type C MCBs – 6A each



• 2 Outgoing double pole MCBs – At least 32A

alarms, relays etc., with fault diagnostic procedures.

A durable instruction card comon the inside of the Charger's c

12.3.22

The wiring terminaspecification.

12.3.23 Labels

Labels complying instruments, controls and indications. Labels shall also be fixed on the charger's main components for identification of the functions/controls.

The following spares are considered part a

• Neon bulbs and

12.4 DC DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS

12.4.1 General

110 V DC distribution panels shaltwo DC to DC converters and the the Schedules and indicated in the drawing and shall generally comply withrequirements of cubicle type control panels of this specification.

48 V DC d

12.4.2 Cubicle

The DC Boards, either 110V DC or 48V DC, shall be enclosed in a suitabsteel cubicle. The cubicle shall be consthan 1,5mm thick and shall be prefethick or more.

12.4.3 Ratings

The 110 V DC Board shall have the follo



Adequate space to accommodate at least 20 outgoing MCBs.

The 48 V DC board shall have the following minimum incoming and outgoing circuits:

t least 32A

ccommodate at least five (5) 6A outgoing MCBs shall be provided.

usbars

ing circuits

tem through

shall be paralleled to the busbars with the switches interlocked to the float/boost switch.

colour markings to indicate the positive and negative polarities similar .

12.4.5 Converters

ribution cubicle.

urrent rating. A 8V DC

nverter output shall be isolated using a double pole switch.

m, the charger

usbar cannot be switched to boost charge.

n float charge. (Or arge, then the

charge.

the Specification

switch is specified in the Schedules an assembly similar to the fuse-switch shall be supplied, but the fuses shall be replaced by bolted copper links.

The equipment shall be capable of carrying, making and breaking the maximum possible fault current and details of the make-up of this shall be provided. Curves of battery current plotted against time under short-circuit conditions shall be supplied.

• 1 Incoming double pole MCB – A


Adequate space to a

12.4.4 B

The busbars shall be rated not less than the load requirements of the outgospecified above.

The busbars shall be connected directly to the 110V battery and charger sysdouble pole switches. Where duplicate battery and charger systems are specified they

Busbars shall haveto battery markings

12.4.5.1 General

The 110V DC to 48V DC converters shall be mounted in the DC dist

12.4.5.2 Ratings

The output of the DC/DC converter shall be 48V±5% with 20A continuous cminimum of 80% power efficiency conversion shall be considered. Each 4co

12.4.6 Interlocks

As stated in the above paragraphs for duplicate battery and charger systeincoming switches shall be interlocked to the charger float/boost selection switch such that,

(a) A charger being connected to the b

(b) A charger can only be connected to the busbar when selected oalternatively, if the charger is connected to the load while on boost chcharger will automatically return to float charge).

(c) Both chargers can be operated in parallel on float

12.4.7 Fuses, Links, and Switchgear

The switchgear shall be in accordance with relevant clauses of incorporating fuse-switch units of quick-break type, which shall be suitable for carrying continuously the rated current and of making or breaking this current. Where a link-



Outgoing distribution cables shall be connected directly to the relevant fuse and/or link, or

at only the lower circuit.

shall be incorporated in the incoming DC supply from the charger nnections.

connection is through the high-resistance battery earth fault relay. This has the ing one polarity only, all the battery circuits will

.9 Cable Glands and Terminations

all be done using multicore cables connected at the terminal blocks to in the cubicle

s

le termination terminals shall be additionally identified.

Drawings and Instruction Manuals

Drawings of all wiring, schematic and layout diagrams shall be submitted for approval within the time-period as stated in the specification. Instruction manuals for the Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of the batteries, chargers and distribution boards shall be in accordance with the general requirements of the instruction manuals in this specification.

circuit-breaker.

Ratings appropriate to the wiring cross-section shall be used such thrated fuse will blow in the event of two earth faults occurring on the same

Double pole isolatorsand for the battery co

12.4.8 Earthing

The battery system specified here shall be of the floating type whereby the only earth

advantage in that for an earth fault affectstill remain operative.

12.4

Outgoing wiring shthe circuit switches. Cable gland plate for bottom entry shall be provided forlayout.

12.4.10 Label

Each circuit shall be suitably labelled at the front of the panel and at the cabwhere the

12.4.11 Spares

The spares listed below shall be considered as part and parcel of the contract for the DC Switchboard:

• Fuses for each rating: 20%

12.4.12



13. POWER AND MULTICORE/MULTIPAIR CABLES UP TO 132kV

all power and control cabling including orts, junction

The 300mm 132kV and the 22kV power cables required for the completion of works at ing these

responsible for laying, terminating, glanding, earthing, supporting, is contract.

ct and shall be to l of the Engineer.

ired, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the competence of the allation and

n the following

er conductors.

opper conductors.

m2 copper conductor for connecting the power transformer to the 22 kV switchboard.

sulation and 300mm2 aluminium

uctors and XLPE insulated, armoured, with PVC or PE oversheath

hone type cables for telemetry, control and measurement signals.

ation of Conductor Size and Rating

eters on which to base his cable designs.

All cable sizes quoted in this tender are indicative only and no claim will be considered in ction with these.

13.1.4 Drawings

The Contractor will be required to prepare schematic drawings as called for in this Specification, which are to be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

13.1 GENERAL

13.1.1 Scope

The Contract includes the supply and installation ofterminations and other cabling materials such as racks, cleats, trays, suppboxes etc. required for the satisfactory operation of the plant.

2

the substation will be provided by the purchaser. All accessories for terminatpower cables will be supplied by the Contractor.

The Contractor shall becleating, sealing, protecting, testing and commissioning of all cables under thAll ducts, cable racking and supports are to be supplied under the Contrathe approva

The Contractor shall, if requelectricians and jointers he proposes to use or to employ on the cable instjointing works.

13.1.2 Types of Cable

The required cables shall be of the following types as specified in detail isub-sections, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Engineer.

• 132kV cables with extruded solid dielectric XLPE insulation and copp

• 66kV cables with extruded solid dielectric XLPE insulation and c

• 22kV cables with extruded solid dielectric XLPE insulation and 630m

• 22kV cables with extruded solid dielectric XLPE inconductor for connecting the power transformer to the earthing transformer.

• Power and multicore cables (1000V grade) with stranded copper cond

• Multipair telep

13.1.3 Determin

The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the design param

conne



Drawings showing the general arrangement of the cable runs shall be prContractor and the Contractor shall be responsible for preparing detailed cabdrawings and details of the supports before the commencement of the wordrawings shall also include all cables supplied by others as well a

ovided by the le layout

ks. The cabling s the requirements for

ngs.

inal record drawings of all cable works as laid to the

ules

ctured and

ontrol cables ntities and

materials he may require to complete the work.

e point of origin and termination of all cables shall be prepared and k

for operation on systems where continuity of supply is the first heric and , voltage and

factorily passed cal

s offered shall

actor is to certify that the cables and/or accessories offered will be identical in pect of design, materials and workmanship with the cables

and shall of the types

required by

All materials shall be of the best quality and of the class most suitable for working under the conditions specified. They must be capable of withstanding the normal variations of temperature and service conditions without disturbances or deterioration or the setting up

ue stresses in any part and without impairing the strength and stability of the various parts for the work, which they have to perform. The repair of defective parts during manufacture will, normally, not be permitted but, in the exceptional circumstances where this rule is waived, the repair shall not be put in effect without the written permission of the Engineer.

equipping in future all substation circuits, which are indicated in the drawi

The Contractor shall also provide fapproval of the Engineer.

13.1.5 Quantities and Sched

It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that quantities manufashipped are adequate to complete the work.

All multicore type control cables, auxiliary power cables and telephone type cshall be supplied by the Contractor who shall determine the cable types, quainstallation

Schedules indicating thsubmitted by the Contractor to the Engineer for approval before erection worcommences.

13.1.6 Reliability

All cables shall be designedconsideration. They shall also be satisfactory in operation under the atmospclimatic conditions prevailing at the site and under such variations of currentfrequency as may be met under fault and surge conditions on the system.

13.1.7 Type Approval

Cables and accessories for use at 22kV, 66kV and 132kV shall have satistype approval tests equal to those required by the International ElectrotechniCommission or equivalent British Standard and details for the cable designbe given in the appropriate place in the schedules hereto.

The Contrall essential particulars in resand/or accessories for which type approval certificates are offered in support of his tender. The Contractor shall also ensure that all materials used will be subjected tohave satisfactorily withstood such tests as are customary in the manufactureof cable specified. Records of such tests shall be available for inspection, ifthe Engineer.

13.1.8 Quality of Materials

of und



13.1.9 Design Particulars

Cables shall comply with the design details entered in the Schedule of PaGuarantees hereto and, except where otherwise specified, their individualshall meet the requirements of the current International Standards / Recommendations

rticulars and components

e.

re applicable, cables shall be supplied in maximum drum lengths bearing in mind the ccess to the site. No drum shall contain more than one

thed cable the sheath.

ach drum of multicore cables shall be marked red and green in accordance with BS 6346 or

rotected against

re impregnated d insect attack or made of steel suitably protected against corrosion.

ng closely-fitting

, finish, eights, shall be clearly shown on one flange of

All cables and accessories shall be carefully packed for transport and storage on Site in articular

ite by sea or

suitably constructed to avoid problems due to shrinkage, rot and

ates, cases, etc., for maintenance spares shall be non-returnable. Cable maintenance lengths and spare lengths shall be wound onto steel drums before they are handed over to the Purchaser's stores. Particulars of the cable (as stated above) shall be clearly marked.

13.1.12 Spare Cable

Spare cable and accessories as detailed in the schedules are required to be included in the Contract.

where these are applicabl

13.1.10 Cable Lengths

Whetransport limitations in gaining alength.

13.1.11 Sealing and Drumming

Immediately after the Works Tests both ends of every length of metal-sheashall be sealed by means of a metal cap fitted over the end and plumbed toOther cables shall be sealed by enclosing the ends in approved caps, which shall be tight fitting and adequately secured to prevent ingress of moisture. The ends of elengthBS 5467.

The cable end which is left projecting from the drum shall be adequately pdamage.

Cable drums shall be non-returnable and shall be made of timber, pressuagainst fungal anThey shall be arranged to take a round spindle and be lagged with strobattens in accordance with EN 1559.

Each drum shall bear a distinguishing number, either printed or neatly chiselled on the outside of one flange.

Particulars of the cable, i.e. voltage, length, conductor size, number of coressection and length number, gross and net wthe drum. The method of drum making shall be to the Engineer's approval.

such a manner that they are fully protected against all climatic conditions, pattention being paid to the possibility of deterioration during transport to the Soverland and to the conditions prevailing on the Site.

Wooden drums shall beattack by insects.

Drums, cr



13.1.13 Jointing Accessories

y testing for voids, urement.

ping means, designed, manufactured and site constructed to assure that retraction of the cable

nnecting

in the cable system the

ely suitable to operate the Cable iodically

he cable sheath

ing the types xes shall be

rp points or ridges

e laid direct in the ground and they shall be protected by an outer box all be

he serial

ted cables into nts of EN e armouring

secure the

e inner extruded tion rating of

erably project 10 mm above the gland plate to avoid entry of between the cable outer sheath and gland

all be fitted

all be capable of clamping the cable armour so that the clamp withstands any short circuit current from the armour wires, through the gland body to the integral bonding connector.

Cable Sealing Ends and Terminal Boxes

Terminations shall be constructed as outdoor, indoor SF6 or transformer sealing-end and shall be dry. Outdoor sealing ends shall be prefabricated and indoor SF6 and transformer sealing ends pluggable prefabricated.

13.1.13.1 Cable Joints

Joints shall be of the premoulding or prefabricating or cold shrink, or slip-on technology and shall be as compact as possible.

Moulded components shall be tested during manufacture including, X-raelectrical testing at 1,5 times working stress and partial discharge meas

Cable conductors shall be connected by well established and tested crim

insulation is unable to occur or is not critical to the accessory design. The coferrule shall be of the open barrel type.

All jointing accessories are to have been specifically designed to work in which they form apart. In particular, the Contractor's attention is drawn torequirement that all jointing accessories shall be entirsheath sections as a fully insulated sheath system with the provision for pertesting the integrity of the sheath by the application of 10 kV D.C. across tand the outer graphite or semiconductive surface of the sheath.

Before manufacture commences the Contractor shall submit drawings showof joint boxes proposed for the cable included in the Contract. The joint boconstructed of approved materials and shall be watertight, free from shaand thoroughly clean internally.

Joint boxes shall bof approved design and filled with compound. Each joint and its outer box shpermanently labelled in an approved manner and the marking shall include tnumber of the joint and the phase colour.

13.1.13.2 Glanding

Mechanical glands for the termination of elastomeric or thermoplastic insulastraight-through joints and termination accessories shall meet the requireme50262 and BS 6121 and shall be correctly designed for the termination of thproviding cable retention of class “B”. The gland shall not only adequatelyarmour to provide efficient electrical continuity and protective bonding to Earth of Category ‘C’ but shall also provide a watertight seal between the oversheath and thor taped bedding to prevent the ingress of moisture giving an ingress protecIP 66. The glands shall prefmoisture and be provided with watertight sealsand between the inner sheath and threaded fixing component. All glands shwith a substantial earth bond terminal.

The armour-clamping device sh

13.1.13.3



The terminations shall have built in stress cone designs and be designed tominor

accommodate cable movement, radial and longitudinal, without significant change in the dielectric

-ray testing for rement.

and glands

ilitate outer

boxes terminating

point ble higher cable ratings. The necessary

sealing ends and

onditions, rise when

aning.

d, no further all satisfy the

lators which have t there shall be no possibility of such insulators being re-

shall be and not impressed. The marks shall be imprinted before firing and shall be

the maximum cable sealing end.

ording to EN

The Contractor shall provide satisfactory evidence, or carry out a programme of Type Tests, to demonstrate that the complete sealing end assembly is gas and oil-tight under all conditions of maximum operating and transient pressures and pressures attained

testing of connected equipment.

At SF6 switchgear terminations the cable supporting steel work may be required to be totally self-supportive and designed to avoid imposing excessive thrust forces under any service condition on the switchgear circuit.

stresses.

Moulded components shall be tested during manufacturing, including Xvoids, electrical testing at 1,5 working stress and partial discharge measu

Detailed drawings showing the types of cable sealing ends, terminal boxes proposed for the installation shall be submitted at the time of Tendering.

All sealing ends and terminal boxes shall be fitted with insulated glands to facsheath testing after installation.

Disconnecting links shall be provided on all sealing ends terminations of metallic sheathed cables and combined armour and earthing clamps shall be fitted to all armoured cables where specified.

The design of the sealing and terminations shall be suitable for use as singlebonding system, if required, in order to enaovervoltage suppression fittings shall be included in the supply.

The external dimensions, fixing details and terminal arrangements for allterminal boxes shall be agreed with the Purchaser.

Outdoor terminations shall have an adequate silicon rubber post insulator housing.

The insulators and fittings shall be unaffected by atmospheric and climatic cozone, acids or alkalis, dust deposits or rapid temperature changes likely to aoperating in the Site conditions and shall be designed so as to facilitate cle

When an insulator bearing a certain identification mark has been rejecteinsulators bearing this mark shall be submitted and the Contractor shEngineer that adequate steps will be taken to mark or segregate the insubeen rejected in such a way thasubmitted subsequently for test or being supplied.

Each insulator shall have marked on it the manufacturer's name or trademark and the year of manufacture. Marks shall be visible after assembly of fittings andimprintedclearly legible after firing and glazing.

The Contractor shall state in the Schedule of Particulars and Guarantees working loads for each design of

Indoor SF6 terminations shall be designed, manufactured and tested acc62271-209.

during



Cable supporting steelwork at SF6 switchgear may also be required to be clad in a 's requirements.

ed against heath voltage

limiters spaced 180 degrees around the sealing end, each connection shall not exceed

materials are aling ends and

hall be submitted in English to the Engineer for approval, ysical and electrical characteristics of the filling medium

em

tems and the ck the integrity

rrounding structural nd the supporting

d and SF6 type sealing ends shall be n insulated barrier. A disconnecting

ase of each sealing end to enable the post ircuited when required for testing purposes.

PE INSULATED POWER CABLES

d Dimensions

anded (Class 2)

2

nternational Standard Conductivity of 100%.

ong the tween the

r. A radial water barrier alone over the conductor construction is

lightweight metallic material suitably finished or painted to the Engineer

At Gas Insulated Switchgear, the sectionalising insulation shall be protectvoltage flashover during switching operations by short circuiting links or s

500mm in length.

13.1.14 Jointing Instructions

As soon as possible after the commencement of the Contract and beforedespatched, copies of the jointing instructions applicable to the joints, seterminations to be supplied stogether with details of the phproposed.

13.1.15 Insulated Syst

The 132 kV, 66kV and 22 kV cable installations shall be insulated sheath sysaccessory designs shall include provision for periodic HV DC testing to cheof the cable anti-corrosion sheath.

All outdoor type cable sealing end bases shall be insulated from the susteelwork by means of post insulators interposed between the bases astructure. Cable glands of oil-immersed air insulateinsulated from the transformer/switchgear body by alink device shall be provided at the binsulators/insulated barrier to be open c

13.2 132/66kV XL

Some cable design details are given below:

13.2.1 Construction an

13.2.1.1 Conductors

The conductors shall be manufactured from annealed copper, circular strcomplying with BS 6360 or EN60228 in the following sizes:

- 300mm2, 630mm2 and 800mm

Copper shall have an I

Provision should be made to prevent the longitudinal penetration of water alconductor. This is to be achieved by the application of a moisture barrier bestrands of the conductonot considered an acceptable solution.

.2 Screens and insulation

13.2.1.2.1 Application

Semi-conducting screens and insulation shall be applied simultaneously, as a continuous single pass extrusion free from factory repairs, by means of a triple extrusion method, using a triple extruder head.

13.2.1



13.2.1.2.2 Conductor screen

A conductor screen consisting of an extruded layer of semi-conducting compshall be cross-linked during manufacture of the cable, shall be applied o The extruded layer shall be continuous and shall cover the surface of the conductor

ound, which ver the conductor.

dance with

thickness of the t any point.

all be of the ther and processed under such conditions of cleanliness as to

the required physical and electrical characteristics, suitable

i-conducting compound. It shall be in accordance with clause 5.3 of IEC60502.

a of the tion due to the

eath to avoid ping to be at ducting

een.

s shall be of perature likely

hall adhere properly to the armour and sheath, so that ere e coverings.

n the sheath,

The Tenderer shall offer cables having lead alloy metal sheaths, or copper wire screen as ed by the schedules of requirements.

The cross-section of the metal sheath shall be adequate to carry the earth fault current specified. The minimum thickness of the metal sheath shall not fall below the declared nominal thickness by more than 0.1 mm + 5% of the specified nominal thickness for lead alloy. The sheath thickness shall be sufficient to ensure adequate mechanical strength.

completely.

13.2.1.2.3 Insulation

The insulation shall be of extruded cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) in accorclause 4 of IEC60502 and shall be applied using a dry cure, dry cooling process designed, as far as possible, to eliminate microvoids in the dielectric. The insulation shall not fall below the nominal value by more than 10 per cent a

The materials used in the manufacture of compounds for XLPE insulation shhighest purity, mixed togeensure a stable product withfor prolonged use without deterioration in service under the environmental and operational conditions prevailing at the site.

13.2.1.2.4 Insulation screen

The insulation screen shall consist of an extruded layer of cross-linked sem

The screen shall be bonded. It shall be continuous and cover the whole areinsulation and shall have no tendency in service to separate from the insulaeffects of bending, load cycling and short circuit.

13.2.1.2.5 Moisture Barrier and Sealing Compounds

A layer of semiconducting swelling tape shall be applied under the metal shthe propagation of moisture in case of damage to the outer sheath. Overlapleast 50%. In the case of copper wire screen cables two layers of semi conswelling tape shall be applied, one under and one over the copper wire scr

All compounds used in protective bedding, servings and over metal sheathsuch a nature that in the finished cable they do not crack or run at any temto be attained in transit to the Site or on the Site, before or after laying or when the cables are in operation. The compound safter the coverings are removed it shall be evident that the metal surfaces wcompletely covered by closely adherent compound before the removal of thCare shall be taken to ensure that the amount of compound applied is retained evenly around the cable. The compounds used shall have no deleterious effect oarmour or protective coverings.

13.2.2 Metal Sheath (screen)

indicat



The screen area, the number and nominal diameter of the wires of the coppeshall be based on providing the specified earth fault capability.

r wire screen The wires shall be spaced

rength and also hall meet the

mit with his tender calculations to show nt and shall

conductive swellable tape and bonded

s of 4 mm and be of

overing shall of the

or any other ent corrosion of the lead sheath. The outer

r of the lead sheath. or run in the ring installation

sustained load. The compound shall have no

chaser, empt repair. ble length

o form an electrode for the HV DC sheath

the surface of

layer extruded simultaneously with the under laying non- the form of graphite colloid applied on the under laying non-onductive layers obtained by mere superficial deposition of

V 300mm2 cable shall include an extruded PE sheath with a flame-retardant outer layer.

13.2.4 Cable markings

13.2.4.1 Marking of oversheath

ternal surface of all cables in this specification shall be legibly marked with the following elements of marking.

with an average gap not greater than 4mm and no gap shall exceed 8mm.

The sheath thickness shall be sufficient to ensure adequate mechanical stto meet the specified earth fault duty. Similarly the copper wire screen sspecified earth fault duty. The Tenderer shall subthat the design offered is entirely suitable to carry the specified fault currestate the referred Standard for the basis of his calculation.

In the case of copper wire screened cable aluminium or copper foil of 0,2mm thickness shall be applied on top of the second layer of semito the oversheath lower surface to prevent the radial ingress of moisture.

13.2.3 Anti-corrosion Outer Protective Covering

The outer covering (oversheath) shall have a minimum radial thicknesblack extruded high density polyethylene type ST7 in accordance with clause 4.3 and 10.11 of IEC60840 (clause 8 of EN60811-1-3). The thickness of the outer cnot fall below the nominal thickness at any point by more than 0,1mm + 15%specified nominal thickness

Lead sheaths shall be coated with a thin layer of bitumastic compoundsuitable anti-corrosion layer or coating to prevcovering shall be in intimate contact with and closely follow the contou The sealing compound shall be of a quality and type which will not crack finished cable at any temperature likely to be attained in transit to Site, duor when in operation at the maximumdeleterious effect on the lead sheath or outer covering.

If there is any damage to the outer covering which in the opinion of the Purappears to be repairable, the supplier may, after receiving agreement to attThis repair, however, shall not bind the Purchaser to accept the repaired cawhen it is re-offered for inspection and test.

The outer covering shall have a coating tintegrity tests to be applied at the factory and for periodic HV DC tests after installation. The coating shall withstand the rigours of installation and shall adhere tothe sheath when the cable is operating at maximum conductor temperature. The coating shall be either a conductive conductive layer or shall be inconductive layer in hot jets. Cconductive powder (graphite) are not acceptable.

The outer sheath of 132k



Element English Greek

1. Electric cable C ELECTRLE

ΩΔΙΟ ΑΗΚ

EA IC ΗΛΕΚΤΡΙΚΟCAB ΚΑΛ

2 tion 00 V or 66000 32000 V or 66000V . Voltage designa 1320 V 1

3 15-001 15-001 . Specification number

4 tion . Manufacturer’s identifica

5 s, type and area of conductor.

0 Cu (RL x630 Cu (RL)* . The number of corenominal

1x63 )* 1

6. EAC Contract No./year of XXXX-YYYY XXXX-YYYY manufacture

* 1x630 Cu (RL) indicates a single core cable with 630 mm2 Copper conductors with

enting be by

nd (3) shall appear, in any sequence that is deemed to neither confuse roximately

surface of the cable. Elements (4), (5) and (6) shall appear on

and need not

e end of the one element of marking and the beginning of the ments (1), (2)

rking shall be and English.

visual examination and measurement.

Metre marking in any legible colour in steps of 1m length of cable (starting from free end at one metre intervals) shall be provided throughout the length of the cable. The start and

lues shall be marked on the drum label.

13.2.5 Sealing and drumming

The manufacturer shall cap the ends of all cables for dispatch to form a seal to prevent the ingress of water during transportation and storage.

Radial and Longitudinal moisture barrier.

The marking of elements (a) to (d) shall be by embossing or indenting on the oversheath in both Greek and English.

The marking of element (e) and (f) may as an alternative to embossing or indprinting on the oversheath.

Elements (1), (2) anor conflict, on two or more primary lines along the axis of the cable, appequally spaced around the at least one line, which can be one of the primary lines, or a secondary line or lines. They can appear in any sequence that is deemed to neither confuse nor conflict,all be on the same line.

The letters and figures shall consist of upright block characters. The characters shall have a minimum height of 3 mm.

The distance between thnext identical element of marking shall not be greater than 500 mm, for eleand (3), and not greater than 1000 mm for elements (4), (5) and (6). The main an alternating order between Greek

Compliance shall be checked by

13.2.4.2 Metre marking

end va



Cable drums shall be lagged in order to protect the cable from damage, and the end of the

mber, pressure cted against

le and the el section. Drums shall be lagged with

cable drums

reed after Contract award.

information given in the form of stencil marks the following information on a metal plate securely fixed on the side of the drums:

origin.

.

r

Year of manufacture.

Weight of emp

Each loaded drum shall bear an arrow indicating the correct direction of rotation of the drum for pulling out the cable.

All drums are to bear the following shipping Mark:


RXXXX

cable projecting from the drum shall also be protected from damage.

Cable drums shall be non-returnable and shall be made either of steel or tiimpregnated against fungal and insect attack or made of steel suitably protecorrosion. Timbered drums shall be arranged to take a round steel spindperimeters shall be reinforced by adequate flat stestrong closely-fitting battens around the perimeter. For long term storage, required for Purchaser’s stock shall be made of steel only.

Drum dimensions and length of cable on each drum to be ag

In addition to any other should appear

Maker and Country of

EAC Contract No

Drum Number/Lot Numbe

Voltage (132,000 V or 66,000V)

Size of cable

Length in metres

Gross weight in kg.

Net weight in kg.

ty drum in kg (excluding battens)

132 kV UNDERGROUND XLPE CABLES

EAC CONTRACT NO. ……./YEA

LIMASSOL (OR LARNACA) CYPRUS

Each item is to be packed properly or protected for shipment and transport frommanufacture to site.

the point of

Each drum is to contain a packing list in a waterproof envelope. All items of material are to rly marked for easy identification against the packing list.

Standardised delivery lengths are required and these shall be finalised at Contract award. For tender purposes and unless otherwise shown on the construction drawings, these can be taken as 500mm-700m approximately.

Drum dimensions and construction details shall be submitted by the successful Tenderer, for approval by EAC, after Tender award.

be clea



13.3 22 kV XLPE INSULATED POWER CABLES

The 22 kV cables required to connect the power transformers with the earthitransformers and the 22 kV incoming

ng circuit breakers are to be supplied by the Purchaser.

are given below:

d multicore power 22.

extrusion of insulation and screens, and outer protective with the paragraphs above.

2 over an extruded

cturer followed by 22.000 VOLTS”. The size of cable, year of manufacture, and type of

1.000 V

d copper conductors and shall be XLPE insulated, rsheath. The cables shall meet the requirements of the

n of the y offers an equivalent or higher quality. When such other standard is offered a

ether with a copy of an approved English translation of the itted with the offer.

e cables shall be 600/1.000V as defined in BS 5467 and

m cross-sectional area of 1,5 mm2. Conductors less than 16 mm2 cross section shall be made of

13.4.4 Insulation

The insulation shall be cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) type GP8 according to BS 5467 and BS 7655: section 1.3. The insulation shall be applied by an extrusion process and shall form

Some basic design details

13.3.1 Cable Design

The project includes cross-linked polyethylene insulated single core ancables, which shall be generally manufactured to EN 60502 and BS 66

Conductor stranding, triple covering is to be in accordance

13.3.2 Inner Covering

The inner covering shall be extruded.

13.3.3 Metallic Layer/Screen

A metallic layer of copper wires of 95 mm cross section shall be appliedbedding.

13.3.4 Voltage Identification

The outer covering shall be embossed with the name of the manufa“ELECTRIC CABLEinsulation shall also be included.

13.4 AUXILIARY POWER AND MULTICORE CABLES UPTO

13.4.1 General

The cables shall have strandearmoured, with PVC or PE ovestandards specified hereafter or of such other standard, which in the opinioAuthoritcopy of the standard togStandard should be subm

13.4.2 Voltage Designation

The designated rated voltages of thIEC 60502.

13.4.3 Conductors

Conductors shall be of plain stranded copper wires and shall have a minimu

seven strands. Copper conductors shall meet the requirements of EN 60228 or BS 6360. Single strand conductor is not permitted.



a compact and homogeneous body. The insulation shall meet the compatibility test vant standard.

d BS 5467. d they shall be printed in black on white core insulation at intervals

, throughout the length of the core. The print shall be permanent and edding

l compatible with the g temperature of the cable and generally shall be in accordance to BS5467. Suitable

shall be included in-between the insulation and bedding for facilitating aration of the upper layer without causing any damage to the core

e wire armour consisting of a single layer of galvanized steel wires ements of BS 5467 of that size and number appropriate to the in order to provide screening factor corresponding to the level of

ircuits which shall

d to the recommendation of the BS5467 and effectively to the requirements for type 9 specified in BS

shall contain 1,5% non toxic “Termite Repellent” or other method of ated in the relevant schedules.

the cable type

stranded numbers of cores: 4, les having more than seven cores, the direction of lay

Where fillers are necessary to make a circular compact XLPE insulated cable, they shall be of PE. Textile and other hygroscopic materials are not permitted.

13.4.11 Voltage Identification

The PVC outer sheath of control cables shall be embossed with the legend "ELECTRIC CONTROL CABLE". The letters shall be raised and consist of upright block characters in accordance with the requirements of BS5467.

requirements specified in the rele

13.4.5 Identification of Cores

The cores of the cables shall be identified in accordance with clause 3.29.1 anWhen numerals are usenot greater than 70mmnot easily removed. B

13.4.6 Bedding

The bedding of the cables shall be an extruded layer of synthetic materiaoperatinintermediate powderthe removal and sepinsulation.

13.4.7 Armour

The cables shall havcomplying with the requirthickness of the insulationthe disturbing electromagnetic field intensity from the adjacent power cbe considered as 15 kV.

13.4.8 Oversheath

The oversheath of the cables shall be an extruded layer of black PVC compoun

7655. The outer sheathprotection against termites which must be st

The external surface of the sheath shall be embossed with a legend specifyingas described in the relevant standards BS5467.

13.4.9 Laying up

Cores shall be laid up in accordance with BS5467.

Multicore control cables shall contain one of the following7, 12, 19, and 27. For control cabshall alternate for each successive layer.

13.4.10 Fillers



13.4.12 Cable Lengths

Cables shall be supplied in maximum drum length. No drum shall contain more than one

ccessfully been

eptional

All cables entering or leaving terminal boxes shall be provided with separate terminations mber of such cables can be removed or replaced without

disturbing the remainder.

transmission of analogue measured ntrol and

ments of BS 5308 Part 1.

5308. The rdance with an

,8 mm diameter

of approved s identifying a

shall be twisted which shall be laid up in

Binding tapes constructed from suitable materials shall be applied with open spiral or e a compact

emoval of the inner sheath of the insulated

Where required and specified the cables shall be collectively or individually foiled with drain wire and/or braid screened in order to ensure protection from interference.

Where armoured cables are specified they shall be in accordance to BS 5308 and to the requirements of the relevant clause above (13.4).

The oversheath of the cable shall be in accordance to BS 5308 and to the requirements of the relevant clause above (13.4).

length of cable.

13.4.13 Jointing

Cables shall be terminated and jointed with accessories, which have sutype tested.

Straight through jointing of cable lengths is not normally permitted but in exccircumstances may be allowed subject to the Engineer's approval.

so that any cable out of a nu

13.5 MULTIPAIR CABLES

Multipair cables are intended to be used for thequantities such as current, power, and/or audio frequencies and also coindication signals of rated voltage 110Vdc.

The cables shall meet the require

The conductors shall be tinned copper stranded and shall comply with BSsolderability of the tinned copper conductors shall be demonstrated in accoapproved specification (EN 60068). The size of the conductor shall be of 0(0,9 mm diameter would be accepted).

The insulation of the cores shall be PE (Polyethylene- preferable) or XLPEthickness and self-coloured for identification purpose - two different colourpair in accordance with a specified colour scheme. The insulated corestogether to form pairs except in the case of the two pair cable,quad formation.

overlap as required between layers and over the laid up structure to providuniform formation. A rip cord to facilitate rcables shall be included during the application of the overall binding tape.



13.6 INSTALLATION OF CABLES AND ACCESSORIES WITHIN THE N BUILDING

All cables shall be installed either on trays or racking, in ducts, cleated to steelwork or laid

by adequate and tools. The

y the Engineer

it the removal of any one cable without undue disturbance to ts shall be allowed in any cables unless approved by the

The layout of all cables shall be arranged to have adequate clearance from other services. ise the risk of les when

tion which the Contractor considers necessary to t cables shall be

s of cleats or and orderly

r as possible. at the runs do

dii shall be observed.

s, etc to support for bonding,

tions. Rawl bolts or asonry. The

sed for fixing such supports shall be to the approval of the Engineer.

al of any . Where

cables required for future extensions will be run in the same runs as cables being supplied tc for

cables plus 20% spare space without undue overcrowding or

Every cable shall be securely supported at a point not more than 1 m from its termination, here vertical runs pass through the floors, immediately above the floor. The type of

installation used for the support system shall be to an approved method.

"Racks" may be defined as steel members of various forms specially constructed for one or more of the following purposes:

(a) Carrying cables, cable ladders, or trays, which are otherwise unsupported.

SUBSTATIO

13.6.1 General

in concrete trenches.

The installation and handling of the cables shall be undertaken at all timesstaff suitably trained and supplied with all the necessary plant, equipment arrangement of the cables and all methods of laying shall be approved band shall be planned to provide an orderly formation, free from unnecessary bends and crossing, which will permadjacent cables. No joinEngineer.

13.6.2 Segregation

Cables shall generally be routed to avoid hot or fire risk areas, and to minimdamage from any source. Control cables shall be separated from power cabinstalled in air.

Any screening and cable segregaprevent spurious signals being induced into the cables from other adjacenincluded and stated in the relevant cable schedules.

13.6.3 Racks, Cleats and Trays

All cables routed in concrete trenches shall be suitably supported by meanracks. No cable shall be laid on the trench floor. They shall be run in a neatmanner and the crossing of cables within the trench shall be avoided as faWhere cable runs unavoidably cross a suitable ramp shall be provided so thnot touch. The manufacturer's recommended minimum bending ra

The Contractor shall supply all necessary steelwork, cleats, racks, fixingand secure the cables adequately, together with any special fittings required earthing or protection against mechanical damage in vulnerable posiequivalent shall be used for fixing of supports and associated steelwork to mmethod u

Supports, racks, etc shall be arranged, as far as possible, for the easy removsingle cable in multi cable run without undue disturbance of adjacent cables

under this Contract, provision shall be made in the design of the supports, eaccommodating these futurecongestion.

and, w



(b) Supporting cleats.

ed by the Engineer).

or ladder rack supported on

lly tested with ave cable

les to be mounting from

r space of ff access of cable.

le depth with a held with cable

ts.

opper links across each joint and shall be bonded to the main earthing bar to a number of positions.

of mild steel, and may be either purpose made from standard ll sections shall

rts and

nd shall be

to be erected

racks supporting s of ladders

bmitted for approval before manufacture and

rs or trays shall be

mps for control cable in horizontal and vertical runs shall be to the manufacturer's recommendation but shall not exceed the following:

• 600mm for cables up to 40mm overall diameter

• 1000mm for cables between 40mm and 60mm overall diameter

• 2000mm for cables exceeding 60mm overall diameter on horizontal runs and

• 1200mm on vertical runs

Racks may be mounted:

(a) Directly upon structural steelwork or masonry (NOTE: Drilling or welding of structural steelwork may only be carried out when approv

(b) On the floor in the form of single or double sided stands.

Cable trays shall be manufactured from 18 SWG minimum perforated steeltype subsequently galvanised in accordance with EN 729 and shall be steelwork or directly on the masonry as required. The cable tray must be fua uniform distributed load safety factor of 2,5. The cable trays rack shall hretaining edges or pegs and be of a width suitable for the number of cabsupported and shall be supplied with purpose made brackets suitable for the building structure. Where required extended brackets shall provide a rea150mm between the ladder rack and building structure for on and o

Cable trays shall be of adequate width for deploying the cables in a singwidth allowance of 33% for future expansion. Cables up to 35mm2 shall bestraps at intervals of 1m. Larger cables shall be held with suitable cable clea

All cable trays shall be electrically continuous by means of 20mm x 3mm c

Racks shall be constructedsections or a preformed package system of metal frame construction. Ahave sufficient mechanical strength so that distortion is prevented.

Rawl bolts or drilled-in inserts shall normally be used for the fixing of suppoassociate steelwork to masonry.

All ladders and trays shall be securely fastened to supporting steelwork, aadequately supported to prevent sagging.

The spacing of racks or ladders for cable runs shall suit the type of cables but the horizontal distance between centres of racks supporting wire armoured cables shall not exceed 500 mm and the horizontal distance between centres of unarmoured cables shall not exceed 300mm. The distance between centresupporting any type of cable in a vertical run shall not exceed 750mm.

Cable support and rack designs shall be suerection commences.

Cables shall be cleated on vertical runs. Cables on horizontal laddelaid in parallel runs and secured in position by means of plastic ties. The distance between supporting cla



Cables run on trays shall be neatly dressed and where not provided with cleasecured by heavy gauge, type approved metal reinforced, clips or saddlessix cables shall be embraced by one and not more than two layers of

ts shall be . Not more than

cables run on one tallation.

oth finish split rs. For single

other tough groups shall

eer. Wooden

ables axially and laterally during heat cycling and under short

trays, cable ladders, racks and steelwork, etc., shall be galvanised or method approved by the Engineer. The protective finish shall be

tective finish

amped with the cable number, feeder name, size of cable, require. The e of material

echanical damage.

ens and armour, c., to the main

formed cable f clamps or

ter than 1m.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the efficient bonding and earthing to the main

All completed records shall be the property of the Employer. They shall be completed the progress prints following upon the completion of

d, shall be

13.7 EXCAVATION OF TRENCHES AND ANCILLARY EARTHWORKS IN TRANSMISSION SUBSTATIONS

13.7.1 General Requirements

Excavation/Reinstatement works shall be undertaken only by contractors/subcontractors registered with the Council of Registration of Civil Contractors of Building & Civil Works and holding a valid annual licence under the required classification (Civil Works).

tray. Care shall be exercised to ensure a "Reduced Fire Propagation" ins

Single core and multicore cables shall be clamped to the racks with smopacking pieces or cleats with bores or the correct size for the cable diametecables, claw type cleats shall be of silicon aluminium, glass filled nylon or non-hygroscopic material. Single core cables erected in close trefoil 3 phasebe held in position with non-magnetic clamps to the approval of the Engincleats are prohibited. Cleats used to clamp single core power cables shall be of adequate strength to restrain the ccircuit conditions.

13.6.4 Galvanising

All metal cableotherwise protected by a to an approved specification. No welding shall be carried out after the prohas been applied.

13.6.5 Identification

All cables shall be identified below the gland at each end and at approved positions by means of bands engraved or stnumber of cores, phase colour, etc., or such lettering as the Engineer may bands shall be securely fastened in a permanent manner, and shall be madable to resist corrosion, damp and m

13.6.6 Earthing and Bonding

The Contractor shall connect, unless otherwise instructed, all cable scresupporting steelwork and the metal enclosure of sealing boxes, joints etearth bar by suitable branch connections.

The earth strip or insulated cable and connections thereto shall be laid intrenches or ducts, and/or fixed to walls, concrete or steelwork, by means oclaw type cleats, as appropriate. The spacing of fixings shall not be grea

earth system of all cable screens and armour where provided.

within one month of the approval ofeach section of the Contract Works. Progress prints, in duplicate if requiresubmitted to the Engineer at intervals not exceeding three months.



The Tenderer shall submit at tender stage a list of equipment and resourassigned to the project. The Tenderer shall also submit

ces that will be a reference list outlining past

s adjacent to the route.

n drawings. d to mark this route on site and no excavation is permitted unless

route and approves it. The final route of the trench is

he Engineer

is depth may be ed or decreased in selected parts of the route or locally to avoid other services or

ase or decrease of ll stick to the

consent of the

location of each trench shall be approved by the Engineer on Site and no on the ach trench

rmation and dimensions and shall have vertical sides

mooth contour. The Contractor shall take rom a slip or

the bottom of ll, if not indicated on the

width, lines, grades and depths

m any source

Any over-excavation shall be backfilled with suitable fill material and completed in accordance with the specification. Where directed by the Engineer such over excavations

e backfilled with mass concrete at the Contractors expense.

The Contractor shall carry out at his own expense soil thermal resistivity tests for the sand intended to be used in the sand cement bound mixture and the mixture itself under dry and wet conditions, sufficiently in advance before commencement of the works, to verify the required thermal properties of the mixture.

experience of Civil Contractors/Subcontractors in similar contracts.

Every effort shall be made to maintain traffic flow and access to persons and vehicles to property and place

13.7.2 Route

Generally the route of the trench is that shown on the attached constructioThe Contractor is obligethe Engineer inspects the markedthat decided by the engineer.

13.7.3 Excavation of Trenches

At least seven days notice of intention to start excavation shall be given to ttogether with the agreed programme for excavation on the complete route.

The depth of excavation is that shown on the construction drawings but thincreasother reason as may be deemed necessary by the Engineer. This increexcavation depth does not vary the contract value. The Contractor shaapproved route and by no means is allowed to depart without the written Engineer.

The exactclaims are allowed by the Contractor for any deviation from the route shownconstruction drawings. Trenches shall be kept as straight as possible and eshall be excavated to approved fowhich shall be timbered or otherwise secured where necessary so as to avoid subsidence and damage.

The bottom of each trench shall be firm and of sreasonable precautions to prevent damage to the road or ground surface fbreaking away of the sides of the trench.

Where trenches pass from positions where a change of level is necessary,the trench shall rise or fall gradually. The rate of rise or faconstruction drawings shall be approved by the Engineer.

All trenches shall be excavated with vertical sides to theas shown on the drawings or as specified in writing by the Engineer.

All excavations shall be adequately supported and kept free from water froat the Contractor’s expense and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

shall b



When excavations for trenches have been accurately executed, the connotice to the Engineer. Laying of cables or ducts or building of structure shal

tractor shall give l not be

eed with the work.

The Engineer f the Works where the Contractor fails to take

ll not claim for

k as specified tract, or at off-

the requirements of e, but not by power and

Contract.

n. In particular, ny existing

eted roads and/or

measures to ted trench. The Contractor

hered to.

for obtaining information he considers necessary regarding llow for it in his

any source

e placed so as to prevent nuisance or damage to adjacent ditches, drains, fences, gateways and other property or things. If, owing to traffic or for reasons of safety or other considerations, or deemed necessary by the Engineer, the excavated material cannot be stacked on site, it shall be removed from

e to an approved tip and returned for refilling the trench (if proved to be suitable according other clauses of this specification) on completion of laying at the cost of the contractor. The cost of any additional security measures needed to be taken by the Contractor in such cases is deemed to be included in the Contract price. Surplus material shall be disposed off by and at the cost of the Contractor.

started until the Contractor has obtained the Engineer’s sanction to proc

The Contractor is responsible for the protection of existing services and supplies from damage at no extra cost.

The Contractor shall not work in any area where services are still covered. shall have the right to stop the work or part othe necessary measures to uncover these services and the Contractor shaadditional compensation in time or additional money.

The Contractor shall perform all hand excavation, protection and other worherein or as required to locate existing services within the limits of this Consite locations as designated by the Engineer and in accordance withall Contract Documents. The existing services referred to herein shall includway of limitation, all sewers, water mains and lines, gas mains, electric (bothlighting), telephone and such others as may be encountered under this

The Contractor shall take all necessary precautionary and protective measure required to maintain existing services and appurtenances that must be kept in operatiothe Contractor shall take adequate measures to prevent undermining of aservices and appurtenances that must be kept in operation

In the cases where the excavation is to be made on asphalted or concrpavements, the asphalt or concrete surfacing shall be cut using suitable disk cutter at a depth of not less than 120mm. The Contractor shall take all necessary minimise damage of the asphalt beyond the width of the excavawill be charged with the extra costs where reinstatement’s in excess of the approved excavation width.

This method of cutting of road surfacing is essential and shall be strictly ad

The use of air compressor and associated cutting tools will not be allowed.

There shall not be any soil classification for excavating either in soft or in hard material. The contractor is responsiblethe possibility of encountering soil with varying degree of hardness, and atender.

All excavations shall be adequately supported and kept free from water fromat the Contractor’s expense and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

13.7.3.1 Excavated Material

The materials excavated from each trench shall b

the sit



13.7.3.2 Horizontal drilling

Horizontal drilling shall be used instead of excavation where specified in the drawings or

of the Works maintain a right of e and safe

r pedestrians when the Works disrupts the existing ones. The footways shall be adequately maintained with at

estrian

fety of Employer’s effect it is of and all

t night.

affic where this e signing to

o longer needed,

rogress of the the Works in

other necessary precautions for the protection of the Works and the safety of the employees and Employer’s personnel.

tends to nt details and

g

d with concrete nches or

eer. Where

covers and for the provision of temporary protective covers on

enches or

triangular formation touching unless otherwise agreed, the apex of the triangle being up trefoil arrangement).

13.7.4.1 Cables Laid Direct

Unless instructed to the contrary by the Engineer, the Contractor shall lay cables direct in the ground in the following manner: 100mm of soft Cement Bound Sand to EN 197-1 in the ratio of 14 parts to 1 part by volume shall be placed to form a bed for the cable.

in any Contract document.

13.7.3.3 Traffic Safety Measures

The Contractor shall at all times during the constructionway. This right of way shall be of adequate quality and durability for the frepassage of pedestrians and traffic, to the Engineer’s satisfaction.

The Contractor shall also ensure that there are adequate footways fo

least a suitable all weather surface. The Contractor shall also maintain pedaccessibility to substation buildings and switchyards.

Measures shall be taken by the contractor to ensure at all times the sapersonnel as well as for the Contractor’s employees working on site. To thisprimary importance that the Contractor properly fences the excavated routebarricades, excavations and constructions be illuminated by the Contractor a

The Contractor shall construct and maintain detours for the diversion of trbecomes necessary. Detours shall be of an approved standard with adequatensure traffic safety. Detours shall be removed by the Contractor when nand the area shall be reinstated.

The Contractor shall provide, erect, maintain, reposition, cover and uncover and finally remove, as applicable, traffic signs, cones and other street furniture as the pWorks require and take such other measures as may be necessitated by order to direct traffic and take all

All details or traffic safety and management measures necessitated by the Works shall be submitted to the Engineer for his consent 7 days before the Contractor incommence any work. The Contractor shall also furnish any further relevainformation requested by the Engineer.

13.7.4 Methods of Layin

Cables laid direct in the ground in excavated trenches shall be protectecovers. Cables may also be drawn into pipes or ducts or laid in formed tretroughs or on racks or supported in trays or cleats as required by the Engincables are laid in formed trenches the installation shall include for the removal and replacement of the trenchthe trenches where they access ways.

Where three single-core cables are laid direct in the ground or in formed trsupported in cleats or racks and form one three-phase circuit, they shall be laid in

most (



After the cables have been laid they shall be bound with suitable cables 2m and then they shall be covered to a level of 400mm

ties at intervals of above the bottom of the lower

ogeneous t upon the initial water

).

e covers are required they shall be carefully centred over the with the adjacent covers

.

not allowed), homogeneous and pure d’s thermal

ry tests proving

upper layers of marked on layers, to

all be solely responsible for ascertaining to the satisfaction of the

avoid able and

etals in the

nches fitted ment on buried cable routes, the

n trefoil formation and the trench backfilled with imported back-fill

curely cleated to

tained as rp changes in altitude or direction shall be avoided.

specified in t intervals of

2m shall be installed to secure the pipes in position. Pipes shall then be covered with t-bound sand mixture (prepared as per paragraph 6.1) up to a level of 100 mm

above the uppermost pipe unless otherwise shown on drawings. All provisions described elsewhere in this specification regarding the mixture, concrete covers etc, shall be applied to backfill trenches with pipes.

In certain cases and where in the construction drawings is stated so, pipes shall be covered by concrete grade 20 instead of cement bound sand mixture. The Engineer may

most cable with cement-bound sand in the ratio 14:1 by volume.

In all cases the mixture shall be prepared in a suitable mixer to give a hommaterial. Water shall be added in the requisite amount (dependencontent of the sand) so as to achieve a proper mixture that will enable adequate compaction to be achieved. (The water shall reach the bottom of the mixture

In each layer where protectivcables forming each circuit, each cover being closely interlockedthroughout the length of the cable.

The covers shall be in accordance with BS 2484 and EAC drawing 7180008

The sand shall be fine (particles greater than 5mmwithout any chemical impurities that might cause harm to the cable. Sanresistivity shall not exceed 1,2oCW/m. The Contractor shall submit laboratoits thermal resistivity, chemical properties and composition.

Where more than one horizontal layer of cables is laid, the level of thecable shall be gauged from the level of the finished bottom of the trench andthe side of the trench at frequent intervals before the installation of the lowerensure that the correct vertical spacing is maintained.

The Contractor shEngineer whether the soil is chemically active and for taking special precautions to protect the cables against chemical action. The Contractor shall take precautions toelectrolytic and/or electro-chemical action occurring in situations where the caccessories are likely to be installed in close proximity to other dissimilar mpresence of moisture.

Where power cables are to be installed in buried formed concrete or brick trewith covers, and in order to maintain thermal environcables shall be cleated imaterial of thermal resistivity to secure the stated cable rating under all conditions. The back-fill material shall be carefully consolidated and the covers fitted.

Power cables laid in unfilled formed concrete or brick trenches shall be sethe trench bottom in a manner to suit the cable system design.

13.7.4.2 Pipes and Ducts

Where cables are to be drawn in pipes the bottom of the trench shall be mainsmooth as possible. Sha

The trench shall first be formed with 100mm cement-bound sand soft fill as paragraph 6.1 and the pipes shall then be laid in trefoil formation. Spacers a

cemen



instruct the Contractor to use concrete instead of the mixture in other places as well, stallations.

ri. After that

.

es as easy as practicable and in ce with shall be

gs. Spacers to all be sized to

an the bore ter of the pipe shall be successfully drawn through the pipes to secure good

curvature is e greater than

ds shall be used s embedded in

concrete, expansion joints shall be provided every 18m.

t seals to shall be fixed in all pipe ends whether empty or occupied by cable, or vermin. Spacers to at intervals of 2m shall be

l be laid in all

Warning tape/cable markers

ckfill material, PE warning tape shall be laid as shown on the r. In addition

ete cable markers shall be placed right on the trench surface or nearby the cable. The marker shall be approved by the

2484 and EAC

ed as shown on the relevant construction drawings to the specified dimensions. Pit covers shall be manufactured by heavy-duty ductile iron to EN 60124 grade D400 of high quality and standard. The frame shall be

lock, provided and fixed with anchoring devices. The top shall be of the 3-point suspension system with two or more triangular covers. The top surface shall be anti-skid with the EAC logo as badging. The raised pattern shall be at least 5mm in depth. For fibre optic cable pits adjacent to concrete, expansion joints at pipe entries/exits shall be provided. The Contractor shall provide reasonable number of cover lifting keys or tools, which must be simple and operated by one person.

depending on the site conditions and provisional measures against future in

Prior to handing over the project, pipes shall first be sized to remove any deba suitable mandrel (piston) of 10% smaller diameter than the diameter of the pipe shall be successfully drawn through the pipes to secure good practice of duct laying

Care shall be taken to make the bends of pipe or duct-linno case of a radius less than 3,2 metres. Prefabricated bends in accordanused in cases where the curvature is such that pipe cannot be bent.

Pipes for fibre-optic cables shall be laid as shown on construction drawinat intervals of 2m, shall be installed to secure the pipes in position. Pipes shremove any debri. After that a suitable mandrel of 10% smaller diameter thdiamepractise of duct laying. Prefabricated bends shall be used in cases where thesuch that pipe cannot be bent. The radius of curvature in any case shall b300mm.

In general and where applicable angles and bends shall be preferably effected by bending the pipes in as high as possible radius of curvature. Prefabricated benonly where the bending of pipe is impossible. In all installations of pipe

Duccables, to prevent ingress of water orinstalled in all pipe installations.

Nylon pulling guide of 8mm diameter and strength of at least 1000kgf shalpipes.

13.7.5

Before the last layer of baconstruction drawings. The warning tape is to be provided by the Purchasesuitable concrevery 5m to indicate the position ofEngineer.

13.7.6 Cable Covers

Cable covers shall be of un-reinforced concrete and shall comply with BSdrawing 7180008.

13.7.7 Pits for Fibre-Optic Cables

Pits for fibre-optic cables shall be construct

monob



13.7.8 132kV Joint-Bays

The Contractor must allow in his tender, where necessary, for the preparatjoint-bays for jointing work. The size of the joint bays, if not indicated on thedrawings, must be as compact as possible and in any case the width of the excavation

ion of adequate construction

or approval.

uitably located ide mechanical protection. Each joint shall bear an engraved label

where the phase

ing work.

ll not be commenced until the Engineer has inspected, approved

ckfilling operations

or pavements ormal soil (non-

shall be exceeding 300mm.

d for future owing ition of the

lic Works

of cable laying or trial holes) shall be back- the earth in each e for settlement.

95% of the dry with the American

ich shall be

er of tests is two for a length of excavation up to 50 meters. For greater lengths the number tests will be increasing accordingly but in any case the distance between successive test positions shall not be greater than 50 meters. The Contractor shall send copies of test results to the Engineer.

uipment to be used for the compaction of the backfill material shall include apart from vibrating rollers (self or hand driven) power rummers, vibrating plates, and others to be approved by the Authority and the Engineer, so that proper compaction is effected in corners and side edges.

must not exceed 3m. Joint-bay drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer f

Joint bays shall have a concrete base and a double layer of slabs shall be sabove the joints to provindicating the circuit joint number and phase mounted on the outer shellcolour shall also be painted.

Joint bays shall be excavated in not more than 2 days before the actual pull

13.7.9 Filling In and Reinstatement

Filling in of trenches shathe cables and accessories or pipes and has authorised the operation to proceed.

After cable slabs have been installed and approved by the Engineer bashall commence immediately.

Where the cable route passes along switchyards or areas other than readsthen the excavated material can be used as backfill provided that is nrocky). If the excavated ground is rockly, then soil suitable for compactionimported for backfill. The soil shall be compacted properly in layers not

Where the cable route passes along roads or pavements or areas designateroad or pavement the backfilling and reinstatement shall comply with the follrequirements. Generally all material and work shall comply with the latest ed"Standard Specification for Road and Civil Works of the Department of Pub(PWD-Roads Division), Sections 400, 500, 600 and 700.

All excavations made (whether for the purposefilled in 100-200mm layers depending on the compacting machine used,layer being well rammed and consolidated and sufficient allowance madEach layer shall be adequately sprayed with water in such a manner that, in conjunction with the means of compaction that are to be used, a density of at least density at the optimum moisture content to be achieved, in accordance Specification AASHTO-180-74 (Modified Proctor Test).

The Contractor is responsible for the proper compaction of each layer, whtested in accordance with the above-mentioned specification standard.

The minimum numb

The eq



13.7.9.1 Fill material type 2

The backfill material of the section between the cable slabs and at depth as construction drawings from the road finished level, shall be of type 2 mate

shown on the rial as specified

Standard Specification for Road and Civil Works of the PWD.

ackfill type 2 to the level where asphalted ied in the Standard

of the PWD.

d that it

certificates on artment (PWD)

ckfill (ii) from erials. For this

he cement of the works. The Contractor shall immediately after the stock piling

tion and testing of the stocked material by the PWD. Work shall not

e Engineer prior

ork shall be wing and PWD specification.

ly with the time of purchase

y PWD on the purpose of this

ype 1 material, shall be effected with special oth finish.

y field and sts required.

sts at any time in order to check the compliance with the Specification.

If the results of such tests are negative the Contractor shall be obliged to remove the unsuitable materials and replace them with suitable ones at his own expense or if possible and with the consent of the engineer take any suitable measures and actions to rectify the

ive works.

The Contractor shall bear all expenses in respect of such negative tests results.

in the latest edition of the

13.7.9.2 Fill material type 1

The section of the trench, from the top of blayers start, the trench shall be backfilled with material type 1 as specifSpecification for Road and Civil Works

The excavated material may be used as backfill material type 1 or 2 providecomplies with the corresponding specification.

The Contractor must make the necessary contacts and obtain appropriatetime: (i) from the Soil Mechanics Laboratories of the Public Works Depregarding the suitability of excavated or imported materials to be used as barelevant authorities on the T.R. values of the excavated or imported matreason the Contractor shall stock on site all the required fill material before tcommenarrange for the inspecbe allowed to commence unless the imported material proves to be suitable by PWD. Copies of the certificates shall be sent for approval to the Authority and thto their use.

13.7.9.3 Asphalting

The trench shall be fully reinstated with asphalting layers. All associated wconstructed according to relevant dra

The asphalt shall be of type 35-50 at a temperature of 25oC and shall compquality of the asphalt produced by the Cyprus Petroleum Refinery at theof the asphalt for the purpose of this project. Any amendments imposed bquality control procedure after the Contract award shall be applied for theContract without affecting the contract price.

The placing of asphalt layers, including the tfinisher suitable for the trench width, so as to effect excellent quality smo

The Contractor shall bear all costs and relevant charges for all the necessarlaboratory te

The Authority reserves the right to perform field and/or laboratory te

defect



13.8 TERMINATION OF AUXILIARY CABLES AND IDENTIFICATION OF

ble shall be terminated in brass compression type cable glands in

ferruled and every cable tail

ers clearly engraved in black. hall be used. The

shall be of the interlocking type and shall grip the insulation.

cable

ch a manner ing of the

ctor termination without disturbing the main group of wiring.

res shall be run rminal row away from the gland and then back to the appropriate

All markers shall be fitted to cores in an approved manner such that the number reads

ermit a

es which incorporate metallic screens shall have the screens earthed at one ds. The position s.

ning shall be sleeved with green or ctions shall use green/yellow coloured

hall have the pair and the screen earth connection secured together intact up to the terminal board.

COLOURING AND LABELLING

s, tail ends and rked with

f the supply where such supply is not obvious.

TERMINAL BOXES AND CABLE MARSHALLING KIOSKS

13.11.1 General

The outer case of terminal boxes shall be of steel construction and shall be so designed to form an extremely rigid structure and shall be fitted with one or more hinged covers provided with fasteners and padlocking facilities.

CORES

The ends of each caaccordance to EN 50262.

In cubicles all cores including the spare cores of multi-core cables shall beterminated at the top of a terminal block. The ends of every type wire andshall be fitted with numbered white ferrules with the numbMoisture and oil-resisting insulating material having a glossy finish sferrules

Wiring looms shall be formed in a neat and secure fashion using approved strapping.

The individual cores shall be taken out and connected to the terminals in suthat a sufficient length of core is available to permit cutting off and re-makcondu

All cores shall be left long enough to reach any terminal in the box. All coto the far end of the teterminal.

from the terminal outwards.

Control cable looms within cubicles shall have sufficient surplus length to psubsequent rearrangement to the remotest termination.

13.9 TERMINATION OF CONTROL CABLE SCREENS

Control cablend only but the screens shall be connected to terminal boards at both enof the earthing connection shall be shown clearly on the relevant diagram

Earth connections formed from wire braid screegreen/yellow insulation. Cable type earth conneinsulated cable.

Multicore cable, comprising twisted pairs with a screen round each pair, s

13.10 TERMINAL

Phase identification shall be marked in an approved manner on cable boxesingle-core cables and at all connecting points. Cable boxes shall be maapproved labels indicating the purpose o

13.11



Each unit shall be provided with an earth stud.

All main equipment shall be arranged so that it is accessible from the front of the box or

and shall be finished e terminal

shall be of d. Boxes located outside shall be weather and insect

ose located

the provision of two hinged front covers they shall ll be removable to facilitate cable termination. The

f weatherproof lities. Any

ide the boxes or kiosks shall be perforated to assist ey shall be so designed that condensation does not affect the

rtight switch

nuts and above this

tegral handles. Nuts, bolts, or carriage keys shall not

boxes and kiosks shall be provided with stays to retain the doors

equately an appropriate "DANGER" notice shall be fixed on the outside

All cables shall enter boxes and kiosks at the base.

Conduits shall not be run at or below ground level, but shall wherever practicable enter boxes or kiosks near the base.

Removable gland plates shall be provided, at least 450mm above ground level. Sufficient free space shall be available for the addition of future cables. Cable glands and conduits shall project at least 20mm above the gland plate to prevent any moisture on the plate

kiosk.

The outer cases shall be treated before painting to prevent corrosionin glossy enamel to an approved colour externally and white internally. Wherboxes are required for installation outdoors or in damp situations, they watertight construction and galvaniseproof with drainage facilities to EN 60529, IP54 degree of protection. Thindoors shall be to IP51 degree of protection.

If the width of the box necessitates close on to a centre post, which shadepth of the outer case shall be not less than 200 mm.

13.11.2 Outdoor Boxes and Kiosks

Outdoor boxes and kiosks shall have domed or sloping roofs and shall be oand vermin-proof construction, with adequate ventilation and draining facidivisions between compartments insthe natural air circulation. Thinsulation of the apparatus, the terminal boards or the cables. Heaters shall be provided. Where these exceed 40 watts, they shall be controlled by means of a watemounted on the outside of the box or kiosk.

13.11.3 Access Facilities

Access shall be provided at both the front and back of kiosks and junction boxes, except for small terminal boxes of the type normally employed for wall mounting.

Doors and access covers shall be easily opened and shall not be secured bybolts. Doors and covers under 14 kg weights may be of the slide-on pattern; weight they shall be hinged.

Kiosk doors shall be fastened with inbe used. Provision shall be made for padlocking each door.

Hinged doors on outdoorin the open position.

13.11.4 Low Voltage Connections

If voltages in excess of 125 V are present in box or kiosk, they shall be adscreened or insulated andand inside of the box or kiosk.

13.11.5 Cable Termination



draining into cable crutches or conduits. Means shall be provided to drainsurface of the gland plate. The back, sides and front of the box or kiosk shaleast

water off the ll project at

50 mm below the gland plate to prevent moisture draining on to the plate and cable

Where armoured cables are employed the armouring shall, unless otherwise approved, be

e provided.

e equipment they able,

lating, and vermin- proof material. Cable glands and conduits shall project at least

of the gland

Separate gland plates shall be provided for each circuit plate with glands designed as pre

ide each junction box or kiosk to describe functions of the ents each door shall

loaded d duty of the

ertical formation to provide a rigid assembly. Each pair of terminals shall be connected together at the base

resistant to flame und the base of

ockets to prevent the terminals

rotation and displacement.

shall be minals and

mmable terminal covers fitted with marker strips for mponents provided for

securing the wires shall be electro-tinned. Springs shall be aged and shall withstand

oards and from the sides of the case shall not ance between terminal boards and the top and

inal boxes and boards shall meet the associated cable site tests.

13.12 DRAWINGS

The following drawings and schedules are required:

(a) Multicore and auxiliary power cable route plan

glands.

earthed inside the cable glands.

For the reception of external cables in panels removable gland plates shall b

All cables shall enter vertically from below and at their point of entry to thshall be sealed by fitted boards. These shall be of an approved, non-flamminsu20mm above the gland plate to prevent any moisture on the plate draining into cable crutches or conduits. Means shall be provided to drain water off the surface plate.

EN 50262 and suitable for the specified cables.

13.11.6 Labels

Labels shall be provided insvarious items of equipment. Where the kiosk is divided into compartmhave an external label to identify the compartment.

13.11.7 Terminal Boards

Terminal boards shall comprise banks of rail mounted, screw clamp, spring insertion, solder lug or stud type terminals as required to suit the design ancables to be terminated, arranged in pairs horizontally and grouped in v

with a fixed or plug type link. Insulating material of self extinguishing orpropagation and substantially non-hydroscopic type shall be moulded arothe screws or studs, links connecting pairs of screws or studs or plug sexposure of live metal at the back of the terminal boards and to secure against

Terminal boards shall have an approved means for securing the wires, and complete with identification ferrules, insulating barriers between pairs of terremovable transparent non-flaidentifying the terminals. All nuts, washers, links and other co

corrosion.

The clearance between adjacent terminal bbe less than 100 mm. The minimum clearbottom of the case shall be 200mm.

All term



(b) Layout and dimensions of cable trays, racks and ladders

(c) Arrangement for cable support, steelwork, clamping, cleating, cable markers, cable

Other drawings necessary to complete compilation and details of cable layout and arrangement shall be submitted as required by the Engineer.

tress etc

(d) Cable schedules

(e) Core termination schedule



14. LV AC SWITCHBOARD

ructure and insulated multi-cubicle, factory built assembly type,

isolators, fuses,

ce and shall be

ot impede hall be

down of any ed of non-

Insulating barriers and bus supports shall be of rs, both bus wires

bushed" to

itchboard and ich shall exposed when r.

shall be robust and be designed to prevent the spreading of damage due its or other causes. All cable terminations shall be accessible from the

compartment shall be segregated from the rest of the

its

switch

breakers for the three incoming supplies, fixed type, motorized, with mechanical and electrical interlocks as described later on.

oming Circuit breakers must be equipped with under voltage relay.

14.2.1.2 Outgoing Circuits

• 1 – 200A 3P moulded case circuit breaker

• 1 – 125A 3P moulded case circuit breaker

14.1 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION

The panel is to comprise of a completely enclosed self supporting metal stshall be of the single busbar airincorporating moulded case circuit breakers, miniature circuit breakers,instruments and current transformers.

All units when built up into a complete switchboard shall be such that the completed switchboard is of flush fronted design, having a neat and clean appearanreadily extensible on both sides.

All components shall be accessibly mounted in the switchboard and shall naccess to wiring or terminals. All faults occurring within any individual unit scontained within that unit and except for busbar faults shall not cause shutsection of board other than the unit itself. All equipment shall be constructhygroscopic and non-flammable material. an approved material. The design shall cater for the interconnection of busbaprimary and secondary, between adjacent units. The apertures for secondarybetween adjacent units and for secondary wiring in individual units shall be "prevent damage to wires on sharp edges of metal.

Primary busbars shall be contained in a separate compartment within the swaccess shall be possible only by means of bolted-on sheet steel covers, whclearly be marked "Busbars". Busbars and busbar connections shall not becovers and doors are opened for access to the remainder of the switchgea

The constructionto fire, short-circubottom. The cable termination switchboard. The switchboards shall be designed to prevent accidental contact with live parts.

14.2 RATINGS

14.2.1 415V AC Switchboard

The Switchboard shall comprise the following:

14.2.1.1 Incoming Circu

• 1 – 250A 4P Manual change-over

• 2 – 250A 4P moulded case circuit

All Inc



• 4 – 63A 3P MCBs type D

pe D

type D

e D

ype D

pe D

l MCBs

e tender.

f high conductivity ion stresses. The

clearances of the busbars to all earthed metal parts shall comply with the requirements to

The Busbars shall be insulated by using appropriate plastic cover or other suitable

onal area and

capable of carrying continuously the specified currents without l Standards.

all be not less

oated sheet m (14 SWG). The construction shall employ

ement where lays or other

el surfaces shall be protected against corrosion in accordance with EN ISO 12944. The exterior of the panels shall be given one coat or primer, one undercoat and at least one finishing coat of minimum thickness 80 microns of light grey colour. The interior of the panel shall be finished with a mat white surface.

The panel shall provide for bottom entry of cables via detachable blank vermin proof plates.

• 2 – 20A 3P MCBs ty

• 9 – 16A 3P MCBs

• 1 – 60A 1P MCB typ

• 2 – 25A 1P MCBs t

• 2 - 20A 1P MCBs ty



20% space for additiona

All the above as per drawing No. 1S000E8NE1SB002 constituting part of th

14.3 MAIN BUS-BARS

The panel shall include three phase busbars and one neutral busbar ocopper, adequately supported to withstand all normal and fault condit

EN 60439 - 1.

insulating means.

The phase and neutral busbars shall be not less than 264mm2 cross sectithe rated short time withstand current of the busbar shall be 50kA for 1 s.

14.4 TEMPERATURE RISE

The panels shall beexceeding the maximum temperatures given in the appropriate Internationa

14.5 CONSTRUCTION OF ENCLOSURE

The panel shall comply with EN 60439 - 1 and the degree of protection shthan IP31 to EN 60529.

The panel shall be of robust construction and shall be made of electro-zinc cmetal having a minimum thickness of 2mfolding techniques with use of standard rolled sections or other reinforcnecessary. The stiffness shall be such as to prevent maloperation of reapparatus by impact. The front of the panel shall have a smooth well-finished surface.

All ste



The enclosure shall be front accessed. The backside cover panelnot for maintenance or installation purposes. All maintenanc

s shall be detachable but e and installation

the installation of the incoming and outgoing cables. The minimum estimated required area per incoming

oof louvers fitted with

shall be clearly

Incoming and outgoing circuits shall be appropriately marked. Also interconnection wires uitable plastic sleeves at both wire ends, bearing the same

of 415V/240V ulded case circuit breakers, which shall comply in all respects with the

s than 20 kA and han 9 kA unless

reakers (see hall be of the quick-make and quick break type with the speed of

rom the ate all poles

h shall clearly indicate the three positions,

metallic thermal elements for inverse time

owing overload and short circuit discrimination

hout

Outgoing circuit breakers (MCBs) shall be covered by a hinged door with a safety lock.

Incoming Circuit Breakers

The incoming circuit breaker operating mechanisms shall be motor wound spring operated. The circuit breaker shall be capable of closing fully and latching against its rated making current.

Spring operated mechanisms shall have the following additional measures:

requirements must be satisfied by accessing the panels from the front.

The depth and other dimensions of the panels shall be such as to satisfy

cable must not less than 300x300mm.

The panel shall be well ventilated, top and bottom, through vermin prbrass gauge screens.

All control circuits shall be fused with suitable rated fuses at the points of supply. Indicating lamps shall be fitted with suitable dropping resistors. All devices labelled and the ON/OFF position of the switches shall be clearly indicated.

shall be marked by inserting snumber.

14.6 LV CIRCUIT BREAKERS

All incoming and outgoing circuits on the panel shall be protected by meansminiature or morequirements of EN 60898 and EN 60947-2.

The breaking capacities of the incoming circuit breakers shall be not lesthe breaking capacities of the outgoing circuit breakers shall be not less totherwise specified.

The circuit breaker operating mechanisms, except for the incoming circuit bParagraph below), soperation independent of the operator and shall be mechanically trip free foperating handle. The operating mechanisms shall be constructed to opersimultaneously during opening, closing, and tripped conditions.

The circuit breakers operating handle or switcON, OFF, and TRIPPED.

The circuit breakers shall be provided with bi-delay operation and magnetic elements for short circuit protection.

Current curves shall be provided shbetween outgoing breakers and the incoming breaker.

The replacement of any circuit breaker shall be possible to be carried out witinterference to the other circuit breakers on the panel.

14.6.1



(a) If the circuit breaker is open and the spring charged, the circuit breaker can be closed

ed and the spring charged, the circuit breaker can be

nisms should be provided with means for charging the spring by ctrical release

ker closing seconds.

r the spring to red for closing

can be released to close the circuit-breaker.

10Vdc shunt ical hand

e suitable for operation from a 110Vdc range when to 110% of

nominal voltage, with the exception of the shunt trip release coil which shall operate f all operating

ubstation.

re of insulation

each unit and

be provided to r earthed

closing supply intenance purposes shall be provided.

The locking facilities with padlocks shall be provided so that the circuit breaker can be prevented from being closed when it is open and from being manually tripped when it is closed. These facilities shall not require the fitting of any loose components prior to the

on of the single padlock required. It shall not be possible, without the aid of tools, to gain access to the tripping toggle or any part of the mechanism which would permit defeat of the locking of the manual trip. It shall not be possible to lock mechanically the trip mechanism so as to render inoperative the electrical tripping.

and then tripped.

(b) If the circuit breaker is closopened, closed and then tripped.

(c) Mechanical indication and an auxiliary switch for remote electrical indication shall be provided to indicate the state of the spring.

(d) Motor charged mechahand and also a shrouded push-button for releasing the spring. An elecoil shall also be provided.

(e) Under normal operation, motor recharging of the operating spring shall commence immediately and automatically upon the completion of each circuit-breaoperation. The time required for spring recharging shall not exceed 30

(f) It shall not be possible to close a circuit breaker, fitted with a motor charged closing mechanism, whilst the spring is being charged. It shall be necessary fobe fully charged and the associated charging mechanism fully prepabefore it

All circuit-breaker operating mechanisms shall be fitted with an electrical 1trip release coil for local remote tripping /opening and in addition a mechantripping device.

The electrical tripping and closing devices shall bpower supply and shall operate satisfactorily, over the ambient temperature the voltage at their terminals is at any value within the voltage range of 85%

between 70% to 110% of nominal voltage and in addition over the range oconditions of the batteries and chargers of the s

All operating coils for use on the DC supply shall be connected so that failuto earth does not cause the coil to become energized.

Tripping and closing circuits shall be provided with a fuse in each pole onshall be independent of each other and all other circuits.

Approved, positively driven mechanically operated indicating devices shallindicate whether a circuit-breaker is in the open, closed, service, isolated oposition.

Facilities shall be provided for manually charging the springs in case of failure. Manual operation of circuit breakers for ma

inserti



14.6.2 Manual Change-Over Switch

The manual change-over switch shall comply in all respects with the requirements of EN

n category.

independent

act moulded body with double break contacts l be provided so that the

The technical characteristics of the switch must be such as to comply with the ack up fuses of 400A rating, HRC type 2 and the LV circuit breaker ded in the proposed switchboard under this tender.

s

y means of

ans of 0-300 A itable selector switch

with L1, L2, L3, and OFF positions.

hether the to the Distribution Switchboard busbars or not.

URRENT TRANSFORMERS

e Incoming circuits shall be equipped with a Current Transformer for

• Burden: 15 VA

For the Substation switchboards, each phase and the neutral of the Incoming circuits shall ipped with a Current Transformer for Restricted Earth Fault protection. The current

transformers shall comply with EN 60044 - 1 and have the following characteristics:

• Ratio: 300/1A

• Class: X

• Knee point voltage: 100V

60947-3.

The rated operational currents as stated are based on the AC-23 utilizatio

They shall be of the quick make and quick break operation and shall have opening and closing mechanism.

The changeover switches shall be of compand separate arcing contacts. Locking facilities with padlocks shalchangeover switch can be locked in either position.

characteristics of the bof the MCCB type inclu

14.7 INSTRUMENTS

14.7.1 Voltmeter

The phase-to-neutral voltage of each Incoming supply shall be measured bsuitable separate voltmeters with phase selection switches.

14.7.2 Ammeters

The load of each phase of the incoming circuits shall be monitored by mescale Ammeter. The Ammeter shall be controlled by means of a su

14.7.3 Indicating Lamps

A red lamp shall be connected to each Incoming supply circuit to indicate wcircuit in question is connected

14.8 C

Each phase of thmonitoring the phase currents. The current transformers shall comply with EN 60044 - 1 and have the following characteristics:

• Ratio: 300/1A

• Class: 1

be equ



• Internal Resistance at 75oC: 0,85Ω

PE/PE means of suitable

ith the panel. The terminations strips terioration.

e provided at the stage of tender. It shall be ensured that the glanding pace is adequate for all incoming and outgoing circuits.

2 cross-

INTERLOCK

electrically and mechanically interlocked nd relays in order to be controlled for either

r manual parallel operation.

e possible to have the following combinations:

g is selected:

CB1 closes and CB2 cannot close.

.

lly ensuring transformers will never be paralleled:

shall close

y.

ain to that state, even when the cause is removed.

ncoming supply shall be monitored by means of an under voltage relay which is to operate when the voltage on any phase drops below 70% of the rated value. It shall be possible to adjust the operation of these relays with a time delay, adjustable between 0 and 2 seconds. The under-voltage relay shall pick up when the monitoring voltages reach a value of 90% of the rated value. Both pick-up and drop-off voltage settings, shall be adjustable between 20% and 100% of the nominal voltage.

14.9 TERMINATION CABLES

The incoming supplies to the panels will be by means of 185mm2, 4-core, XLinsulated and armoured aluminium cables, which shall be terminated by cable lugs and glands, which are to be provided wshall be at adequate height for avoiding core deformation and insulation deThey must be accessible at all installation stages of cable

Detail drawings of the termination compartment and terminals with any other associated equipment shall band termination s

14.10 EARTHING

The panels shall be provided with a copper earth bar of not less than 95 mmsection, which is to be connected to the substation earth.

14.11 INCOMING SUPPLY CIRCUIT BREAKERS CONTROL AND SCHEME

The incoming supply circuit breakers shall beand shall be provided with selector switches aautomatic/manual changeover o

In the manual position, it shall b

(a) When change-over and non parallelin

•

• CB2 closes and CB1 cannot close

(b) When manual parallel operation is selected:

• Both CB1 and CB2 close paralleling the two transformers.

In the automatic position, the following change over shall happen automaticathat the

• If CB1 is closed and CB1 fails or looses its source of supply, then CB2 automatically.

• If under the same conditions CB2 fails then CB1 shall close automaticall

After any changeover the circuit breaker shall rem

Each i



When a circuit breaker trips an alarm must be given on the panel and supervisory signalling to be provided by voltage free contact.



15. SUBSTATION EARTHING

he connection of all items of Plant to the earthing system of the substation that shall include the supply and installation of all materials and equipment for

t.

em as

The earthing system design is generally in accordance with the guidelines for earthing in ation Grounding". The earthing of all equipment and

ce BS 7430.

rs, earthing , LV AC and

equipment and all other electrical apparatus shall each be connected to the main mm2.

rs, rails, steel structures, cable trays, concrete reinforcement bars and all by branch earth

plicate and made direct to the main cted to the earth

(d) In general the connections between HV electrical equipment and the main earth bar quipment comprising substantial multi-cubicle

substation and shall provide t and panels and shall cater for future

15.4 JOINTS AND BRANCHES

Joints shall have a resistance not exceeding that of an equivalent length of conductor and nd shall be tested to prove compliance with this requirement.

No drilling of the earth conductor shall be allowed.

Joints and connections to the earthing system shall be so effected as to avoid reduction of the current carrying capacity and shall be to the approval of the Engineer.

15.1 GENERAL

The Contract includes t

the connection of the Plan

15.2 BASIS OF DESIGN

The design of the earth mat is based on the maximum fault level of the systspecified in Section 3.1- “Design Criteria”.

IEEE 80 "Guide for Safety in Substthe provision of earthing systems, electrodes and connections is in accordan

15.3 EARTHING OF EQUIPMENT

All electrical apparatus shall be connected by individual branches from the earth grid. The points of connection in respect of principal items of plant are:

(a) The HV switchgear, MV switchboard, capacitor banks, power transformeand auxiliary transformers, tanks, Relay/Control Panels, Telecom panelsDCearth bar by means of separate subsidiary connection of at least 185

(b) All steel doometal structures of the substation shall be connected to the earth grid bars.

(c) Connections to transformer neutrals shall be duearth bar at two different points. The transformer body shall be connegrid separately.

and between LV electrical eswitchboards and the main earth bar shall be duplicated.

(e) The main earth bar shall be distributed throughout theaccess for connection of all equipmenexpansions.

joints a



All joints and connections underground shall be made by thermo weldingconnections shall be made by thermo welding or where approved by the Engcompression or tinn

. Exposed ineer by

ing and bolting, provided allowance for such connections was made in

Special precautions shall be taken to ensure that the available contact area is fully utilized s to plant and apparatus.

Where earthing conductors are exposed to mechanical damage steel guards shall be provided to protect them.

the design calculations.

in all connection

15.5 GUARDS



16. FIBER OPTIC SYSTEMS

accordance number of fibres

in the Schedules. The fibres shall be carried terminating in

Optical fibres shall be of the single mode type and shall be designed for operation at hall be low.

ween the which shall be tract and its

ectors. The ypes shall be defined during the Contract design stage in co-ordination with

s not included

ect with the

each substation building, to accommodate fibre splices between he flexible termination cable.

requirements detailed below.

ut they shall h wavelengths around 1.550 nm.

sion splicing technique.

Fibre Material

The fibre shall be manufactured from high grade silica and doped as necessary to provide the required transmission performance.

The chemical composition of the fibres shall be specifically designed to minimize the effect of hydrogen on the transmission properties.

16.1 GENERAL

Except as otherwise specified optical fibre media will be provided by others inwith this Specification. Each optical fibre link shall comprise a specified between two substation buildings, as definedin underground optical fibre cable buried with the 132 kV power cables,demountable connectors, as specified in detail below.

nominal wavelengths of both 1.300nm and 1.550nm. However, the fibres soptimised for operation within the 1.300nm window, as specified in detail be

Any fibre optic cable connection, which may be required to be provided betdigital current differential protection relays and the multiplexer equipment, installed in the telecommunications room, shall be supplied under this Contotal cost for installation and connection at both ends shall be assumed to be included in the Contract price. The optical fibres shall be fitted with demountable connconnection tthe supplier of the optical terminal equipment.

Unless otherwise stated the following scope of supply for the optical links iin this Contract:

(a) Fibres within the underground optical fibre cable, which shall interconnexisting system.

(b) Splice boxes, withinthe fibre cable and t

(c) Flexible termination cables, which shall form the final connection between the splice box and termination equipment to be supplied under this contract.

16.2 OPTICAL FIBERS

16.2.1 General

All fibres shall be of the single mode type and shall comply with ITU-T Recommendation G.652 (Red Book) and the

The fibres shall be optimised for use with wavelengths of around 1.300 nm, balso be suitable for operation wit

The fibres shall be entirely suitable for jointing by means of a normal fu

16.2.2



16.2.3 Fibre Coating

The primary coating shall consist of an inert material which can be reajointing purposes

dily removed for without damage to the fibre and without necessitating the use of

rt material.

ng shall be fast

nslucent such that fibre splicing techniques, using optical cladding, shall

lly matched to the cladding to ping.

d to reduce the production of

th a tolerance of ±0,6μm.

rror shall not be more than 1μm.

er the maximum and

new links, to be provided within the scope of attenuation of coefficient (per optical path) not d 0,25dB/km at 1.550nm.

16.2.7 Dispersion Coefficient

The fibres should be optimised for operation at 1.300nm such that the total dispersion coefficient is nominally zero. The dispersion coefficient at 1.550nm shall not exceed

m.nm.

The dispersion coefficients at wavelengths of both 1.300nm and 1.550nm will be advised later.

hazardous chemicals.

A secondary coating may be applied directly over the primary coating or alternatively a loose jacket may be provided.

Where a tight fitting secondary coating is provided it shall consist of an ine

The secondary coating or loose tube shall be colour coded throughout the length of the cable. If not part of the material of the secondary coating the colour codiand capable of withstanding normal handling during termination.

The fibre coating shall be traalignment of cores by means of injection and detection of light through thebe supported. In addition, the fibre coating shall be opticapromote cladding mode strip

The composition of the cable shall be specifically designehydrogen gas and to prevent the migration of hydrogen into the fiber.

16.2.4 Fibre Geometry

The mode field diameter shall be 9,2μm wi

The mode field non-circularity shall be less than 6%.

The mode field concentricity e

The fibre cladding diameter shall be 125μm ±2.4%.

The cladding non-circularity shall be less than 2% when measured ovminimum diameters.

16.2.5 Fibre Attenuation

Those optical fibres forming part of entirelythe Contract, shall have an averageexceeding 0,4dB/km at 1.300nm an

16.2.6 Cut-off Wavelength

The cut-off wavelength of fibres shall lie in the range 1.100 to 1.280nm, as measured by the Reference Test Method detailed in ITU-T G650.

18ps/k



16.3 FIBER JOINTS

16.3.1 Fusion Splices

All fibre joints shall be of the fusion type, except where demountable connectors are specified.

Fusion slicing shall be carried out by trained personnel using automatic fusioequipment designed for the fibre type. Fibre ends shall be prepared

n splicing for splicing using

facturers. The plicing.

lignment of fibre cores, prior to splicing, shall be verified using a technique

mized the

ce. No single

ent by means protection sleeves shall be heat

f the sleeves int) box by

able clips or restraints. It shall be possible to remove and replace the splice mage to the splice or fibre.

ociated with erwise retained) within the

each optical link.

olerance room, ; the precise

location shall be agreed with the Engineer.

defined as that cable installed between the splice box at the ipment (supplied by

The termination cable shall be of flexible and rugged construction, suitable for installation floor voids at the substation buildings. The cable construction shall incorporate

strength member(s), fibre buffering (bedding) and a tough jacket. The fibres shall be entirely compatible with those of the approach cable to ensure good optical and physical fusion splicing properties.

Each termination cable shall be supplied in a preformed length, with factory fitted demountable connectors at the free end. The type of demountable connector shall comply

methods and tools recommended by the fibre and splicing equipment manucleanliness and accurate cleaving of fibre ends shall be ensured prior to s

The accurate athat monitors the optical power transmitted across the splice interface. Fusion splicing shall be commenced only after manipulations of fibre alignment have maxitransmitted power.

Fusion splice optical losses shall average at no more than 0,07dB per splisplice loss shall exceed 0,1dB.

Splices shall be mechanically strengthened and protected from the environmof purpose designed splice sleeves or enclosures. Theshrinkable and shall incorporate a stainless steel rod. The minimum length oshall be 45mm. The finished splice shall be supported within the splice (jomeans of suitin the support device without risk of da

Each fusion splice shall have a spare length of fibre of approximately 1 m assit. This excess fibre shall be coiled neatly and clipped (or othsplice (joint) box.

16.3.2 Demountable Connectors

Demountable connectors shall be fitted to each fibre at the termination ofThe connector types shall be defined during the contract design phase.

16.3.3 Splice Boxes

Splice boxes shall be wall mounted and located at the substation building, tadjacent to the terminal equipment with which the optical link is associated

16.4 TERMINATION CABLES

A termination cable issubstation end of the approach cable and the optical termination equothers).

within



with the requirements previously described. A minimum allowance of 10m shall be made for the length of each termination cable.

arried out in accordance with procedures defined in ITU-T G.650

m the following tests, and compliance with

for each individual fibre of the link.

lectometer. results shall be

res under test are outside the dead l shall be

te, weather conditions, jointers and supervising t or termination,

the Splicing

(b) Test certificates shall be submitted detailing the test results of commissioning as specified in the relevant clause above.

(c) Full written reports shall be required of any damage occurring to conductor or equipment together with remedial action proposed which shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

16.5 TESTING

16.5.1 Factory Testing

Factory testing shall be cor EN 793 - 1.

16.5.2 Site Testing

On hand over of the optical fibre optic link the contractor shall perforto be carried out for each individual fibre link to confirm acceptabilitythis specification.

(a) Link attenuation at 1.300nm and 1.550nm

(b) Fibre attenuation profile measurement using an optical time domain refThis test shall be carried out from each end of each fibre link. Test presented in graphical form with graduated axes.

Precautions are to be taken to ensure that the fibzones of the OTDR. For this reason an appropriate length of fibre pigtaiinserted between the launch end and the fibre to be tested.

16.5.3 Splicing & Testing Reports and Certificates

The following reports in duplicate shall be submitted to the Engineer for each new optical link to be established, for record purposes and shall be incorporated in the “As Constructed Records”.

(a) Splicing reports detailing the daengineer’s names, details of the type of cable and the type of joinlocation, ambient temperature and any other information relative toOptical process.



17. INSPECTION AND TESTING

ant inspection carried out by

-Contractor and for those carried out according to the egulations and

n and test by ngineer or the

e the right of the n when erected to

shall be borne

ed at all ests on the

nd workmanship eing

other premises, the Contractor shall obtain for the Purchaser and/or the witness tests as

nspection, s obligations

Before any Plant is packed or dispatched from the Main or Sub-Contractor's works, all en successfully carried out in the presence of the Engineer.

for inspection or actors to

rd to the neer a list of all sub-orders placed or intended. The Contractor shall submit un-priced

r. One copy of all drawings

eer shall cover all components, which lant is in operation

be dispatched to Site direct from the Sub-Contractor's works.

Sub-orders shall include a statement advising the Sub-Contractor that the items being ordered will be subject to inspection and test by the Engineer.

It is important that all copies of sub-orders are clearly marked with the name of the Contractor and the following reference:

17.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

The Contractor shall be responsible for the carrying out of material and pland testing. He shall be responsible for any inspection and testing normally the Manufacturer/Contractor/Submanufacturing and fabrication standards of the material/plant and/or rule, rpractices of the manufacturing country.

The whole of the Plant covered by this Contract will be subject to inspectiothe Engineer during manufacture and on completion. The approval of the Epassing of any such inspection or test will not, however, prejudicPurchaser to reject the Plant if it does not comply with the Specificatiogive complete satisfaction in service. The costs of all tests and inspectionby the Contractor and shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Price.

The Purchaser and/or the Engineer and/or his representative shall be entitlreasonable times during the manufacture, to inspect, examine and witness tManufacturer's, Contractor's and Sub-Contract's premises the material aof all plant to be provided under the Contract. If part of the said plant is bmanufactured inEngineer and/or his representatives, permission to inspect, examine andif the said plant is being manufactured at the Contractor's premises. Such iexamination and/or testing shall not release the Contractor from any of hiunder the Contract.

tests called for shall have be

Not less than thirty days notice shall be given when the Plant is readytest and every facility shall be provided by the Contractor and his Sub-Contrenable the Engineer to carry out the necessary inspection and tests.

17.2 SUB-CONTRACTORS

Within two months of acceptance of the Tender the Contractor shall forwaEngicopies of all orders and sub-orders as selected by the Engineereferred to in the sub-orders is to be submitted, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer.

The drawings and sub-orders submitted to the Enginare subject to electrical and mechanical pressure or stress when the Pand also those items, which will

For the purpose of this Clause, inter-works shall be treated as sub-orders.



• Purchaser's Name

Specification this Section. Orders issued by the Sub-Contractor shall also

include the Main Contractor's name and reference on their sub-order in addition to the .

enable him to h test pieces shall

borne by the ply with the requirements of the appropriate

le of the tallurgists will

rtified particulars of tests which have

ded and the main features of the project design are ablished by the

ecessary to

e tests shall be

uce certified

ipment which is for practical test red is to be

ering.

l be required.

authorities.

The Manufacturer's test equipment shall be of satisfactory quality and condition and where necessary shall be calibrated at the expense of the Contractor by such other body

y be agreed.

Not less than thirty days notice of all tests shall be given to the Engineer, in order that he may be present if he so desires. As many tests as possible shall be arranged together in accordance with a program to be agreed with the Engineer.

• Contract Number

Sub-Contractors shall comply with all the applicable requirements of this and, in particular, with

above-mentioned heading

17.3 MATERIAL TESTS

The Contractor shall provide test pieces as required by the Engineer todetermine the quality of the material supplied under this Contract. Sucbe prepared and supplied free of charge and any cost of the tests shall be Contractor. If any test piece fails to comspecifications for the material in question, the Engineer may reject the whomaterial represented by that test piece; the Contractor's designers and mebe consulted before any material is so rejected.

In the event of the Engineer being furnished with cebeen carried out for the Contractor by the suppliers of materials, they may, at their own discretion, dispense with the previously mentioned test entirely.

17.4 WORKS TESTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

After the Contract has been awarknown, then an Engineer's Inspection and Testing Program shall be estContractor.

The Engineer reserves the right to call for such additional tests as may be nprove compliance with the Specification.

Unless an alternative place of testing is agreed or specified the routincarried out at the Manufacturer's Works.

Type tests will not be required in those cases where the Contractor can prodevidence to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the required type tests have been performed successfully on identical equipment or equpurposes similar and produced in the factory where the equipment offemanufactured. Evidence to this effect shall be submitted at the time of tend

Where a type-tested design is manufactured under license in a different location evidence of repeat type tests appropriate to the alternative manufacturing location wil

Type tests shall be carried out by approved testing

as ma



The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer applications for inspection which shall contain rmation.

(b) Manufacturer's name plus name of manufacturer's staff responsible for the testing and r's works order number

of tests

ntractor's order references alone

sts to be performed and standard to be applied

Plant offered

st up to a

ruments and manpower shall be

testing of the Plant.

General

lectrical, mechanical and hydraulic tests in m and

red by sts as are e which must

performance, further tests which are considered necessary by the Engineer shall be carried out by the

tests to which the Purchaser will be put d other expenses of the Engineer) will be borne by the Contractor.

nt shall be ping. No item in writing.

17.5.1 Procedure

Not less than 2 months before the commencement of site testing the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a test program for all sites to meet the erection and commissioning program agreed.

Together with this program the Contractor shall provide in adequate time for approval by the engineer before site testing is due to commence a set of pro-forma test forms for each

the following info

(a) Contract number

manufacture

(c) Location

(d) Date of test

(e) Description in full of Plant offered for inspection (Coare insufficient and unacceptable)

(f) Schedule of te

(g) List of the Engineer's approved drawing numbers appropriate to the

(h) Sub-order number

The subject items should remain available for Engineer's inspection and teminimum of 10 days beyond the agreed date of witnessing the test.

Every facility with respect to access, drawings, instprovided by the Contractor and his Sub-Contractor to enable the Engineer or his designated representative to carry out the necessary inspection and

Inspection and testing during manufacture shall be in accordance with theConditions of Purchase and this section of the Specification.

Works tests shall include all routine eaccordance with the relevant Standards except where departures therefromodifications thereto are embodied in this Specification. For Plant not coveInternational Standard or specifically mentioned in this Specification, such terelevant shall be carried out in accordance with the maker's standard practicmeet with the prior approval of the Engineer.

Should the Plant or any portion thereof fail under test to give the required

Contractor and the whole costs of the repeated (including travelling an

After satisfactory completion of the witnessed tests at the Works, the Plasubmitted for the Engineer's approval during dismantling preparatory to shipof Plant is to be dispatched to Site until the Engineer has given his approval

17.5 SITE TESTS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS



item or type of equipment showing details of the proposed tests, checks and recording results. A list of all general checks shall also be included. The fortype of equipment, serial numbers and any other identifying marks, sucircuit identificatio

method of ms shall record

bstation name and n and shall include space for the test Engineer's and witnessing

ltage selection mission shall apply to

here wiring modifications are involved on existing plant marked if these have not

n shall form

ormal working utage

The Contractor shall advise the Engineer in writing at the time of commencement of site st equipment.

d all relevant test

wise agreed.

ith the

he test sheets in earing on the test

ent shall be of satisfactory quality and condition and shall be n approved authority or standard at the contractors expense.

o some tated by

structional techniques.

17.6 TEST CERTIFICATES

Triplicate sets of all principal test records, test certificates and performance curves shall be submitted to the Engineer immediately after the conclusion of each test carried out in accordance with the provisions of this Contract. These test records, certificates and performance curves shall be supplied for all tests, whether or not they have been

Engineer's signature.

No testing shall commence until the format and test procedures are agreed and all results shall be submitted on the approved form.

Where testing of common equipment such as bus zone protection and voschemes is involved as extensions to existing and operational sites the subclearly state the outage requirements or 'risk of trip' conditions which wouldoperational plant and wdiagrams shall be submitted showing any wiring additions and deletionsbeen previously submitted, before any work commences and this submissiopart of the "Permit to Work".

Testing shall be carried out during normal working hours as far as practicable. Tests which involve existing apparatus and outages may be carried out outside nhours. The Contractor shall give sufficient notice to allow for the necessary oarrangements to be made in conformity with the testing program.

erection of the site supplies, which will be required for the operation of the te

The Contractor shall provide the requisite experienced test personnel anequipment, unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer or stated in the Schedules.

No tests as agreed under the program of tests shall be waived except upon the instruction of the Engineer in writing.

All tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Engineer unless other

17.5.2 Standards and Methods

The method of testing, unless specified in the Schedules, shall be agreed wEngineer.

Details of the test equipment and instruments used shall be noted in tcases where the instrument or equipment characteristics can have a bresults.

The Contractors' test equipmappropriately calibrated by a

The testing requirements detailed under this Specification may be subject tvariation upon the instruction or agreement of the Engineer where necessichanged conditions at site or by differing design, manufacture or con



witnessed by the Engineer. The information given in such test certificates shall be sufficient to identify the material or equipment to

and curves which the certificate refers and

-divided by plant type and further index and

sed for maintenance tests the final records shall be provided pletion of testing.

in any respect

considers , the

ct on any item being of such a nature that the requirements of this n, such item is to be replaced

nd Testing Program

rehensive Inspection and Testing Programme during of carrying out the

omprehensive out and furnish

losed Switchgear

ssemblies. transformers, and

ied in this tment chambers

17.8.1.1.1 Routine Tests

rdance with the requirements of EN 62271 - 200 or 62271 - 203 as applicable. The interchangeability feature of identical units, together with the interlocking provided for preventing units of different ratings being inter-changed shall be demonstrated. Supply voltage variations for auxiliary devices shall be in accordance with the requirements of this Specification. Fluid leakage tests and partial discharge tests shall be included for gas-filled switchgear.

should also bear the Contract reference and the Purchaser's name.

The Engineer shall countersign the test certificates from all works and site tests if found to be satisfactory and retain two copies.

The test certificates shall be grouped by substation subon a circuit-by-circuit basis and shall be compiled into volumes complete withincluded in the appropriate Operation and Maintenance manuals.

So that the records may be uas soon as possible after com

17.7 REJECTION OF PLANT

If any item fails to comply with the requirements of this Specificationwhatsoever at any stage of manufacture, test, erection or on completion at Site, the Engineer may reject the item, or defective component thereof, whichever henecessary, and after adjustment or modification as directed by the EngineerContractor shall submit the item for further inspection and/or test.

In the event of a defeSpecification cannot be fulfilled by adjustment or modificatioby the Contractor, at his own expense, to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer.

17.8 LIST OF TESTS

Following is the list of the tests at the manufacturer's works and at site.

17.8.1 Manufacturer’s Inspection a

The Contractor shall carry out a compmanufacture of plant. The Contractor shall allow in his Tender for the cost following stages of inspection and/or test. These are not intended to form a cprogramme, as it is the Contractor's responsibility to draw up and carryevidence of "type tests" on certain items of equipment.

17.8.1.1 Metal-Enc

The requirements of this section are intended to cover complete switchgear aComponent parts such as circuit breakers, isolators, current and voltageinstruments shall have already been submitted to separate tests as specifSpecification. Additional pressure tests are specified however for the comparof gas-insulated switchgear.

In acco



Each pressurised chamber of gas-insulated switchgear shall be subject to a hafter completion of all welding and machinery operations for a period of 15 mishall be no sign of leakage or undue strain during the test and no permanentpressure has been released. The test pressure shall be not less than 1.5 tipressure of the compartment or as may be varied to the requirement of regulations of the

ydraulic test nutes. There

distortion after mes the design

the satisfaction of the Engineer.

akers

and EN 62271 - 1 together with any , leakage

circuit-breakers.

pproved by the Engineer.

n integral part.

fered shall be es to the requirements of EN 62271 - 100 evidence of

ank control, evidence must be provided

relevant Standard.

tors and Earth Switches

ance with the requirements of EN 60168 and IEC 60273. The mechanical routine nsion test. The insulators shall withstand a load not less than 30% of for 3 seconds, without failure or loosening of fittings.

tine test on ltrasonic wave

d 50 MHz. The test shall be made along the axis of the insulator

In accordance with the requirements of EN 60168. The tests shall be carried out on a sample of 0.5% with a minimum of three insulators. All insulators shall be submitted to test (1) to (4)

se 34. Porosity tests - test (5) - shall, be carried out on fragments of porcelain from insulators broken during other tests.

Galvanising tests - test (6) may be carried out on new unmounted fittings, selected from the manufacturer's stocks of identical material.

country of installation and to

17.8.1.2 Circuit Bre


In accordance with the requirements of EN 62271 - 100 tests carried out as a normal routine procedure by the manufacturer. In additiontests shall be carried out on gas-filled

The gas pressures, gas supply conditions, test connections and the measuring and recording of results are to be a

Circuit-breakers shall be tested complete with any housing of which they form a

17.8.1.2.2 Type Tests

In accordance with the Specification, the performance of the circuit-breaker ofcovered by existing type-test certificatwhich shall be submitted with the tender.

In the case of the 22kV circuit breaker for capacitor bthat the circuit breaker offered has passed satisfactorily the type tests for capacitor bank switching according to the

17.8.1.3 Disconnec

Routine and Type Tests - In accordance with EN 62271 - 102.

17.8.1.4 Post Insulators


In accordtest shall consist of a tethe tension failing load,

Where solid-core insulators are used an ultrasonic test shall be applied as a routhe insulating part of each insulator before assembly. The frequency of the ushall be between 0.8 MHz anand radially.

17.8.1.4.2 Sample Tests

of clau



17.8.1.5 Oil-Filled Vessels other than Cable Boxes

subjected to service operating pressure, or, if vented to atmosphere, to a pressure of 1 bar. They shall be

During this period no leakage shall occur.

Pressure Containers

withstand gas pressures in

tings permanently

inutes and

ect to material k in service, the test shall be made twice maximum working pressure.

ure plus pressure.

able to ceramic, treated paper, condenser and indoors or outdoors and may be with or without oil or other filling as


Hollow Insulators

able to porcelain insulators which are complete in themselves or form part of complete bushing assemblies.


In accordance with the requirements of EN 62155.




All oil-filled vessels other than cable boxes shall be filled with insulating oil and

left standing for a period of 24 hours.

17.8.1.6 Insulated


Containers made of insulating material which have in service to excess of atmospheric pressure shall each be tested hydraulically after all necessary grinding or machining work on them has been completed. For containers having fitattached thereto, the tests shall be made after the fittings have been added.

The tests shall be carried out at the pressure given below for a period of 15 mcomponents shall thereafter be marked in an agreed manner.

(a) For containers subject to static gas pressure loads only, and not subjmechanical shoc

(b) For containers subject to rapid changes of gas pressure, or to gas pressmechanical shock, the test shall be made three times maximum working

17.8.1.7 Bushings

The requirements of this section are applicother bushings for useappropriate.






17.8.1.8 Porcelain

The requirements of this section are applic



17.8.1.9 Current Transformers

cteristic.

ents of EN 60044.

e Tests

60044.

gnetic voltage transformers, it shall be demonstrated to the satisfaction of ischarge capability of the transformer is not less than the

e made on representative units to confirm the mechanical and thermal

tests as specified in by the Engineer.

. The reports

ation shall

ms, e.g. distance relays, auto reclose relays, shall be subject to such

bly and its settings and

Meters, Instruments, and Secondary


Tests shall be carried out to prove the correct functioning and wiring of the complete equipment to the requirements of the Specification.


In accordance with the requirements of EN 60044. These shall also include a check of the magnetisation chara


In accordance with the requirem

17.8.1.10 Voltage Transformers

17.8.1.10.1 Routin

In accordance with the requirements of EN



Additionally, for mathe Engineer that capacitance drating assigned or stated in the Schedules. Where deemed necessary by the Engineer discharge tests shall bstability of the windings.

17.8.1.11 Protective Equipment


All relays, instruments and other equipment shall be subjected to routine EN 60255, supplemented by additional tests as is considered necessary

Routine test reports shall be submitted for each relay and piece of equipmentshall record all measurements taken during the tests.

All apparatus directly connected to pilots which pass outside the switching stwithstand a high voltage test of 4 kV to earth for one minute. During the test all other windings, connections or contacts shall be earthed.

Composite relay systetesting to International Standards by approved manufacturers' works inspection and testing procedure as shall satisfactorily prove the correctness of the assemranges of operation.

17.8.1.12 Control and Indicating Panels, Marshalling Kiosks, Terminal Boxes,

All components shall have been tested in accordance with relevant International Standards/Recommendations prior to assembly in the complete equipment.



All secondary wiring including panel wiring and control circuits and all appadirectly thereto shall withstand a high voltage test

ratus connected of 2 kV to earth unless subject to other

h as detailed under Protective Equipment.

ts, which shall be carried

measurement on each phase of h.v. motors 5.0 kV and above.

ctors and heaters

f direction of rotation relative to the phase sequence of the supply.

surement at nominal voltage with check for balance with the machine the bedplate. All h.v. motors shall be run for 15 minutes at 120%

nominal voltage.

t.

ary excess torque capability.

ltage, with

ent of breakaway starting current. When this test is carried out at a nce shall be made for the effects

e value at nominal voltage.

speed for 5 minutes on h.v. motors and prototype

urement of insulation resistance.

(o) Vibration measurements when required.

(p) High voltage test.

17.8.1.13.2 Routine Tests - A.C. Motors

All other motors shall be submitted to test (a), (b), (c), (d), (e), (g), (i), (l), (o), and (p) of the above.

requirements suc

17.8.1.13 Motors

17.8.1.13.1 Type Tests - A.C. Motors

One motor of each type shall be submitted to the following tesout in accordance with EN 60034.

(a) Inspection, at 50% assembly stage on h.v. motors 1.0 kV and above.

(b) Loss tangent

(c) Measurement of winding resistance, resistance measurement detewhere applicable.

(d) Verification o

(e) No load loss meaunbolted from

(f) Temperature rise test.

(g) Locked rotor tes

(h) Verification of load characteristics and moment

(i) Verification of capability to produce rated output at minimum transient vomeasurement of slip.

(j) Measurement of breakaway, pull-up and pull-out torques.

(k) Measuremreduced voltage due to limitation of test plant, allowaof saturation when deducing th

(l) Overspeed test at 120% nominaldesigns. (Visual examination on high speed or highly stressed rotors and welded rotor assemblies).

(m) Dielectric tests including meas

(n) Noise measurement where applicable.



17.8.1.13.3 Type Tests - D.C. Motors

One motor or each type shall be submitted to the following tests which shall be carried out 60034 where appropriate.

ements of windings and heaters where applicable.

istics.

rise tests.

tests.

(k) The above tests shall be conducted on the first motor of each basic design although d (j) may be submitted for approval.

ests - D.C. Motors

Galvanising articles shall be tested in accordance with EN ISO 1460, EN ISO 1461 as other standard as may be approved. If evidence of white rust is

order the etermine the extent of damage,

ary.

Oil and Gas

from each consignment shall be tested before despatch and shall comply with the requirements of EN 60296 and IEC 60376, respectively.

.16 Handling Devices and Lifting Tackle


All handling devices and lifting tackle supplied for maintenance purposes under the contract shall, unless they are built into and form part of the equipment, be tested, marked and certificates of test provided.

in accordance with EN

(a) Insulation resistances.

(b) Resistance measur

(c) Winding polarity checks.

(d) Light run figures and balance.

(e) Load character

(f) Temperature

(g) Commutation

(h) Overspeed tests.

(i) High voltage test.

(j) Noise tests where applicable.

test certification for tests (f) an

(l) Where special series or ballast resistors are used, these shall be tested with the motor.

17.8.1.13.4 Routine t

Tests as (a), (b), (c), (d), (g), (h), (i) and (l) above.

17.8.1.14 Galvanising


appropriate, or such apparent upon receipt at site of bundled steel section, the Engineer shallContractor to make such tests as he deems necessary to dif any, and the remedial measures necess

17.8.1.15 Insulating


Samples of oil and gas

17.8.1



Lifting tackle built into and forming part of the equipment shall be operated with the maximum of the Engineer.

and Chargers

fied voltage this setting it shall be demonstrated that the

fied variations rrent.

he correct functioning

bmitted to a high voltage test of 2 kV AC for 1 minute.

lators/diodes are to be connected it shall be demonstrated load voltage is maintained within -10% to +10% of rated voltage for all

nce with the appropriate International

ordance with EN 60439.

17.8.1.19

ersion in water t 3 kV rms AC between conductors and between each conductor and the

d maintained

istance e which shall be

connected to the armour shall be measured and shall be not less than that stated in the relevant Schedule.

nductor resistance - The DC resistance of each conductor shall be measured and shall be not greater than the figure stated in the relevant Schedule when corrected to 20°C.

(d) Armour resistance - The DC resistance of the armour shall be measured and shall be not greater than the figure stated in the relevant Schedule when corrected to 20°C.

working load to the satisfaction

17.8.1.17 Batteries


Battery charger routine tests according to EN 60146.

The normal low-rate (float) charge voltage shall be set in the works at the speciper cell when delivering 50% of rated load. Atcharger can maintain output voltage within the prescribed limits under the speciof input voltage and frequency and output load cu

The operation of the boost charge facility shall also be demonstrated. Tof all control indication and alarm devices shall be verified.

All secondary wiring shall be su

Where load voltage limiting reguand recorded that the stages of battery charging conditions.

17.8.1.18 Low Voltage Switchgear


Routine tests shall be carried out in accordaStandards/Recommendations. Routine tests shall include general inspection and electrical operation tests.

DC Switchboard routine tests in acc

Auxiliary Power and Control Cables


Routine tests in accordance with BS 6346.

17.8.1.19.1.1. PVC /XLPE –PE Insulated Auxiliary Cables

(a) Voltage test - Every drum of completed cable shall be tested without immfor 5 minutes aarmour which shall be earthed. The voltage shall be increased gradually anat the full value for 5 minutes.

(b) Insulation resistance - After completion of the voltage test the insulation resbetween each conductor and the remaining conductors in the cabl

(c) Co



(e) Insulation thickness - Measurements shall be made on representative samtaken not less than 0,30 m from the end of

ples or core every factory length of cable, and the method

representative samples taken not less that 0,150 m from the end of every factory length of cable, and the

(g) oversheath shall be spark tested in approved

onductors and hed. No breakdown of the

uctors connected to all conductors

en each ion of the e relevant

asured and the n the relevant

.

easured tors of the cable

and armour earthed. The mean value using alternating current and a suitable bridge shall be recorded.

(e) Capacitance unbalance - Measurement of pair to pair capacitance unbalance shall be made at a suitable audio frequency with all other conductors and any screen

and earthed. The measured value shall be divided by:

of measurement shall be approved by the Engineer.

(f) Extruded bedding and sheath thickness - Measurements shall be made on

method of measurements shall be approved by the Engineer.

Spark test on oversheath - The extruded manner.

17.8.1.19.1.2. Polyethylene (PE) Multipair Cables

(a) Voltage test - Every drum of completed cable shall be tested between cbetween all conductors and the armour which shall be eartinsulation shall occur. Between each conductor and remaining condthe armour which shall be earthed - 10 kV AC, for 1 minute. Between bunched and armour, which shall be earthed, - 15 kV AC for 1 minute.

(b) Insulation resistance - The insulation resistance shall be measured betweconductor and the other conductors connected to the armour after completvoltage test. The measured value shall not be less than that indicated in thSchedule.

(c) Conductor resistance - The DC resistance of the conductors shall be meresults when corrected to 20OC shall not be greater than the figures stated iSchedule

(d) Mutual capacitance of telephone pairs - The mutual capacitance shall be mbetween the two conductors of each telephone pair with other conduc

connected to the armour

21

21 ⎤⎡ ⎤⎡

500500 ⎥⎥⎦⎢

⎢⎣

⎥⎦⎢⎣+

where L is the length in meters.

urements shall be made at 5 kHz on carrier pairs. The

LL

(f) Mutual inductance - Measmeasured value shall be divided by:

21

21

50000 ⎥⎥⎦

⎤⎢⎡

⎥⎦⎤

⎢⎣⎡+

LL

where L is the length in meters.

(g) Voltage test on outercoverings - The PVC oversheath of complete cable shall withstand a spark test for one minute between the armour and the external conducting surface of the



PVC sheath. The voltage applied between electrode and armour shall be 6 kV AC per r 9 kV DC per mm of thickness.

Tests

per cent of drum

and sheath shall be in accordance with EN 60811. The cable shall include measurement of insulation and sheath thickness, armouring wires, cable diameter and make up of cable to comply

17.8.1.20 Optical Fibers

e carried out in accordance with procedures defined in ITU-T G.650

ine Tests

e carried out on completed cable lengths of XLPE insulated power e the following:

aving graphite or semiconductive coated over-sheaths:

f sheath thickness applied between the metallic layer beneath the oversheath and the outer

ct to a maximum of 25 kV.

tailed in IEC 60840 and supplements as :

nal check.

esistance of conductor.

(c) Measurement of cable diameters and thickness of insulation, screens, metallic sheath and over-sheath on a sample from each drum of cable.

(d) Check of dimensions and thickness of insulation, screens, metallic sheath and over-eath on a sample from each drum of cable.

(e) Measurement of insulation purity.

(f) Measurement of insulation concentricity.

mm of thickness o

17.8.1.19.2 Sample

(a) PVC Auxiliary Cables

(b) Polyethylene Multipair Cables.

Sample tests shall be carried out on the first length and on not less than 10lengths of cable supplied to the contract.

The method of testing insulationphysical examination ofdiameter and number ofwith the relevant Schedule particulars.

Factory testing shall bor EN 793 - 1.

17.8.1.21 132kV and 66kV XLPE Single Core Cables

17.8.1.21.1 Rout

Routine tests shall bcables in accordance with IEC 60840 and supplements and shall includ

(a) High Voltage test

(b) Partial discharge test

(c) Electrical test on cables h

The oversheath shall withstand a d.c. voltage test equal to 8 kV per mm o

conducting coating for one minute subje

17.8.1.21.2 Special Regular Tests

The Contractor shall carry out the special tests deappropriate to the type of cable under test, and shall include the following

(a) Conductor examination and dimensio

(b) Measurement of electrical r

sh



(g) Measurement of moisture content in extruded insulation and screen, using the on method or other equivalent method.

f Semi-Conducting Screens.

n shrinkage test.

e Tests

ccordance

ering on cables must have been subjected to abrasion, penetration and IEC 60229 during the type approval programme of tests.

val tests must be provided

te IEC d in accordance with the relevant clauses of this Specification.

out in accordance with the IEC 60840.

Evidence of having satisfactorily passed the relevant Type approval tests must be

ns shall be tested in accordance with EN 62271-209

o assess the

Cables of similar construction are regarded as those having the same type and manufacturing process of insulation material, the same form of conductor (stranded or solid, circular or shaped), and the same forms of semi-conducting screens.

Repetition of the sequential type tests is not necessary on account of differences in the protective layers applied over the screened cores, unless these would be likely to have a

ant effect on the results of the tests, taking into account that the prime purpose is to test the electrical performance of the electrical system.

Coulometric Kart Fisher Titrati

(h) Measurement of screen protrusions.

(i) Volume Resistivity o

(j) Insulatio

(k) Hot set test.

(l) Measurement of capacitance

(m) Water penetration test.

17.8.1.21.3 Typ

The cable shall have satisfactorily passed type approval tests generally in awith the IEC 60840.

The outercovsaline bath tests in accordance

Evidence of having satisfactorily passed the relevant type approwith the Tender.

17.8.1.22 Power Cable Accessories

Accessories shall be subject to routine tests in line with the appropriaRecommendation anRoutine tests shall include material and dimensional checks on samples of accessories.

Type tests shall be carried

provided with the Tender.

Indoor SF6 terminatio

17.8.1.22.1 Range of approval

17.8.1.22.1.1. General

The sequential type tests, which are primarily electrical tests, are intended tperformance of the cable.

signific



17.8.1.22.1.2. Range

If the sequential type tests have been carried out on one conductor size, in 300-1200 mm2, the results should be regarded as valid

the range for cables of the same type having

tests carried out successfully on cables with shaped conductors should be cular conductors,

lts of tests on cables with stranded aluminium conductors or stranded copper ted as valid for similar cables with stranded conductors of the

Routine Tests

tine tests in accordance with EN

(a) Correct functioning of the tap-changer and driving mechanism.

edance voltage on all tap positions.

capacitances windings-to-earth, and between windings.

prise:

withstand

• lighting impulse withstand for line terminals

% BIL kVp

On non-uniformly insulated windings tests shall comprise:

• short duration power frequency voltage withstand

• induced line to earth overvoltage withstand test

• lightning impulse withstand for line terminals

• lightning impulse chopped wave, at 115% BIL kVp

other conductor sizes in that range, whether copper or aluminium.

The results of accepted as valid also for cables, otherwise of similar type but, having cirbut not vice versa.

The resuconductors should be accepother metal.

17.8.1.23 Power Transformer

17.8.1.23.1

All power transformers shall be subjected to the following rou60076.

(b) Measurement of winding resistance on all tap positions and phases.

(c) Measurement of ratio, polarity and phase relationship.

(d) Measurement of imp

(e) Measurement of Zero Sequence Impedance

(f) Determination of

(g) Measurement of load loss.

(h) Measurement of no load loss and no load current at Un and at +5% Un and at +10% Un.

(i) Insulation resistance

(j) Dielectric withstand tests.

On uniformly insulated windings tests shall com

• induced over voltage withstand

• short duration power frequency voltage

• lightning impulse chopped wave, at 115



• induced power frequency overvoltage withstand test wmeasurement. This shall be performe

ith partial discharge d in symmetrical three-phase

.

tests prior to the

cipal and on

3. The procedure shall be as required by EN 60076 Part 3, Clause 13, the impulse ely to each line terminal. Negative polarity

e:

tion.

iii. One reduced chopped wave voltage application.

wave voltage applications.

/or transferred voltage are to be taken and included in the records.

rds are to be made available to the Engineer at the time

shings during the chopped wave tests is not permitted.

e transformers shall again be

(a) Temperature Rise Test - The test shall be in accordance with EN 60076, Part 2. Temperature-rise tests shall be conducted on the tapping corresponding to the maximum losses.

(b) Sound Level Test - A sound pressure level test in accordance to EN 60076, Part 10 shall be carried out.

asurements of the harmonics at the no-load current

connection on completion of all the above tests

The following are noted regarding the impulse voltage withstand tests:

1. The transformer shall have been subjected to the above routine impulse voltage withstand tests.

2. Impulse test on regulating windings shall be carried out on the printhe extreme tap positions.

test voltages being applied successivis to be used throughout the tests.

The sequence of voltage applications shall b

i. One reduced impulse calibration test.

ii. One 100 per cent full wave voltage applica

iv. Two 115 per cent chopped

v. Two 100 per cent full wave voltage applications.

Oscillographic records of the applied voltage and neutral current and

Copies of the oscillographic recoof the tests for examination.

External flashover of the bu

At the conclusion of the impulse voltage withstand tests, thsubjected to the routine tests (f) and (g).

(k) Sweep Frequency Response Analysis

17.8.1.23.2 Type and Special Tests

These tests shall be carried out on one transformer of each size and type.

(c) Me



17 trol Equipment

addition the mechanical test shall be carried out at rated voltage and no load.

Test Certificates shall be submitted confirming compliance with EN 60214 except that evidence of the service duty type test shall be in excess of 100,000 operations.

sts as necessary on control scheme to cover the principal modes of remote and and identification. These tests shall be performed with the tap

co

mbled is to be tested for one minute at 2,000V AC between core the

between the structural steelwork to prove that the core is earthed through the e point only.

Magnetisation curves shall be supplied by the manufacturer with the test reports based on the nal and on calculated values for nominal voltages

17.8.1.23.5 Cable Boxes

17 e Tests

jected in withstand without leakage, a hydraulic

2 2 er is the greater,

17.8.1.23.6.2. Type Tests

Type Test Certificates can be produced for tests carried out on similar equipment, the following tests are to be included for tanks and conservators.

(a) Vacuum Test - The equipment is to withstand a full vacuum of 760mm of mercury when empty of oil. The permanent deflection of plates or stiffeners on removal of vacuum is not to exceed the following values:

.8.1.23.3 Voltage Con

17.8.1.23.3.1. Routine Tests

Each finished tap changer is to be subjected to the routine tests specified in EN 60214 but in

17.8.1.23.3.2. Type Tests

17.8.1.23.3.3. Sequence Tests

Proving tesupervisory control, alarmchanger installed in the transformer and temporarily connected by cables to the remote

ntrol panel.

17.8.1.23.4 Magnetic Circuit


Each core completely assebolts, side plates, structural steelwork and core at the core and coil stage. Aftertransformer is tanked and completely assembled, a further test is to be appliedcore and the earthedremovable link, at on

test values for voltages up to 110% of nomiabove 110% up to 140%.


To meet the requirements as specified in EN 50299

17.8.1.23.6 Tanks

.8.1.23.6.1. Routin

Oil Leakage - All tanks, conservators and oil filled compartments which are subservice or during maintenance to oil pressure are topressure test equal to 69kN/m or the normal pressure plus 34kN/m whichevfor 24 hours during which time no leakage or oil ingress into normally oil free spaces shall occur.

Unless



Length of Plat Permane ent Deflection

3.17mm

69kN/m2 or hichever is the greatest. The permanent deflection of

ressure is not to exceed the value stated in respect of e preceding paragraph.

Routine Tests

kage - When subject to an internal oil pressure of 207kN/m2 for fifteen minutes

(d) er service conditions

s and casing

s shall be subjected to the routine tests specified in EN 60044 - 1.

e and Installation

ry Transformer

e following tests in accordance with EN 60076.

voltage

(d) Measurement of zero sequence impedance

(e) Measurement of load loss

(f) Measurement of no load loss

(g) Short duration power frequency withstand test

(h) Induced overvoltage withstand test

Less than 1300mm

1300 to 2500mm 6.5mm

Greater than 2500mm 12.7mm

(b) Pressure Test - The equipment is to withstand a pressure corresponding tothe normal pressure plus 34kN/m2 wplates or stiffeners on removal of pthe vacuum test in th

17.8.1.23.7 Gas and Oil – Actuated Relays

17.8.1.23.7.1.

(a) Oil Lea

(b) Gas collection

(c) Oil Surge

Performance test und

(e) Voltage - 2kV for one minute between electrical circuit

17.8.1.23.8 Galvanizing


To the requirements of EN 10244 or EN 729 whichever is applicable.

17.8.1.23.9 Current Transformers

All current transformerTriplicate Copies of all test records should be submitted to the Engineer. Also one copy of each test record should be included in the relative Operating, MaintenancManuals.

17.8.1.24 Earthing and Auxilia


All transformers shall be subjected to th

(a) Measurement of Winding Resistance

(b) Ratio, polarity and phase relationships

(c) Measurement of impedance



(i) Insulation resistance of each winding

transformer cluded in the Contract price. This test shall take into account

d continuous operation at

and (full wave) to be carried out on each transformer.

ance with the or shall provide all

n (if Site Engineer.

ording to this required) shall

than one month in advance of the planned test.

oval by the thorised local Body and

ble. Tests al working age

ement of site test equipment, to

ements should

and with ord can be

ance curves ed by the Contractor to the Engineer as soon as possible after completion of

shall be supplied formation given

hall be sufficient to identify the material or equipment to

st sheets if found to be satisfactory and return one copy to the Contractor.

ontractor shall subsequently provide to the Engineer six bound copies of all site test sheets as final records. The test sheets shall be grouped by substation sub-divided by plant type and further on a circuit-by-circuit basis.

So that the records may be used for maintenance tests the final records shall be provided as soon as possible after completion of testing.

17.8.1.24.2 Type and Special Tests

(a) Temperature rise test - A temperature rise test shall be carried out on one and the costs shall be intemperature rise due to both the specified earth fault current anCMR of the auxiliary winding.

(b) Impulse voltage withst

17.8.2 Tests at Site

Tests on completion of erection shall be carried out by the Contractor in accordrelevant Clauses of the General Conditions of the Contract. The Contractnecessary test equipment to carry out the site tests and certificates of calibratioapplicable) by an approved authority shall be submitted for the approval of the

The Contractor shall submit a written programme of tests and checks accClause for the approval of the Engineer. Test sheets and testing procedures (if be forwarded to the site engineer not less

The Contractor shall provide experienced test personnel subject to the apprEngineer (CV's shall be submitted) and conditions imposed by any authe local laws ruling at that time on such practice.

The testing shall be carried out during normal working hours as far as practicawhich involve existing apparatus and outages may be carried out outside normhours. The Contractor shall give sufficient notice to allow for the necessary outarrangements to be made in conformity with the testing programme.

The Contractor shall advise the Engineer in writing at the time of commencerection of the site supplies which will be required for the operation of theenable the Engineer to arrange accordingly or to agree with alternative arrangthis be necessary.

The Contractor shall record the results of the tests clearly, on an approved formclear reference to the equipment and items to which they refer, so that the recused as the basis for maintenance tests by the Purchaser during the working life of the equipment. Triplicate copies of all Site test records, test certificates and performshall be providany group of tests. These test records, certificates and performance curvesfor all tests, whether or not they have been witnessed by the Engineer. The inin such test certificates and curves swhich the certificate refers and should also bear the Contract reference.

The Engineer shall countersign the te

The C



Initial energising and all subsequent 'live' tests will be directed by the Engineer out jointly by the Purchaser, Contractor and Engineer. They will be subject to standard safety procedures and all operational switching will be carried outaccording to a detailed programme, which the Purchaser will prepare and wagreed in advance between all three parties. During these 'live' tests the Contractor shall

and carried the Purchaser's

by the Purchase hich will be

n the instruction

nded settings uipment, not less than three (3) months

her contract,

eets in cases st results.

nged conditions

to submit proposals for dielectric tests to be carried out at site and d necessary.

made and shall include a check of the completeness, correctness and condition of earth connections,

ances, painted surfaces, cables, wiring, pipework, ll be made for oil

A check shall be e.g. blanking plates,

h voltage circuits

roposed test voltage.

s and submitted to ntrolled clean

an alternative site test comprising an impulse test followed by a partial discharge test may be acceptable. The Contractor shall submit details of any alternative site test

ures at the time of tendering.

Dielectric tests shall be carried out on all auxiliary and Control Circuits.

The resistance of the main busbars and connections shall be measured and recorded.

Contact resistance tests shall be carried out with not less than 15 amperes passing through the contacts.

remain responsible for the performance of his Plant.

No tests as agreed under the programme of tests shall be waived except upoor agreement of the Engineer in writing.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval a list of recommefor all protection and other types of automatic eqbefore such equipment is required in commercial service. Where the settings involve discrimination with settings of an existing network or plant supplied under anotthe relevant information will be supplied to the Contractor.

Details of the test equipment and instruments used shall be noted in the test shwhere the instrument or equipment characteristics can have a bearing on the te

The testing requirements detailed under this Specification may be subject to some variation upon the instruction or agreement of the Engineer where necessitated by chaat Site or by differing design, manufacture, or construction techniques or by latest revisions, if any, of the Purchaser's testing procedures.

The Tenderer is required to include in his price the costs of such tests and of such equipment as deeme

17.8.2.1 Main Switchgear and Ancillary Equipment

17.8.2.1.1 General Checks

A general check of all the main switchgear and ancillary equipment shall be

labelling, arcing ring and horn gaps, clearvalves, blanking plates and all other auxiliary and ancillary items. Checks shaand gas leaks and that insulators are clean and free from external damage. made that loose items which are to be taken over by the Purchaser, tools, spares, are in order and are correctly stored for taking over.

17.8.2.1.2 Metal Enclosed Switchgear Tests

Following completion of erection of GIS metal enclosed switchgear all higshall be subjected to a high voltage AC withstand test. The Contractor shall submit with his tender his proposals for carrying out this test including the p

Provided that the switchgear is fully assembled at the manufacturers worka full AC voltage test and provided that site installation is carried out under coconditions



All electrical and mechanical interlocks shall be proved. Checks shall be made on local and

local and remote trip/close. Circuit-breaker timing tests shall be

calibration test certificate for all test equipment.

ontact ease of

s and operation cts.

al and remote overload and

single-phasing tests.

the opening and anual locking

nufacturer's transformer for its

haracteristic up to ensure that the

lly demagnetised before commencing the test.

re to be carried out by the Contractor. The primary injection er.

t transformers of

or secondary output

llowing tests shall be carried out on electromagnetic type voltage transformers:

(a) Insulation tests at 500V to earth and between windings. All voltage transformers shall be checked for polarity phasing and for secondary output.

(b) In the case of capacitor voltage transformers used as carrier coupling units tests will be required on the coupling equipment and on the high frequency earth rods and their connections where these are included under the Contract.

remote indications and operation of auxiliary contacts.

Operational tests will includecarried out on all circuit- breakers.

Testing of the gas system shall be carried out to prove the gas quantity, its dryness and its dielectric strength. The gas leakage shall also be measured.

All test equipment shall be provided by the Contractor who shall also provide current

17.8.2.1.3 Disconnectors and Earthing Switches

Manually operated equipment shall be subject to operational tests to confirm cpressures, contact resistance, synchronism of operation of all phases and theoperation.

Checks shall be made on interlocks, local, remote and supervisory indicationof auxiliary conta

Motorised equipment shall be tested to prove the motor operation, including locoperation. Timing tests shall also be carried out. Motors shall be subjected to

Earth switches and maintenance earthing devices shall be tested to confirm closing sequences and checks shall be made on interlocks, indications and mdevices.

17.8.2.1.4 Current Transformers

The magnetisation characteristic of all current transformers shall be checked at a sufficient number of points to identify the current transformers with reference to the maestimated design curve and to determine the suitability of the current intended duty. It may be noted that it is not normally necessary to check the cto the knee-point for this purpose. Special measures may have to be takencore is fu

Primary current injection tests amethods employed for a particular installation are to be agreed with the Engine

Local primary injection tests are to be carried out to establish the ratio and polarity or current transformers as a group, care being taken to prove the identity of currensimilar ratio.

17.8.2.1.5 Voltage Transformers

All voltage transformers shall be checked for polarity, ratio, phasing and f(for CVT it shall be energised from the primary voltage side).

The fo



17.8.2.1.6 Interlocking

All interlocking arrangements both electrical and mechanical shall be fully checked and e fully proven on each circuit.

t

that the

r ratings and nd charger alarm systems and to confirm battery capacity.

be recorded.

eters

r direction and ecks shall be

operation and rotation. The meters will subsequently be curate and out of limits

issioning defect.

erred to above so far as is ements and

eability of components. Insulation tests shall be carried out with a 1kV test set.

nd standby

Insulation tests shall be carried out with a 500V insulation test set. Check earthing

ponents shall checked.

t on the batteries and chargers to confirm the charger ratings and

orded (for each

The insulation to earth of the complete DC installation shall be tested.

17.8.2.2 Power Cables

The Contractor is responsible to carry out all necessary after installation tests according to IEC 60840. In addition the testing program shall include impedance measurements. The Contractor shall submit at least one month before the commencement of tests detailed testing program for Engineer’s approval. A full commissioning report in triplicate shall be

tested. The interlocking for on load transfer shall b

17.8.2.1.7 Batteries and Battery Charging Equipmen

The insulation to earth of the complete DC installation shall be tested.

Battery discharge tests shall be carried out to confirm the battery rating and conditioning charge has been successfully carried out.

Tests shall be carried out on the batteries and chargers to confirm the chargeadjustment and on the battery a

The specific gravity and cell voltages of the batteries when fully charged shall

17.8.2.1.8 Instruments and M

Instruments and instrument transformer circuits shall be checked for polarity ofor calibration including any interposing transformers or transducers. These chmade on all current transformer ratios.

Meters shall be checked for correcttaken to the employer's test laboratory and if they are found to be inacwill be dealt with as a defect during the guarantee period rather than a comm

17.8.2.1.9 Low Voltage Switchboards

General testing and inspection shall be carried out as refapplicable. It shall include checks on interlocking, changeover arranginterchangAttention is drawn to the requirement for functional testing and timing testing on circuit- breakers and AC and DC circuits associated with standby auxiliary supplies agenerating sets, particularly where automatic operation is specified.

connections.

Shutters, interlocking, earthing procedures and the interchangeability of combe

17.8.2.1.10 DC Supply Equipment

Tests shall be carried ouadjustment, the battery and charger alarm systems and battery capacity.

The open-circuit cell voltages of the batteries when fully charged shall be reccell).



submitted before handing over the project. All costs of these tests shall be borne by the

but before the test the voltage

for 1 minute akdown.

- The insulation resistance of each completed cable circuit shall be

m the following tests,

for each individual fibre of the link.

lectometer. results shall be

presented in graphical form with graduated axes.

to ensure that the fibres under test are outside the dead s reason an appropriate length of fibre pigtail shall be

tests shall be performed:

tance tests between core and tank, between primary and secondary

g oil to EN 60296.

tio.

ing temperature devices.

(g) Tap Changer:

sistance of control and motor circuits.

• Raise-lower switch in local and remote position over complete range.

Operation of limit switches and motor protection cut-outs.

(h) Prove control circuits and remote indication and alarms.

(i) Calibration of automatic voltage control equipment.

(j) Cooling Equipment:

Contractor.

17.8.2.3 Auxiliary Cables

(a) Voltage Test - Each 600/1000V cable shall after installation and glandingconnecting tails to equipment terminals be tested at 3,5kV DC Duringshall be increased gradually to the full value and maintained continuously between conductors and between each conductor and armour without bre

(b) Insulation resistance measured and recorded.

17.8.2.4 Optical Fibers

On hand over of the optical fibre optic link the contractor shall perforto be carried out for each individual fibre link to confirm acceptability and compliance with this specification.

(c) Link attenuation at 1.300nm and 1.550nm

(d) Fibre attenuation profile measurement using an optical time domain refThis test shall be carried out from each end of each fibre link. Test

Precautions are to be takenzones of the OTDR. For thiinserted between the launch end and the fibre to be tested.

17.8.2.5 Transformers

The following

(a) Insulation resiswindings and to earth.

(b) Voltage withstand tests on insulatin

(c) Voltage ra

(d) Phase relationship.

(e) Magnetisation characteristics of current transformers of wind

(f) Calibration of winding temperature devices.

• Insulation re

•



• Megger insulation resistance in control circuits, motors, pumps and fans as

positions.

• Check the automatic starting and stopping of power cooling devices and the

pressed air.

measurement. functions operate.

before energisation e the last test on the transformer.

hould be carried out on the earthing transformers as far as practicable.

s to:

(b) Establish that the correct equipment has been supplied and installed.

ipment have been correctly interconnected.

ormance of schemes designed on the basis of calculation, e.g. differential

allowing the

Insulation Resistance Test at not less than 1000V AC for one minute or 500V DC are to be s to ensure that

ition. The insulation of all circuits shall be checked before relay contacts,

iring checks for jointing, fuse

ment which may be damaged by the application of test voltage shall have the appropriate terminals short-circuited.

circuit wiring diagram. This may be done by using bells or buzzers or DC voltage supplied from the station battery. Where it is found necessary during pre-commissioning work to effect site modifications to the secondary wiring, site copies of the appropriate schematic and wiring diagrams shall be suitably marked as agreed with the Engineer before the circuit is commissioned.

appropriate.

• Check operation of fan and pump motors from local and remote

associated indication.

(k) Check the Buchholz protection relays for alarm and trip operation using com

(l) Calibrate the oil temperature indicators including the winding temperatureProve that the cooling-on, alarm and trip

(m) Sweep Frequency Response Analysis – This should be carried outand it should b

Before carrying out any tests the transformer should be dried by means of approved methods, if necessary.

The above tests s

17.8.2.6 Protection, Control, Alarms, Measurement, and Indication Equipment

17.8.2.6.1 General

Sufficient tests shall be performed on the relays and protection scheme

(a) Establish that the equipment has not suffered damage during transit.

(c) Confirm that the various items of equ

(d) Confirm perfprotection.

(e) Provide a set of figures for comparison with future maintenance valuescondition of the equipment to be determined.

17.8.2.6.2 Wiring

carried out on all AC and DC protection, control, alarm and indication circuitwiring is in a satisfactory condproceeding with other tests and it is also essential that all AC wiring is proved,auxiliary contacts, etc., being operated to verify this. Visual inspection and wcompleteness shall be made before testing commences on cable glands, cableor circuit-breaker ratings and small panel items such as indicating lamps.

Static equip

Inter-relay, inter-unit and cubicle wiring carried out at site is to be checked to the appropriate



Loop resistance measurements are to be made on all current transformer circuvalues are required for current tran

its. Separate sformer and lead resistance and all measurements are to

diagrams.

be examined to ensure that they are in proper working condition and belled and that the relay case, cover, glass and gaskets are in

g.

Secondary injection shall be carried out on all AC relays, using voltage and current of n and range

e intervals.

s, the points of injection for shall be across the relay and stabilizing resistance. The fault setting

appropriate onnected.

e primary injection eer.

mers as a group, care being taken to prove the identity of current transformers of similar ratio.

establish the value of current necessary to produce operation of the

and transducers shall be tested and calibrated to the complete

Tests are to be carried out to prove the correctness of all DC polarities, the operating levels of ays and the correct functioning of DC relay schemes, selection and control switching,

indicating and alarms.

17.8.2.7 On Load Tests

In view of the hazards inherent in these tests, they shall be carried out under the direct supervision of the Engineer and/or the Employer.

be recorded on lead resistance

17.8.2.6.3 Mechanical Inspection

All panel equipment is to correctly adjusted, correctly lagood order and properly fittin

17.8.2.6.4 Secondary Injection

sinusoidal waveform and rated power frequency to confirm satisfactory operatioadjustment.

When testing distance relays a switched voltage and current input should be used to simulate fault conditions.

The polar characteristics of all distance protection shall be recorded at 30 degre

For circulation current protection employing voltage operated relayrelay voltage setting tests for this type of protection is to be established by secondary injection, where it is impracticable to ascertain this value by primary injection. Injection is to be made across therelay bus wires with all associated relays, setting resistors and CTs c

17.8.2.6.5 Primary Injection

Primary current injection tests are to be carried out by the Contractor. Thmethods employed for a particular installation are to be agreed with the Engin

Tests are to be carried out as follows:

(a) Local primary injection to establish the ratio and polarity of current transfor

(b) Overall primary injection to prove correct inter-connections between current transformer groups and associated relays.

(c) Fault setting tests torelays.

17.8.2.6.6 Instruments and Meters

All instruments, meterssatisfaction of the Engineer.

17.8.2.6.7 DC Operations

DC rel



An operation and stability test shall be carried out for on load commissioning of unit type

ll be carried out to prove the characteristics of protective systems with

ervice to ensure ed as well as to ltage readings

ections between the

ltage or current respectively may not be proof of the

n completion shall be subject to discussion and agreement but shall in general include ted.

r no load condition, normal system voltage, for 48

DA).

circuits under

(d) Operational tests on synchronising equipment.

protection where

(g) Phasing checks on LV AC systems, VT supplies and main systems.

rmer fans in operation under the minimum

PLAN AND PROCEDURES

d by the Contractor and shall be approved by the

ernational Standards. For each of the following stages of the work, the acceptance criteria shall be stated.

(b) Stages of inspection shall cover the following:

• Tests to review or approve certification of material.

• Review and approval of manufacturing procedures.

protection.

Test for restraint shadirectional characteristics.

On load checks shall be made after the protection gear has been placed in sthat all connections and test links have been replaced and test leads removconfirm the integrity of the current transformer circuits. Where necessary voshall be taken at the terminals on each relay to ensure that loop connrelays are complete. Special attention shall be paid to broken delta voltages and residual current circuits where zero vocompleteness of the circuit.

17.8.2.8 Tests on Completion

Tests othe following after all erection and site tests have been satisfactorily comple

(a) Energization of all equipment undehours.

(b) Verification of correct indication of all instruments and meters under varying loads and voltage (Local Displays, HMI and SCA

(c) End to end tests of differential protection, intertripping and communicationslive line conditions.

(e) Directional tests on distance, and directional overcurrent and earth fault appropriate.

(f) On-load stability tests of unit protection systems.

(h) Measurement of noise level with the transfoambient noise conditions.

The exact nature of the tests and presentation of the results shall be to the approval of the Engineer.

17.9 INSPECTION

An Inspection Schedule shall be prepareEngineer.

The Schedule shall include:

(a) Int



• Witnessing test or review and approval of certification of operator's qualification to

ation of components.

s, system performance tests and soak test.

ng proposals and documentation for shipment.

tion program

his inspection or cturing shall

scretion.

gineer before dispatch from the works.

The approval by the Engineer of any such inspection and tests shall not prejudice the right of the Employer to reject the plant if it fails to comply with the Specification when erected or to give complete satisfaction in service.

carry out the work required.

• Visual and dimensional examin

• Pressure tests on casings and vessels.

• Non-destructive examination of materials in progress.

• Functional tests on sub-assemblies, type tests on complete unit

• Examination of painting, packi

The Engineer will indicate the inspection requirements on the agreed inspecin accordance with the following paragraphs:

(a) Hold point which requires a mandatory inspection by the Engineer. Ttest shall be witnessed by the Engineer and further progress in manufanot be made until the plant is approved by the Engineer.

(b) Inspection or test of material may be carried out by the Engineer at his di

(c) Certification of material and functional test shall be approved by the En



18. ITEMS OF EQUIPMENT

quipment and, of the

ude in his supply and in s, which are necessary to meet the

t contained in this section is the following:

witchgear

gear

mation System

• Control Cubicles and Panels

ntrol and Data Acquisition Signalling (SCADA)

iary Power and Multicore Cables up to 132kV

ors

etailed in this section there shall be provided the

detail or not.

uit Breakers

Transformers

• 132kV & 22-11kV Neutral Current Transformers

• 132kV Voltage Transformers

• 132kV Surge Arresters

• 132kV Connections

• 132kV Structures

The Items of Equipment are listed in the following paragraphs.

The descriptions given in the items of this Section cover the main items of efurthermore, are not exhaustive in their description of the full requirementsSpecifications. It is, therefore, the Tenderer's responsibility to inclthe prices to be quoted in Schedule of Prices all itemfull requirements of the Specification and the General Conditions of Contract.

The main equipmen

• 132kV and 66kV Outdoor S

• GIS Switch

• 22kV Indoor Metalclad Switchgear

• Transformers

• Microprocessor based Substation and Energy Auto

Protection and Bay

• Supervisory Co

• Main and Auxil

• LV AC Distribution Board

• DC Battery Systems

• Fire Extinguishers

• Ambient Temperature Sens

18.1 132 and 66kV OUTDOOR TYPE SWITCHGEAR

To complete each item of equipment dnecessary terminal boards, screens, guards, labels, cable gland plates and all necessary sundries whether specified in

The Items of Equipment comprise:

• 132kV Triple Pole Circ

• 132kV Isolators and Earthing Switches

• 132kV Current



• 66kV Voltage Transformers

nuous rating of 800A, n 3.1 –

ble for the application of ll be complete with

ll be housed the electrical controls and

s, externally

nder complete technical details and tests carried red, particularly in relation to oil pressure loss.

A rating.

but having 2500A rating

for outdoor installation, 800A continuous rating, complete with manual operating mechanism with mechanical and

witches, mechanism box heater and all

ith site rating of 1600A

of 2500A

of 3150A

riven for local, remote and supervisory control, fitted with a removable emergency manual operation facility.

(b) isolator, as item 18.1.2.2(a) but with site rating of 1600A

(c) isolator, as item 18.1.2.2 (a) but with site rating of 2000A

(d) isolator, as item 18.1.2.2 (a) but with site rating of 2500A

(e) isolator, as item 18.1.2.2 (a) but with site rating of 3150A

• 66kV Surge Arresters

18.1.1 132kV Triple Pole Circuit Breaker

(a) 132 kV triple-pole, circuit breaker, of the SF6 type, having a contia symmetrical breaking capacity as specified in the drawings and Sectio“Design criteria” of the specifications. It shall be suitathree-phase auto-reclosure when required. The circuit breaker, shaa 110V dc motor wound, spring charged operating mechanism.

In a weatherproof control local kiosk shamechanical and electrical interlocking arrangements, auxiliary switches, local control switch, local/remote control selection changeover switch, internal heatermounted single phase AC plug and socket outlet.

Circuit breaker operating mechanisms of hydraulic type shall be considered provided that the Tenderer submits with his Teout on identical equipment to that offeManual facilities must be provided for recharging the system.

(b) As for item 18.1.1(a) but having 1600A rating.

(c) As for item 18.1.1(a) but having 2000

(d) As for item 18.1.1(a)

(e) As for item 18.1.1(a) but having 3150A rating

18.1.2 Isolators and Earthing Switches

18.1.2.1 132kV Isolator

(a) 132 kV isolator, triple-pole, open type, suitable

electrical interlocking arrangements, auxiliary snecessary multicore cable gland plates.

(b) isolator, as item 18.1.2.1(a) but w

(c) isolator, as item 18.1.2.1 (a) but with site rating of 2000A

(d) isolator, as item 18.1.2.1 (a) but with site rating

(e) isolator, as item 18.1.2.1 (a) but with site rating

18.1.2.2 132kV Isolator (power driven)

(a) 132 kV isolator as item 18.1.2.1(a) but power d



18.1.2.3 132kV Isolator (power driven) with Earth Switch

(a) 132 kV isolator as item 18.1.2.1 (a) but complete with triple-pole, earth sisolator power driven for local,

witch, with the remote and supervisory control, fitted with a removable

of 1600A

of 2000A

(d) isolator, as item 18.1.2.3 (a) but with site rating of 2500A

rresters for outdoor use housed in polymeric housing, rated tructure mounting

e arrester monitoring units able to record:

rester

transceiver should be supplied, able to collect ents and transfer them to a computer for statistical analysis.

nuously rated tubular connections, clamps etc. n as shown in the tion Isolators, in

the end of the busbars for clamps associated with future extension.

(b) As for item 18.1.6.1.1(a) above but having 2000A rating

18.1.6.1.2 132kV Bus Coupler Bay Connections

(a) One 3 phase set of 132kV 3150A continuously rated tubular and conductor type connections, clamps, strain insulator sets, bimetal connections and all necessary sundries to complete one bus coupler bay as shown in the drawings

emergency manual operation facility.

(b) isolator, as item 18.1.2.3(a) but with site rating

(c) isolator, as item 18.1.2.3 (a) but with site rating

(e) isolator, as item 18.1.2.3 (a) but with site rating of 3150A

18.1.3 132kV Surge Arresters

Set of three Metal Oxide surge avoltage 120kV complete with insulating base for s

18.1.4 66kV Surge Arresters

Surge arresters as Item 18.1.3 but with rated voltage 60kV

18.1.5 Surge Arrester Monitoring Unit

Set of three surg

• Number of discharges

• Amplitude of surges together with date and time

• Leakage current

• Resistive current through the ar

For each substation a handheld cordlessthe monitoring unit measuremRelevant software should be included with the package.

18.1.6 Busbars and Connections

18.1.6.1 132kV Double Busbar Substations

18.1.6.1.1 132kV Double Busbar

(a) One 3 phase set of 132kV 3150 A contito establish the wrap-around double busbar system of the substatiorelevant drawings including busbars and connections to the Bus Secbusbars 'A' and 'B'. Sufficient provision shall be made at



(b) As for item 18.1.6.1.2(a) above but having 2000A rating

18.1.6.1.3 132kV 2500A Double Busbar Line/Cable Connection

One 3 phase set of 132kV 2500A continuously rated tubular and conductor t

s

ype connections, clamps, strain insulator sets, bimetal connections and all necessary sundries

.

r item 18.1.6.1.3 above but rated

nections

item 18.1.6.1.3 above but rated

detailed under item 18.1.6.1.3 above but rated with conductor type connections to the

minal bushing, as

continuously rated tubular and conductor type

the drawings.

having 2000A rating

cture.

– Type 2

ang mounting

s

continuously rated busbar connections complete with strain sets, clamps and all necessary fittings to complete the single busbar system, as shown in the drawings.

132kV 1600A Bus Section Bay Connections

One 3 phase set of 132 kV 1600 Amp continuously rated conductor type connections, clamps, bimetal connectors to complete one bus section bay in substation with conductor type busbars, as shown in the drawings.

to complete one Line/Cable bay as shown in the drawings

18.1.6.1.4 132kV 2000A Double Busbar Line/Cable Connections

One three phase set of connections etc, as detailed undeat 2000 A, to complete one Line/Cable bay as shown in the drawings

18.1.6.1.5 132kV 800A Double Busbar Line/Cable Con

One three phase set of connections etc, as detailed underat 800 A, to complete one Line/Cable bay as shown in the drawings

18.1.6.1.6 132kV 800A Double Busbar Transformer Connections

One three phase set of connections etc, asat 800 A, to complete one transformer bay,transformer, up to and including the clamp on the transformer 132kV tershown in the drawings

18.1.6.1.7 132kV Bus Section Bay Connections

(c) One 3 phase set of 132 kV 3150 Aconnections, clamps, strain insulator sets, bimetal connectors and all necessary sundries to complete one bus section bay in substation, as shown in

(d) As for item 18.1.6.1.7(a) above but

18.1.6.1.8 132kV Post Insulators – Type 1

One 132kV post insulator set complete with fixing bolts and steel structure suitable for upright mounting on the provided steel stru

18.1.6.1.9 132kV Post Insulators

One 132 kV post insulator set complete with fixing bolts suitable for underhon steel gantry.

18.1.6.2 132/66kV Single Busbar Substation

18.1.6.2.1 132kV 1600A Single Busbar

One 3 phase set of 132 kV 1600 A

18.1.6.2.2



18.1.6.2.3 132kV 800A Single Busbar Line/Cable Connections

One 3 phase set of connections etc, as detailed under item 18.1.6.2.2 to complete one Line/Cable bay up to and including the clamp on the overhead line conductoalternatively up to and including the stem of the respective cable sealing end, as shown in

r or

s detailed under item 18.1.6.2.2 to complete one luding the clamp on the transformer terminal bushing or

et complete with fixing bolts and steel structure suitable for ided steel structure.

sulators

Substation high level steel structure to support both the incoming overhead line feeder uctors, complete with fixing bolts, eye bolts etc

provided on the attached detailed

onductors, or mounting

underhang insulators where necessary for clearance purposes in accordance with the

Type 3

m in accordance

hich are

18.1.6.3.4 High Level Steel Structure – Type 4

Substation high level steel structure suitable for supporting two adjacent incoming overhead line feeders and substation strained conductors, complete with fixing bolts, eye

tc to enable attachment of line strain sets, and capable of being extended in future at both ends. Additional take off points to be provided on the beam to achieve specified down lead clearances. The structures should be suitable for extension on both ends for supporting in future new line feeders connected to the substation.

the drawings.

18.1.6.2.4 132kV 800A Single Busbar Transformer Connections

One 3 phase set of connections etc, atransformer bay up to and inccable sealing end, as shown in the drawings.

18.1.6.2.5 132kV Post Insulators

One 132 kV post insulator supright mounting on the prov

18.1.6.2.6 66kV Post In

As item 18.1.6.2.5 above but 66kV.

18.1.6.3 STRUCTURES


connections and substation strained condto enable attachment of line-strain sets. Additional take off points to bebeam to achieve specified down lead clearances in accordance with thedrawings.


Substation high level steel structures to support the substation strained cincluding busbars, complete with fixing bolts, eye bolts etc and suitable f

attached detailed drawings.

18.1.6.3.3 High Level Steel Structure –

A high level steel structure to support the substation shield wire systewith the attached detailed drawings.

The structure shall be equipped with a Tension Head Plate with 8 holes wnecessary for the attachment of earth wire coming from any direction.

bolts e




Substation high level steel structure as item 18.1.6.3.4 above but suitable for connecting substation strained conductors.

m 18.1.6.3.4 above but suitable for connecting ubstation strained conductors.

nductors, , of two adjacent feeders, complete with fixing bolts, eye bolts etc. and

s, where necessary for clearance purposes. The n on both ends for extending the substation in

nductors, as nt feeders.

Type 9

nductors, as t feeders.

he substation strained conductors, as ders.

l steel structures to support the substation strained conductors, as uitable for six adjacent feeders.

tructures for Other Equipment

ctures for all other equipment including:

r.

• Post insulator, etc.

18.2 METAL ENCLOSED GIS SWITCHGEAR

To complete each item of equipment detailed in this schedule, there shall be provided the necessary terminal boards, panel wiring, fuses, cubicles, lighting, screens, guards, labels, cable gland plates including cable glands, SF6 gas or other insulating medium,

three adjacent overhead line feeders and


Substation high level steel structure as itefour adjacent overhead line feeders and s


Substation high level steel structures to support the substation strained coincluding busbarssuitable for mounting underhang insulatorstructures should be suitable for extensiofuture with new bays.


Substation high-level steel structures to support the substation strained coitem 18.1.6.3.7 above but suitable for three adjace

18.1.6.3.9 High Level Steel Structure –

Substation high-level steel structures to support the substation strained coitem 18.1.6.3.7 above but suitable for four adjacen


Substation high-level steel structures to support titem 18.1.6.3.7 above but suitable for five adjacent fee


Substation high-leveitem 18.1.6.3.7 above but s

18.1.6.3.12 Steel Supporting S

Substation steel supporting stru

• Circuit-breake

• Isolator and earth switch.

• Post type current transformer.

• Capacitor voltage transformer.



connections to all related equipment provided under this Contract and all necessary

referred to are site ratings based on the specified outdoor erature.

ent comprise:

• Isolators and Earth Switches

rs

rs

m site rating Clause 3.1.2 of this

insulators and

et complete with circuit breaker and switch control monitoring facilities, h mimic

s with accept and cancellation facilities, all necessary auxiliary remote selection and internal heaters. It shall the circuit-breaker poles and the control

d with all necessary facilities appropriate to

ting

peres, complete with electrical and manual operating mechanism with mechanical and electrical

erlocking arrangements, all necessary auxiliary switches and mechanism box heater.

(b) Busbar/line isolating switch, as item 18.2.2 (a) but with site rating of 1600 amperes

(c) Busbar/line isolating switch, as item 18.2.2 (a) but with site rating of 2000 amperes

(d) Busbar/line isolating switch, as item 18.2.2 (a) but with site rating of 2500 amperes

sundries whether specified in detail or not.

In all cases the current ratingsshade design ambient temp

The items of equipm

• Circuit Breakers

• Voltage Transforme

• Current Transforme

• Busbars and Connections

• Gas Handling Equipment

• Metal Enclosed Surge Arresters

18.2.1 132 kV Circuit Breakers

(a) SF6 single pressure type circuit-breaker, triple pole, continuous minimu800 amperes, 132 kV with rated short circuit rating as specified inspecification at 145 kV symmetrical breaking capacity complete withoperating mechanism.

Control cabinmechanical and electrical interlocking arrangements, bay controller witdiagram, alarm ledswitches, local control capabilities, local/include all pipe work on, in and between cabinet or kiosk.

The local control panels shall be equippethe GIS design offered.

(b) As for item 18.2.1 (a) but having 1600 amp ra

(c) As for item 18.2.1 (a) but having 2000 amp rating.

(d) As for item 18.2.1 (a) but having 2500 amp rating

(e) As for item 18.2.1 (a) but having 3150 amp rating

18.2.2 132 kV Isolators and Earthing Switches

(a) Busbar/line isolating switch, triple-pole, continuous site rating 800 am

int



(e) Busbar/line isolating switch, as item 18.2.2 (a) but with site rating of 3150

(f) Maintenance earth switch, triple-pole with electrical and manual operatimechanical and electr

amperes

ng mechanism, ical interlocking arrangements, all necessary auxiliary switches

itch, triple pole with electrical and ngements, all

ating mechanism, cking arrangements, all necessary auxiliary switches,

facilities.

chamber with busbars clamps, support insulators ip a single busbar unit with a 3 phase set of busbars. s.

600A

r chamber with busbars, clamps, support insulators ip a single busbar bus coupler unit with a 3 phase

1600A.

tion chambers with connectors, clamps, support insulators, current transformer accommodation, voltage transformer accommodation

(m) As item 18.2.3 (k) above but rated 1600A.

(n) As item 18.2.3 (l) above but rated 1600A.

(o) As item 18.2.3 (k) above but rated 2000A.

item 18.2.3 (l) above but rated 2000A.

(q) As item 18.2.3 (k) above but rated 2500A.

(r) As item 18.2.3 (l) above but rated 2500A.

and mechanism box heater.

(g) High speed busbar or line fault making earth swmanual operating mechanism, mechanical and electrical interlocking arranecessary auxiliary switches and mechanism box heater.

(h) Maintenance earth switch, triple-pole with electrical and manual opermechanical and electrical interlomechanism box heater and fitted with additional primary injection testing

18.2.3 Busbars and Connections

(a) Set of 132 kV, 2000 A rated busbar and all necessary sundries to equ Suitable for extension at both end

(b) As item 18.2.3 (a) above but double busbar.

(c) As item 18.2.3 (a) above but rated 3150A.

(d) As item 18.2.3 (b) above but rated 3150A.

(e) As item 18.2.3 (a) above but rated 1

(f) Set of 132 kV 2000 A rated busbaand all necessary sundries to equset of busbars.

(g) As item 18.2.3 (f) above but double busbar.

(h) As item 18.2.3 (f) above but rated 3150A.

(i) As item 18.2.3 (g) above but rated 3150A.

(j) As item 18.2.3 (f) above but rated

(k) Set of 132 kV 800 A rated connec

for a single busbar feeder unit.

(l) As item 18.2.3 (k) above but double busbar.

(p) As



(s) Cable sealing end termination chamber complete with connections, clamps and all .

nection to

1600A.

n chambers with connectors, clamps, support, modation for a single busbar transformer feeder

e busbar.

gh to insulated terminal bushings complete with support insulators,

generated by the transformer.

to SF6 connection chamber complete with ndry items and

The system shall incorporate any necessary expansion joints and absorb any possible quipment.

nking as detailed under item (z) but with nsulated metal oxide surge arresters should it

equired as a result of insulation co-ordination studies.

mplete sampling, testing, filtering, drying, extraction, evacuation and refilling of SF6 gas. The unit shall be self-contained and house all necessary compressors, high precision pressure gauges, piping, moisture meter, leak detection equipment and controls together with a storage tank capable of containing sufficient gas to fill all chambers of one circuit bay including

ated busbar chambers.

Two portable gas alarm units shall also be supplied for detecting possible overpressure in a compartment during maintenance by means of clear audible alarm.

sundry items to accept three 132 kV single core cable sealing ends

(t) Set of SF6 – Air bushing 800 A rated termination, suitable for the conoverhead lines, transformers or sealing ends. The insulators shall be of composite material construction.

(u) As item 18.2.3 (t) above but rated

(v) As item 18.2.3 (t) above but rated 2000A.

(w) As item 18.2.3 (t) above but rated 2500A.

(x) Set of 132 kV 800 A rated connectioinsulators, current transformer accomunit.

(y) As item 18.2.3 (x) above but doubl

(z) Set of 132 kV 800 A connection chamber with 3 phase connections throutransformer 132 kV gas clamps and all sundry items and supports.

The system shall incorporate any necessary expansion joints and absorb any vibration

(aa) As item 18.2.3 (z) above but throughchamber / chamber adaptors, support insulators, clamps and all susupports.

vibration generated by the connected e

(bb) Set of 132 kV 800 A connection trufacilities to accommodate 132 kV gas ibe established that these are r

(cc) As item 18.2.3 (bb) above but rated 1600A.

(dd) As item 18.2.3 (bb) above but rated 2000A

(ee) As item 18.2.3 (bb) above but rated 2500A.

18.2.4 Gas Handling Equipment

A portable gas handling trolley shall be provided for the co

associ



18.2.5 Metal Enclosed Surge Arresters

Set of 3-phase metal enclosed, metal oxide, surge arresters, for accommodaSwitchgear complete with discharge counter, and leakage indicator. The unit

tion in GIS s shall have

lation co-ordination requirements of the substation.

mer sing of a primary winding having continuous thermal current rating of 2000A, each

ox, all necessary secondary

racy limit factor for busbar

A, rated burden, class, and accuracy limit factor for

pe 2

132kV 800A Line/Cable Circuit – Type 1

ormer

ondary

PX, with knee point voltage 1st main

nd main protection.

ted burden, accuracy class and accuracy limit factor for at least class 5P20.

ated burden, accuracy class and accuracy limit factor for busbar and breaker failure protection.

132kV 1600A Line/Cable Circuit – Type 2

As item 18.3.4 but with CT ratio 1600/1

18.3.6 132kV 2000A Line/Cable Circuit – Type 3


electrical characteristics to suit the insu

18.3 Current and Voltage Transformers

18.3.1 132kV 1600A Bus Coupler /Section Circuit – Type 1

Set of three current transformers (one CT per phase). Each current transforcompriseparately mounted, complete with a weatherproof secondary terminal bmulticore cable gland plates and glands and comprising of the following windings:

(a) First winding with a ratio, rated burden, class, and accucirculating current protection and breaker fail protection.

(b) Second winding ratio 1600/1overcurrent protection and instruments and of at least class 5P20.

18.3.2 132kV 2000A Bus Coupler /Section Circuit – Ty


18.3.3 132kV 3150A Bus Coupler /Section Circuit – Type 3


18.3.4

Set of three current transformers (one CT per phase). Each current transfcomprising of a primary winding having continuous thermal current rating of 800A, each separately mounted, complete with a weatherproof secondary terminal box, all necessary multicore cable gland plates and glands and comprising of the following secwindings:

(a) First winding ratio 800/1A, with characteristics as class more than 400V and secondary resistance (75oC) not more than 8Ω for protection.

(b) Second winding ratio 800/1A with characteristics as (a) above for 2

(c) Third winding ratio 800/1A, raovercurrent, earthfault and instruments and of

(d) Fourth winding with a ratio, r

18.3.5




Set of three current transformers (one CT per phase). Each current transforcomprising of a primary winding having continuous thermal current rating ofseparately mounted, complete with a weatherproof secondary termina

mer 800A, each

l box, all necessary multicore cable gland plates and glands and comprising of the following secondary

nding ratio 800/1A, with characteristics as class PX, with knee point voltage 1st main

s (a) above for 2nd main protection.

limit factor for

(f) Sixth winding ratio 800/1 A for metering with a burden of 10VA Class 0,2S

/Cable Circuit – Type 5

0 132/23-11,5kV Transformer Circuit – Type 1

rmer

, all necessary

d burden, accuracy class and accuracy limit factor for h fault protection.

ted burden, accuracy class and accuracy limit factor ts of at least class 5P20.

limit factor for

18.3.11 132/23-11,5kV Transformer Circuit – Type 2

18.3.10 but with CT ratio 200-100/1.


(a) First winding ratio 200/1A, rated burden, class, and accuracy limit factor for overall transformer differential and restricted earth fault protection.

windings:

(a) First wimore than 400V and secondary resistance (75oC) not more than 8Ω for protection.

(b) Second winding ratio 800/1A with characteristics a

(c) Third winding ratio 800/1A, rated burden, accuracy class and accuracy overcurrent, earthfault, instruments and at least class 5P20.

(d) Fourth winding with a ratio, rated burden, accuracy class and accuracy limit factor for busbar and breaker failure protection

(e) Fifth winding ratio 800/1 A for metering with a burden of 10VA Class 0,2S

18.3.8 132kV 1600A Line




18.3.1

Set of three current transformers (one CT per phase). Each current transfocomprising of a primary winding having continuous thermal current rating of 800A, each separately mounted, complete with a weatherproof secondary terminal boxmulticore cable gland plates and glands and comprising of the following secondary windings:

(a) First winding ratio 200/1A, rateoverall transformer differential and restricted eart

(b) Second winding ratio 200/1A, rafor overcurrent, earth fault protection, and instrumen

(c) Third winding with a ratio, rated burden, accuracy class and accuracybusbar and breaker failure protection

As item



(b) Second winding ratio 200/1A rated burden, accuracy class and accuracy limit factor 5P20.

d burden, accuracy class and accuracy limit factor for

Class 0,2S

rden of 10VA Class 0,2S


neutral Current Transformer to be mounted on the transformer tank or alternatively ring type internal to the transformer tank round the respective bushing,

one core as follows for differential/restricted earthfault protection:

(b) Class: PX

ratio.

nsformer

eutral current transformer to be mounted on the earthing k or alternatively ring type internal to the transformer tank round the

g two cores as follows:

ult protection

1A

ding resistance: 8Ω (max)

/1A

Class & Accuracy limit Factor: 5P20

• Rated Burden: 20VA

18.3.17 132 kV Outdoor Voltage Transformer

Set of three 132 kV voltage transformers, single phase, separately mounted capacitor type suitable for outdoor installation, ratio

for overcurrent, earth fault protection and instruments of at least class

(c) Third winding with a ratio, ratebusbar and breaker failure protection

(d) Fifth winding ratio 200/1 A for metering with a burden of 10VA

(e) Sixth winding ratio 200/1 A for metering with a bu

As item 18.3.12 but with CT ratio 200-100/1

18.3.14 132 kV Neutral Current Transformer

Outdoor post type,

comprising

(a) Turns ratio: 200/1A

(c) Knee point emf: 400V (min)

(d) Secondary winding resistance: 8Ω (max)

18.3.15 132 kV Neutral Current Transformer

As item 18.3.14 but with CT ratio 200-100/1

18.3.16 22-11 kV Neutral Current Tra

Outdoor post type 22-11kV side ntransformer tanrespective bushing, comprisin

(a) Core 1: 22-11kV Restricted Earth Fa

• Turns ratio: 2000-1000-500/

• Class: PX

• Knee point emf: 400V (min)

• Secondary win

(b) Core 2: Standby Earth Fault Protection

• Turns ratio: 2000-1000-500

•



V 333

/3

−− 110110110132,000

ing

ding with an rated output of 25VA, accuracy class 0,2 with voltage ratio etering and

ith voltage ratio

iniature circuit appropriate number of auxiliary contacts, isolating terminals, and

l also have facilities for the connection of power line carrier coupling equipment, including provision of a drain coil, and for the

s on top

with a minimum accuracy, class and output to EN 60044 – 5 as follows:

(a) First winding with an rated output of 25VA, accuracy class 0,2 with voltage ratio error of ±0,2% and phase displacement of ±10min for main statistical meter

(b) Second winerror of ±0,2% and phase displacement of ±10min for main statistical mmeasurements

(c) Third winding ratio with an rated output of 50VA, accuracy class 3P werror of ±3% for protection, synchronizing and instrumentation purposes

and each complete with a weatherproof cubicle containing secondary mbreakers, complete withearthing links. The voltage transformers shal

mounting of line trap

18.3.18 66kV Outdoor Voltage Transformer.

As item 18.3.17 but with V 3

1103

1103

110/3

,000−−

66 ratio.

18.3.19 132 kV GIS Voltage Transformer

N 60044 – 2 ry miniature circuit breakers and appropriate

number of auxiliary contacts, isolating terminals, and earthing links.

1 for Requi ments

ION UNIT

40 M

132/23-11,5 kV

16

132/23-11,5 kV

16 MVA

66/23-11,5 kV

As item 18.3.17 but in an SF environment triple wound single-phase to E6complete with a cubicle containing seconda

18.4 POWER AND EARTHING TRANSFORMERS

8.4.1 Power Trans mer re

DESCRIPT

VA MVA

1. To deliver a continuous maximum power for entire range of regulatio

ing conditions: MVA 40 16 16 n

with the follow

(a) Normal LV voltage 22,8 22 22,8-11,4 kV -11,4 ,8-11,4

(b) Load Power factor (lag) 0 0,9 ,9 0,9

(c) Range of HV System Voltage % +/- 10 +/- 10 +/- 10

2. No. of phases 3 3 3

3. No. of windings 2 2 2

4. Normal ratio of transformation kV/kV 132/23-11,5 132/23-11,5 66/23-11,5

5. Corresponding highest system voltage kV/kV 145/24-12 145/24-12 72.5/24-12



ON UNIT

40

132/23-11,5 kV 132/23-11,5 kV

16 MVA

66/23-11,5 kV DESCRIPTI

MVA 16 MVA

6. Minimum withstand voltages:

(a) Full wave impulse kVrms 550/125-95 550/125-95 325/125-95

(b) Induced overvoltage pofre

wer quency kVrms 230/50-28 230/50-28 140/50-28

(c) Power frequency withstand o kVrms 38/- 38/- f neutral 38/-

7. ONAN/ONAF ONAN/ONAF ONAN/ONAF Type of cooling

8. Minimum continuous ONAN rating s MVA 31.5 10 10 of transformer

9. External cooling medium Air A Air ir

10. Service conditions:

(a) Altitude not exceeding m 1000 1000 1000

(b) Air temperature not exceedin oC 50 50 50 g

(c) Air temperature in any one g: year not exceedin

• For design purposes oC 45 45 45

• Average in any one day oC 30 30 30

r oC 20 20 20 • Average in one yea

11. Winding temperature rise limit oC 60 60 60

12 temperature rise limit oC 55 55 55 . Top oil

13. Winding hot spot temperature on emergency overload not exceedin

oC 140 140 140 g

14. Maximum hot spot temperature ri ce with oC 73 73 73

sewhen loaded in accordanIEC 60354

15. Phase connections:

(a) 132 kV winding Star Star

Delta (b) 66 kV winding

(c) 22-11 kV winding or tertiary Delta Delta Star

(d) Vector group - 132 or 66 or 22-11 kV YNd11 YNd11 Dyn11

16. Short circuit withstand:

Fault Level at terminals of:

(a) 132 kV Busbars (1 sec) kA

(b) 66 kV Busbars (1 sec) kA

Refer to Clause 3.1.2



ION UNIT

40 MVA

132/23-11,5 kV

16 MVA

132/23-11,5 kV

16 MVA

66/23-11,5 kV DESCRIPT

(c) 22 kV Busbars (3 sec) kA

17 at 75oC and at .M.R. between

e) % 21 15 15

. Impedance voltage principal tapping Cwindings. (% on HV bas

18N 60076-10

efer to

. Sound pressure level in accordance with E

Indoor installations – RSpecification Drawings

dB (A) ≤ 50 ≤ 50 ≤ 50

19 el in

Refer to

. Sound pressure levaccordance with EN 60076-10

Outdoor installations –Specificatio

dB (A ≤ 60 ≤ ≤ 60

n Drawings

) 60

20. Sound pressure level at wopossible operating con

rst ditions dB (A) ≤ 80 ≤ 80 ≤ 80

Voltage Control

21. Total range of variation of nominal tapped ratio as item 4 above

(a) - plus % 10 % 12,5 12,5

(b) - minus % 18 14,3 % ,75 12,5

(c) Number and Size of steps #/% 25/1,25 20/1,25 17/1,43

22. Type of control

On load – local, remote asupervisory

On load – local, remote and, supervisory

On load – local, remote and, supervisory

nd,

23. Automatic control required and reference voltage YES / 110Vac,

50Hz YES / 110Vac,

50YES / 110Vac,

50Hz Hz

24. Estimated distance betwremote control point

een and m 100 100 100

transformer

25. Nominal DC supply Vdc 110 110 110

26 ervisory indication YES YES YES . Provision for suprequired

27. YES YES YES Marshalling kiosk required

28. Number of transformers for which automatic control is to be required 3 3 3

29. Supply voltage for parallel control and panel indications Vac 230 230 230

30. Supply voltage for supervisory control, alarms and trips Vdc 110 110 110



N UNIT

40 MVA

132/23-11,5 kV

16 MVA

132/23-11,5 kV

16 MVA

66/23-11,5 kV DESCRIPTIO

31. Pollution category of open air gs

m/kV nominal voltage

He

Composite

35

H

Composite

35

Heavy

Composite

35

bushin

Insulators

Minimum (m )

avy

eavy

32. Number of cooler banksper transformer

required 2 2 2

33. Rating of each cooler bank as percentage of total loss at C.M.R. 50 % 50 50

34. Type of oil preservation system Mainteree Silic

Breather

MaiFree Silica Gel

Breather

Maintenance Free Silica Gel

Breather F

nance a Gel

ntenance

35. heels, skid or flat bottom Flat base Skid or Flat base

Skid or Flat base

Whether wbase required

36 YES NO NO . Whether anti-vibration padsrequired

37 XLP Cu Conductor

Screen One per phase One per phase One per phase

. High voltage cable is 132 kVsingle core, 300 mm2

E

cable with 90 mm2 Cu Wire

38 u E single core cables

with 95 mm2 Cu wire screen Three per phase One per phase One per phase

. 22kV Cables: 630 mm2 CConductor XLP

39. 22kV Cable to connect the earthing transformer: 300 mm2 Al conductor XLPE single core cable with 95 mm2 Cu wire screen

One per phase phase One per

18.4.2 Earthing Transformer Require ts

DESCRIPTION UNIT

150 kVA

23-11,5/0,415 kV

men

1. No-Load voltage ratio variation % ±5

2. Number of taps and approx. step # 5/2,5% /%

3. Rating of interconnected star winding on 0 seconds basis A/Phase 557

3

4. Vector group HV/LV ZΝyn1/d

5. Bushing insulators or cable box:

(a) HV Line Cable box

(b) HV Neutral Bushing



DESCRIPTION UN

150 kVA

3-11,5/0,415 kV IT 2

(c) LV Line Cable box

(d) Neutral Bushing

(e) HV Cable discorequired

nnecting chamber No

6. econdary load 150 External s kVA

7. Zero sequence impedance with Lopen circuited

V wind s

Ω/Phase

4 for 11 kV nominal

16 for 22 kV nominal

ing

8. Maximum Flux Density at Rated Voltage T 1,7

9. e Voltage at C.M.R. of S.W.% 4

Impedanc , 75oC and Normal Ratio

10 accordance dB (A) ≤ 60

. Nominal mean sound level inwith EN 60551

11. Skid or flat Type of transformer base required

12 for

transformer

Supplied under this Contract

YES

YES

. Accommodation required on tank outdoor weatherproof post type current

13. Low Voltage Cable to the LV Switchboard: 3x185 mm2 Al cable with 70 mm2

tric Cu wire tral (CEANDER

type)

concenneu

18.5 22 kV SWITCHGEAR

t detailed in this schedule there shall be provided the , current transformer and voltage transformer test terminal el wiring fuses, MCB's, cubicle lighting, anti-condensation

ble gland plates and all necessary sundries whether

The Items of Equipment comprise:

(a) Transformer Incoming circuit breakers.

(b) Bus Section circuit breakers

(c) Feeder circuit breakers (Underground)

(d) Feeder circuit breakers for capacitor bank

To complete each item of equipmennecessary terminal boardsblock, auxiliary relays, panheaters, screens, guards, labels, caspecified in detail or not.



18.5.1 Transformer Incoming Circuit Breakers – Type 1

nisms for safe work, arged spring operating mechanism, etc.

V and secondary resistance

Class 1 of 2000-1000/1 ratio, for capacitor bank Control on ONLY

Transformer Incoming Circuit breaker panel comprising the following:

(a) Fixed portion consisting of three-phase single busbar of 2000A rating, set of isolating plug and socket.

(b) Fixed 2000A circuit breaker with associated isolating mechaauxiliary switches, 230V AC motor chAlternative designs with removable circuit breaker shall be considered.

(c) Trip and close spring release coils, 110V DC.

(d) Three current transformers each housing the following cores:

• One Class PX, with knee point voltage more than 400(75oC) not more than 8 Ohms, of 2000-1000/1 ratio, for biased differential protection.

• One Class 5P20 of 2000-1000/1 ratio for O/C and E/F protection.

• One the black

ing, instruments and tap changer

ratio 22000-n, metering,

test technology equipped with all the necessary ing the eration of tap control etc.

capable of handling the bay controller functions that

d measured values from the e station control unit. It should release

re or the Operator at the Station Level and

ctions of the IED including inputs and outputs

earth switch and isolating mechanisms

• 1A overcurrent and earth fault IDMT protection

• 1A two stage inverse time LV standby earth fault

• Adequate programmable binary inputs

• Adequate programmable output relays (hand and self reset)

• Adequate programmable LEDs

(L2) phase current transformer.

• One Class 0,2 of 2000-1000/1 ratio, for metercontrol.

(e) One three-phase disconnectable, circuit connected voltage transformer11000/110V, 50/25VA per phase of accuracy class 0,5+3P, for protectiotap change control, supervisory indication and instruments.

(f) One voltage regulating relay of the lamodules to allow the automatic voltage control of power transformers usminimum circulating current principle, manual step up and step down opchanger, indications, communication facilities for remote and supervisory

(g) One multifunction protective IEDare described below but not limited to these:

• Collect and pre-process status information, alarms answitchgear and transmit the data to thcommands initiated by the Control Centalso provide local control capability

• Self check watchdog for all fun

• Interlocking facilities with



• Measuring Functions for Current, Voltage, Real and Reactive Power and Power

rol Selector Key Switch

front panel to such as Feeder control diagram with load indication, Status

es at graphic display, metering quantities, messages related to events or faults

st push button

nal boards, bus wiring, labels, anti-condensation g to the Specification.

g connections for

tch, feeder connected.

ensions of openings will be given by the up to the meters shall be

pe 2

Breakers – Type 3

g relay

ising the following:

bar of 2000A rating set of isolating plug and socket.

ed 2000A circuit breaker with associated isolating mechanisms for safe work, auxiliary switches, 230V AC motor charged spring operating mechanism, etc. Alternative designs with removable circuit breaker shall be considered.

(c) Trip and close spring release coils, 110Vdc.

(d) One set of three current transformers housing the following:

Factor

• Local/Remote Cont

• Trip/Close Control Switch

• Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) and a Display Screen (LCD) on theprovide information indication of feeder devic

• LED reset and te

• Trip Circuit Supervision

• 110Vdc Power Supply

(h) Current and Voltage Transformer Test terminal blocks.

(i) One set of small wiring, fuses, termiheaters, etc., to complete accordin

(j) One cable box complete with terminations, cable glands and earthinthe cables specified in the relevant drawing.

(k) Lockable Earth Swi

(l) Space to be made available for one three-phase electronic meter to be mounted locally by the Purchaser on the cubicle. DimPurchaser after Contract award. All necessary wiringsupplied with the panels.

18.5.2 Transformer Incoming Circuit Breakers – Ty

As paragraph 18.5.1 but with CT ratios 2000-1000-500/1

18.5.3 Transformer Incoming Circuit

As paragraph 18.5.1 but without voltage regulatin

18.5.4 Transformer Incoming Circuit Breakers – Type 4

As paragraph 18.5.2 but without voltage regulating relay

18.5.5 Bus Section Circuit Breakers – Type 1

Bus Section circuit breaker panel compr

(a) Fixed portion consisting of three-phase single bus

(b) Fix



• CT Class 5P20 ratio 2000-1000/1 for O/C and E/F protection and in

(e) One multifunction protective IED cap

struments.

able of handling the bay controller functions that

lues from the data to the station control unit. It should release

Station Level and

• Self check watchdog for all functions of the IED including inputs and outputs

switch and isolating mechanisms

T protection

binary inputs

utput relays (hand and self reset)

Measuring Functions for Current.

witch

Ds) and a Display Screen (LCD) on the front panel to such as Feeder control diagram with load indication, Status

er devices at graphic display, metering quantities, messages or faults

Section one)

ds, bus wiring, labels, anti-condensation n.

panel or erwise as appropriate).

18.5.6 Bus Section Circuit Breakers – Type 2

As paragraph 18.5.5 but with CT ratios 2000-1000-500/1

18.5.7 Feeder Circuit Breakers (Underground) – Type 1

Outgoing circuit breaker panel controlling an underground cable feeder comprising the following:

are described below but not limited to these:

• Collect and pre-process status information, alarms and measured vaswitchgear and transmit thecommands initiated by the Control Centre or the Operator at thealso provide local control capability

• Interlocking facilities with earth

• 1A phase segregated 3 phase and earthfault IDM

• Adequate programmable

• Adequate programmable o


•

• Local/Remote Control Selector Key Switch

• Trip/Close Control S

• Light Emitting Diodes (LEprovide informationindication of feedrelated to events

• LED reset and test push button



(f) Cubicle heaters ON / OFF switch (only on Bus

(g) Voltage Selection Relay and bus-wiring to all feeders

(h) Current Transformer Test terminal block.

(i) One set of small wiring, fuses, terminal boarheaters, etc., to complete according to the Specificatio

(j) Lockable Busbar Earth Switch for each separate Bus-Section (on thisoth



(a) Fixed portion consisting of three-phase single busbar of 2000A rating, set of isolating

for safe work,

ircuit breaker shall be considered.

for O/C and E/F protection and instruments.

unctions that

tus information, alarms and measured values from the ould release

rator at the Station Level and

Self check watchdog for all functions of the IED including inputs and outputs

g mechanisms

hase and earth-fault IDMT protection

ammable binary inputs

mable output relays (hand and self reset)

ncy

er and Power

rol Selector Key Switch

h

• Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) and a Display Screen (LCD) on the front panel to on such as Feeder control diagram with load indication, Status

graphic display, metering quantities, messages



(f) Current Transformer Test terminal blocks.

(g) One set of small wiring, fuses, terminal boards, bus wiring, labels, anti-condensation heaters, etc., to complete according to the Specification.

plug and socket.

(b) Fixed 630A circuit breaker with associated isolating mechanismsauxiliary switches, 230V AC motor charged spring operating mechanism, etc. Alternative designs with removable c

(c) Trip and close spring release coils, 110 Vdc.

(d) One set of three current transformers housing the following windings:

• One Class 5P20 of 500/1A ratio,

(e) One multifunction protective IED capable of handling the bay controller fare described below but not limited to these:

• Collect and pre-process staswitchgear and transmit the data to the station control unit. It shcommands initiated by the Control Centre or the Opealso provide local control capability

•

• Interlocking facilities with earth switch and isolatin

• 1A phase segregated 3 p

• Adequate progr

• Adequate program


• Under / Over-voltage

• Under / Over-freque

• Measuring Functions for Current, Voltage, Real and Reactive PowFactor

• Local/Remote Cont

• Trip/Close Control Switc

provide informatiindication of feeder devices at related to events or faults




(h) One cable box complete with terminations, cable glands and earthing connections for t drawing.

of 500/1 ratio for metering.

breaker panel controlling overhead line feeder comprising the following:

ting set of isolating

iated isolating mechanisms for safe work, auxiliary switches, 230V AC motor charged spring operating mechanism, etc.

considered.

current transformers housing the following windings:

truments.

, for sensitive

unctions that

d measured values from the l unit. It should release

erator at the Station Level and local control capability

chdog for all functions of the IED including inputs and outputs


T protection

fault

quate programmable output relays (hand and self reset)


• Under / Overvoltage

• Under / Over-frequency

• Measuring Functions for Current, Voltage, Real and Reactive Power and Power Factor

the cables specified in the relevan

(i) Lockable Earth Switch, feeder connected.

18.5.8 Feeder Circuit Breakers (Underground) –Type 2

As paragraph 18.5.7 but with additional Class 0,2 CT

18.5.9 Feeder Circuit Breakers (Overhead) – Type 1

Outgoing circuit

(j) Fixed portion consisting of three-phase single busbar of 2000 A raplug and socket.

(k) Fixed 630A circuit breaker with assoc

Alternative designs with removable circuit breaker shall be

(l) Trip and close spring release coils, 110 V DC.

(m) One set of three

• One Class 5P20 of 500/1A ratio, for O/C and E/F protection and ins

(n) One core balance neutral current transformer Class 5P20 of 60/1A ratioearth-fault protection.

(o) One multifunction protective IED capable of handling the bay controller fare described below but not limited to these:

• Collect and pre-process status information, alarms answitchgear and transmit the data to the station controcommands initiated by the Control Centre or the Opalso provide

• Self check wat


• 1A phase segregated 3 phase and earth-fault IDM

• Auto-reclosing

• Sensitive earth

• Adequate programmable binary inputs

• Ade




front panel to such as Feeder control diagram with load indication, Status

ces at graphic display, metering quantities, messages s

t push button

nal boards, bus wiring, labels, anti-condensation g to the Specification.

glands and earthing connections for

ith additional Class 0,2 CT of 500/1 ratio for metering.

der Circuit Breakers (Capacitor Bank)

MVAr capacitor

se single busbar of 2000A rating, set of isolating

hanism, etc. esigns with removable circuit breaker shall be considered.


tio for O/C and E/F protection and

cuit connected voltage transformer ratio 22000-11000/110V, 50 / 25VA per phase of accuracy class 0,5, for metering, capacitor Bank control, supervisory indication and instruments

e interposing current transformer, Class 1,0 of ratio 1+1+1/1A, 30VA for the capacitor bank control, which is supplied by others

(g) One multifunction protective IED capable of handling the bay controller functions that are described below but not limited to these:

• Trip/Close Control Switch

• Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) and a Display Screen (LCD) on the provide information indication of feeder devirelated to events or fault

• LED reset and tes



(p) Current Transformer Test terminal blocks.

(q) One set of small wiring, fuses, termiheaters, etc., to complete accordin

(r) One cable box complete with terminations, cable the cables specified in the relevant drawing.

(s) Lockable Earth Switch, feeder connected.

18.5.10 Feeder Circuit Breakers (Overhead) –Type 2

As paragraph 18.5.9 but w

18.5.11 Fee

Outgoing feeder circuit breaker panel suitable for switching up to a 10bank, comprising the following:

(a) Fixed portion consisting of three-phaplug and socket.

(b) Fixed 630A circuit breaker with associated isolating mechanisms for safe work, auxiliary switches, 230Vac motor charged spring operating mecAlternative d

(c) Trip and close spring release coils, 110 Vdc.

• One Class 5P20 of 500-300-150/1A rainstruments.

(e) One three-phase disconnectable, cir

(f) On



• Collect and pre-process status information, alarms and measurswitchgear and transmit the data to the station control unit. It should commands initiated by the C

ed values from the release

ontrol Centre or the Operator at the Station Level and

nd outputs

mechanisms and capacitor

• 1A phase segregated 3-phase and earth-fault IDMT protection

binary inputs

output relays (hand and self reset)

s for MVars

witch

Ds) and a Display Screen (LCD) on the front panel to such as Feeder control diagram with load indication, Status

or faults

s wiring, labels, anti-condensation ation.

e cable box complete with terminations, cable glands and earthing connections for

rth Switch, feeder connected.

following:

ed portion consisting of three-phase single busbar of 2000A rating, set of isolating plug and socket.

(b) Fixed 630A circuit breaker with associated isolating mechanisms for safe work, auxiliary switches, 230Vac motor charged spring operating mechanism, etc. Alternative designs with removable circuit breaker shall be considered.

also provide local control capability

• Self check watchdog for all functions of the IED including inputs a

• Interlocking facilities with earth switch and isolatingbank circuit breakers

• Under / Over-voltage




• Measuring Function


• Trip/Close Control S

• Light Emitting Diodes (LEprovide informationindication of feeder devices at graphic display, metering quantities, messages related to events




(h) Current Transformer Test terminal blocks.

(i) One set of small wiring, fuses, terminal boards, buheaters, etc., to complete according to the Specific

(j) Onthe cables specified in the relevant drawing.

(k) Lockable Ea

18.5.12 Feeder Circuit Breakers (Local Transformer)

Outgoing circuit breaker panel controlling underground cable feeder comprising the

(a) Fix



(c) Trip and close spring release coils, 110Vdc.


ments.

functions that

lues from the data to the station control unit. It should release

Station Level and

uding inputs and outputs


T protection

binary inputs

Adequate programmable output relays (hand and self reset)

ower Factor

• h

es (LED’s) and a Display Screen (LCD) on the front panel to

er devices at graphic display, metering quantities, messages

blocks.

(g) One set of small wiring, fuses, terminal boards, bus wiring, labels, anti-condensation heaters, etc., to complete according to the Specification.

(h) One cable box complete with terminations, cable glands and earthing connections for the cables specified in the relevant drawing.

• One Class 5P20 of 500-100/1, for O/C and E/F protection and instru

(e) One multifunction protective IED capable of handling the bay controller are described below but not limited to these:

• Collect and pre-process status information, alarms and measured vaswitchgear and transmit thecommands initiated by the Control Centre or the Operator at thealso provide local control capability

• Self check watchdog for all functions of the IED incl


• 1A phase segregated 3 phase and earth-fault IDM


•

• Adequate programmable LED’s

• Under / Overvoltage

• Measuring Functions for Current, Real and Reactive Power and P


Trip/Close Control Switc

• Light Emitting Diodprovide information such as Feeder control diagram with load indication, Status indication of feedrelated to events or faults




(f) Current Transformer Test terminal

(i) Lockable Earth Switch, feeder connected.



18.6 PROTECTION AND CONTROL CUBICLES

Each cubicle shall be of sheet steel suitable for floor mounting with cable abottom. The cubic

ccess at the les shall accommodate all the items specified together with all relevant

ancillary components.

Note: Bay Controllers can be situated on the Protection Cubicle or the Local Control Cubicle depending on the type of installation.

Important Note: In certain cases relays should be compatible with relays at the opposite included to this

elays.

cluding:

a range of in- multiplexed fibre

er no infeed or lay shall also

protection, complete with current check feature, to be used with signalling equipment (not

se and earth-

trol Cubicle or in case of outdoor switchgear llect and pre-process status information, itchgear and transmit the data to the station

ted by the Control Centre or the

breaker failure protection bay unit

OUT switch first main protection

otection

e main relays:

(i) Under / Over-frequency

ng, electrical reset

(k) Second main protection high speed tripping, electrical reset

ck-up protection high speed tripping, hand reset

(m) Busbar protection high speed tripping, hand reset

(n) Breaker fail protection high speed tripping, hand reset

(o) Trip circuit supervision for each tripping circuit

line end. These cases are indicated in the relevant protection drawings specification. It is expected that the Tenderers should offer the specified r

18.6.1 132 kV Feeder Protection Relay Cubicle (DIST/DIFF) In

(a) One first main feeder protection is a distance type full scheme offeringbuilt schemes to be used with protection signalling equipment overoptic cables to provide initially a permissive overreach scheme. It shall also incorporate "weak infeed" feature to allow tripping when there is eithinsufficient infeed to operate the relay measuring elements. The reincorporate Auto-reclosing and Synchronizing features.

(b) One second main feeder protection relay for current differential feeder

included in this Contract) over direct or multiplexed fibre optic channels.

(c) One numerical back-up protection relay IDMT, phase segregated 3 phafault

(d) Bay Controller, mounted on the Local Conon the protection and control panel, to coalarms and measured values from the swcontrol unit. It should release commands initiaOperator at the Station Level and also provide local control capability.

(e) One busbar and

(f) One protection IN/

(g) One protection IN/OUT switch, second main pr

The following functions should be incorporated into th

(h) Under / Over-voltage

(j) First main protection high speed trippi

(l) Ba



(p) Protection supply supervision for each protection circuit

indication

cation

ays.

iliary relays, interposing current transformers and material to complete the relay cubicle.

Including:

Including:

er Protection Relay Cubicle (DIFF/DIFF) Including:

ntial principle. The atively its main algorithm must be

ction Relay Cubicle (DIFF/DIFF) Including:

ST) Including:

y and busbar protection relays.

Including:

n relays

Including:

18.6.10 66 kV Feeder Protection Relay Cubicle (DIFF) Including:

As 18.6.4 but with only one line differential relay and without busbar protection relays.

18.6.11 66 kV Feeder Protection Relay Cubicle (DIFF) Including:

6.4 but with only one line differential relay and without bay controller and busbar protection relays`

(q) Main protection out of service

(r) Main protection operated indi

(s) One LED reset and test push button

Some of the functions referred to above can be realized by separate rel

Current and voltage transformer test terminal blocks for each circuit, aux

18.6.2 132 kV Feeder Protection Relay Cubicle (DIST/DIFF)

As 18.6.1 but without busbar protection relays

18.6.3 132 kV Feeder Protection Relay Cubicle (DIST/DIFF)

As 18.6.1 but without bay controller and busbar protection relays

18.6.4 132 kV Feed

As 18.6.1 above but with both protection relays based on current differerelays should be from different manufacturers or alternbased on a different basic logic.

18.6.5 132 kV Feeder Prote


18.6.6 66 kV Feeder Protection Relay Cubicle (DI

As 18.6.1 but without line differential relay.

18.6.7 66 kV Feeder Protection Relay Cubicle (DIST) Including:

As 18.6.1 but without line differential rela

18.6.8 66 kV Feeder Protection Relay Cubicle (DIST)

As 18.6.1 but without bay controller, line differential and busbar protectio

18.6.9 66 kV Feeder Protection Relay Cubicle (DIFF)

As 18.6.4 but with only one line differential relay.

As 18.



18.6.12 132/22-11 kV Transformer HV Relay Cubicle Including

(a) One 3-element high speed biased numerical differential relay complete overa

:

for 3 phase ll transformer protection incorporating instantaneous high set differential current

ult relay

rth fault relay

e instantaneous 415V winding restricted earth fault relay

e and earth-

f outdoor switchgear ess status information,

itchgear and transmit the data to the station

ontrol capability.

(g) One busbar and breaker failure protection bay unit

nto the main relays:

and reset

eset

peed tripping, hand reset

h tripping circuit

ized by separate relays.

ogrammable binary inputs, LEDs and tripping relays from the transformer and will initiate alarms and trips for

• Tap changer low oil level alarm

• Oil temperature alarm and trip

• Winding temperature alarm and trip

• Main transformer pressure relief operated trip

• Earthing transformer Buchholz protection gas alarm and oil surge trip

element

(b) One instantaneous 132kV winding restricted earth fa

(c) One instantaneous 22-11kV winding restricted ea

(d) On

(e) One numerical back-up protection relay IDMT, phase segregated 3 phasfault

(f) Bay Controller, mounted on the Local Control Cubicle or in case oon the protection and control panel, to collect and pre-procalarms and measured values from the swcontrol unit. It should release commands initiated by the Control Centre or the Operator at the Station Level and also provide local c

The following functions should be incorporated i

(a) Main protection high speed tripping, h

(b) Back-up protection high speed tripping, hand r

(c) Breaker fail protection high s

(d) Trip circuit supervision for eac

(e) Protection supply supervision for each protection circuit

(f) Main protection operated indication

(g) One LED reset and test push button

Some of the functions referred to above can be real

(h) One Controller with adequate prthat will receive information the following:

• Main transformer Buchholz protection gas alarm and oil surge trip

• On-load tap changer Buchholz oil surge protection trip

• Main transformer low oil level alarm



• Earthing transformer pressure relief operated trip

• Earthing transformer Restricted Earth Fault Protection operated

r low oil level alarm

arm

sformers, auxiliary relays and material to complete the relay cubicle.

Including:

luding:

132/66 kV Interbus Transformer Relay Cubicle Including:

rential current ement

se and earth-

and control panel, to collect and pre-ues from the switchgear and elease commands initiated by

e Station Level and also provide local control

y unit

rated into the main relays:

t

d tripping, hand reset

(l) Breaker fail protection high speed tripping, hand reset

in protection operated indication

(p) One LED reset and test push button

Some of the functions referred to above can be realized by separate relays.

(q) One voltage regulating relay of the latest technology equipped with all the necessary modules to allow the automatic voltage control of power transformers, manual step up

• Earthing transforme

• Silica Gel Breather Al

(i) LED reset and test push button

(o) Ma

Current transformer test terminal blocks, interposing current tran

18.6.13 132/22-11 kV Transformer HV Relay Cubicle


18.6.14 132/22-11 kV Transformer HV Relay Cubicle Inc


18.6.15

(a) One 3-element high speed biased numerical differential relay complete for 3 phase overall transformer protection incorporating instantaneous high set diffeel

(b) One instantaneous restricted earth fault relay

(c) One numerical back-up protection relay IDMT, phase segregated 3 phafault

(d) Bay Controller, mounted on the protectionprocess status information, alarms and measured valtransmit the data to the station control unit. It should rthe Control Centre or the Operator at thcapability.

(e) One busbar and breaker failure protection ba

The following functions should be incorpo

(j) Main protection high speed tripping, hand rese

(k) Back-up protection high spee

(m) Trip circuit supervision for each tripping circuit

(n) Protection supply supervision for each protection circuit



and step down operation of tap changer, indications, communication facilities for

tripping relays transformer that will initiate alarms and

arm and oil surge trip

rm

, interposing current transformers, auxiliary relays

Cubicle Including:

Cubicle Including:

g:

ction relays

r Relay Cubicle Including:

ailure central unit carrying out the ection bay units:

ent

urement


e numerical back-up protection relay IDMT, phase segregated 3 phase and earth-fault

(c) Bay Controller, mounted on the Local Control Cubicle or in case of outdoor switchgear on the protection and control panel, to collect and pre-process status information, alarms and measured values from the switchgear and transmit the data to the station

remote and supervisory control etc.

(r) One Controller with adequate programmable binary inputs, LEDs andthat will receive necessary signals from the trips for the following:

• Main transformer Buchholz protection gas al

• On-load tap changer Buchholz oil surge protection trip

• Main transformer low oil level alarm

• Tap changer low oil level ala

• Oil temperature alarm and trip

• Winding temperature alarm and trip

• Main transformer pressure relief operated trip

Current transformer test terminal blocksand material to complete the relay cubicle.

18.6.16 132/66 kV Interbus Transformer Relay

As 18.6.15 but without voltage regulating relays

18.6.17 132/66 kV Interbus Transformer Relay


18.6.18 132/66 kV Interbus Transformer Relay Cubicle Includin

As 18.6.15 but without bay controller and busbar prote

18.6.19 132 kV Bus Couple

(a) One numerical low impedance busbar and breaker ffollowing features in conjunction with the prot

• Zone 1, Zone 2 and additional Check Zone measurem

• Phase segregated meas

• Self monitoring, including CT circuits and isolator positions

• Integrated 2-stage circuit breaker failure protection

• Set of LEDs to indicate protection operated, zones out of service

(b) On



control unit. It should release commands initiated by the Control Centre or the provide local control capability.

for each protection circuit

elays.

ction of busbar voltage) and Synchronizing g

minal block

plete the relay cubicle.

r based Substation Control System to monitor and control the entire :

g

Automation

tation

d reporting

(SCADA) using the IEC 60870-5-101 protocol, test and diagnosis PC for commissioning and trouble shooting, time synchronization.

(d) Bay control units, protective IEDs or combined control and protection bay units.

(e) Engineering PC (latest available specification) with Windows operating system that shall configure and parameterise the substation having the following features:

Operator at the Station Level and also

(d) Trip circuit supervision for each tripping circuit

(e) Protection supply supervision

(f) One LED reset and test push button

Some of the functions referred to above can be realized by separate r

(g) One voltage selection scheme (selefacilities to be used for Auto-reclosing, Local Closing and SCADA Closin

(h) One current transformer test ter

Current transformer test terminal blocks, interposing current transformers, auxiliary relays and material to com

18.7 SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM

18.7.1 General

A microprocessosubstation that shall handle the following tasks

• Telecommunication

• Monitorin

• Remote control/control with switchgear interlock

• Serial connection of protection devices

•

• Pre-processing and visualizing process-related information in the s

• Archiving an

18.7.2 Configuration

The typical configuration shall consist of:

(a) Substation Controller shall be of an open-type, modular construction telecontrol and substation controller.

(b) Serial interfaces for connection to higher-level system control centres

(c) Connection to bay level.



• Software for setting, commissioning, controlling and testing IEDs, for visualizing ing fault records, etc.

r

s XP

raphical display,

nt expansion, wizards, processing functions and Measured/Metered ng unit

r

de:

ble for the Engineering PC screen and printer, and one for the HMI and printer

rm chairs

el shall be of sheet steel, suitable for floor mounting, fascias shall include all

control cubicles and panels for double bu ar substations

uipped with the fo wing:

No.

and evaluat

• 21” TFT Monito

• Colour Laser Printer

(f) Operation and monitoring PC (latest available specification) with WindowProfessional operating system having the following features:

• Human Machine Interface offering standard function modules for gfor messaging, archiving and reporting. It shall consist of symbol library, message managemeValue processi

• 21” TFT Monito

• Dot-Matrix Printer

(g) Furniture to inclu

• One computer ta

• One rack for the PCs

• Four office a

18.8 REMOTE CONTROL CUBICLES AND PANELS

18.8.1 General

Each cubicle and panaccommodating all items to complete the control functions. Alarmthe necessary repeat facilities to retransmit alarms over SCADA.

18.8.2 Remote sb

18.8.2.1 Line/Cable Bay

132 kV double busbar feeder circuit, control panel eq llo

Function

Section of Mimic diagram 1

Busbar isolator semaphore indicators and combined control switch 2

Line isolator semaphore indicator and combined control switch 1

Line earth switch semaphore indicator only 1

Circuit breaker semaphore indicator and combined control switch 1

28 way equipped alarm facia LED technology incorporating LED test pushbutton and alarm accept pushbutton and incorporating the minimum following alarms:

• Circuit Breaker Lockout

1



Function No.

• e Circuit Br aker Tripped • SF6 Pressure Low • CB Loss of SF6 General Lockout

rated rated

d ated

perated

Circuits Faulty r 2 Faulty

aulty

VT Fail • Main 1 Protection inoperative/out

t diate position

• Main 1 Protection Ope• Main 2 Protection Ope• Busbar Protection Operate• Backup Protection Oper• Breaker Fail Protection O• Intertrip Received • Communication• Protection Supply 1 o• Trip Circuit 1 or 2 F• Auto-Recloser Off • Auto-Recloser Operated • Auto-Recloser Lockout •

• Main 2 Protection inoperative/ou• Isolator in interme

Circular platform scale ammeter suitably scaled 1

Ammeter phase selector switch 1

Voltmeter circular platform scale suitably scaled 1

Voltmeter phase selector switch 1

Wattmeter circular platform scale, suitably scaled 1

Varmeter circular platform scale, suitably scaled 1

Pushbutton for resettable protection related trip relay reset 1

LED and lamp indicating test pushbutton 1

Synchronising check relay 1

Synchronising selector switch - Manual -Off-Check 1

Selector switch Remote/Supervisory complete with all interposing relays for supervisory control of the circuit over SCADA and trip relay reset

1

SCADA transducer for MW 1

SCADA transducer for MVAr 1

18.8.2.2 Transformer Bay

132 kV double busbar transformer circuit, control panel equipped with the following:



Function No.




28 way equipped alarm facia LED technology incorporating LED test ept pushbutton and incorporating the minimum

ed

ockout

ted d rated

mer mer

ansformer rmer

nsformer Transformer

• Buchholtz Alarm Earthing Transformer rmer

TRFMR LVAC Supply Faulty perative/out

sition

1 pushbutton and alarm accfollowing alarms:

• Circuit Breaker Lockout • Circuit Breaker Tripp• SF Pressure Low 6• CB Loss of SF Genera6 l L• Main Protection Operate

Operad

• Busbar Protection • Back-up Protection Operate• Breaker Fail Protection Ope• Protection Supply 1 or 2 Faulty • Trip Circuit 1 or 2 Faulty • Oil Temperature Main Transfor• Buchholtz Alarm Main Transfor• Winding Temperature Main Tr• Oil Level Main Transfo• Pressure Relief Main Tra• Oil Temperature Earthing

• Pressure Relief Earthing Transfo•• Main protection ino• Isolator in intermediate po




Selector switch Remsupervisory control o

ote/Supervisory complete with all interposing re s for f the circuit over SCADA and trip relay reset

1 lay

18.8.2.3 Bus Coupler Bay

132 kV bus coupler feeder circuit, control panel equipped with the following:

Function No.






Function No.

28 way equipped alarm facia LED technology incorporating LEpushbutton a

D test nd alarm accept pushbutton and incorporating the minimum

r Lockout

ockout ed

Operated ction Operated

• Protection Supply 1 or 2 Faulty

1

following alarms:

• Circuit Breake• Circuit Breaker Tripped • SF Pressure Low 6• CB Loss of SF6 General L

t• Busbar Protection Opera• Backup Protection• Breaker Fail Prote

• Trip Circuit 1 or 2 Faulty Isolator in intermediate position





Selector switch Remote/Supervisory complete with all interposing re s for ircuit over SCADA and trip relay reset

1 laysupervisory control of the c

SCADA transducer for Amps 1

SCADA transducer for Volts 2

18.8.2.4 Bus Section Bay

132 kV bus section feeder circuit, control panel equipped with the following:

No. Function



Busbar earth switch semaphore indicator only 4

28 way equipped alarm facia LED technology incorporating LED test shbutton and incorporating the minimum

following alarms:

• Busbar Protection inoperative/out Battery Charger 1 or 2 fail

• Battery Volts low • Battery earth 1 or 2 fail • Isolator in intermediate position

1 pushbutton and alarm accept pu

• LVAC Supply Faulty

•




Function No.

Selector switch Remote/Supervisory complete with all interposing relays for r SCADA and trip relay reset

1 supervisory control of the circuit ove

Substation “Attended / Unattended” switch 1

Centrally mounted double swing recess-able synchronising frame including:

oltmeters 100mm dial for "running" and "incoming" volts

dial, double scaled complete with selector switch

1

• Synchroscope 200mm dial and on/off switch

• 2 v

• Phase angle meter 100mm

• 2 frequency indicators 100mm dial

18.8.3 Remote control cubicles and panels for single busbar substations

18.8.3.1 Line/Cable Bay

No.

132kV single busbar feeder circuit, control panel equipped with the following:

Function


Busbar isolator semaphore indicators only 1

Line isolator semaphore indicator and combined control switch 1

Line earth switch semaphore indicator only 1


28 way equipped alarm facia LED technology incorporating LED test pushbutton and incorporating the minimum

t

Lockout ted

on Operated erated

perated • Breaker Fail Protection Operated

Intertrip Received • Communication Circuits Faulty • Protection Supply 1 or 2 Faulty • Trip Circuit 1 or 2 Faulty • Auto-Recloser Off • Auto-Recloser Operated • Auto-Recloser Lockout

1 pushbutton and alarm acceptfollowing alarms:

• Circuit Breaker Lockou• Circuit Breaker Tripped • SF Pressure L6 ow • CB Loss of SF6 General

Opera• Main 1 Protection • Main 2 Protecti• Busbar Protection Op• Backup Protection O

•



Function No.

• VT Fail at• Main 1 Protection inoper

• Main 2 Protection inoperative/out ive/out

• Isolator in intermediate position



Voltmeter circular platform scale suitably scaled 1

Voltmeter phase selector switch 1

Wattmeter circular platform scale, suitably scaled 1

Varmeter circular platform scale, suitably scaled 1

Pushbutton for resettable protection related trip relay reset 1




Selector switch Remote/Supervisory complete with all interposing relays for ircuit over SCADA and trip relay reset

1 supervisory control of the c

SCADA transducer for MW 1

SCADA transducer for MVAr 1

18.8.3.2 Transformer Bay

132kV single busbar transformer circuit, control panel equipped with th ollowing:

No.

e f

Function


Busbar isolator semaphore indicators only 1


28 way equipped alarm facia LED technology incorporating LED test ushbutton and incorporating the minimum

• Circuit Breaker Lockout Circuit Breaker Tripped

• SF6 Pressure Low • CB Loss of SF6 General Lockout • Main Protection Operated • Busbar Protection Operated • Back-up Protection Operated

1 pushbutton and alarm accept pfollowing alarms:

•



Function No.

• Breaker Fail Protection Operated ulty

er sformer

nsformer er

sformer nsformer

er Transformer

•

diate position

• Protection Supply 1 or 2 Fa• Trip Circuit 1 or 2 Faulty • Oil Temperature Main Transform• Buchholtz Alarm Main Tran• Winding Temperature Main Tra• Pressure Relief Main Transform• Oil Temperature Earthing Tran

ing Tra• Buchholtz Alarm Earth• Oil Level Main Transform• Pressure Relief Earthing TRFMR LVAC Supply Faulty • Main protection inoperative/out • Isolator in interme




Selector switch Remote/Supervisory complete with all interposing relays fosupervisory control of the c

r ircuit over SCADA and trip relay reset

1

18.8.3.3 Bus Section Bay

132 kV bus section feeder circuit, control panel equipped with the following. If CB is not

No.

specified disregard its functions:

Function




28 way equipped alarm facia LED technology incorporating LED test pushbutton and incorporating the minimum

ipped

eral Lockout ection Operated

• Backup Protection Operated Breaker Fail Protection Operated

• Protection Supply 1 or 2 Faulty • Trip Circuit 1 or 2 Faulty • LVAC Supply Faulty • Busbar Protection inoperative/out • Battery Charger 1 or 2 fail • Battery Volts low

1 pushbutton and alarm accept following alarms:

• Circuit Breaker Lo Tr

ckout • Circuit Breaker• SF6 Pressure Low • CB Loss of SF6 Gen• Busbar Prot

•



Function No.

• Battery earth 1 or 2 fail • Isolator in intermediate position





Selector switch Remote/Supervisory complete with all interposing re s for he circuit over SCADA and trip relay reset

1 laysupervisory control of t

SCADA transducer for Amps 1

SCADA transducer for Volts 2

Substation “Attended / Unattended” switch 1

Centrally mounted double swing recess-able synchronising frame including:

and on/off switch g" and "incoming" volts

• Phase angle meter 100 mm dial, double scaled complete with selector

1

• Synchroscope 200 mm dial • 2 voltmeters 100 mm dial for "runnin

switch • 2 frequency indicators 100 mm dial

18.8.3.4 Remote Tap Changer Panels – Type 1

Automatic control shall be suitable for the control of transformers in parallel, uptransformers using the Master/Follower/Independents principle.

to three

all be equipped with the following:

g:

f the low voltage terminals of the

Remote/Supervisory tap change control selector switch

pushbuttons

Start/Stop controls for forced cooling equipment

Independent/Master/Follower selector switch

AVR voltage reference adjuster

2. Alarm Relay: A multi-element alarm flag relay is to be provided to indicate the following:

Buchholz Gas

Remote Tap Changer Panel sh

1. Automatic Voltage Regulating Relay equipped with followin

Voltage Indication (Phase to phase voltage otransformer).

Tap position indicator

Automatic/Manual - voltage control selector switch spring return

Raise/Lower



Winding Temperature - stage 1

rated (if provided)

t trip flag relay is to be provided for the following:

Buchholz Oil surge

il surge

2

ite lamp

p

The alarm and trip relays are required to be latched flag relays with four hand-reset change transformer

e automatic regulating relay controls and alarms y other means.

table for operation with the distance between the n on the drawings.

m circulating current


Remote Tap Changer panel with up to three voltage regulating relays, applicable scheme to match substation requirements, of the latest technology equipped with all the necessary modules to allow the automatic voltage control of power transformers, manual step up and

wn operation of tap changer, input output modules for indications, alarms and measurements, communication facilities for remote and supervisory control complete with all accessories.

Low oil level

Pressure Relief ope

Marshalling Kiosk AC Fail.

3. Trip Relay: A multi-elemen

OLTC o

Winding temperature - stage

4. Indications and Alarms

Tap change in progress - wh

Tap change out of step - amber lam

Auto/Manual indication - white lamps

Air forced cooling equipment running - white

Air forced cooling failure - amber

VT Fail alarm - amber

Supply voltage failure on OLTC - amber lamp

over contacts per element. The contacts shall be voltage free for operating the main trip relay.

Depending on the scheme the available on thshall be utilised and only the remaining as specified above, shall be provided b

Remote control schemes shall be entirely suitransformer and remote control panel as show


Remote Tap Changer panel as paragraph 18.8.3.4 but using the minimuprinciple

step do




VISORY CONTROL AND DATA ACQUISITION (SCADA)

Alarms to SCADA shall be grouped in the following manner subjected to the particular t and the final recommendation and approval of the enginner:

ions that degrade or prevent the operation of protection relays, for

upply failure

it fault

ns that prevents CB opening, for example,

cuit supervision relay and trip supply faulty

2

events CB operation (closure), for example,

(a) Aux DC & Drive supply faulty

(b) SF6 pressure low stage 1

(c) Oil pressure low stage 1

(d) Spring not charged (delayed contact)

18.9 SUPERSIGNALS

18.9.1 Alarms to SCADA

requirements of the projec

18.9.1.1 Protection Fault

Summary of all conditexample,

(a) Relay dc s

(b) Protection relay fault

(c) Pilot wire fault

(d) Communication circu

(e) VT failure/MCB tripped

18.9.1.2 Trip Circuit Fault

Summary of all conditio

(a) Fault detected by trip cir

(b) SF6 pressure low stage 2

(c) Oil pressure low stage

18.9.1.3 Circuit Breaker Fault

Summary of all conditions that pr

EAC SPEC 14-019, Issue 9 Dated 03-05-2010 18.9.2 Circuit Data

18.9.2. 132 kV Switchgear 1

INN

info No

IEC

101 Address

Line Bay bay BS/BC COMMON ITEM DESCRIPTION TYPE FO. AME

IEC 61870-5 101

61870-5 Transformer

1. Close-command DO S*Z010 1 13NN 13NN 13NN - Circuit Breaker (QA1) Open/ 1 3NN

2. DO S*F040 8 - - Auto Recloser IN/OUT -command 8 3NN 83NN -

3. man DO S*Z052 2 23NN - BusBar Isolator A (QB1) Open/Close-com d 2 3NN 23NN 23NN

4. comman DO S*Z054 3 33NN 33NN - BusBar Isolator B (QB2) Open/Close- d 3 3NN 33NN

5. en/Close-command DO S*F056 - - Line Isolator (QB8) Op 5 53NN 53NN -

6. Trip Relay Reset-command DO S*Z180 12 123NN 123NN 123NN - 123NN

7. Circuit Breaker (QA1) Open/Closed DI S*Z200 16 163NN 163NN 163NN - 163NN

8. ed S*Z2 1 17 173NN 173NN - BusBar Isolator (QB1) Open/Clos DI 20 17 73NN 3NN

9. Bus Section Isolator QB2 Open/Closed S*Z230 18 183NN 183NN 183NN 183NN - DI

10. Line Isolator (QB8) Open/Closed DI S*F250 20 203NN 203NN - - -

11. BusBar WA11 Maintenance Earth SwitchClosed

QC1 S*Z2 21 213NN 213NN 213NN -

SI 40213NN

12. itch QC2 S*Z2 233 N 233N 23 NN NN -

BusBar WA21 Maintenance Earth SwClosed

SI 4223 N N 3 233

13. BusBar WA11 Earth Switch QC115 Closed SI S0C1240 21 213NN - - 21300 -

14. BusBar WA12 Earth Switch QC125 Closed SI S0C1242 22 223NN - - - 22300




ITEM DESCRIPTION TYPE INFO. NAME

IEC 61870-5 101

info No

IEC 61870-5

101 Address

Line Bay Transformebay BS/BC COMMON r

16. BusBar WA22 Earth Switch QC225 Closed SI S0C2242 24 243NN - - 24300 -


18. osed S0C3242 26 263NN - - - 26300 BusBar WA23 Earth Switch QC235 Cl SI

19. Line Isolator Maintenance Earth Switch QC8 SI S*F262 2 223N - - Closed 22 23NN N -

20. C9 Closed S*F 2 27 - - Line Earth Switch (CCT) Q SI 260 27 73NN 3NN -

21. d S*Z 4 403N 403NN 03NN - First Main Protection Operate SI 270 40 03NN N 4

22. Second Main Protection Operated SI S*F280 41 413NN 413NN - - -

23. Transformer (tank) Protection Operated SI S*T280 - - 41 413NN - 413NN

24. Backup Protection Operated SI S*Z290 42 423NN 423NN 423NN 423NN -

25. Intertrip ((Remote End) Operated S*F3 46 463NN 463NN - - - SI 00

26. on Operated SI S*Z490 493 N 493N 49 NN 3NN 49300 Circuit Breaker Failure Protecti 49 N N 3 49

27. S*Z5 503 N 503N 50 NN 3NN 50300- BusBar Protection Operated SI 00 50 N N 3 50

28. ion Operated S0C 5 - 51300 Busbar Zone A Protect SI 510 51 13NN - -

29. Operated S0C 5 - 52300 Busbar Zone B Protection SI 540 52 23NN - -

30. lt S*Z 703 N 70 703NN 03NN - First Main Protection Fau SI 310 70 N 3NN 7

31. Second Main Protection Fault SI S*F320 71 713NN 713NN - - -

3 nsformer Protection Fault SI S*T320 71 713NN - 713NN - - 2. Tra

33. Backup Protection Fault SI S*Z312 72 723NN 723NN 723NN 723NN -




IEC 61870-5 101

info No

IEC 61870-5

101 Address

Line Bay Transformer bay BS/BC COMMON

34. BusBar / Circuit Breaker Failure Protection Fau SI S*Z319 74 743NN 743NN 743NN 743NN - lt

35. Circuit Breaker Failure Protection Fault S*Z3 75 753NN 753NN 753NN 753NN - SI 29

36. lt S*F314 7 733N First Main Prt. Communication Fau SI 73 33NN N

37. Prt. Communication Fault S*F3 7 76 Second Main SI 24 76 63NN 3NN

38. lt S*Z 3 30 03NN - Trip Circuit Fau SI 330 30 03NN 3NN 303NN 3

39. ut S*Z 3 31 13NN - Bay SF6 Lock O SI 332 31 13NN 3NN 313NN 3

40. S*Z 3 32 23NN - SF6 Sensor Defect SI 334 32 23NN 3NN 323NN 3

41. Circuit Breaker QA1 fault SI S*Z340 33 333NN 333NN 333NN - 333NN

42. BusBar Isolator QB1-2 fault SI S*Z342 34 343NN 343NN 343NN 343NN -

43. S*F3 3 35 - - Line Isolator QB8 fault SI 46 35 53NN 3NN -

44. Bay /GIS Loss of SF6 Alarm SI S*Z341 36 363NN 363NN 363NN 363NN -

45. S*Z349 3 373N 373NN 373NN - Bay Control fault SI 37 73NN N

46. ervice S*Z3 6 60 03NN - First Main Protection Set Out of S SI 50 60 03NN 3NN 603NN 6

47. Service S*F 6 61 - - Second Main Protection Set Out of SI 360 61 13NN 3NN -

48. S*Z 633 N 63 633NN 33NN - BusBar Protection Set Out of Service SI 359 63 N 3NN 6

49. CB Failure Protection Set Out of Service SI S*Z360 64 643NN 643NN 643NN 643NN -

50. Transformer Protection Set Out of Service SI S*T360 61 613NN - 613NN - -

51. Auto Recloser Set Out of Service SI S*F370 65 653NN 653NN - - -




IEC 61870-5 101

info No

IEC 61870-5

101 Address


52. Auto Recloser Fault SI S*F372 77 773NN 773NN - - -

53. Supervisory Control Selected (NCC Authority) S*Z3 58 583NN 583NN 583NN 583NN 58300 SI 80

54. ted S*F550 7 783N - - Auto Recloser Initia SI 78 83NN N -

55. out S*F5 7 793N - - Auto Recloser Lock SI 60 79 93NN N -

56. S*F 8 803N - - Auto Recloser Blocked SI 562 80 03NN N -

57. S*F 8 813N Reclosure by Remote End SI 564 81 13NN N

58. Measuring Instrument Circuits Faulty S*F 6 69 - - SI 482 69 93NN 3NN -

59. Annunciator Fault SI S*Z590 83 833NN 833NN 833NN 833NN 83300

60. Substation controller General Alarm SI S0C599 84300 84 843NN

61. ure Alarm SI S*F690 8 843N - - Under Ground cable High Temperat 84 43NN N -

62. Under Ground cable Low Pressure Alarm SI S*F692 85 853NN 853NN - - -

63. izing Circuit Fault SI S*F4 6 68 - 68300- Supervisory Check Synchron y 80 68 83NN 3NN -

64. larm S0C6 - 85300 Switchgear maintenance A SI 60 85300 85300 - -

65. ply Fault S*Z 863 N 863N 63NN 86300 Protection Panel DC Sup SI 606 86 N N 863NN 8

66. upply Fault S*Z 873 N 873N 87 NN NN 87300 Control Panel DC S SI 608 87 N N 3 873

67. Bus Coupler/ Section Current AM S*C700 92 923NN - 923NN - -

68. Busbar WA11 Voltage AM S0C710 93 933NN - - - 93300





IEC 61870-5 101

info No

IEC 61870-5

101 Address


70. Busbar WA21 Voltage AM S0C730 95 953NN - - 95300 -


72. nt AM S*F800 9 903N - - MW Measureme 90 03NN N -

73. AM S*F810 913 N 913N - - MVAr Measurement 91 N N -

74. GIS Room Temperature Measurement AM S0C960 99 993NN - - - 99300

NN is replaced by the bay number as designated in the relevant approved Single Line Diagram such as “05”. “3” (predecessor of “NN”) corresponds to the operating Voltage of the Switchgear that is 132kV. For 66kV “4” replaces number “3” Configuration method for creating the IEC 61870-5-101 Information Address is given in paragraph 18.9.2.6 below



18.9.2. T2 ntrol

0-5

info No

IEC 61870-5

101 Address

ransformer & Tap Changer Co

Transformers and transformer tap changer control should provide the following signals:


IEC 6187

101

1 mmand S* 80 143NN . Tap Changer Raise/ Lower-co DO T0 14

2 l-command S* 0 133NN . Tap Changer Auto/Manua DO T10 13

3 Alarm S* 0 843NN . Transformer Temperature SI T40 84

4 S* 0 853NN . Transformer Buchholtz Gas Alarm SI T41 85

5. Transformer Oil Level Alarm 863NN SI S*T414 86

6. Tap Changer Fault SI S*T420 77 773NN

7 S* 30 783NN . Tap Changer Incomplete SI T4 78

8 upervisory Control Selection (NCAuthority)

S* 0 653NN

. Tap Changer S C SI T44 65

9 S* 50 793NN . Tap Changer in Auto DI/SI T4 79

10. Transformer Cooling Fault SI S*T470 88 883NN

11. Tap changer Tap position Indication SI S*T790 89 893NN



18.9.2. Medium Voltage Switchboard3

INN

61

info No

IEC

101 Address

er BS Capac Common ITEM DESCRIPTION TYPE FO. AME

IEC 870-5 101

61870-5 Incom UG OH

1. and DC S*D050 1 1*NN 1*NN 1*NN 1*NN 1*NN 1*NN - Circuit Breaker (QA1)

Open/Close-comm

2. loser IN/OUT - DC S*D040 8 8*NN - - - 8*NN - - Auto Reccommand

3. rth Fault DC S*D044 9 9*NN - - - 9*NN - - Sensitive Ea

In/Out-command

4. Lockout Relay Reset- 1 - 2*NN - - command SC/DC S*D180 2 12*NN - - 1

5. A1 D *D2 N N *NN 16*NN - Circuit Breaker QOpen/Closed P S 00 16 16*NN 16*NN 16* N 16* N 16

6. tor ed S 17*NN 7*NN 17*NN 17*NN 17*NN - BusBar QB1 isola

Clos P S*D220 17 17*NN 1

7. ator S*D10 17*NN - - - - - - BusSec QB11 isol

Closed SP 22 17

8. lator SP S*D12 18*NN - 18*NN - BusSec QB12 iso

Closed 22 18 - - -

9. 1 E/S QC115 closed/open SP S*D124

0 21 21*NN - 21*NN - - - 21*00 BB WA1

10. BB WA12 E/S QC125 closed/open SP S*D124

2 22 22*NN - 22*NN - - - 22*00

11. BB WA13 E/S QC135 closed/open SP S*D124

4 25 22*NN - 22*NN - - - 25*00




IEC 61870-5

101 info No

IEC 61870-5

101 Address

Incomer BS UG OH Capac Common

12. S*D260 27*NN - 27*NN 27*NN 27*NN 58*00 Feeder E/S (QC1) closed SP 27 27*NN

13. Selected (NCC Authority) SP S*D380 58 58*NN 58*NN 58*NN 58*NN 58*NN 58*NN - Supervisory Control

14. Protection Fault (Circuit SP S*D310 70 70*NN 70*NN 70*NN 70*NN 70*NN 70*NN - /IED)

15. Auto Recloser Service Set SP S*D370 65 65*NN - - - 65*NN - - Out

16. Sensitive Earth Service SP S*D372 - 66*NN - - Set Out 66 66*NN - -

17. 90*NN - - MW Measurement AM S*D800 90 90*NN 90*NN 90*NN 90*NN

18. surement A *D8 91*NN - 91*NN 91*NN 91*NN - MVAr Mea M S 10 91 91*NN

19. Measurement 97*NN - - - - - - Power Factor AM S*D780 97

20. nt A S*D7 9 92*NN - 2*NN - - - - Bus Section Curre M 00 2 9

21. ltage A 0D 93*NN - - - - - 93*00 BusBar WA11 Vo M S 710 93

22. AM S0D720 94 94*NN - - - - - 94*00 BusBar WA12 Voltage

23. BusBar WA13 Voltage AM S0D730 95 95*NN - - - - - 95*00

24. Circuit Breaker Trip Circuit SP S0D330 30 30*NN 30*NN 30*NN 30*NN 30*NN 30*NN 30*00 Fault

25. Circuit Breaker Fault SP S0D340 33 33*NN - - - - - 33*00

26. Over Current Protection Operated SP S0D270 40 40*NN 40*NN 40*NN 40*NN 40*NN 40*NN 40*00




IEC 61870-5

101 info No

IEC 61870-5

101 Address

Incomer BS UG OH Capac Common

27. Time ated SP S0D280 - - - - 41*00 High Set Definite

Protection Oper 41 41*NN 41*NN

28. Fault Protection SP S0D272 42 42*NN 42*NN 42*NN 42*NN 42*NN 42*NN 42*00 Earth Operated

29. Under Frequency Protection Operated SP S0D570 55 55*NN - - - - - 55*00

30. rated SP S0D290 43 43*NN - - - 43*NN - 43*00 Sensitive Earth Fault

Protection Ope

31. Circuit Breaker Fail 0D 49*N - - - - - 49*00 Protection Operated SP S 490 49 N

32. Auto Recloser Initiated 78*NN - - - - - 78*00 SP S0D550 78

33. Lockout - - - - 79*00 Auto Recloser SP S0D560 79 79*NN -

34. ult (IED LifeCont) 70*NN 70*NN 70*NN 70*NN 70*NN 70*00 Protection Fa SP S*D310 70 70*NN

35. DC Supply Fault S0D606 86*NN - - - - - 86*00 SP 86

36. MV Room Temperature SP S0D960 99 99*NN - - - - - 99*00 Measurement

NN is replaced by the bay number as designated in the relevant approved Single Line Diagram such as “03”. “*” is replaced by the number corresponding to the operating Voltage of the Switchboard that is “6” for 22kV and “7” for 11kV.



18.9.2.4 Capacitor Bank


0-5

info No

IEC 61870-5

101 Address

IEC 6187

101

1. Capacitor Bank 1 Circuit Breaker Open/Close- DC S1V050 1 1795 Command

2 Capacitor Bank 2 Circuit Breaker Open/Close- DC S1V051 2 2795 . Command

3. Capacitor Bank 3 Circuit Breaker Open/Close- DC S1V052 3 3795 Command

4 elect (NCC S 00 13795 . Capacitor Bank Supervisory Control SAuthority) DC 1V1 13

5. 16 16795 Capacitor Bank 1 Circuit Breaker Open/Closed DP S1V200

6. Capacitor Bank 2 Circuit Breaker Open/Closed DP S1V201 17 17795

7 osed DP S1V202 18 18795 . Capacitor Bank 3 Circuit Breaker Open/Cl

8. Capacitor Bank Stage Faulty – CB Trip SI S0V270 40 40795

9. Capacitor Bank Supervisory Control Selected (NCC S 80 58795 Authority) SI 0V3 58

10. Capacitor Bank Alarm SI S0V390 77 77795

11. Capacitor Room Temperature Measurement AM S0V960 99 99795



18.9.2.5 Substation Common Alarms


IEC 61870101 in

No

-5 fo

IEC 61870-5

101 Address

1. SI 77000 Water Level Alarm S0S414 77

2 n Equipment Fault 78000 . Communicatio SI S0S640 78

3 79000 . Fire Alarm Operated SI S0S650 79

4 ply Failure 82000 . Low Voltage AC Sup SI S0S620 82

5. 110V Battery Charger Fault SI S0S600 87 87000

6. 48V DC Supply Equipment Fault SI S0S610 88 88000


1



6

16777215

8.9.2. IEC 61870-5-101 -OBJECT INFORMATION ADDRESS structure

Maximum Number Three byte (UNSTRUCTURED)=

Address Structure IEC 61870-5 101 Info. No & VOLTAGE DesgNo & CCT or PANEL or BAY No

VOLTAGE LEVEL designation No

Rated Operating Voltage Function plant / equipment DESIGNATION No Common Signals

VARIABLE VOLTAGE LEVEL OR COMMO HE S/S 0 000N TO T

> s 1 100220kv feeders/bay

220kv feeders/bays 2 200



24-52kv feeders/bays 5 500

22kv feeders/Panels 6 600

11kv feeders/Panels 7 700

1,2-10kv feeders/Panels 8008

<1 /Panels 9 900kV Boards/Cubicles

Dedicated Addressing

Special units le)(132kV) 390 (Ripp

Special units (Ripple)(66kV) 490

Special units (Capacitor Banks 11kV) 795


18.10 MAIN AND AUXILIARY POWER AND MULTICORE CABLES

6kV Cables, Joints and Terminations

, 13kA for 1sec

ire stranded conductor, 13kA for 1sec

able with 300mm copper conductor, 13KA for 1 sec. copper wire

LPE cable with 630mm2 copper wire stranded conductor, 13kA for 1 sec lead sheath, HDPE oversheath.

th 300mm2 copper conductor.

1. 132kV outdoor sealing-end termination for 800mm copper conductor XLPE cable, complete

30mm2 copper conductor cable

00mm2 copper conductor cable

le complete with

6. 132kV SF6 sealing end as item 4 but for 300mm cable.

per conductor XLPE cable complete with all ond terminals

e

2 LPE

10. 66kV outdoor sealing-end termination for 630mm2 copper conductor, XLPE cable, complete h bushings and all necessary accessories and fittings.

11. 66kV outdoor sealing end as item 10 but for 300mm2 copper conductor cable.

12. 66kV transformer sealing-end for 630mm2 copper conductor XLPE cable, complete with all necessary accessories, internal and external fittings and earth bond terminals

13. 66kV transformer sealing end as type 12 but for 300sqmm copper conductor cable.

18.10.1 132/6

18.10.1.1 Cables

1. 132kV single core XLPE cable with 800mm2 Copper wire stranded conductorlead sheath, HDPE oversheath.

2. 132kV single core XLPE cable with 800 mm2 Copper wcopper wire screen, HDPE oversheath.

3. Same as item 2, but with 630 mm2 copper wire stranded conductor

4. 132kV single core XLPE c 2

screen and aluminium foil, HDPE oversheath.

5. 66kV, single core X

6. 66kV single core XLPE cable as item 4 but wi

18.10.1.2 Terminations

2

with bushing and all necessary accessories and fittings.

2. 132kV outdoor sealing-end as item 1 but for 6

3. 132kV outdoor sealing-end as item 1 but for 3

4. 132kV SF6 sealing-end termination for 800mm2 copper conductor XLPE cabinternal and external fittings, and earth bond terminals.

5. 132kV SF6 sealing end as item 4 but for 630mm2 cable.

2

7. 132kV transformer sealing end for 800mm2 copnecessary accessories, internal and external fittings and earth b

8. 132kV transformer sealing end as item 7 but for 630mm2 copper XLPE cabl

9. 132kV transformer sealing end as item 7 but for 300mm copper conductor X

wit




r conductor XLPE cable, complete with all

15. 22kV indoor sealing-end for 300mm aluminium conductor XLPE cable, complete with all cessories, internal and external fittings

te with all necessary jointing accessories, internal and external fittings, insulating materials etc.

nductor XLPE Cable.

ctor cable.

ble to a 630mm2

aterials etc

132kV cable to an pper conductor XLPE cable.

levant substation design are to be ssful Tenderer at

re to be laid and fitted to position by the Tenderer with suitable

it overvoltages.

n design are to be iven to the successful Tenderer at

suitable of proven technology.

(g) The Contract includes the supply and installation of all cable support and traywork (including

18.10.4 Transformer – 22 kV Switchgear Cable Connections

Three phase 22kV XLPE cable circuits adequately rated to suit the rating of the transformers with 20% overload. Minimum cable size shall be single core copper stranded conductor of 630 mm2

cross sectional area.

14. 22kV indoor sealing-end for 630mm2 coppe

necessary accessories, internal and external fittings.

2

necessary ac

18.10.1.3 Joints

1. 132kV joint for 800mm2 copper conductor XLPE cable, comple

2. 132kV joint as item 1 above but for 630mm2 copper co

3. 66kV joint for 300mm2 copper conductor, XLPE cable, complete with all necessary jointing accessories, internal and external fittings, insulating materials etc

4. Joint as item 3 above but for 630sqmm copper condu

5. 132kV Transition joint to connect a 630mm2 aluminium conductor, oil filled caCopper Conductor XLPE Cable, both cables with lead sheath, with all necessary jointing accessories internal and external fittings, insulating m

6. As item 5 above but to connect the 630mm2 aluminium conductor, oil filled 800mm2 co

18.10.2 132/66kV GIS – Transformer Cable Connections

(a) All 132 kV cables within the substation area to suit the resupplied by the Purchaser and design details are to be given to the succeTender award.

(b) All cables supplied aterminations of proven technology.

(c) The Contract includes the supply and installation of all cable support (d) The cables shall be single point bonded with earthing at the switchgear. At the unearthed

terminals, varistors of adequate size shall be installed, in order to lim

18.10.3 22kV Cables

(e) All 22 kV cables within the substation area to suit the relevant substatiosupplied by the Purchaser and design details are to be gTender award.

(f) All cables supplied are to be laid and fitted to position by the Tenderer with terminations

for all cables of outgoing feeders), cable ties etc. If necessary, in case of spare cable connections on the MV switchboard, these should be fitted with plugs or plastic covers



s

ize as the transformer 22kV switchgear connection rrant it.

les, copper connection cables, plugs, connector modules/adapters, star couplers, converters and modems.

er cables ing glands to interconnect all items of plant supplied and installed under the contract. Also

der separate lied under this

low voltage side or the local supply transformer and the LV AC switchgear shall be 3x185 mm2 Al cable with 70 mm2

ER type).

ywork, cable ties

18.11 LV AC DISTRIBUTION BOARD

r 1 second LV AC switchboard comprising an air insulated and fixed type

forming a flush fronted switchboard which shall be complete with all .

18.12 SUBSTATION DC EQUIPMENT

in chapter 12 of this specification document that include

• Two DC to DC converters (110V to 48V)

• One 48Vdc distribution board

• One 110Vdc to 230 Vac inverter

ery charger systems shall be sized adequate to cater for the indicated full substation development.

18.10.5 Transformer - 22 kV Earthing Transformer Cable Connection

Three phase 22kV XLPE cable circuit of same sor a smaller size provided detailed calculations wa

18.10.6 Communication Cables and Accessories

Provide and install all necessary fibre optic cab

18.10.7 Auxiliary Power and Multicore Cables

Provide and install, gland, test through and terminate multicore and auxiliary powincludgland off and terminate at the contractors plant all cables supplied and installed uncontracts interconnecting plant not supplied under this contract with all plant suppcontract

The minimum size of cable for the connection between the earthing transformer

concentric Cu wire neutral (CEAND

The Contractor will be responsible for the provision of all cable supports and traand cleating.

One 400 V, 3-phase, 4-wire, 50 kA fometal enclosed multitier design incorporating moulded case circuit breaker units moulded case circuit breakers, wiring, earthbar, secondary fuses and material to complete

The tender includes all items referred toamong other equipment the following:

• One or Two 110Vdc batteries (depending on the requirements)

• Two 110Vdc battery chargers

• One 110Vdc distribution board

All batt



attery System

x with suitable bushed entry for battery ble gland plate for charger cable.

and fixings.

ery

As item 18.12.1.1 above but having a capacity of 200Ah

floor mounted sheet steel cubicles, access doors and

output to supply 100% of the standing load and the full float and the battery specified. The chargers shall normally work in parallel,

ult location or maintenance purposes.

following:

er.

ble-pole switch and fuses.

(h) Cable gland plates.

(i) One set of manual changeover equipment to provide the following facilities in the case of a dual battery system:

• Either one of the battery banks on float and the other on boost charge.

• Both batteries on float.

• Mimic diagram to show clearly the switch position of the changeover scheme

18.12.1 110V DC B

18.12.1.1 300Ah Battery

110V batteries of the same capacity individually, of the nickel cadmium high performance type with stands and accessories having a capacity of 300Ah

The battery will operate unearthed with high impedance earth fault detection.

The battery system should include:

(a) One set of battery fuses in a wall mounted boconnections and ca

(b) One Set of battery connections, connectors

18.12.1.2 200Ah Batt

18.12.1.3 100Ah Battery

As item 18.12.1.1 above but having a capacity of 100Ah

18.12.2 110V DC Battery Charger

18.12.2.1 Double Charger

110 volt battery charger unit consisting of containing all necessary ancillary equipment, busbars etc, and including:

Two chargers each with ratedboost charge requirements of but shall be suitable for isolation for fa

Each charger shall be complete with the

(a) Boost charge switch with automatic tim

(b) Input AC supply switch and fuse.

(c) Output DC dou

(d) Output DC ammeter, flush type, 100mm dial.

(e) Output DC Voltmeter, flush Type, 100mm dial.

(f) Charge failure relay to give remote alarm and local indication.

(g) Battery overvoltage relay to give remote alarm and local indication.



rger

board consisting of floor mounted sheet steel cubicle with access doors and ns to chargers and

nsitivity switch.

ctor relay with facilities to identify positive and mote alarm

tery fail relay to give remote alarm local indication.

distribution outlets, actual number to . There should also be capacity for extending the number of outlets

(f) The board shall be fitted with voltage regulating equipment (limiting diodes) to maintain load % of nominal under all charge conditions.

ortable type extinguishers shall be supplied as necessary complete with wall mounting he dry powder type ipment that is

A scheme of fire extinguishers shall be provided and each extinguisher shall be numbered in accordance with the schedule. The schedule shall contain all relevant design and maintenance information.

The whole of the fire extinguisher arrangements, quantities, locations and types shall be to the approval of the Fire Officer in Cyprus and the Engineer.

Mobile extinguishers shall be provided as follows:

ROOM NO. OF UNITS

18.12.2.2 Single Charger

As item 18.12.2.1 above but one cha

18.12.3 110V DC Distribution Board

110 Vdc distributioncontaining all necessary ancillary equipment, busbars, complete with connectiobatteries, and including:

(a) Battery input/output DC ammeters, flush type, 100 mm dial with high/low se

(b) Load output DC ammeters, flush type, 100 mm dial.

(c) Battery earth fault high impedance type detenegative earth faults and complete with test facilities, alarm indications and refacilities.

(d) Bat

(e) Double-pole circuit fuse-switches for a minimum of thirtythe approval of the Engineerto 60.

volts within -15% and +10

(g) Two DC/DC converters 110/48 Vdc

(h) 110 Vdc / 230 Vac inverter

18.13 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

Suitable pbrackets and shall be erected by the Contractor. The extinguishers shall be of t(10kg charged weight) or CO2 type (6kg charged weight) depending on the equerected in the room that they are to be situated.

1. 132 kV Switchgear (Indoor Installations) 2 2. Relay and Control 1 3. SCADA and Telecom 1 4. 22 /11kV Switchgear 2 5. Battery 1 6. Capacitors (where applicable) 1 7. Basement (where applicable) 2


OOM NO. OF UNITS R

8. Main Entrance (where applicable) 1

18.14 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSORS

Where applicable temperature sensors shall be installed in the switchgear roomCapacitors) for the measurement and monitoring of ambient tem

s (GIS, 22kV and perature from the Energy Centre.

The sensors shall have a temperature range of –5oC to +70oC and shall be wall mountable with stainless steed sheath so as to provide mechanical protection to the sensor.




19. SPECIFICATION DRAWING LIST

he following draw m part of this Spec

RIPTION DRAWING NO.

T ings accompany and for ification:

DRAWING DESC

“International Airport”- 132kV Substation

1. Control Building – Phase A & B TK60/9-1

2. Control Building – Phase C TK60/9-2

3. 132kV Single Line Diagram TK60/42

4. Substation Interconnection TK60/43

5. Switchgear Equipment Layout – Phase A TK60/45-1

6. Switchgear Equipment Layout – Phase B TK60/45-2

7. t Layout – Phase C TK60/45-3 Switchgear Equipmen

8. 132kV Protection Scheme (2 sheets) TK60/46

9. 132/22-11kV Typical Protection & Control Base Design TK60/47

“Pyla”- 132kV Substation

10. Control Building Plan TK53/2-1

11. Control Building Plan – Phase A TK53/2-2

12. B TK53/2-3 Control Building Plan – Phase

13. t TK53/18-1 Switchgear Equipment Layou

14. TK53/18-2 Switchgear Equipment Layout - Phase A

15. Switchgear Equipment Layout - Phase B TK53/18-3

16. 132kV Single Line Diagram (3 sheets) TK53/61

17. TK53/62 132kV Protection Scheme (3 sheets)

18. 132/22-11kV Typical Protection & Control Base Design TK53/63

“Protaras”- 132kV Substation

19. 2 sheets) TK42/301 22-11kV Single Line Diagram (

20. 22-11kV Protection Scheme (4 sheets) TK42/303

21. 22-11kV Typical Protection & Control Base Design TK42/304

“Limassol Marina”- Primary Substation

22. 22-11kV Single Line Diagram (2 sheets) TIM/LIM90

23. 22-11kV Protection Scheme (4 sheets) TIM/LIM95



ON DRAWING NO. DRAWING DESCRIPTI

24. rotection & Control Base Design TIM/LIM96 22-11kV Typical P

25. Metering AC Supplies TM/LIM97

“Larnaca Commercial Centre”- 132kV Substation

26. 132kV U/G Cable Bay - Protection Scheme TK67/120

“Dhekelia”- 132kV Substation

27. Scheme TK1/1004 132kV U/G Cable Bay - Protection

l Zone”- 132kV Substation “Free Industria

28. ion Scheme TK47/249 132kV U/G Cable Bay - Protect

Common Drawings

29. Protection & Control – Symbol Notation TK/C/24

30. 132 kV & 22-11kV Interlocking Conditions (10 sheets) TK/C/27

132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Volume 2

Documents

Transcript of 132kV Outdoor GIS Substations and Ancillary Equipment_Volume 2